G-ClassOperator's Manual

SymbolsRegistered trademarks:RBluetooth® is a registered trademark of

Bluetooth SIG Inc.RDTS is a registered trademark of DTS, Inc.RDolby and MLP are registered trademarks

of DOLBY Laboratories.RBabySmart™, ESP® and PRE-SAFE® are

registered trademarks of Daimler AG.RHomeLink® is a registered trademark of

Prince.RiPod® and iTunes® are registered

trademarks of Apple Inc.RLogic7® is a registered trademark of

Harman International Industries.RMicrosoft® and Windows media® are

registered trademarks of MicrosoftCorporation.RSIRIUS is a registered trademark of Sirius

XM radio Inc.RHD Radio is a registered trademark of

iBiquity Digital Corporation.RGracenote® is a registered trademark of

Gracenote, Inc.RZAGATSurvey® and related brands are

registered trademarks of ZagatSurvey,LLC.

In this Operator's Manual, you will find thefollowing symbols:

G WARNINGWarning notes draw your attention to hazardsthat endanger your health or life, or the healthor life of others.

H Environmental noteEnvironmental notes provide you withinformation on environmentally aware actionsor disposal.

! Notes on material damage alert you todangers that could lead to damage to yourvehicle.

i Practical tips or further information thatcould be helpful to you.

X This symbol indicates aninstruction that must be followed.

X Several of these symbols insuccession indicate an instructionwith several steps.

(Y page) This symbol tells you where youcan find more information about atopic.

YY This symbol indicates a warning oran instruction that is continued onthe next page.

Display This font indicates a display in themultifunction display/COMANDdisplay.

~ This symbol tells you that you canfind further information in theDigital Operator's Manual.

Parts of the software in the vehicle areprotected by copyright © 2005The FreeType Projecthttp://www.freetype.org. All rightsreserved.

Welcome to the world of Mercedes-BenzBefore you first drive off, read this Operator'sManual carefully and familiarize yourself withyour vehicle. For your own safety and a longervehicle life, follow the instructions andwarning notices in this manual. Disregardingthem may lead to damage to the vehicle orpersonal injury.Vehicle damage resulting from the disregardof the instructions is not covered by theMercedes-Benz Limited Warranty.The equipment or model designation of yourvehicle may differ according to:RModelROrderRCountry specificationRAvailabilityMercedes-Benz therefore reserves the rightto introduce changes in the following areas:RdesignRequipmentRtechnical featuresThe equipment in your vehicle may thereforediffer from that shown in the descriptions andillustrations.The following are integral components of thevehicle:ROperator's ManualRMaintenance BookletREquipment-dependent supplementsKeep printed copies of the documents in thevehicle at all times. If you sell the vehicle,always pass the documents on to the newowner.The technical documentation team atDaimler AG wishes you safe and pleasantmotoring.Mercedes-Benz USA, LLCMercedes-Benz Canada, Inc.A Daimler Company

XXXX ÉXXXXNËÍ

Index ....................................................... 4

Introduction ......................................... 20

At a glance ........................................... 27

Safety ................................................... 37

Opening/closing ................................. 67

Seats, steering wheel and mirrors .... 83

Lights and windshield wipers ............ 97

Climate control ................................. 117

Driving and parking .......................... 137

On-board computer and displays .... 207

Stowage and features ...................... 261

Maintenance and care ...................... 287

Breakdown assistance ..................... 301

Wheels and tires ............................... 317

Technical data ................................... 347

Contents 3

1, 2, 3 ...115 V socket ...................................... 27112 V socket ........................................ 2714ETS (Electronic Traction System)

Function/notes ................................ 624MATIC (permanent four-wheeldrive) .................................................. 1934MATIC off-road system ................... 193

AABS (Anti-lock Braking System)

Display message ............................ 226Function/notes ................................ 61Important safety notes .................... 61Warning lamp ................................. 250

Active Blind Spot AssistActivating/deactivating (on-board computer) ............................ 218Display message ............................ 240Function/information .................... 189Trailer towing ................................. 192

ADAPTIVE BRAKE ................................. 64Adaptive brake lamps ......................... 62Additives (engine oil) ........................ 354Air bags

Display message ............................ 231Front air bag (driver, frontpassenger) ....................................... 42Important safety notes .................... 41PASSENGER AIR BAGOFF- indicator lamp .......................... 44Safety guidelines ............................. 40Window curtain air bag .................... 44

Air-conditioning systemsee Climate control

Air ventsImportant safety notes .................. 134Rear ............................................... 136Setting ........................................... 134Setting the center air vents ........... 135Setting the side air vents ............... 135

Alarm systemsee ATA (Anti-Theft Alarm system)

All-wheel driveTransfer case ................................. 198

AMG menu (on-board computer) ..... 222

Anti-lock braking systemsee ABS (Anti-lock Braking System)

Anti-theft alarm systemsee ATA (Anti-Theft Alarm system)

Approach/departure angle .............. 167Ashtray ............................................... 269Assistance menu (on-boardcomputer) .......................................... 218ASSYST service interval display

Service messages .......................... 293ATA (Anti-Theft Alarm system)

Activating/deactivating ................... 65Function ........................................... 65Switching off the alarm .................... 65

Audio systemsee separate operating instructions

Authorized Mercedes-Benz Centersee Qualified specialist workshop

AUTO lightsDisplay message ............................ 234see Lights

Automatic car wash .......................... 295Automatic engine start (ECO start/stop function) .................................... 143Automatic engine switch-off (ECOstart/stop function) .......................... 142Automatic headlamp mode .............. 100Automatic transmission

Automatic drive program ............... 150Display message ............................ 245Drive position (ECO start/stopfunction) ........................................ 147Driving tips .................................... 149Emergency running mode .............. 153Engaging drive position .................. 147Engaging neutral ............................ 147Engaging reverse gear ................... 146Engaging the park position ............ 146Important safety notes .................. 145Kickdown ....................................... 149Manual drive program .................... 151Neutral (ECO start/stop function) . 147Overview ........................................ 145Problem (malfunction) ................... 153Program selector button ................ 149Pulling away ................................... 140Selector lever ................................ 145

4 Index

Shift ranges ................................... 150Steering wheel paddle shifters ...... 150Trailer towing ................................. 149Transmission position display ........ 146

Automatic transmissionemergency mode ............................... 153Axle load, permissible (trailertowing) ............................................... 358

BBackup lamp

Changing bulbs .............................. 113BAS (Brake Assist System) ................. 61Battery

Checking (SmartKey) ....................... 70Important safety guidelines(SmartKey) ....................................... 70Replacing (SmartKey) ...................... 71

Battery (vehicle)Charging ........................................ 307Display message ............................ 236Important safety notes .................. 305Jump starting ................................. 308Overview ........................................ 305

Blind Spot AssistActivating/deactivating ................. 218Display message ............................ 240Notes/function .............................. 186see Active Blind Spot Assist

Brake fluidDisplay message ............................ 229Notes ............................................. 354

Brake fluid level ................................ 292Brake lamps

Adaptive ........................................... 62Display message ............................ 232

BrakesABS .................................................. 61BAS .................................................. 61Brake fluid (notes) ......................... 354Display message ............................ 226Driving tips .................................... 159High-performance brake system .... 161Important safety notes .................. 159Maintenance .................................. 160Parking brake ................................ 157Warning lamp ................................. 249

Breakdownsee Flat tire see Towing away

Brush guard ....................................... 280Bulbs

Backup lamp .................................. 113Brake lamp .................................... 113Cornering light function ................. 110Fog lamps ...................................... 110Rear fog lamp ................................ 113Tail lamp ........................................ 113see Changing bulbs

CCalifornia

Important notice for retailcustomers and lessees .................... 21

Calling up a malfunctionsee Display messages

CareCarpets .......................................... 300Car wash ........................................ 295Chrome parts ................................. 298Display ........................................... 298Gear or selector lever .................... 299Headlamps ..................................... 297Interior ........................................... 298Matte finish ................................... 296Notes ............................................. 294Paint .............................................. 296Plastic trim .................................... 298Power washer ................................ 295Rear view camera .......................... 298Roof lining ...................................... 300Seat belt ........................................ 300Seat covers .................................... 299Sensors ......................................... 297Steering wheel ............................... 299Tail pipes ....................................... 298Trim strips ..................................... 299Washing by hand ........................... 295Wheels ........................................... 296Windows ........................................ 297Wiper blades .................................. 297Wooden trim .................................. 299

Index 5

Cargo compartment coverInstalling/removing ....................... 267Notes/how to use ......................... 267Opening and closing ...................... 267Overview ........................................ 267

Cargo compartment enlargementImportant safety notes .................. 264

Cargo tie down rings ......................... 267CD player/CD changer (on-boardcomputer) .......................................... 216Center console

Overview .......................................... 32Upper section .................................. 32

Central lockingAutomatic locking (on-boardcomputer) ...................................... 220Locking/unlocking (SmartKey) ........ 68

Changing bulbsImportant safety notes .................. 108Overview of bulb types .................. 109Reversing lamps ............................ 113Side marker lamps ......................... 112Turn signals (front) ......................... 111

Changing gears .................................. 148Checklist

After driving off-road ...................... 166Before driving off-road ................... 165

Child-proof locksImportant safety notes .................... 59Rear doors ....................................... 59

ChildrenIn the vehicle ................................... 54Restraint systems ............................ 54

Child seatAutomatic recognition ..................... 44Automatic recognition/air bagdeactivation, self-test ...................... 46LATCH-type (ISOFIX) child seatanchors ............................................ 57Special seat belt retractor ............... 56Top Tether ....................................... 58Troubleshooting ............................... 47

Chrome parts (cleaninginstructions) ...................................... 298Cigarette lighter ................................ 270

Climate controlControlling automatically ............... 130Cooling with air dehumidification . . 124Defrosting the windows ................. 132Defrosting the windshield .............. 131Dual-zone automatic climatecontrol ........................................... 119Important safety notes .................. 118Indicator lamp ................................ 129Maximum cooling .......................... 132Notes on using automatic climatecontrol ........................................... 120Overview of systems ...................... 118Problems with "cooling with airdehumidification" ........................... 129Problem with the rear windowdefroster ........................................ 133Refrigerant ..................................... 354Setting the air distribution ............. 131Setting the airflow ......................... 131Setting the air vents ...................... 134Setting the temperature ................ 131Switching air-recirculation modeon/off ............................................ 134Switching on/off ........................... 121Switching residual heat on/off ...... 134Switching the rear windowdefroster on/off ............................ 133Switching the ZONE function on/off .................................................. 131Windshield defroster ...................... 133

CockpitOverview .......................................... 28see Instrument cluster

COMANDsee separate operating instructions

Combination switch .......................... 103Consumption statistics (on-boardcomputer) .......................................... 213Convenience opening feature

see Side windows Coolant (engine)

Checking the level ......................... 291Display message ............................ 234Filling capacity ............................... 356Notes ............................................. 354Temperature (on-board computer) . 222

6 Index

Temperature gauge ........................ 209Warning lamp ................................. 256

Coolingsee Climate control

Cornering light functionFunction/notes ............................. 104

Cruise controlCruise control lever ....................... 170Display message ............................ 242Driving system ............................... 169Function/notes ............................. 169Selecting ........................................ 170

Cup holderCenter console .............................. 268Important safety notes .................. 268Rear compartment ......................... 268

Customer Assistance Center (CAC) ... 24Customer Relations Department ....... 24

DData

see Technical data Daytime running lamps

Display message ............................ 234Switching on/off (on-boardcomputer) ...................................... 219Switching on/off (switch) ................ 99

Delayed switch-offExterior lighting (on-boardcomputer) ...................................... 219Interior lighting .............................. 220

Differential locks ............................... 201Digital speedometer ......................... 213Display (cleaning instructions) ........ 298Display messages

Calling up (on-board computer) ..... 225Driving systems ............................. 238Engine ............................................ 234General notes ................................ 224Hiding (on-board computer) ........... 224Lights ............................................. 231Safety systems .............................. 226Service interval display .................. 293SmartKey ....................................... 247Tires ............................................... 242Vehicle ........................................... 245

Distance display (on-boardcomputer) .......................................... 218Distance recorder

see Trip odometer Distance warning (warning lamp) .... 258DISTRONIC PLUS

Activating ....................................... 179Activation conditions ..................... 179Cruise control lever ....................... 179Deactivating ................................... 184Display message ............................ 240Displays in the multifunctiondisplay ........................................... 182Driving tips .................................... 184Function/notes ............................. 177Important safety notes .................. 177Setting the specified minimumdistance ......................................... 183wählen ........................................... 179Warning lamp ................................. 258

Door control panelOverview .......................................... 35

DoorsAutomatic locking (on-boardcomputer) ...................................... 220Automatic locking (switch) ............... 75Central locking/unlocking(SmartKey) ....................................... 68Display message ............................ 246Emergency locking ........................... 76Emergency unlocking ....................... 75Important safety notes .................... 73Opening (from inside) ...................... 74Overview .......................................... 73

Drinking and driving ......................... 159Drive program

Automatic ...................................... 150Display ........................................... 146Manual ........................................... 151SETUP (on-board computer) .......... 222

Driving abroadSymmetrical low beam .................... 98

Driving in mountainous terrainApproach/departure angle ............ 167Driving downhill ............................. 169Gradient-climbing capability(maximum) ..................................... 168

Index 7

Driving lampssee Daytime running lamps

Driving off-roadsee Off-road driving

Driving on flooded roads .................. 162Driving safety systems

4ETS (Electronic Traction System) ... 62ABS (Anti-lock Braking System) ....... 61ADAPTIVE BRAKE ............................. 64Adaptive brake lamps ...................... 62BAS (Brake Assist System) .............. 61Electronic brake force distribution ... 64ESP® (Electronic StabilityProgram) .......................................... 62Important safety information ........... 60Overview .......................................... 60

Driving systemVariable SPEEDTRONIC ................. 174

Driving systemsActive Blind Spot Assist ................. 188Blind Spot Assist ............................ 186Cruise control ................................ 169Display message ............................ 238DISTRONIC PLUS ........................... 177HOLD function ............................... 192PARKTRONIC ................................. 194Rear view camera .......................... 197SPEEDTRONIC ............................... 174

Driving tipsAutomatic transmission ................. 149Brakes ........................................... 159DISTRONIC PLUS ........................... 184Downhill gradient ........................... 160Driving abroad ................................. 98Driving in winter ............................. 163Driving on flooded roads ................ 162Driving on sand .............................. 166Driving over obstacles ................... 167General .......................................... 158Gravel roads .................................. 166Hydroplaning ................................. 162Icy road surfaces ........................... 163Off-road driving .............................. 164Off-road fording ............................. 162Snow chains .................................. 321Symmetrical low beam .................... 98Tire ruts ......................................... 166Towing a trailer .............................. 203

Traveling uphill ............................... 167Wet road surface ........................... 160

DVD audioOperating (on-board computer) ..... 216

DVD videoOperating (on-board computer) ..... 216

EEASY-ENTRY feature

Activating/deactivating ................. 221Function/notes ................................ 92

EASY-EXIT featureFunction/notes ................................ 92Switching on/off ........................... 221

EBD (electronic brake forcedistribution)

Display message ............................ 228Function/notes ................................ 64

ECO start/stop functionDeactivating/activating ................. 142General information ....................... 141

Electronic Stability Programsee ESP® (Electronic Stability Program)

Electronic Traction Systemsee 4ETS (Electronic Traction System)

Emergency callsee mbrace

Emergency lockingVehicle ............................................. 76

Emergency releaseVehicle ............................................. 75

Emergency Tensioning DevicesFunction ........................................... 53Safety guidelines ............................. 40

Emissions controlService and warranty information .... 21

EngineCheck Engine warning lamp ........... 256Display message ............................ 234ECO start/stop function ................ 141Engine number ............................... 350Irregular running ............................ 144Jump-starting ................................. 308Starting problems .......................... 144Starting the engine with theSmartKey ....................................... 140Switching off .................................. 157

8 Index

Engine electronicsProblem (malfunction) ................... 144

Engine oilAdding ........................................... 291Additives ........................................ 354Checking the oil level ..................... 289Display message ............................ 236Filling capacity ............................... 353Notes about oil grades ................... 353Temperature (on-board computer) . 222Viscosity ........................................ 354

Environmental protectionNote ................................................. 20

ESP® (Electronic StabilityProgram)

AMG menu (on-board computer) . . . 222Deactivating/activating ................... 63Display message ............................ 226Function/notes ................................ 62Important safety information ........... 62Trailer stabilization ........................... 64Warning lamp ................................. 252

Exhaust check ................................... 159Exhaust tail pipe (cleaninginstructions) ...................................... 298Exterior lighting

see Lights Exterior mirrors

Adjusting ......................................... 93Dipping (automatic) ......................... 94Folding in/out (automatically) ......... 94Folding in/out (electrically) ............. 93Folding in when locking (on-boardcomputer) ...................................... 221Out of position (troubleshooting) ..... 94Setting ............................................. 93Storing settings (memoryfunction) .......................................... 95Storing the parking position ............. 94

FFiller cap

see Fuel filler flap First-aid kit ......................................... 302Flat tire

Preparing the vehicle ..................... 304Floormat ............................................. 284

Fog lampsSwitching on/off ........................... 101

Folding the seat backrest (rear)forwards/back .................................. 265Front fog lamp (display message) . . . 233Front fog lamps

Switching on/off ........................... 101Fuel

Additives ........................................ 353Consumption statistics .................. 213Displaying the currentconsumption .................................. 213Displaying the range ...................... 213Fuel gauge ..................................... 209Grade (gasoline) ............................ 351Important safety notes .................. 351Notes for AMG vehicles ................. 352Premium-grade unleaded gasoline . 351Problem (malfunction) ................... 156Refueling ........................................ 153Tank content/reserve fuel ............. 351

Fuel/water separatorService ........................................... 294

Fuel consumptionNotes ............................................. 159

Fuel filler flapEmergency release ........................ 155Opening/closing ............................ 154

Fuel levelCalling up the range (on-boardcomputer) ...................................... 213

Fuel tankCapacity ........................................ 351Problem (malfunction) ................... 156

Fuse allocation chart ........................ 313Fuse box

Battery case ................................... 315Dashboard ..................................... 314Front-passenger footwell ............... 314Transmission tunnel ....................... 314

Fuse extractor ................................... 313Fuses

Allocation chart ............................. 313Before changing ............................. 313Dashboard fuse box ....................... 314Fuse allocation chart ..................... 313Fuse box in the front-passengerfootwell .......................................... 314

Index 9

Fuse box in the transmissiontunnel ............................................ 314Important safety notes .................. 313In the battery case ......................... 315

GGarage door opener

Clearing the memory ..................... 284Important safety notes .................. 280Opening/closing the garage door .. 284Programming the remote control ... 281

Gasoline ............................................. 351Gear indicator (on-boardcomputer) .......................................... 222Gear or selector lever (cleaningguidelines) ......................................... 299Genuine Mercedes-Benz parts ......... 348Genuine wood trim and trim strips(cleaning instructions) ...................... 299Glove box ........................................... 263Gradient-climbing capability(maximum) ......................................... 168GTW (Gross Trailer Weight)(definition) ......................................... 338

HHazard warning lamps ...................... 104Headlamps

Adding fluid to cleaning system ..... 292Cleaning ......................................... 297Cleaning system (capacity) ............ 356Cleaning system (function) ............ 103Cleaning system (notes) ................ 356Fogging up ..................................... 105Protective grille .............................. 112see Automatic headlamp mode

Head restraintsAdjusting ......................................... 86Adjusting (rear) ................................ 87Installing/removing (rear) ................ 88Luxury .............................................. 87Resetting (front) ............................... 87

Heatingsee Climate control

High-beam headlampsDisplay message ............................ 232Switching on/off ........................... 103

Hill start assist .................................. 141HOLD function

Function/notes ............................. 192Hood

Closing ........................................... 289Display message ............................ 246Important safety notes .................. 288Opening ......................................... 289

Hydroplaning ..................................... 162

IImmobilizer .......................................... 64Instrument cluster

Overview ........................................ 209Warning and indicator lamps ......... 247

Instrument cluster lighting .............. 209Interior lighting ................................. 105

Automatic control .......................... 106Cargo compartment lamp .............. 107Delayed switch-off (on-boardcomputer) ...................................... 220Manual control ............................... 106Overview ........................................ 105Reading lamp ................................. 107Rear interior lighting ...................... 108

JJack

Pump lever ..................................... 342Storage location ............................ 302Using ............................................. 342

Jump starting (engine) ...................... 308

KKey positions

SmartKey ....................................... 139Kickdown

Manual drive program .................... 152

10 Index

LLap time (RACETIMER) ...................... 222LATCH-type (ISOFIX) child seatanchors ................................................ 57License plate lamp (displaymessage) ............................................ 233Lights

Activating/deactivating theinterior lighting delayed switch-off . 220Automatic headlamp mode ............ 100Cornering light function ................. 104Driving abroad ................................. 98Fog lamps ...................................... 101Hazard warning lamps ................... 104High beam flasher .......................... 104High-beam headlamps ................... 103Light switch ..................................... 98Low-beam headlamps ...................... 99Parking lamps ................................ 102Rear fog lamp ................................ 101Standing lamps .............................. 102Switching the daytime runninglamps on/off (on-boardcomputer) ...................................... 219Switching the daytime runninglamps on/off (switch) ...................... 99Switching the exterior lightingdelayed switch-off on/off (on-board computer) ............................ 219Switching the surround lightingon/off (on-board computer) .......... 219Turn signals ................................... 103see Changing bulbs see Interior lighting

Light sensor (display message) ....... 234LIM indicator lamp

Cruise control ................................ 170DISTRONIC PLUS ........................... 179Variable SPEEDTRONIC ................. 175

Limit speedVariable SPEEDTRONIC ................. 174

Load anchorage ................................. 266Loading guidelines ............................ 262

LockingEmergency locking ........................... 76From inside the vehicle (centrallocking button) ................................. 74see Central locking

Locking (doors)Automatic ........................................ 75

Locking centrallysee Central locking

Locking verification signal (on-board computer) ............................... 221Low-beam headlamps

Display message ............................ 231Setting for driving abroad(symmetrical) ................................... 98Switching on/off .............................. 99

LOW RANGE off-road gear ................ 199Luggage compartmentenlargement

Overview ........................................ 264Lumbar support

Adjusting the 4-way lumbarsupport ............................................ 89

Luxury head restraints ....................... 87

MM+S tires ............................................ 320Malfunction message

see Display messages Matte finish (cleaninginstructions) ...................................... 296mbrace

Call priority .................................... 276Display message ............................ 229Downloading destinations(COMAND) ..................................... 277Downloading routes ....................... 279Emergency call .............................. 274Geo fencing ................................... 280Important safety notes .................. 272Locating a stolen vehicle ............... 278MB info call button ........................ 276Remote vehicle locking .................. 277Roadside Assistance button .......... 275Self-test ......................................... 273Speed alert .................................... 279System .......................................... 273

Index 11

Triggering the vehicle alarm ........... 280Vehicle remote malfunctiondiagnosis ....................................... 278Vehicle remote unlocking .............. 277

Mechanical keyFunction/notes ................................ 70General notes .................................. 70Removing ......................................... 70

Memory card (audio) ......................... 216Memory function ................................. 95Message memory (on-boardcomputer) .......................................... 225Messages

see Display messages Mirrors

Sun visor ........................................ 269see Exterior mirrors see Rear-view mirror

Mobile phoneMenu (on-board computer) ............ 216

Mounting wheelsMounting a new wheel ................... 343Raising the vehicle ......................... 342Removing a wheel .......................... 343Securing the vehicle againstrolling away ................................... 341

MP3Operation ....................................... 216see separate operating instructions

Multifunction displayFunction/notes ............................. 212Permanent display ......................... 219

Multifunction steering wheelBack button ................................... 211Operating the on-board computer . 210Overview .......................................... 31

NNavigation

Menu (on-board computer) ............ 214see separate operating instructions

NECK-PRO head restraintsOperation ......................................... 47Resetting after being triggered ........ 48

Notes on breaking-in a newvehicle ................................................ 138

OOccupant safety

Children in the vehicle ..................... 54Important safety notes .................... 38

Odometersee Trip odometer

Off-roadDifferential locks ............................ 201Off-road ABS .................................... 61

Off-road drivingChecklist ........................................ 165Driving on sand .............................. 166Important safety notes .................. 164Traveling uphill ............................... 167

Off-road fording ................................. 162Off-road system

4MATIC .......................................... 193Oil

see Engine oil On-board computer

AMG menu ..................................... 222Assistance menu ........................... 218Audio menu ................................... 215Convenience submenu .................. 221Display messages .......................... 224DISTRONIC PLUS ........................... 182Factory settings submenu ............. 222Important safety notes .................. 208Instrument cluster submenu .......... 219Lighting submenu .......................... 219Menu overview .............................. 212Message memory .......................... 225Navigation menu ............................ 214Operation ....................................... 210RACETIMER ................................... 222Service menu ................................. 218Settings menu ............................... 218Standard display ............................ 212Telephone menu ............................ 216Trip menu ...................................... 212Vehicle submenu ........................... 220Video DVD operation ..................... 216

Operating systemsee On-board computer

Outside temperature display ........... 210Overhead control panel ...................... 34

12 Index

Override featureRear side windows ........................... 59

PPaint code number ............................ 349Paintwork (cleaning instructions) . . . 296Panic alarm .......................................... 38Parcel net ........................................... 264Parking ............................................... 156

Engaging park position .................. 146Important safety notes .................. 156Position of exterior mirror, front-passenger side ................................. 94see PARKTRONIC

Parking aidsee Exterior mirrors see PARKTRONIC

Parking brakeApplying ......................................... 157Display message ............................ 228Warning lamp ................................. 255

Parking lampsSwitching on/off ........................... 102

PARKTRONICDeactivating/activating ................. 196Driving system ............................... 194Function/notes ............................. 194Important safety notes .................. 194Problem (malfunction) ................... 197Range of the sensors ..................... 194Trailer towing ................................. 196Warning display ............................. 195

Pedals ................................................. 159Plastic trim (cleaning instructions) . 298Power supply (trailer) ....................... 206Power washers .................................. 295Product information ............................ 20Programming

SmartKey ......................................... 69Program selector button .................. 149Pulling away

Automatic transmission ................. 140

QQualified specialist workshop ........... 23

RRACETIMER

Deleting all laps ............................. 223Displaying and starting .................. 222Displaying the intermediate time ... 223Resetting the current lap ............... 223Starting a new lap .......................... 223Stopping ........................................ 223

RACETIMER (on-board computer) .... 222Radio

Selecting a station ......................... 215see separate operating instructions

Reading lamp ..................................... 105Rear bench seat

Folding forward .............................. 266Rear compartment

Setting the air vents ...................... 136Rear door

Closing ............................................. 77Display message ............................ 246Important safety notes .................... 77Opening ........................................... 77Opening/closing .............................. 77

Rear fog lampDisplay message ............................ 233Switching on/off ........................... 101

Rear lampssee Lights see Tail lamps

Rear seat benchFolding into an upright position ..... 266

Rear view cameraFunction/notes ............................. 197

Rear view camera (cleaninginstructions) ...................................... 298Rear-view mirror

Dipping (automatic) ......................... 94Rear window defroster

Problem (malfunction) ................... 133Switching on/off ........................... 133

Rear window wiperSwitching on/off ........................... 115

RefuelingFuel gauge ..................................... 209Important safety notes .................. 153Refueling process .......................... 154see Fuel

Index 13

Remote controlProgramming (garage dooropener) .......................................... 281

Reporting safety defects .................... 24Reserve (fuel tank)

see Fuel Reserve fuel

Display message ............................ 237Warning lamp ................................. 256see Fuel

Residual heatSwitching on/off ........................... 134

Restraint systemssee SRS (Supplemental RestraintSystem)

Reversing lamps (displaymessage) ............................................ 233Roadside Assistance (breakdown) . . . . 22Roof lining and carpets (cleaningguidelines) ......................................... 300Route (navigation)

see Route guidance (navigation) Route guidance (navigation) ............ 214

SSafety

Children in the vehicle ..................... 54Child restraint systems .................... 54

Safety systemsee Driving safety systems

Seat backrestFolding back .................................. 265

Seat beltsAdjusting the height ......................... 52Belt force limiters ............................ 53Cleaning ......................................... 300Correct usage .................................. 49Emergency Tensioning Devices ........ 53Fastening ......................................... 50Fastening, front ............................... 51Fastening in the rear, center ............ 51Important safety guidelines ............. 48Releasing ......................................... 52Safety guidelines ............................. 40Special seat belt retractor ............... 56Warning lamp ................................. 248Warning lamp (function) ................... 53

Seat heatingIndicator lamp (malfunction) ............ 90

SeatsAdjusting (electrically) ..................... 86Adjusting the 4-way lumbarsupport ............................................ 89Adjusting the head restraint ............ 86Cleaning the cover ......................... 299Correct driver's seat position ........... 84Important safety notes .................... 85Overview .......................................... 85Storing settings (memoryfunction) .......................................... 95Switching seat heating on/off ......... 89Switching seat ventilation on/off . . . . 90

Seat ventilationIndicator lamp (malfunction) ............ 90

Sensors (cleaning instructions) ....... 297Service interval display

Displaying a service message (on-board computer) ............................ 293

Service menu (on-board computer) . 218Service products

Brake fluid ..................................... 354Coolant (engine) ............................ 354Engine oil ....................................... 353Fuel ................................................ 350Important safety notes .................. 350Notes ............................................. 350Refrigerant (air-conditioningsystem) .......................................... 354Washer fluid ................................... 356

Setting a speed limitsee SPEEDTRONIC

SettingsCalling up a stored setting ............... 96Factory (on-board computer) ......... 222On-board computer ....................... 218

Setting the air distribution ............... 131SETUP (on-board computer) ............. 222Shift ranges ....................................... 150Side marker lamp (displaymessage) ............................................ 233Side marker lamps (changingbulbs) ................................................. 112

14 Index

Side windowsConvenience opening feature .......... 78Important safety information ........... 78Opening/closing .............................. 78Overview .......................................... 78Troubleshooting ............................... 79

Ski rack .............................................. 267Sliding sunroof

Important safety notes .................... 79Opening/closing .............................. 80Operating manually .......................... 80Problem (malfunction) ..................... 81

SmartKeyChanging the battery ....................... 71Changing the programming ............. 69Checking the battery ....................... 70Convenience opening feature .......... 78Display message ............................ 247Door central locking/unlocking ....... 68Important safety notes .................... 68Loss ................................................. 72Malfunction ...................................... 72Mechanical key ................................ 70Overview .......................................... 68Problem (malfunction) ..................... 72Starting the engine ........................ 140

Snow chains ...................................... 321Sockets

Front-passenger footwell ............... 271Luggage compartment ................... 271Rear compartment ......................... 271

SOSsee mbrace

Spare fuses ........................................ 313Spare wheel

Mounting ....................................... 340Notes/data .................................... 346Spare wheel bracket at the rear .... 303Stainless-steel spare hub cap ........ 304

Specialist workshop ............................ 23Special seat belt retractor .................. 52Speed, controlling

see Cruise control Speedometer

Digital ............................................ 213In the Instrument cluster ............... 209

Segments ...................................... 210Selecting the unit ofmeasurement ................................ 219see Instrument cluster

SPEEDTRONICDisplay message ............................ 241Selecting ........................................ 175Variable ......................................... 174

SRSsee SRS (Supplemental RestraintSystem)

SRS (Supplemental RestraintSystem)

Display message ............................ 229Introduction ..................................... 39Warning lamp ................................. 255Warning lamp (function) ................... 39

Standing lampsDisplay message ............................ 233Switching on/off ........................... 102

Starting the engineImportant safety notes .................. 140

Steering (display message) .............. 246Steering wheel

Adjusting (electrically) ..................... 91Buttons (on-board computer) ......... 210Cleaning ......................................... 299Important safety notes .................... 90Paddle shifters ............................... 150Steering wheel heating .................... 91Storing settings (memoryfunction) .......................................... 95

Steering wheel heatingIndicator lamp (malfunction) ............ 91

Steering wheel paddle shifters ........ 150Stopwatch (RACETIMER) ................... 222Stowage areas ................................... 263Stowage compartments

Armrest (under) ............................. 263Cup holders ................................... 268Glove box ....................................... 263Important safety information ......... 263Stowage pockets ........................... 264

Summer tires ..................................... 320Sun visor ............................................ 268

Index 15

Supplemental Restraint Systemsee SRS (Supplemental RestraintSystem)

Surround lighting (on-boardcomputer) .......................................... 219Suspension tuning

SETUP (on-board computer) .......... 222SUV

(Sport Utility Vehicle) ....................... 22Switching air-recirculation modeon/off ................................................. 134Switching off the alarm (ATA) ............ 65

TTachometer ........................................ 210Tailgate

Opening dimensions ...................... 357Tail lamps

Display message ............................ 233see Lights

Tank contentFuel gauge ..................................... 209

Technical dataCapacities ...................................... 350Tires ............................................... 344Tires/wheels ................................. 344Trailer Loads .................................. 358Vehicle data ................................... 357Wheels ........................................... 344

TELEAIDCall priority .................................... 276Downloading destinations(COMAND) ..................................... 277Downloading routes ....................... 279Emergency call .............................. 274Geo fencing ................................... 280Important safety notes .................. 272Locating a stolen vehicle ............... 278MB info call button ........................ 276Remote vehicle locking .................. 277Roadside Assistance button .......... 275Self-test ......................................... 273Speed alert .................................... 279System .......................................... 273Triggering the vehicle alarm ........... 280

Vehicle remote malfunctiondiagnosis ....................................... 278Vehicle remote unlocking .............. 277

TelephoneAccepting a call ............................. 217Display message ............................ 246Menu (on-board computer) ............ 216Number from the phone book ........ 217Redialing ........................................ 217Rejecting/ending a call ................. 217

Telephone compartment .................. 263Temperature

Coolant .......................................... 209Coolant (on-board computer) ......... 222Engine oil (on-board computer) ...... 222Outside temperature ...................... 210Setting (climate control) ................ 131

Theft deterrent systemsATA (Anti-Theft Alarm system) ......... 65Immobilizer ...................................... 64

Tilt/sliding sunroofsee Sliding sunroof

Timesee Separate Operator's Manual

Timing (RACETIMER) ......................... 222Tire pressure

Calling up (on-board computer) ..... 325Checking manually ........................ 325Display message ............................ 242Maximum ....................................... 324Notes ............................................. 323Recommended ............................... 322Table (single tires) ......................... 322

Tire pressure monitorChecking the tire pressureelectronically ................................. 327Warning message .......................... 327

Tire pressure monitoring systemFunction/notes ............................. 325Restarting ...................................... 327Warning lamp ................................. 259

TiresAspect ratio (definition) ................. 339Average weight of the vehicleoccupants (definition) .................... 338Bar (definition) ............................... 338Changing a wheel .......................... 340Characteristics .............................. 337

16 Index

Checking ........................................ 319Definition of terms ......................... 338Direction of rotation ...................... 341Display message ............................ 242Distribution of the vehicleoccupants (definition) .................... 340DOT, Tire Identification Number(TIN) ............................................... 337DOT (Department ofTransportation) (definition) ............ 338GAWR (Gross Axle Weight Rating)(definition) ..................................... 338GTW (Gross Trailer Weight)(definition) ..................................... 338GVW (Gross Vehicle Weight)(definition) ..................................... 338GVWR (Gross Vehicle WeightRating) (definition) ......................... 339Important safety notes .................. 318Increased vehicle weight due tooptional equipment (definition) ...... 338Kilopascal (kPa) (definition) ........... 339Labeling (overview) ........................ 334Load bearing index (definition) ...... 340Load index ..................................... 336Load index (definition) ................... 339Maximum loaded vehicle weight(definition) ..................................... 339Maximum load on a tire(definition) ..................................... 339Maximum permissible tirepressure (definition) ....................... 339Maximum tire load ......................... 337Maximum tire load (definition) ....... 339Optional equipment weight(definition) ..................................... 340PSI (pounds per square inch)(definition) ..................................... 339Replacing ....................................... 340Service life ..................................... 320Sidewall (definition) ....................... 340Speed rating (definition) ................ 338Storing ........................................... 341Structure and characteristics(definition) ..................................... 338Technical data ............................... 344Temperature .................................. 333

TIN (Tire Identification Number)(definition) ..................................... 340Tire bead (definition) ...................... 340Tire pressure (definition) ................ 339Tire pressures (recommended) ...... 338Tire size (data) ............................... 344Tire size designation, load-bearingcapacity, speed rating .................... 334Tire tread ....................................... 319Tire tread (definition) ..................... 339Total load limit (definition) ............. 340Traction ......................................... 333Traction (definition) ....................... 340Tread wear ..................................... 333TWR (permissible trailer drawbarnoseweight) (definition) ................. 340Uniform Tire Quality GradingStandards ...................................... 332Uniform Tire Quality GradingStandards (definition) .................... 338Unladen weight (definition) ............ 339Wear indicator (definition) ............. 340Wheel rim (definition) .................... 338see Flat tire

Top Tether ............................................ 58Towing

Important safety guidelines ........... 310In the event of malfunctions .......... 313

Towing a trailerAxle load, permissible .................... 358Driving tips .................................... 203Lights display message .................. 231Mounting dimensions .................... 358Shift range ..................................... 149Trailer loads ................................... 358Trailer tow hitch ............................. 358

Towing awayWith both axles on the ground ....... 312

Towing eyeFront .............................................. 311Rear ............................................... 311

Tow-startingImportant safety notes .................. 310

Trailer7-pin connector ............................. 206Power supply ................................. 206

Trailer loadsTechnical data ............................... 358

Index 17

Trailer tow hitchBall position ................................... 359

Trailer towingActive Blind Spot Assist ................. 192ESP® ................................................ 64PARKTRONIC ................................. 196

Transfer caseGeneral notes ................................ 198Shifting .......................................... 199Shifting (general notes) .................. 199Shifting (important safety notes) . . . 199Shifting to neutral .......................... 200Shift range ..................................... 198Switching off the off-road gearratio ............................................... 200Switching on the off-road gearratio ............................................... 199

Transmissionsee Automatic transmission

Transmission positions .................... 148Transporting the vehicle .................. 312Traveling uphill

Brow of hill ..................................... 168Trip computer (on-boardcomputer) .......................................... 213Trip odometer

Calling up ....................................... 212Resetting (on-board computer) ...... 214

Turn signalsChanging bulbs (front) ................... 111Display message ............................ 232Switching on/off ........................... 103

TWR (Tongue Weight Rating)(definition) ......................................... 340Type identification plate

see Vehicle identification plate

UUnlocking

Emergency unlocking ....................... 75From inside the vehicle (centralunlocking button) ............................. 74

VVanity mirror

Sun visor ........................................ 269Variable SPEEDTRONIC

Function/notes ............................. 174Vehicle

Correct use ...................................... 23Data acquisition ............................... 24Display message ............................ 245Emergency locking ........................... 76Emergency unlocking ....................... 75Equipment ....................................... 21Individual settings .......................... 218Limited Warranty ............................. 24Loading .......................................... 328Locking (SmartKey) .......................... 68Lowering ........................................ 344Maintenance .................................... 21Parking for a long period ................ 158Pulling away ................................... 140Raising ........................................... 342Reporting problems ......................... 24Securing from rolling away ............ 341Towing away .................................. 310Tow-starting ................................... 310Transporting .................................. 312Unlocking (SmartKey) ...................... 68Vehicle data ................................... 357

Vehicle data ....................................... 357Vehicle dimensions ........................... 357Vehicle identification number

see VIN Vehicle identification plate .............. 349Vehicle tool kit .................................. 302Ventilation

Setting the airflow ......................... 131Video

Operating the DVD ......................... 216VIN ...................................................... 349

WWarning and indicator lamps

ABS ................................................ 250Brakes ........................................... 249Check Engine ................................. 256Coolant .......................................... 256

18 Index

Cruise control ................................ 170Distance warning ........................... 258DISTRONIC PLUS ........................... 258ESP® .............................................. 252ESP® OFF ....................................... 253Fuel tank ........................................ 256LIM (DISTRONIC PLUS) .................. 179LIM (variable SPEEDTRONIC) ......... 175Overview .................................. 30, 247Parking brake ................................ 255PASSENGER AIRBAG OFF ................ 44Reserve fuel ................................... 256Seat belt ........................................ 248SRS ................................................ 255Tire pressure monitor .................... 259

Warning triangle ................................ 302Warranty ............................................ 348Washer fluid

Display message ............................ 246Wheel bolt tightening torque ........... 344Wheels

Changing a wheel .......................... 340Checking ........................................ 319Cleaning ......................................... 296Cleaning (warning) ......................... 341Important safety notes .................. 318Interchanging/changing ................ 340Mounting a new wheel ................... 343Mounting a wheel .......................... 341Overview ........................................ 318Removing a wheel .......................... 343Storing ........................................... 341Technical data ............................... 344Tightening torque ........................... 344Wheel size/tire size ....................... 344

Window curtain air bagDisplay message ............................ 230Operation ......................................... 44

Windowssee Side windows

Windows (cleaning instructions) ..... 297Windshield

Defrosting ...................................... 131Windshield heating ........................... 133Windshield washer fluid

see Windshield washer system

Windshield washer systemAdding washer fluid ....................... 292Filling capacity ............................... 356Notes ............................................. 356

Windshield wipersProblem (malfunction) ................... 116Rear window wiper ........................ 115Replacing the wiper blades ............ 115Switching on/off ........................... 114

WinterDriving in winter ............................. 163Winter operation ............................ 320

Winter drivingSnow chains .................................. 321

Winter operationOverview ........................................ 320

Winter tiresM+S tires ....................................... 320

Wiper bladesCleaning ......................................... 297Important safety notes .................. 115Replacing ....................................... 115

Index 19

Protection of the environment

General notes

H Environmental noteDaimler's declared policy is one of integratedenvironmental protection.The objectives are for the natural resourcesthat form the basis of our existence on thisplanet to be used sparingly and in a mannerthat takes the requirements of both natureand humanity into account.You too can help to protect the environmentby operating your vehicle in anenvironmentally responsible manner.Fuel consumption and the rate of engine,transmission, brake and tire wear depend onthe following factors:Roperating conditions of your vehicleRyour personal driving styleYou can influence both factors. You shouldbear the following in mind:Operating conditions:Ravoid short trips as these increase fuel

consumption.Ralways make sure that the tire pressures

are correct.Rdo not carry any unnecessary weight.Rkeep an eye on the vehicle's fuel

consumption.Rremove roof racks once you no longer need

them.Ra regularly serviced vehicle will contribute

to environmental protection. You shouldtherefore adhere to the service intervals.Ralways have service work carried out at a

qualified specialist workshop.Personal driving style:Rdo not depress the accelerator pedal when

starting the engine.Rdo not warm up the engine when the vehicle

is stationary.Rdrive carefully and maintain a safe distance

from the vehicle in front.

Ravoid frequent, sudden acceleration.Rchange gear in good time and use each gear

only up to Ô of its maximum engine speed.Rswitch off the engine in stationary traffic.

Product information

Mercedes-Benz recommends that you usegenuine Mercedes-Benz parts, conversionparts and accessories that have beenapproved for your vehicle.Mercedes-Benz tests genuine parts as well asconversion parts and accessories that havebeen specifically approved for your vehicle fortheir reliability, safety and suitability. Despiteongoing market research, Mercedes-Benz isunable to assess other parts. Therefore,Mercedes-Benz accepts no responsibility forthe use of such parts in Mercedes-Benzvehicles. This is also the case, even if theyhave been independently or officiallyapproved. The use of non-approved partscould affect your vehicle's operating safety.Genuine Mercedes-Benz parts, approvedconversion parts and accessories areavailable from any authorized Mercedes-BenzCenter. Here, you will receive advice aboutpermissible technical modifications, and theparts will be professionally installed.

Operator's Manual

General notesBefore you first drive off, read this Operator'sManual carefully and familiarize yourself withyour vehicle.For your own safety and a longer vehicle life,follow the instructions and warning notices inthis manual. Disregarding them may lead todamage to the vehicle or personal injury.Vehicle damage resulting from the disregardof the instructions is not covered by theMercedes-Benz Limited Warranty.

20 Introduction

Vehicle equipmentThis Operator's Manual describes all modelsand all standard and optional equipment ofyour vehicle available at the time of going toprint. Country-specific differences arepossible. Please note that your vehicle maynot be equipped with all features described.This also applies to safety-related systemsand functions. The equipment in your vehiclemay therefore differ from some of thedescriptions or illustrations.The original purchase agreement lists allsystems installed in your vehicle.Contact an authorized Mercedes-Benz Centerif you have any questions about equipment oroperation.The Operator's Manual and the MaintenanceBooklet are important documents and shouldbe kept in the vehicle.

Service and vehicle operation

Service and literatureYour vehicle is covered under the terms of thewarranties printed in the Service andWarranty Information booklet. Yourauthorized Mercedes-Benz Center willexchange or repair any defective partsoriginally installed in the vehicle inaccordance with the terms of the followingwarranties:RNew Vehicle Limited WarrantyREmission Systems WarrantyREmission Performance WarrantyRCalifornia, Connecticut, Maine,

Massachusetts, New York, Pennsylvania,Rhode Island and Vermont EmissionControl Systems WarrantyRState warranty enforcement laws (lemon

laws)

Information for customers inCalifornia

In California, you have the right to exchangea vehicle or receive a refund of the purchaseor leasing price if Mercedes-Benz USA, LLCand/or an authorized workshop ormaintenance facility cannot, after severalauthorized repairs, rectify considerabledamage to or malfunctions of the vehicle thatare covered by the contractual warranty.During the period of 18 months from originaldelivery of the vehicle or the accumulation of18,000 miles (approximately 29,000 km) onthe odometer of the vehicle, whicheveroccurs first, a reasonable number of repairattempts is presumed for a retail buyer orlessee if one or more of the following occurs:(1) the serious defect or damage can result

in deadly or serious injury to the vehicleoccupants while driving AND this defecthas already been repaired at least twiceAND Mercedes-Benz, LLC has beeninformed in writing of the necessity of arepair.

(2) the defect or damage, though lessserious than (1) above, has already beenrepaired at least four times ANDMercedes-Benz has been informed inwriting of the necessity of a repair.

(3) the vehicle cannot be used for longerthan 30 calendar days because of repairwork resulting from this or other seriousdefects or damage.

Please send your written notice to:Mercedes-Benz USA, LLCCustomer Assistance CenterOne Mercedes DriveMontvale, NJ 07645-0350

MaintenanceThe Service and Warranty Booklet describesall the necessary maintenance work whichshould be done at regular intervals.

Introduction 21

Z

Always have the Service and WarrantyBooklet with you when you bring the vehicleto an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center. Theservice advisor will record every service foryou in the Service and Warranty Booklet.

Roadside AssistanceThe Mercedes-Benz Roadside AssistanceProgram offers technical help in the event ofa breakdown. Calls to the toll-free RoadsideAssistance Hotline are answered by ouragents 24 hours a day, 365 days a year.1-800-FOR-MERCedes(1-800-367-6372) (USA)1-800-387-0100 (Canada)For additional information, refer to theMercedes-Benz Roadside AssistanceProgram brochure (USA) or the "RoadsideAssistance" section in the Service andWarranty booklet (Canada). You will find bothin your vehicle literature portfolio.

Change of address or change ofownership

In the event of a change of address, pleasesend us the "Notification of Address Change"in the Service and Guarantee booklet orsimply call the Mercedes-Benz CustomerAssistance Center (USA) at the hotlinenumber1-800-FOR-MERCedes(1-800-367-6372) orCustomer Service Center (Canada) at1-800-387-0100. This will assist us incontacting you in a timely manner should theneed arise.If you sell your Mercedes, please leave theentire literature in the vehicle so that it isavailable to the next owner.If you have purchased a used car, please sendus the "Notification of Used Car Purchase" inthe Service and Guarantee booklet or simplycall the Mercedes-Benz Customer AssistanceCenter (USA) at the hotline number1-800-FOR-MERCedes(1-800-367-6372) or

Customer Service (Canada) at1-800-387-0100.

Vehicle operation outside the USAand Canada

If you plan to operate your vehicle in foreigncountries, please be aware that:Rservice facilities or replacement parts may

not be readily available.Runleaded fuel for vehicles with a catalytic

converter may not be available. Leaded fuelmay cause damage to the catalyticconverter.Rthe fuel may have a considerably lower

octane rating. Unsuitable fuel can causeengine damage.

Some Mercedes-Benz models are availablefor delivery in Europe through our EuropeanDelivery Program. For details, consult anauthorized Mercedes-Benz Center or write toone of the following addresses.In the USAMercedes-Benz USA, LLCEuropean Delivery DepartmentOne Mercedes DriveMontvale, NJ 07645-0350In CanadaMercedes-Benz Canada, Inc.European Delivery Department98 Vanderhoof AvenueToronto, Ontario M4G 4C9

Sports Utility Vehicle

G WARNINGThis Sport Utility Vehicle is designed for bothon-road and off-road use. It can go places andperform tasks for which conventional 2-wheeldrive passenger cars are not intended. Thisvehicle will handle and maneuver differentlyfrom conventional passenger cars in driving

22 Introduction

conditions which may occur on streets,highways and off-road use.This vehicle has a higher ground clearanceand a higher center of gravity than manypassenger cars. As with other vehicles of thistype, if you make sharp turns at excessivespeeds or abrupt maneuvers, the vehicle mayroll over or may go out of control and crash.Utility vehicles have a significantly higherrollover rate than other types of vehicles.Failure to operate this vehicle safely mayresult in an accident, rollover of the vehicle,and severe or fatal injury.Before you start to drive this vehicle, read theOperator's Manual. Take time to becomefamiliar with the driving characteristics of thisvehicle. Be sure you are familiar with allvehicle controls. Learn how your vehiclehandles on different road surfaces. Do notattempt sharp turns at excessive speeds orabrupt maneuvers or other unsafe drivingactions that can cause loss of vehicle control.When driving off-road or working the vehiclehard, do not overload it. And, always wearyour seat belts at all times. In a rollover crash,an unbelted person is significantly more likelyto die than a person wearing a seat belt.

Operating safety

Declarations of conformity

Vehicle components which receiveand/or transmit radio wavesUSA: "The wireless devices of this vehiclecomply with Part 15 of the FCC Rules.Operation is subject to the following twoconditions: 1) These devices may not causeharmful interference, and 2) These devicesmust accept any interference received,including interference that may causeundesired operation. Changes ormodifications not expressly approved by theparty responsible for compliance could voidthe user’s authority to operate theequipment."

Canada: "The wireless devices of this vehiclecomply with Industry Canada license-exemptRSS standard(s). Operation is subject to thefollowing two conditions: (1) These devicesmay not cause interference, and (2) Thesedevices must accept any interference,including interference that may causeundesired operation of the device."

Qualified specialist workshopAn authorized Mercedes-Benz Center is aqualified specialist workshop. It has thenecessary specialist knowledge, tools andqualifications to correctly carry out the workrequired on your vehicle. This is especially thecase for work relevant to safety.Observe the notes in the MaintenanceBooklet.Always have the following work carried out atan authorized Mercedes-Benz Center:Rwork relevant to safetyRservice and maintenance workRrepair workRalterations, installation work and

modificationsRwork on electronic components

Correct use

G WARNINGThere are various warning stickers affixed toyour vehicle. Their purpose is to alert you andothers to various dangers. Therefore, do notremove any warning stickers unless thesticker clearly states that you may do so.If you remove any warning stickers, you orothers could fail to recognize certain dangersand be injured.

When driving your vehicle observe thefollowing information:Rthe safety notes in this manualRthe Technical Data section in this manual

Introduction 23

Z

Rtraffic rules and regulationsRlaws and safety standards pertaining to

motor vehicles

Problems with your vehicleIf you should experience a problem with yourvehicle, particularly one that you believe mayaffect its safe operation, we urge you tocontact an authorized Mercedes-Benz Centerimmediately to have the problem diagnosedand rectified. If the problem is not resolved toyour satisfaction, please discuss the problemagain with a Mercedes-Benz Center orcontact us at one of the following addresses.In the USACustomer Assistance CenterMercedes-Benz USA, LLCOne Mercedes DriveMontvale, NJ 07645-0350In CanadaCustomer Relations DepartmentMercedes-Benz Canada, Inc.98 Vanderhoof AvenueToronto, Ontario M4G 4C9

Reporting safety defectsUSA only:The following text is reproduced as requiredof all manufacturers according to Title 49,Code of U.S. Federal Regulations, Part 575pursuant to the National Traffic and MotorVehicle Safety Act of 1966.If you believe that your vehicle has a defectwhich could cause a crash or could causeinjury or death, you should immediatelyinform the National Highway Traffic SafetyAdministration (NHTSA) in addition tonotifying Mercedes-Benz USA, LLC.If NHTSA receives similar complaints, it mayopen an investigation, and if it finds that asafety defect exists in a group of vehicles, itmay order a recall and remedy campaign.

However, NHTSA cannot become involved inindividual problems between you, yourdealer, or Mercedes-Benz USA, LLC.To contact NHTSA, you may call the VehicleSafety Hotline toll-free at1-888-327-4236(TTY: 1-800-424-9153); goto http://www.safercar.gov; or write to:Administrator, NHTSA Headquarters,1200 New Jersey Avenue, SE, West Building,Washington, DC 20590.You can obtain additional information aboutvehicle safety from:http://www.safercar.gov

Limited Warranty! Follow the instructions in this manual

about the proper operation of your vehicleas well as about possible vehicle damage.Damage to your vehicle that arises fromculpable contraventions against theseinstructions is not covered either by theMercedes-Benz Limited Warranty or by theNew or Used-Vehicle Warranty.

Data stored in the vehicle

Information about electronic dataacquisition in the vehicle

(Including notice pursuant to California Code§ 9951)Your vehicle records electronic data. If yourvehicle is equipped with mbrace (Canada:TELE AID), data is transmitted in the event ofan accident.This information helps, for example, to testvehicle systems after an accident and tocontinually improve vehicle safety.Daimler AG can access this data and submitit:Rfor safety research or vehicle diagnosis

purposesRwith the consent of the vehicle owner

24 Introduction

Ron the instruction of prosecutingauthoritiesRfor use in arbitration of disputes that

involve Daimler AG, its affiliates or its salesand service organizationsRas otherwise required or permitted by law.Please check your mbrace (Canada: TELEAID) purchase agreement to find out moreabout data that can be recorded andtransmitted by this system.

Information on copyright

Registered trademarksRegistered trademarks:RBluetooth® is a registered trademark of

Bluetooth SIG Inc.RDTS is a registered trademark of DTS, Inc.RDolby and MLP are registered trademarks

of DOLBY Laboratories.RBabySmart™, ESP® and PRE-SAFE® are

registered trademarks of Daimler AG.RHomeLink® is a registered trademark of

Prince.RiPod® and iTunes® are registered

trademarks of Apple Inc.RLogic7® is a registered trademark of

Harman International Industries.RMicrosoft® and Windows media® are

registered trademarks of MicrosoftCorporation.RSIRIUS is a registered trademark of Sirius

XM radio Inc.RHD Radio is a registered trademark of

iBiquity Digital Corporation.RGracenote® is a registered trademark of

Gracenote, Inc.RZAGATSurvey® and related brands are

registered trademarks of ZagatSurvey,LLC.

FreeTypePortions of this software are copyright © 2005The FreeType Project (www.freetype.org). Allrights reserved. © 1996-2000 by DavidTurner, Robert Wilhelm, and Werner Lemberg.

Gnu compilerCopyright © 1982, 1986 Regents of theUniversity of California. All rights reserved.The Berkeley software License Agreementspecifies the terms and conditions forredistribution. Redistributions and use insource and binary forms, with or withoutmodification, are permitted provided that thefollowing conditions are met:1. Redistribution of source code must retain

the above copyright notice, this list ofconditions and the following disclaimer.

2. Redistribution in binary form mustreproduce the above copyright notice,this list of conditions and the followingdisclaimer in the documentation and/orother materials provided with thedistribution.

3. All advertising materials mentioningfeatures or use of this software mustdisplay the following acknowledgment:This product includes software developedby the University of California, Berkeleyand its contributors.

4. Neither the name of the University nor thenames of its contributors may be used toendorse or promote products derivedfrom this software without specific priorwritten permission.

THIS SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED BY THEREGENTS AND CONTRIBUTORS "AS IS" ANDANY EXPRESS OR IMPLIED WARRANTIES,INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, THEIMPLIED WARRANTIES OFMERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR APARTICULAR PURPOSE ARE DISCLAIMED. INNO EVENT SHALL THE REGENTS ORCONTRIBUTORS BE LIABLE FOR ANY DIRECT,

Introduction 25

Z

INDIRECT, INCIDENTAL, SPECIAL,EXEMPLARY, OR CONSEQUENTIALDAMAGES (INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITEDTO, PROCUREMENT OF SUBSTITUTE GOODSOR SERVICES; LOSS OF USE, DATA, ORPROFITS; OR BUSINESS INTERRUPTION)HOWEVER CAUSED AND ON ANY THEORY OFLIABILITY, WHETHER IN CONTRACT, STRICTLIABILITY, OR TORT (INCLUDINGNEGLIGENCE OR OTHERWISE) ARISING INANY WAY OUT OF THE USE OF THISSOFTWARE, EVEN IF ADVISED OF THEPOSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGE.

26 Introduction

Cockpit ................................................. 28Instrument cluster .............................. 29Multifunction steering wheel ............. 31Center console .................................... 32Overhead control panel ...................... 34Door control panel .............................. 35

27

At a

gla

nce

Cockpit

Function Page: Combination switch 103

; Steering wheel paddle shifters

= Instrument cluster 209

? Horn

A Overhead control panel 34

B PARKTRONIC warning display 194

C Climate control systems 118

D Ignition lock 139

E Adjusts the steering wheel 90

F Cruise control lever 170

G Light switch 98

H Opens the hood 289

28 CockpitAt

a g

lanc

e

Instrument cluster

Displays and controls

Function Page: Speedometer with segments 210

; Multifunction display 212

= Tachometer 210

? Coolant temperature display 209

A Fuel gauge

B Instrument cluster lighting control 209

Instrument cluster 29

At a

gla

nce

Warning and indicator lamps

Function Page: L Low-beam

headlamps 99

; ÷ ESP® 252

= K High-beamheadlamps 103

? J Brakes (yellow) 249

A · Distance warning 258

B #! Turn signals 103

C h Tire pressure monitor 259

D 6 SRS 255

E ü Seat belt 248

Function PageF ? Coolant 256

G R Rear fog lamp 101

H O Front fog lamps 101

I ; Check Engine 256

J 8 Reserve fuel 256

K å ESP® OFF 252

L ! ABS 250

M Brakes (red)$ (USA only)J (Canada only) 249

30 Instrument clusterAt

a g

lanc

e

Multifunction steering wheel

Function Page: Multifunction display ~

; COMAND display ~

= ?

Switches on the VoiceControl System; see theseparate operatinginstructions

? ~ ~

Rejects or ends a callExits phone book/redialmemory6

Makes or accepts a callSwitches to the redialmemoryWX

Adjusts the volume8

Mute

Function PageA =; ~

Selects a menu9:

Selects a submenu orscrolls through listsa

Confirms selections andhides messages

B %

BackSwitches off the VoiceControl System; see theseparate operatinginstructions

Multifunction steering wheel 31

At a

gla

nce

Center console

Center console, upper section

Function Page: Audio system; see the

separate operatinginstructionsCOMAND ~

; Seat heating 89

= s Seat ventilation 90

? c PARKTRONIC 194

Function PageA ¤ ECO start/stop

function 141

B £ Hazard warninglamps 104

C 45 Indicator lamp

D å ESP® 62

32 Center consoleAt

a g

lanc

e

Center console, lower section

Function PageF Stowage compartment/

ashtray 269

G Automatic transmissionselector lever 145

H Selects park position 146

I + Selects/deselectsLOW RANGE off-road gear 199

J Stowage compartment ~

K Opens/closes the stowagecompartment 263

Function PageL Cigarette lighter 270

M Audio controller, see theseparate operatinginstructionsCOMAND controller ~

N Switches the windshieldheating on/off 133

O Ú Selects the driveprogram 149

P Parking brake 157

Center console 33

At a

gla

nce

Overhead control panel

Function Page: p Switches the left-

hand reading lamp on/off 105

; c Switches the frontinterior lighting on 106

= u Switches the rearinterior lighting on/off 106

? | Switches the frontinterior lighting/automaticinterior lighting control off 106

A p Switches the right-hand reading lamp on/off 105

B ¡ Opens/closes thesliding sunroof 80

C F Roadside Assistancecall button (mbracesystem) 275

Function PageD G SOS button (mbrace

system) 274

E ï MB Info call button(mbrace system) 276

F Rear-view mirror 93

G Buttons for the garage dooropener 284

H Microphone for mbrace(emergency call system),telephone and the VoiceControl System

34 Overhead control panelAt

a g

lanc

e

Door control panel

Function Page: n Activates/

deactivates the overridefeature for the sidewindows in the rearcompartment 59

; W Opens/closes theside windows 78

= 7Zö\Adjusts and folds theexterior mirrors in/outelectrically 93

Function Page? r45=

Stores settings for the seat,exterior mirrors andsteering wheel (memoryfunction) 95

A Adjusts the seats 86

B %& Unlocks/locksthe vehicle 74

C Opens the door 74

Door control panel 35

At a

gla

nce

36

Useful information .............................. 38Panic alarm .......................................... 38Occupant safety .................................. 38Children in the vehicle ........................ 54Driving safety systems ....................... 60Theft deterrent locking system ......... 64

37

Safe

ty

Useful information

i This Operator's Manual describes allmodels and all standard and optionalequipment of your vehicle available at thetime of publication of the Operator'sManual. Country-specific differences arepossible. Please note that your vehicle maynot be equipped with all featuresdescribed. This also applies to safety-related systems and functions.

i Read the information on qualifiedspecialist workshops: (Y page 23).

Panic alarm

X To activate: press ! button : for atleast one second.An alarm sounds and the indicator lampflashes.

X To deactivate: press ! button :again.

orX Insert the SmartKey into the ignition lock.

i USA only:This device complies with part 15 of theFCC Rules. Operation is subject to thefollowing two conditions:1. This device may not cause interference,and2. this device must accept any interferencereceived, including interference that maycause undesired operation of the device.

Any unauthorized modification to thisdevice could void the user's authority tooperate the equipment.The Product label with FCC ID and ICcertification number can be found in thebattery case of the SmartKey.

i Canada only:This device complies with the RSS-210Rules of Industry Canada. Operation issubject to the following two conditions:1. This device may not cause interference,and2. this device must accept any interferencereceived, including interference that maycause undesired operation.Any unauthorized modification to thisdevice could void the user's authority tooperate the equipment.The Product label with FCC ID and ICcertification number can be found in thebattery case of the SmartKey.

Occupant safety

Important safety notes

G WARNINGModifications to or work improperlyconducted on restraint system componentsor their wiring, as well as tampering withinterconnected electronic systems, can leadto the restraint systems no longer functioningas intended.Air bags or Emergency Tensioning Devices(ETDs), for example, could deployinadvertently or fail to deploy in accidentsalthough the deceleration threshold for airbag deployment is exceeded. Therefore,never modify the restraint systems. Do nottamper with electronic components or theirsoftware.

In this section, you will learn the mostimportant facts about the restraint systemcomponents of the vehicle.

38 Occupant safetySa

fety

The restraint system consists of:Rseat beltsRchild restraint systemsRLATCH-type (ISOFIX) child seat anchorsAdditional protection is provided by:RSRS (Supplemental Restraint System)RNECK-PRO head restraintsRAir bag system components with:

- The 45 indicator lamp- Front-passenger seat with BabySmart™

air bag deactivation systemThe different air bag systems workindependently of each other. The protectivefunctions of the system work in conjunctionwith each other. Not all air bags are alwaysdeployed in an accident.

i Observe the additional information oninfants and children traveling with you inthe vehicle and restraint systems forinfants and children (Y page 54).

SRS (Supplemental Restraint System)

IntroductionSRS reduces the risk of occupants cominginto contact with the vehicle's interior in theevent of an accident. It can also reduce theeffect of the forces to which occupants aresubjected during an accident.SRS consists of:RThe 6 SRS warning lampRAir bagsRAir bag control unit (with crash sensors)REmergency Tensioning Device (ETD) for

seat beltsRSeat belt force limiter

SRS warning lamp

G WARNINGThe SRS self-check has detected amalfunction if the 6 SRS indicator lamp:Rdoes not light up at allRdoes not go out after approximately four

seconds after the engine is startedRlights up after the engine is started or while

the vehicle is in motionFor your safety, Mercedes-Benz stronglyrecommends that you have the systemchecked as soon as possible at a qualifiedspecialist workshop. SRS may otherwise failto activate when it is needed in the event ofan accident, which could lead to serious orfatal injuries. SRS might also be activatedunexpectedly and unnecessarily, which couldalso result in injury.In addition, work carried out improperly onSRS may render SRS inoperative or causeunintended air bag deployment. Work on theSRS system should only be carried out byqualified specialist personnel. Consult aqualified specialist workshop.If it is necessary to modify an air bag systemto accommodate a person with disabilities,contact an authorized Mercedes-Benz Centerfor details. USA only: for further information,contact our Customer Assistance Center at1-800-FOR-MERCedes (1-800-367-6372).

SRS functions are checked regularly whenyou switch on the ignition and when theengine is running. Therefore, malfunctionscan be detected in good time.The 6 SRS warning lamp in the instrumentcluster lights up when the ignition is switchedon. It goes out no later than a few secondsafter the engine is started.The SRS components are in operationalreadiness when the SRS 6 indicator lampgoes out while the engine is running.

Occupant safety 39

Safe

ty

Z

Safety guidelines for seat belts,Emergency Tensioning Devices (ETDs)and air bags

G WARNINGRDamaged seat belts or seat belts that have

been subjected to stress in an accidentmust be replaced. Their anchoring pointsmust also be checked. Only use seat beltsinstalled or supplied by an authorizedMercedes-Benz Center.RAir bags and pyrotechnic Emergency

Tensioning Devices (ETDs) containperchlorate material, which may requirespecial handling and regard for theenvironment. Check your national disposalguidelines. California residents, seewww.dtsc.ca.gov/HazardousWaste/Perchlorate/index.cfm.RAir bags and ETDs are designed to function

on a one-time-only basis. An air bag or ETDthat has deployed must be replaced.RDo not pass seat belts over sharp edges.

They could tear.RDo not make any modification that could

change the effectiveness of the seat belts.RDo not bleach or dye seat belts as this may

severely weaken them. In a crash they maynot be able to provide adequate protection.RNo modifications of any kind may be made

to any components or wiring of the SRS.RDo not change or remove any component

or part of the SRS.RDo not install additional trim material, seat

covers, badges, etc. over the steeringwheel hub, front-passenger front air bagcover, outer sides of the seat backrests,door trim panels, or door frame trims.RDo not install additional electrical/

electronic equipment on or near SRScomponents and wiring.RKeep area between air bags and occupants

free of objects (e.g. packages, purses,umbrellas, etc.).

RDo not hang items such as coat hangersfrom the coat hooks or handles over thedoor. These items may be thrown around inthe vehicle and cause head and otherinjuries when the window curtain air bag isdeployed.RAir bag system components will be hot after

an air bag has inflated. Do not touch them.RNever place your feet on the instrument

panel, dashboard, or on the seat. Alwayskeep both feet on the floor in front of theseat.RImproper repair work on the SRS creates a

risk of rendering the SRS inoperative orcausing unintended air bag deployment.Work on the SRS must therefore only beperformed by qualified technicians.Contact an authorized Mercedes-BenzCenter.RFor your protection and the protection of

others, when scrapping the air bag unit orETD, our safety instructions must befollowed. These instructions are availablefrom any authorized Mercedes-BenzCenter.RGiven the considerable deployment speed,

required inflation volume, and the materialof the air bags, there is the possibility ofabrasions or other, potentially more seriousinjuries resulting from air bag deployment.

If you sell your vehicle, Mercedes-Benzstrongly recommends that you inform thesubsequent owner that the vehicle isequipped with SRS. Also, refer them to theapplicable section in the Operator's Manual.

40 Occupant safetySa

fety

Air bags

Important safety notes

G WARNINGAir bags are designed to reduce the potentialof injury and fatality in certainRfrontal impacts (front air bags)Rside impacts (window curtain air bags)However, no system available today cancompletely eliminate injuries and fatalities.Deployment of the air bags temporarilyreleases a small amount of dust from the airbags. This dust, however, is neither harmfulto your health, nor does it indicate a fire in thevehicle. The dust might cause sometemporary breathing difficulty for people withasthma or other breathing trouble. To avoidthis, you may wish to get out of the vehicle assoon as it is safe to do so. If you have anybreathing difficulty but cannot get out of thevehicle after the air bag inflates, then get freshair by opening a window or door.

G WARNINGTo reduce the risk of injury when the front airbags inflate, it is very important for the driverand front passenger to always be in a properlyseated position and to wear their respectiveseat belt.For maximum protection in the event of acollision always be in normal seated positionwith your back against the seat backrest.Fasten your seat belt and make sure it isproperly positioned on your body.

Since the air bag inflates with considerablespeed and force, a proper seating positionand correct positioning of the hands on thesteering wheel will help to keep you at a safedistance from the air bag. Occupants who arenot wearing their seat belt, are not seatedproperly or are too close to the air bag can beseriously injured or killed by an air bag as itinflates with great force instantaneously:RSit with the seat belt properly fastened in a

position that is as upright as possible withyour back against the seat backrest.RMove the driver's seat as far back as

possible, still permitting proper operationof vehicle controls. The distance from thecenter of the driver's chest to the center ofthe air bag cover on the steering wheelmust be at least 10 inches (25 cm) or more.You should be able to accomplish this byadjusting the seat and steering wheel. Ifyou have any difficulties, please contact anauthorized Mercedes-Benz Center.RDo not lean your head or chest close to the

steering wheel or dashboard.RKeep hands on the outside of the steering

wheel rim. Placing hands and arms insidethe rim can increase the risk and potentialseverity of hand/arm injury when the driverfront air bag inflates.RAdjust the front passenger seat as far as

possible rearward from the dashboardwhen the seat is occupied.ROccupants, especially children, should

never place their bodies or lean their headsin the area of the door where the windowcurtain air bag inflates. This could result inserious injuries or death should the windowcurtain air bag be deployed. Always sit asupright as possible, wear the seat beltproperly and use an appropriately sizedinfant restraint, toddler restraint, orbooster seat recommended for the size andweight of the child.RChildren 12 years old and under must never

ride in the front seat, except in a Mercedes-Benz authorized BabySmart™ compatible

Occupant safety 41

Safe

ty

Z

child seat, which operates with theBabySmart™ air bag deactivation systeminstalled in the vehicle to deactivate thefront passenger front air bag when it isinstalled properly. Otherwise they will bestruck by the air bag when it inflates in acrash. If this happens, serious or fatal injurywill result.

Failure to follow these instructions can resultin severe injuries to you or other occupants.If you sell your vehicle, it is important that youmake the buyer aware of this safetyinformation. Be sure to give the buyer thisOperator's Manual.

G WARNINGAccident research shows that the safest placefor children in an automobile is in a rear seat.Should you choose to place a child 12 yearsold or under in the front passenger seat ofyour vehicle, you must properly use aBabySmartTM child restraint which will turn offthe front passenger front air bag.To help avoid the possibility of injury, pleasefollow these guidelines:

(1) Always sit as upright as possible,wear the seat belt properly, and forchildren 12 years old and under,use an appropriately sized infantrestraint, toddler restraint, orbooster seat recommended for thesize and weight of the child.

(2) Always wear seat belts properly.

If the air bags are deployed, you will hear abang, and a small amount of powder may alsobe released. Only in rare cases will the bangaffect your hearing. The powder that isreleased generally does not constitute ahealth hazard. The 6 SRS warning lamplights up.The air bags are deployed if the air bag controlunit detects the need for deployment. Only inthe event of such a situation will the air bagsprovide their supplemental protection.

If the driver and front passenger do not weartheir seat belts, it is not possible for the airbags to provide their supplementalprotection.In the event of other types of impacts andimpacts below air bag deploymentthresholds, the air bags will not deploy. Thedriver and passengers will then be protectedto the extent possible by a properly fastenedseat belt. A properly fastened seat belt is alsoneeded to provide the best possibleprotection if the vehicle rolls over.Air bags provide additional protection; theyare not, however, a substitute for seat belts.All vehicle occupants must fasten their seatbelts regardless of whether your vehicle isequipped with air bags or not.It is important for your safety and that of yourpassengers to have deployed air bagsreplaced and to have any malfunctioning airbags repaired. This will help to make sure theair bags continue to perform their protectivefunction for the vehicle occupants in theevent of an accident.

Front air bags

G WARNINGObserve "Important safety notes"(Y page 41).

G WARNINGYour vehicle is equipped with air bagtechnology which disables the front-passenger air bag if the system recognizesthat the front-passenger seat is empty .If the front-passenger seat is occupied by anadult or young person and the 4/indicator lamp is lit up, the front-passenger airbag is disabled. If the front-passenger seat isrecognized as empty, the air bag control unitwill not deploy the front-passenger air bag inthe event of a collision.Ask your passenger to sit correctly on thefront-passenger seat in an upright positionuntil the 4/ indicator lamp goes out.

42 Occupant safetySa

fety

If the 4/ indicator lamp does not goout, please consult an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center.

Driver's air bag : deploys in front of thesteering wheel; front-passenger front airbag ; deploys in front of and above the glovebox.The front air bags increase protection for thedriver's and front-passenger's head, neck andchest.They are deployed:Rin the event of certain frontal impactsRif the system determines that air bag

deployment can offer additional protectionto that provided by the seat beltRindependently of other air bags in the

vehicleRdepending on whether the seat belt is being

usedIf the vehicle rolls over, the front air bags aregenerally not deployed. If the system detectshigh vehicle deceleration in a longitudinaldirection, the front air bags are deployed.Your vehicle is equipped with a dual-stagedriver's air bag and a single-stage front-passenger front air bag. In the event of acollision, the air bag control unit evaluates thevehicle deceleration. In the first deploymentstage, the driver's air bag is filled with enoughpropellant gas to reduce the risk of injuries.The front-passenger front air bag, however, isimmediately filled with the maximum amountof propellant gas. The driver's air bag is fully

deployed if a second deployment threshold isexceeded within a few milliseconds.The lighter the front passenger, the higher thevehicle deceleration rate required (predictedat the start of the impact) for triggering thefront-passenger front air bag.The front air bags will not deploy in impactswith vehicle deceleration or accelerationrates which do not exceed the system’spreset deployment thresholds for vehicledeceleration or acceleration. You will then beprotected by the fastened seat belt.Front-passenger front air bag ; will onlydeploy if:Rthe front-passenger seat is occupied.Rthe 45 indicator lamp on the center

console is not lit (Y page 44)Rthe impact exceeds a preset deployment

thresholdThe front-passenger air bag is automaticallyactivated and deactivated. Both driver andpassenger should always check whether thefront-passenger air bag is activated ordeactivated.The deployment of the driver's air bag doesnot mean that the front-passenger air bag willalso deploy. If the system recognizes that thefront-passenger seat is empty, the front-passenger air bag does not deploy even if theimpact fulfills the criteria and the driver's airbag has deployed.If the system detects that the front-passengerseat is occupied, the 45 indicatorlamp lights up for approximately six secondsif:Ryou turn the SmartKey to position 1 or 2 in

the ignition lock.Rthe engine is running and then you switch

it off.This indicates the operational readiness ofthe front-passenger air bag.Note that objects placed on the front-passenger seat may cause the system torecognize the seat as occupied. This canresult in the deployment of the front-

Occupant safety 43

Safe

ty

Z

passenger air bag if the impact fulfills thespecified criteria. If the 45 indicatorlamp lights up, the front-passenger front airbag is disabled and will not be deployed incertain situations. If the 45 indicatorlamp does not light up, the front-passengerfront air bag is enabled and can be deployed.

Window curtain air bags

G WARNINGObserve "Important safety notes"(Y page 41).

Window curtain air bags : enhance the levelof protection for the head, but not chest orarms, of the vehicle occupants on the side ofthe vehicle on which the impact occurs.Window curtain air bags : are integratedinto the side of the roof frame and deploy inthe area extending from the front door (A-pillar) to the rear door (C-pillar).Window curtain air bags : are deployed:Ron the side on which an impact occursRat the start of an accident with a high rate

of lateral vehicle deceleration oracceleration, e.g. in a side impactRregardless of whether the front-passenger

seat is occupiedRindependently of seat belt useRif the vehicle rolls over and the system

determines that window curtain air bagdeployment can offer additional protectionto that provided by the seat beltRindependently of the front air bags

Window curtain air bags will not deploy inimpacts which do not exceed the system'spreset deployment thresholds for lateralacceleration/deceleration. You will then beprotected by the fastened seat belt.

BabySmart™ air bag deactivationsystem

How the air bag deactivation systemworks

G WARNINGAccording to accident statistics, children aresafer when properly restrained in the rearseating positions than in the front seatingposition. Thus, we strongly recommend thatchildren be placed in the rear seats wheneverpossible. Regardless of seating position,children 12 years old and under must beseated and properly secured in an appropriateinfant restraint, toddler restraint, or boosterseat recommended for the size and weight ofthe child.The infant or child restraint must be properlysecured with the vehicle's seat belt, the seatbelt and top tether strap, or lower anchors andtop tether strap, fully in accordance with thechild seat manufacturer's instructions.Occupants, especially children, should alwayssit as upright as possible, wear the seat beltproperly and use an appropriately sized infantrestraint, toddler restraint, or booster seatrecommended for the size and weight of thechild.Children can be killed or seriously injured byan inflating air bag. Note the followingimportant information when circumstancesrequire you to place a child in the frontpassenger seat:RChildren 12 years old and under must never

ride in the front seat, except in a Mercedes-Benz authorized BabySmart™ compatiblechild seat, which operates with theBabySmart™ system installed in the vehicleto deactivate the front passenger front air

44 Occupant safetySa

fety

bag when it is installed properly. Otherwisethey will be struck by the air bag when itinflates in a crash. If this happens, seriousor fatal injury will result.RA child in a rear-facing child restraint on the

front passenger seat will be seriouslyinjured or even killed if the front passengerfront air bag inflates in a collision whichcould occur under some circumstances,even with the air bag technology installedin your vehicle. The only means tocompletely eliminate this risk is to neverplace a child in a rear-facing child restraintin the front seat. We therefore stronglyrecommend that you always place a childin a rear-facing child restraint in a backseat.RIf you must install a BabySmart™

compatible rear-facing child restraint onthe front passenger seat becausecircumstances require you to do so, makesure the 4 / indicator lamp isilluminated, indicating that the frontpassenger front air bag is deactivated.Should the 4 / indicator lamp notilluminate or go out while the restraint isinstalled, please check installation.Periodically check the 4 / indicatorlamp while driving to make sure the4 / indicator lamp is illuminated. Ifthe 4 / indicator lamp goes out orremains out, do not transport a child on thefront passenger seat until the system hasbeen repaired.A child in a rear-facing child restraint on thefront passenger seat will be seriouslyinjured or even killed if the front passengerfront air bag inflates.RIf you have to place a child in a forward-

facing child restraint on the front passengerseat, move the seat as far back as possible,use the proper child restraintrecommended for the age, size and weightof the child, and secure child restraint withthe vehicle's seat belt according to thechild seat manufacturer's instructions.

G WARNINGWhen using a BabySmart™ compatible childseat on the front passenger seat, the frontpassenger front air bag will not deploy only ifthe 4 / indicator lamp remainsilluminated.Please be sure to check the 4 /indicator lamp every time you use aBabySmart™ compatible child seat on thefront passenger seat. Should the 4 /indicator lamp go out while the restraint isinstalled, please check installation. If the4 / indicator lamp remains out, do notuse the BabySmart™ restraint to transport achild on the front passenger seat until thesystem has been repaired.

G WARNINGThe BabySmart™ air bag disabling systemONLY works with specially adapted childrestraint systems. It does not work with childrestraint systems that are not compatible withBabySmart™.Never place anything between the seatcushion and the child restraint system (e.g. acushion), as this reduces the effectiveness ofthe BabySmart™ air bag deactivation system.The underside of the child restraint systemmust lie against the seat cushion of the front-passenger seat. In the event of an accident,an incorrectly installed child restraint systemcould injure the child instead of offeringprotection.Observe the manufacturer's instructionswhen installing special child restraintsystems.

Occupant safety 45

Safe

ty

Z

Your vehicle is equipped with a BabySmart™system.Special child restraint systems which arecompatible with BabySmart™ are necessaryfor deactivating the front-passenger air bag.When the special BabySmart™-compatiblechild restraint system is installed correctlyand is recognized by the sensor system in thefront-passenger seat, the front-passenger airbag is deactivated. In this case, 45indicator lamp : lights up. If you have anyquestions regarding the special BabySmart™-compatible child restraint systems, consultan authorized Mercedes-Benz Center.If the SmartKey has been removed from theignition lock or is in position 0, 45indicator lamp : does not light up.The system does not disable:Rthe window curtain air bagRthe Emergency Tensioning Device

System self-test

G WARNINGDo not leave any switched on notebooks,mobile phones, electronic tags (e.g. a skipass) or similar electronic devices on thefront-passenger seat. Signals emitted fromsuch devices can interfere with theBabySmart™ air bag deactivation system.Such interference can lead to the 45indicator lamp not lighting up during the self-test.If the + SRS warning lamp and the4/ indicator lamp light up

simultaneously in the instrument cluster, thesystem is malfunctioning. The front-passenger air bag could deploy without cause,or may fail to deploy in the event of anaccident.Have the system checked as soon as possibleat an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center.

The 45 indicator lamp lights up whenthe SmartKey is turned to position 1 or 2 inthe ignition lock.The 45 indicator lamp goes out afterapproximately six seconds.If the 45 indicator lamp does not lightup or is always lit, then the system ismalfunctioning. Have the BabySmart™system checked at an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center before transporting a child onthe front-passenger seat.For further information, see "Problems withair bag deactivation system" (Y page 47).

46 Occupant safetySa

fety

Problems with the air bag deactivation system

G WARNINGIf the 45 indicator lamp illuminates and remains illuminated when the weight of a typicaladult or someone larger than a small individual has been detected on the passenger seat, do notallow any occupant to use the passenger seat until the system has been repaired.

Problem Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions

The 45indicator lamp iscontinuously lit.

A special BabySmart™-compatible child restraint system ismounted on the front-passenger seat.The front-passenger air bag is therefore disabled.

There is no BabySmart™-compatible child restraint systemmounted on the front-passenger seat. The BabySmart™ system ismalfunctioning.X Have the BabySmart™ system checked as soon as possible at

an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center.

The 45indicator lamp does notlight up and/or remainlit when a BabySmart™-compatible childrestraint system isinstalled on the front-passenger seat.

The BabySmart™ system is malfunctioning.X Make sure there is nothing between the seat cushion and the

child restraint system.X Check that the child restraint system is installed correctly.X If the 45 indicator lamp does not light up, have the

BabySmart™ system checked as soon as possible at anauthorized Mercedes-Benz Center.Do not transport a child on the front-passenger seat until theair bag deactivation system has been repaired.

NECK-PRO head restraints

Important safety notes

G WARNINGDo not secure any objects (e.g. coat hangers)on the NECK-PRO head restraints. Otherwise,the NECK-PRO head restraints may notfunction properly, or in the event of a rear-endcollision may not be able offer the level ofprotection they are designed to provide.

G WARNINGHead restraint covers prevent the NECK-PROhead restraints from triggering correctly.Consequently, the NECK-PRO head restraints

cannot provide the intended level ofprotection. Do not use head restraint covers.

G WARNINGFor your protection, drive only with properlypositioned head restraints.Adjust the head restraint so that it is as closeto the head as possible and the center of thehead restraint supports the back of the headat eye level. This will reduce the potential forinjury to the head and neck in the event of anaccident or similar situation.

The NECK-PRO head restraints increaseprotection to the driver's and the frontpassenger's head and neck. The NECK-PROhead restraints on the driver's and front-

Occupant safety 47

Safe

ty

Z

passenger seats are moved forwards andupwards in the event of a rear-end collision ofa certain severity. This provides better headsupport.If the NECK-PRO head restraints have beentriggered in an accident, reset the NECK-PROhead restraints on the driver’s and front-passenger seat (Y page 48). Otherwise, theadditional protection will not be available inthe event of another rear-end collision. Youcan recognize if NECK-PRO head restraintshave been triggered by the fact that they havemoved forwards and can no longer beadjusted.

Resetting triggered NECK-PRO headrestraints

G WARNINGFor safety reasons, have the NECK-PRO headrestraints checked at a qualified specialistworkshop after a rear-end collision.

G WARNINGWhen pushing back the NECK-PRO headrestraint cushion, make sure your fingers donot become caught between the headrestraint cushion and the cover. Failure toobserve this could result in injuries.

X Tilt the top of the NECK-PRO head restraintcushion forwards in the direction ofarrow :.

X Push the NECK-PRO head restraint cushiondown in the direction of arrow ; as far asit will go.

X Firmly push the NECK-PRO head restraintcushion back in the direction of arrow =until the cushion engages.

X Repeat this procedure for the secondNECK-PRO head restraint.

i Resetting the NECK-PRO head restraintsrequires a lot of strength. If you havedifficulty resetting the NECK-PRO headrestraints, have this work carried out at aqualified specialist workshop.

Seat belts

Important safety notes

G WARNINGAlways fasten your seat belt before driving off.Always make sure all of your passengers areproperly restrained. You and your passengersshould always wear seat belts.Failure to wear and properly fasten andposition your seat belt greatly increases yourrisk of injuries and their likely severity in anaccident.If you are ever in an accident, your injuries canbe considerably more severe without yourseat belt properly buckled. Without your seatbelt buckled, you are much more likely to hitthe interior of the vehicle or be ejected fromit. You can be seriously injured or killed.In the same crash, the possibility of injury ordeath is lessened if you are properly wearingyour seat belt. The air bags can only protectas intended if the occupants are properlywearing their seat belts.

G WARNINGNever ride in a moving vehicle with the seatbackrest in an excessively reclined position asthis can be dangerous. You could slide underthe seat belt in a collision. If you slide underit, the seat belt would apply force at theabdomen or neck. That could cause seriousor even fatal injuries. The seat backrest andseat belt provide the best restraint when the

48 Occupant safetySa

fety

wearer is in a position that is as upright aspossible and the seat belt is properlypositioned on the body.

G WARNINGNever let more people ride in the vehicle thanthere are seat belts available. Make sureeveryone riding in the vehicle is correctlyrestrained with a separate seat belt. Neveruse a seat belt for more than one person at atime.

G WARNINGAlways have damaged seat belts or seat beltsthat have been subjected to a load in anaccident replaced and the anchorageschecked.Only use seat belts that have been approvedby Mercedes-Benz.Never tamper with seat belts. This can resultin the unintended deployment of theEmergency Tensioning Devices or the failureto deploy when necessary.Do not bleach or dye seat belts, as this mayseverely weaken them. In the event of acollision, they may be unable to provideadequate protection.Have all work carried out only by qualifiedtechnicians. Consult a qualified specialistworkshop.

The use of infant or child restraints is requiredby law in all 50 states, the District ofColumbia, all U.S. territories and all Canadianprovinces.Even where this is not the case, all vehicleoccupants should have their seat beltsfastened when the vehicle is in motion.

i See "Children in the vehicle"(Y page 54) for further information oninfants and children traveling in the vehicle,as well as on child restraint systems.

Correct use of the seat belts

G WARNINGCORRECT USE OF SEAT BELTSRSeat belts only work properly if they are

fastened correctly. Never wear seat belts inany other way than as described in thissection, as that could result in seriousinjuries in the event of an accident.RAll occupants should wear their seat belt at

all times, because seat belts help reducethe likelihood of and potential severity ofinjuries in accidents, even if the vehicleoverturns. The restraint system installed isequipped with SRS (driver's air bag, front-passenger air bag, window curtain airbags), belt tensioners and belt forcelimiters.The system is designed to enhance theprotection offered to occupants who arewearing their seat belts correctly, in certainfrontal impacts (front air bags and belttensioners) and side impacts (windowcurtain air bags and belt tensioners) whichexceed preset deployment thresholds.RNever route the shoulder section of the

seat belt under your arm, across your neckor anywhere other than across yourshoulder. In the event of a frontal impact,your body would be moved too far forward.This would increase the risk of head andneck injuries. The seat belt would thenapply excessive force to the ribs orabdomen which could cause severeinternal injuries to organs such as the liveror spleen.Adjust the seat belt so that the upper partof the belt is as close as possible to thecenter of the shoulder. It should not touchthe neck. Never route the belt under theshoulder. The height of the belt outlet canbe altered to ensure correct usage.RThe lap belt should be routed as low as

possible across the hips, not across theabdomen. If the lap belt is routed across the

Occupant safety 49

Safe

ty

Z

abdomen, it could cause serious injuries inthe event of an impact.RNever route the seat belt over rigid or

fragile objects in or on your clothing, suchas eyeglasses, pens, keys etc, as this couldcause injuries.RAlways ensure that the seat belt is routed

correctly. This is particularly important ifyou are wearing loose clothing.ROnly one person should use each seat belt

at any one time. Never use a seat belt torestrain more than one person or route thebelt around additional objects.RNever wear seat belts when they are

twisted. Otherwise, in the event of animpact, the full width of the seat belt isunavailable to distribute the force of theimpact. The twisted seat belt routed acrossyour body could cause injuries.RPregnant women should also wear a three-

point seat belt. The lap belt must alwayspass across your lap as low down aspossible, i.e. across your hips; not acrossyour abdomen.RThe seat backrest should be set as close to

vertical as possible.RCheck the seat belt during the journey in

order to make sure that it is correctlypositioned.RNever rest your feet on the dashboard or

the seat. Always keep both feet on the floorin front of the seat.RWhen using a seat belt to secure an infant

restraint system, child restraint system ora child on a booster seat, always follow thechild seat manufacturer's instructions.

G WARNINGDo not pass seat belts over sharp edges. Theycould tear.Do not allow the seat belt to get caught in thedoor or in the seat adjustment mechanism.This could damage the seat belt.

Never attempt to make modifications to seatbelts. This could impair the effectiveness ofthe seat belts.

Fastening seat belts

Important safety notesG WARNINGAccording to accident statistics, children aresafer when properly restrained on the rearseats than on the front-passenger seat. Thus,we strongly recommend that children beplaced in the rear seat whenever possible.Regardless of seating position, children 12years old and under must be seated andproperly secured in an appropriately sizedchild restraint system or booster seatrecommended for the size and weight of thechild. For additional information, see the"Children in the vehicle" section.A child's risk of serious or fatal injuries issignificantly increased if the child restraintsare not properly secured in the vehicle and/or the child is not properly secured in the childrestraint.

G WARNINGChildren 12 years old and under must neverride in the front seat, except in a Mercedes-Benz authorized BabySmart™ compatiblechild seat, which operates with theBabySmart™ system installed in the vehicleto deactivate the front passenger front air bagwhen it is installed properly. Otherwise theywill be struck by the air bag when it inflates ina crash. If this happens, serious or fatal injurywill result.

50 Occupant safetySa

fety

Three-point seat belt, front

X Adjust the seat and move the backrest toan almost vertical position (Y page 84).

X Pull the seat belt smoothly through beltsash guide :.

X Without twisting it, guide the shouldersection of the seat belt across the middleof your shoulder and the lap section acrossyour hips.

X Engage belt tongue ; in buckle =.X If necessary, adjust the seat belt to the

appropriate height (Y page 52).X If necessary, pull upwards on the shoulder

section of the seat belt to tighten the beltacross your body.

Further information on releasing the seatbelts with release button ?(Y page 52).

Three-point seat belt in the rear, center

: Bracket for seat belt tongues; Belt buckle for fixed belt tongue= Release button for fixed belt tongue? Fixed belt tongueA Belt buckle for moveable belt tongueB Release button for moveable belt tongueC Moveable belt tongue

X Pull both seat belt tongues ? and C frombracket :.

Occupant safety 51

Safe

ty

Z

X Pull the seat belt smoothly from the seatbelt retractor.

X Engage fixed seat belt tongue ? inbuckle ;.

X Pull movable seat belt tongue C and routethe seat belt across your body. Withouttwisting it, guide the shoulder section of theseat belt across the middle of your shoulderand the lap section across your hips.

X Engage movable seat belt tongue C inbuckle A.

X If necessary, pull upwards on the shouldersection of the seat belt to tighten the beltacross your body.

Further information on releasing the seatbelts with release buttons B and=(Y page 52).

Special seat belt retractorAll seat belts in the vehicle with the exceptionof the driver's are equipped with a specialseat belt retractor, to which a child restraintsystem can be secured. For furtherinformation on the "special seat beltretractor" (Y page 56).

Belt height adjustmentYou can adjust the belt height on the driver'sand front-passenger seat, as well as on theouter rear seats.

Adjust the height so that the upper part of theseat belt is routed across the center of yourshoulder.X To raise: slide the belt sash guide upwards.

The belt sash guide engages in variouspositions.

X To lower: draw belt sash guiderelease : forwards and hold it.

X Slide the belt sash guide downwards.X Let go of belt sash guide release : and

make sure that the belt sash guide hasengaged.

Releasing seat belts! Make sure that the seat belt is fully rolled

up. Otherwise, the seat belt or belt tonguewill be trapped in the door or in the seatmechanism. This could damage the door,

52 Occupant safetySa

fety

the door trim panel and the seat belt.Damaged seat belts can no longer fulfilltheir protective function and must bereplaced. Visit a qualified specialistworkshop.

X Press release button ? of buckle = andguide belt tongue ; back towards beltsash guide :.

Belt warning for the driver and frontpassengerThe 7 seat belt warning lamp in theinstrument cluster is a reminder for alloccupants to fasten their seat belts.Regardless of whether the driver's and front-passenger seat belts have already beenfastened, the 7 seat belt warning lamplights up for six seconds each time the engineis started. It then goes out once the driver andthe front passenger have fastened their seatbelts.If the driver and/or front passenger have notfastened their seat belts after the engine hasbeen started, an additional warning tonesounds. This warning tone switches off afterapproximately six seconds or once thedriver's seat belt is fastened.

If after six seconds, the driver or frontpassenger have not fastened their seat beltsand the doors are closed:Rthe 7 seat belt warning lamp remains

illuminated as long as either the driver's orfront-passenger seat belt is not fastenedRand if vehicle speed once exceeds

15 mph (25 km/h), the 7 seat beltwarning lamp lights up. A warning tone alsosounds with increasing intensity for amaximum of 60 seconds or until the driveror front-passenger seat belt has beenfastened.

If the driver or front-passenger seat belt isunfastened while the vehicle is in motion, the7 seat belt warning lamps light up and awarning tone sounds again.The warning tone ceases even if the driver orfront-passenger seat belt has still not beenfastened after 60 seconds. The 7 seat beltwarning lamp stops flashing but remainsilluminated.After the vehicle comes to a standstill, thewarning tone is reactivated and the 7 seatbelt warning lamp flashes again if the vehiclespeed again exceeds 15 mph (25 km/h).The 7 seat belt warning lamp only goesout if:Rboth the driver and the front passenger

have fastened their seat belts.orRthe vehicle is stationary and a door is open.

i Further information about the 7 seatbelt warning lamp (Y page 248).

Emergency Tensioning Devices, beltforce limiters

G WARNINGPyrotechnic ETDs that were activated must bereplaced.For your safety, when disposing of thepyrotechnic ETDs always follow our safetyinstructions. These are available at anyauthorized Mercedes-Benz Center.

Occupant safety 53

Safe

ty

Z

! If the front-passenger seat is notoccupied, do not engage the seat belttongue in the buckle on the front-passenger seat. Otherwise, the EmergencyTensioning Device could be triggered in theevent of an accident.

X In order to ensure that the pyrotechnicEmergency Tensioning Devices have notbeen triggered, always have the seat beltschecked after an accident.If the Emergency Tensioning Devices havebeen triggered, they must be replaced.

The seat belts for the front seats and rearouter seats are equipped with ETDs and seatbelt force limiters.The ETDs on the driver's and front-passengerseat consist of pyrotechnic belt buckletensioners and belt anchor installationtensioners that are triggered together. Thebelt buckle tensioner is mounted on the B-pillar and the belt anchor installation ismounted on the side of the seat. Afterdeploying, both tensioners must always bereplaced.The ETDs tighten the seat belts in an accident,pulling them close against the body.The ETDs do not correct incorrect seatpositions or incorrectly fastened seat belts.The ETDs do not pull vehicle occupants backtowards the backrest.When triggered, seat belt force limiters helpto reduce the peak force exerted by the seatbelt on the vehicle occupant.The front seat belt force limiters aresynchronized with the front air bags, whichtake on a part of the deceleration force. Thus,the force exerted on the occupant isdistributed over a greater area.The ETDs can only be activated when:Rthe SmartKey is in position 1 or 2 in the

ignition lock.Rthe restraint systems are operational; see

"SRS warning lamp" (Y page 39).

Rthe belt tongue is engaged in the buckle oneach of the lap-shoulder belts in the front.Rthe front-passenger seat is occupied and

the belt tongue is engaged in the buckle onthe front-passenger side

The Emergency Tensioning Devices aretriggered depending on the type and severityof an accident, if:Rin the event of a head-on or rear-end

collision, the vehicle decelerates oraccelerates rapidly in a longitudinaldirection during the initial stages of theimpactRif, in the event of a side impact, on the side

opposite the impact the vehicledecelerates or accelerates rapidly in alateral directionRin certain situations where the vehicle

overturns and the system determines thatit can provide additional protection

If the ETDs are deployed, you will hear a bang,and a small amount of powder may also bereleased. Only in rare cases will the bangaffect your hearing. The powder that isreleased generally does not constitute ahealth hazard. The 6 SRS warning lamplights up.

Children in the vehicle

Child restraint systems

Important safety notes

G WARNINGAccording to accident statistics, children aresafer when properly restrained in the rearseating positions than in the front seatingposition. Thus, we strongly recommend thatchildren be placed in the rear seats wheneverpossible. Regardless of seating position,children 12 years old and under must beseated and properly secured in an appropriateinfant restraint, toddler restraint, or boosterseat recommended for the size and weight ofthe child.

54 Children in the vehicleSa

fety

The infant or child restraint must be properlysecured with the vehicle's seat belt, the seatbelt and top tether strap, or lower anchors andtop tether strap, fully in accordance with thechild seat manufacturer's instructions.Occupants, especially children, should alwayssit as upright as possible, wear the seat beltproperly and use an appropriately sized infantrestraint, toddler restraint, or booster seatrecommended for the size and weight of thechild.Children can be killed or seriously injured byan inflating air bag. Note the followingimportant information when circumstancesrequire you to place a child in the frontpassenger seat:RChildren 12 years old and under must never

ride in the front seat, except in a Mercedes-Benz authorized BabySmart™ compatiblechild seat, which operates with theBabySmart™ system installed in the vehicleto deactivate the front passenger front airbag when it is installed properly. Otherwisethey will be struck by the air bag when itinflates in a crash. If this happens, seriousor fatal injury will result.RA child in a rear-facing child restraint on the

front passenger seat will be seriouslyinjured or even killed if the front passengerfront air bag inflates in a collision whichcould occur under some circumstances,even with the air bag technology installedin your vehicle. The only means tocompletely eliminate this risk is to neverplace a child in a rear-facing child restraintin the front seat. We therefore stronglyrecommend that you always place a childin a rear-facing child restraint in a backseat.RIf you must install a rear-facing child

restraint on the front passenger seatbecause circumstances require you to doso, make sure the 4 / indicatorlamp is illuminated, indicating that the frontpassenger front air bag is deactivated.Should the 4 / indicator lamp notilluminate or go out while the restraint is

installed, please check installation.Periodically check the 4 / indicatorlamp while driving to make sure the4 / indicator lamp is illuminated. Ifthe 4 / indicator lamp goes out orremains out, do not transport a child on thefront passenger seat until the system hasbeen repaired.A child in a rear-facing child restraint on thefront passenger seat will be seriouslyinjured or even killed if the front passengerfront air bag inflates.RIf you have to place a child in a forward-

facing child restraint on the front passengerseat, move the seat as far back as possible,use the proper child restraintrecommended for the age, size and weightof the child, and secure child restraint withthe vehicle's seat belt according to thechild seat manufacturer's instructions.

G WARNINGInfants and small children should never sharea seat belt with another occupant. In the eventof an accident, they could be crushedbetween the occupant and seat belt.A child's risk of serious or fatal injuries issignificantly increased if the child restraintsare not properly secured in the vehicle and/or the child is not properly secured in the childrestraint.Children that are too large for a child restraintmust travel in seats using normal seat belts.Position the shoulder belt across the chestand shoulder, not face or neck. A booster seatmay be necessary to achieve proper seat beltpositioning for children over 41 lb (18 kg) untilthey reach a height where a lap-shoulder beltfits properly without a booster.When the child restraint is not in use, removeit from the vehicle or secure it with the seatbelt to prevent the child restraint frombecoming a projectile in the event of anaccident.

Children in the vehicle 55

Safe

ty

Z

G WARNINGWhen leaving the vehicle, always remove theSmartKey from the ignition lock. Always takethe SmartKey with you and lock the vehicle.Do not leave children unattended in thevehicle, even if they are secured in a childrestraint system, or with access to anunlocked vehicle. A child's unsupervisedaccess to a vehicle could result in an accidentand/or serious personal injury. The childrencould:Rinjure themselves on parts of the vehicleRbe seriously or fatally injured through

excessive exposure to extreme heat or coldRinjure themselves or cause an accident with

vehicle equipment that can be operatedeven if the SmartKey is removed from theignition lock or removed from the vehicle,such as seat adjustment, steering wheeladjustment, or the memory function

If children open a door, they could injure otherpersons or get out of the vehicle and injurethemselves or be injured by following traffic.Do not expose the child restraint system todirect sunlight. The child restraint system'smetal parts, for example, could become veryhot, and the child could be burned on theseparts.

G WARNINGDo not carry heavy or hard objects in thepassenger compartment or trunk unless theyare firmly secured in place.Unsecured or improperly positioned cargoincreases a child's risk of injury in the eventofRstrong braking maneuversRsudden changes of directionRan accident

We recommend that all infants and childrenbe properly restrained using the infant orchild restraint systems at all times while thevehicle is in motion.

Always use a child restraint system that iscompatible with BabySmart™ on the front-passenger seat.The use of infant or child restraints is requiredby law in all 50 states, the District ofColumbia, all U.S. territories and all Canadianprovinces.Infants and small children must be seated inan appropriate infant or child restraint systemrecommended for the size and weight of thechild. The infant or child restraint systemmust be properly secured in accordance withthe manufacturer's instructions. All infant orchild restraint systems must comply with U.S.Federal Motor Vehicle Safety Standards 213and 225 and Canadian Motor Vehicle SafetyStandards 213 and 210.2.An information label on the child restraintsystem indicates whether it meets thesestandards. This confirmation can also befound in the installation instructions that areincluded with the child restraint system.Always read and follow the manufacturer'sinstructions when using an infant or childrestraint system or booster seat.Observe the warning labels in the vehicleinterior or on the infant or child restraint.If an infant or child is traveling in the vehicle:X Secure the child with a child or infant seat

restraint system appropriate to the age andweight of the child.

X Make sure that the infant or child isproperly secured at all times while thevehicle is in motion.

Special seat belt retractor

G WARNINGObserve "Important safety notes"(Y page 54).

G WARNINGNever release the seat belt buckle while thevehicle is in motion, since the special seat beltretractor will be deactivated.

56 Children in the vehicleSa

fety

All seat belts except the driver's seat belt areequipped with a special seat belt retractor.When activated, the special seat beltretractor ensures that the seat belt will notslacken once the child restraint system hasbeen secured.Installing a child restraint system:X Always comply with the manufacturer's

installation instructions.X Pull the seat belt smoothly from the seat

belt retractor.X Engage the seat belt tongue in the belt

buckle.

Activating the special seat belt retractor:X Pull the seat belt out fully and let the seat

belt retractor retract it again.While the seat belt is retracting, you shouldhear a ratcheting sound. The special seatbelt retractor is activated.

X Push down on the child restraint system totake up any slack.

Removing a child restraint system/deactivating the special seat belt retractor:X Always comply with the manufacturer's

installation instructions.X Press the release button on the seat belt

buckle.X Guide the seat belt tongue into the belt

outlet.The special seat belt retractor isdeactivated.

LATCH-type (ISOFIX) child seat anchorsin the rear

G WARNINGObserve "Important safety notes"(Y page 54).

G WARNINGChildren that are too large for a child restraintmust travel in seats using normal seat belts.Position shoulder belt across the chest andshoulder, not face or neck.

A booster seat may be necessary to achieveproper seat belt positioning for children over41 lb (18 kg) until they reach a height wherea lap/shoulder belt fits properly without abooster.Install the child restraint system inaccordance with the manufacturer'sinstructions.Attach the child restraint system to bothsecuring rings.An incorrectly installed child restraint systemcould come loose during an accident andseriously or even fatally injure the child.Child restraint systems or child seat securingrings that are malfunctioning or damaged asthe result of a collision must be replaced.

! When installing the child restraint system,make sure that the seat belt for the middleseat does not get trapped. The seat beltcould otherwise be damaged.

ISOFIX is a standardized securing system forspecially designed child restraint systems onthe rear seats. Securing rings for two LATCH-type (ISOFIX) child restraint systems areinstalled on the left and right of the rear seats.Secure non-LATCH-type (ISOFIX) childrestraint systems using the vehicle's seat beltsystem. When installing child restraintsystems, you must observe themanufacturer's installation instructions.

: Securing ringsX Install the LATCH-type (ISOFIX) child

restraint system. Comply with themanufacturer's instructions when

Children in the vehicle 57

Safe

ty

Z

installing the LATCH-type (ISOFIX) childrestraint system.

X When a LATCH-type (ISOFIX) child seatsecuring system is installed, make surethat the center seat belt in the rearcompartment is fully functional and canmove freely.

Top Tether

G WARNINGObserve "Important safety notes"(Y page 54).

G WARNINGAlways lock the rear seat backrests in theirupright position when the rear seats areoccupied by passengers. Lock the rear seatbackrests in their upright position beforeinstalling the Top Tether straps or when thecargo compartment is not in use. Make surethat rear seat backrests are secured properlyby pushing and pulling on the seat backrests.If the seat backrest is not locked properly, theseat backrest could fold forward. The childrestraint system is no longer supportedproperly or held in position and can no longerfulfill its function. This could cause serious oreven fatal injuries.

G WARNINGOnly use the described top tether anchoragerings for the respective child seat. Otherlashing eyelets could tear in case of anaccident. Make sure the top tether straps arenot crossed or twisted and the hook isattached and closed properly.

Top Tether provides an additional connectionbetween a child restraint system, securedwith a LATCH-type (ISOFIX) child seat mount,and the rear seat. This helps reduce the riskof injury even further.

X Remove cargo compartment cover(Y page 267).

X Move the head restraint upwards.X Install the LATCH-type (ISOFIX) child

restraint system with Top Tether. Complywith the manufacturer's installationinstructions when doing so.

X Route Top Tether belt = under the headrestraint between the two head restraintbars.

X Attach Top Tether hook : to Top Tetheranchorage ; on the cargo compartmentfloor.

X Hook Top Tether hook : of Top Tether belt= into Top Tether anchorage ;.Ensure that:RTop Tether hook : is hooked into Top

Tether anchorage ; as shown.RTop Tether belt = is not twisted.

X Make sure that Top Tether belt = is nottwisted.

58 Children in the vehicleSa

fety

X Tension Top Tether belt =. Comply withthe manufacturer's installationinstructions when doing so.

X Move head restraint back down againslightly if necessary (Y page 86). Makesure that you do not interfere with thecorrect routing of Top Tether belt =.

Child-proof locks

Important safety notes

G WARNINGWhen children ride on the vehicle's rear seats,activate the override switch. Otherwise, thechildren could be injured, e.g. by trappingthemselves in the rear side window.

G WARNINGWhen leaving the vehicle, always remove theSmartKey from the ignition lock. Always takethe SmartKey with you and lock the vehicle.Do not leave children unattended in thevehicle, even if they are secured in a childrestraint system, or with access to anunlocked vehicle. A child's unsupervisedaccess to a vehicle could result in an accidentand/or serious personal injury. The childrencould:Rinjure themselves on parts of the vehicleRbe seriously or fatally injured through

excessive exposure to extreme heat or coldRinjure themselves or cause an accident with

vehicle equipment that can be operatedeven if the SmartKey is removed from theignition lock or removed from the vehicle,such as seat adjustment, steering wheeladjustment, or the memory function

If children open a door, they could injure otherpersons or get out of the vehicle and injurethemselves or be injured by following traffic.Do not expose the child restraint system todirect sunlight. The child restraint system'smetal parts, for example, could become very

hot, and the child could be burned on theseparts.

Child-proof locks for the rear doors

G WARNINGChildren could open a rear door from insidethe vehicle. This could result in seriousinjuries or an accident. Therefore, whenchildren ride in the rear always secure the reardoors with the child-proof locks.

You secure each door individually with thechild-proof locks on the rear doors. A doorsecured with a child-proof lock cannot beopened from inside the vehicle. When thevehicle is unlocked, the door can be openedfrom the outside.

X To activate: press the child-proof locklever down in the direction of arrow ;.

X Make sure that the child-proof locks areworking properly.

X To deactivate: press the child-proof locklever up in the direction of arrow :.

Override feature for the rear sidewindows

G WARNINGWhen children ride on the vehicle's rear seats,activate the override switch. Otherwise, thechildren could be injured, e.g. by trappingthemselves in the rear side window.

Children in the vehicle 59

Safe

ty

Z

X To activate/deactivate: press button :.If indicator lamp ; is lit, operation of therear side windows is disabled. Operation isonly possible using the switches in thedriver's door. If indicator lamp ; is off,operation is possible using the switches inthe rear compartment.

Driving safety systems

Driving safety systems overviewIn this section, you will find information aboutthe following driving safety systems:RABS (Anti-lock Braking System)

(Y page 61)RBAS (Brake Assist System) (Y page 61)RAdaptive brake lamps (Y page 62)RESP® (Electronic Stability Program)

(Y page 62)REBD (electronic brake force distribution)

(Y page 64)RADAPTIVE BRAKE(Y page 64)RTrailer stabilization

Important safety notes

G WARNINGThe ABS, the BAS, and the ESP® switch offwhen the differential locks are switched on.When the ABS, the BAS, and the ESP® areswitched offRwheels may lock during hard brakingRsteering capabilities are reducedRbraking distance is increasedRvehicle stability in standard driving

maneuvers is increasedMake sure the differential locks are switchedon at all times except when driving off-roadfor example. Switch on the differential locksimmediately when returning from off-roaddriving.

If you fail to adapt your driving style orbecome distracted, the driving safetysystems can neither reduce the risk ofaccident nor override the laws of physics.Driving safety systems are merely aidsdesigned to assist driving. You areresponsible for the distance to the vehicle infront, for vehicle speed and for braking ingood time. Always adapt your driving style tosuit the prevailing road and weatherconditions and maintain a safe distance fromthe vehicle in front. Drive carefully.

i Please note that the driving safetysystems described only work as effectivelyas possible if there is adequate contactbetween the tires and the road surface. Payparticular attention to the informationregarding tires, recommended minimumtire tread depths etc. in the "Wheels andtires" section (Y page 318).In wintry driving conditions, always usewinter tires (M+S tires) and if necessary,snow chains. Only in this way will thedriving safety systems described in thissection work as effectively as possible.

60 Driving safety systemsSa

fety

ABS (Anti-lock Braking System)

Important safety notesi Observe the "Important safety notes"

section (Y page 60).

G WARNINGIf the ABS malfunctions, other driving systemssuch as the BAS or the ESP® are also switchedoff. Observe indicator and warning lamps thatmay come on as well as messages in themultifunction display that may appear.If the ABS malfunctions, the wheels may lockduring hard braking, reducing the steeringcapability and extending the braking distance.

G WARNINGIf ABS is faulty, the wheels could lock whenbraking. The steerability and brakingcharacteristics may be severely impaired.Additionally, further driving safety systemsare deactivated. There is an increased dangerof skidding and accidents.Drive on carefully. Have ABS checkedimmediately at a qualified specialistworkshop.

ABS regulates brake pressure in such a waythat the wheels do not lock when you brake.This allows you to continue steering thevehicle when braking.Provided that the differential locks are notactive, ABS works from a speed of about5 mph (8 km/h) upwards, regardless of road-surface conditions. ABS works on slipperysurfaces, even if you only brake gently.The yellow ! ABS warning lamp in theinstrument cluster lights up when the ignitionis switched on. It goes out when the engine isrunning.

BrakingIf ABS intervenes when braking, you will feela pulsing in the brake pedal.

X If ABS intervenes: continue to depress thebrake pedal vigorously until the brakingsituation is over.

X To make a full brake application:depress the brake pedal with full force.

The pulsating brake pedal can be anindication of hazardous road conditions, andfunctions as a reminder to take extra carewhile driving.

Off-road ABSIf the LOW RANGE shift range is selected bythe transfer case, (Y page 199), an ABSsystem specifically suited to off-road terrainis automatically activated.At speeds below 37 mph (60 km/h), the frontwheels lock cyclically during braking. Thedigging-in effect achieved in the processreduces the stopping distance on off-roadterrain. This limits steering capability.

BAS (Brake Assist System)i Observe the "Important safety notes"

section (Y page 60).

G WARNINGIf BAS is malfunctioning, the braking distancein an emergency braking situation isincreased. There is a risk of an accident.In an emergency braking situation, depressthe brake pedal with full force. ABS preventsthe wheels from locking.

BAS operates in emergency brakingsituations. If you depress the brake pedalquickly, BAS automatically boosts the brakingforce, thus shortening the stopping distance.X Keep the brake pedal firmly depressed until

the emergency braking situation is over.ABS prevents the wheels from locking.

The brakes will function as usual once yourelease the brake pedal. BAS is deactivated.

Driving safety systems 61

Safe

ty

Z

Adaptive brake lampsIf you brake sharply from a speed of morethan 30 mph (50 km/h) or if braking isassisted by BAS, the brake lamps flashrapidly. In this way, traffic traveling behindyou is warned in an even more noticeablemanner.If you brake sharply from a speed of morethan 45 mph (70 km/h) to a standstill, thehazard warning lamps are activatedautomatically. If the brakes are applied again,the brake lamps light up continuously. If youdrive faster than 6 mph (10 km/h), the hazardwarning lamps are deactivated automatically.You can also switch off the hazard warninglamps using the hazard warning button(Y page 104).

ESP® (Electronic Stability Program)

Important safety notesi Observe the "Important safety notes"

section (Y page 60).

G WARNINGIf ESP® is malfunctioning, ESP® is unable tostabilize the vehicle. Additionally, furtherdriving safety systems are deactivated. Thisincreases the risk of skidding and an accident.Drive on carefully. Have ESP® checked at aqualified specialist workshop.

! Only operate the vehicle for a maximumof ten seconds on a brake testdynamometer. Switch off the ignition.Application of the brakes by ESP® mayotherwise destroy the brake system.

! A function or performance test shouldonly be carried out on a two-axledynamometer. Before you operate thevehicle on such a dynamometer, pleaseconsult a qualified workshop. You couldotherwise damage the drive train or thebrake system.

ESP® monitors driving stability and traction.Traction is the power transmission betweenthe tires and the road surface.ESP® is deactivated if the å warning lampin the instrument cluster lights upcontinuously when the engine is running.If the ÷ warning lamp and the åwarning lamp are lit continuously, ESP® is notavailable due to a malfunction.Observe the information on warning lamps(Y page 252) and any display messages thatappear in the instrument cluster(Y page 226).If ESP® detects that the vehicle is deviatingfrom the direction desired by the driver, oneor more wheels are braked to stabilize thevehicle. If necessary, the engine output is alsomodified to keep the vehicle on the desiredcourse within physical limits. ESP® assiststhe driver when pulling away on wet orslippery roads. ESP® can also stabilize thevehicle during braking.If ESP® intervenes, the ÷ warning lampflashes in the instrument cluster.If ESP® intervenes:X Do not deactivate ESP® under any

circumstances.X Only depress the accelerator pedal as far

as necessary when pulling away.X Adapt your driving style to suit the

prevailing road and weather conditions.

i Only use wheels with the recommendedtire sizes. Only then will ESP® functionproperly.

i If differential locks are switched on, ABS,BAS and ESP® switch themselves offautomatically.

4ETS (Electronic Traction System)Traction control remains active if youdeactivate ESP®.

62 Driving safety systemsSa

fety

X If appropriate for the driving conditions,engage the LOW RANGE off-road gear(Y page 199).

Traction control is part of ESP®.Traction control brakes the drive wheelsindividually if they spin. This enables you topull away and accelerate on slippery surfaces,for example if the road surface is slippery onone side. In addition, more drive torque istransferred to the wheel or wheels withtraction.Traction control remains active if youdeactivate ESP®.At speeds above approximately 37 mph(60 km/h), traction control is no longeractive.Traction control brakes the drive wheelsindividually if they spin. This enables you topull away and accelerate on slippery surfaces,for example if the road surface is slippery onone side. In addition, more drive torque istransferred to the wheel or wheels withtraction.

Deactivating/activating ESP®

G WARNINGIf you deactivate ESP®, ESP® no longerstabilizes the vehicle. There is an increasedrisk of skidding and an accident.Only deactivate ESP® in the situationsdescribed in the following.

! Avoid spinning the driven wheels for anextended period with ESP® deactivated.You could otherwise damage the drivetrain.

X To deactivate: press button : until theå warning lamp lights up in theinstrument cluster.

X To activate: press button : until theå warning lamp goes out in theinstrument cluster.

ESP® is activated automatically when theengine is started.

i Vehicles with the ECO start/stop function: the ECO start/stop functionautomatically switches the engine off whenthe vehicle comes to a stop. The enginestarts automatically when the driver wantsto pull away again. ESP® remains in itspreviously selected status. Example: ifESP® was deactivated before the enginewas switched off, ESP® remainsdeactivated when the engine is switched onagain.

It may be best to deactivate ESP® in thefollowing situations:Rwhen using snow chainsRin deep snowRon sand or gravelIf you deactivate ESP®:RESP® no longer improves driving stability.Rthe engine's torque is no longer limited and

the drive wheels can spin. The spinning ofthe wheels results in a cutting action, whichprovides better grip.Rtraction control is still activated.

Driving safety systems 63

Safe

ty

Z

RESP® still provides support when youbrake.Rand are driving at above 37 mph

(60 km/h), ESP® still intervenes when onewheel reaches its grip limit even though itis switched off.

i If ESP® is deactivated and one or morewheels start to spin, the ÷ warning lampin the instrument cluster flashes. In suchsituations, ESP® will not stabilize thevehicle.

i If ESP® is deactivated, it is automaticallyreactivated when you drive faster than37 mph (60 km/h) or if a predefined lateralacceleration threshold has been exceeded.

Trailer stabilization

G WARNINGIf road and weather conditions are poor,trailer stabilization will not be able to preventthe vehicle/trailer combination fromswerving. Trailers with a high center of gravitycan tip over before ESP® can detect this.There is a risk of an accident.Always adapt your driving style to theprevailing road and weather conditions.

Trailer stabilization does not work if ESP® isdeactivated because of a malfunction.If your vehicle with trailer (vehicle/trailercombination) begins to lurch, you can onlystabilize the vehicle/trailer combination bydepressing the brake firmly.In this situation, ESP® assists you and candetect if the vehicle/trailer combinationbegins to lurch. ESP® slows the vehicle downby braking and limiting the engine output untilthe vehicle/trailer combination hasstabilized.Trailer stabilization is active above speeds ofabout 37 mph (60 km/h).

EBD (electronic brake forcedistribution)

i Observe the "Important safety notes"section (Y page 60).

G WARNINGIf EBD has malfunctioned, the rear wheels canstill lock, e.g. under full braking. Thisincreases the risk of skidding and an accident.You should therefore adapt your driving styleto the different handling characteristics. Havethe brake system checked at a qualifiedspecialist workshop.

Observe information regarding indicator andwarning lamps (Y page 250) as well asdisplay messages (Y page 228).EBD monitors and controls the brakepressure on the rear wheels to improvedriving stability while braking.

ADAPTIVE BRAKEADAPTIVE BRAKE provides increased brakingsafety. In addition to the braking function,ADAPTIVE BRAKE also has the HOLD function(Y page 192) and hill start assist(Y page 141).

Theft deterrent locking system

ImmobilizerX To activate: remove the SmartKey from

the ignition lock.X To deactivate: switch on the ignition.The immobilizer prevents your vehicle frombeing started without the correct SmartKey.When leaving the vehicle, always take theSmartKey with you and lock the vehicle. Theengine can be started by anyone with a validSmartKey that is left inside the vehicle.

i The immobilizer is always deactivatedwhen you start the engine.

64 Theft deterrent locking systemSa

fety

In the event that the engine cannot bestarted when the starter battery is fullycharged, the immobilizer may be faulty.Contact an authorized Mercedes-BenzCenter or call 1-800-FOR-MERCedes (in theUSA) or 1-800-387-0100 (in Canada).

ATA (anti-theft alarm system)

X To arm: lock the vehicle with theSmartKey.Indicator lamp : flashes. The alarmsystem is armed after approximately15 seconds.

X To deactivate: unlock the vehicle with theSmartKey.

i If you then do not open a door or the reardoor, the alarm system switches back onagain after approximately 40 seconds.

X To stop the alarm: insert the SmartKeyinto the ignition lock.The alarm is switched off.

orX Press the % or & button on the

SmartKey.The alarm is switched off.

A visual and audible alarm is triggered if thealarm system is armed and you open:Ra doorRa door using the mechanical keyRthe rear doorRthe hood

The alarm is also triggered if:Rthe position of the vehicle is changed.Ra window is smashed.

The alarm is not switched off, even if youclose the open door that has triggered it,for example.

i If the alarm stays on for more than30 seconds, the Tele Aid systemautomatically initiates a call to theCustomer Assistance center. The mbraceemergency call system initiates the call if:Ryou have subscribed to the Tele Aid

service.Rthe Tele Aid service has been activated

properly.Rthe required mobile phone, power supply

and GPS are available.

Theft deterrent locking system 65

Safe

ty

Z

66

Useful information .............................. 68SmartKey ............................................. 68Doors .................................................... 73Rear door ............................................. 77Side windows ...................................... 78Sliding sunroof .................................... 79

67

Open

ing/

clos

ing

Useful information

i This Operator's Manual describes allmodels and all standard and optionalequipment of your vehicle available at thetime of publication of the Operator'sManual. Country-specific differences arepossible. Please note that your vehicle maynot be equipped with all featuresdescribed. This also applies to safety-related systems and functions.

i Read the information on qualifiedspecialist workshops: (Y page 23).

SmartKey

Important safety notes

G WARNINGWhen leaving the vehicle, always remove theSmartKey from the ignition lock. Always takethe SmartKey with you and lock the vehicle.Do not leave children unsupervised in thevehicle, even if they are secured in a childrestraint system, and do not give them accessto an unlocked vehicle. A child's unsupervisedaccess to a vehicle could result in an accidentand/or serious personal injury. They could:Rinjure themselves on vehicle partsRbe seriously or fatally injured by extreme

heat or coldRinjure themselves or have an accident with

vehicle equipment that may still be inoperation even after the SmartKey hasbeen removed from the ignition, such as theseat adjustment, steering wheeladjustment or memory function.

If children open a door, they could causesevere or even fatal injury to other persons; ifthey get out of the vehicle, they could injurethemselves when doing so or be seriously oreven fatally injured by any passing traffic.Do not expose the child restraint system todirect sunlight. The child restraint system'smetal parts, for example, could become very

hot, and a child could be burned on theseparts.

G WARNINGDo not carry heavy or hard objects in thepassenger compartment or cargocompartment unless they are firmly securedin place.Unsecured or improperly positioned cargoincreases a child's risk of injury in the eventofRstrong braking maneuversRsudden changes of directionRan accident

G WARNINGIf you attach heavy or large objects to theSmartKey, the SmartKey could beunintentionally turned in the ignition lock. Thiscould cause the engine to be switched off.There is a risk of an accident.Do not attach any heavy or large objects tothe SmartKey. Remove any bulky keyringsbefore inserting the SmartKey into theignition lock.

SmartKey functions

G WARNINGIf children are left unsupervised in the vehicle,they could:Ropen the doors, thus endangering other

people or road users.Rget out and disrupt traffic.Roperate the vehicle's equipment.Additionally, children could set the vehicle inmotion if, for example, they:Rrelease the parking brake.Rshift the automatic transmission out of

parking position P.Rshift the manual transmission into neutral.Rstarting the engine.There is a risk of an accident and injury.

68 SmartKeyOp

enin

g/cl

osin

g

When leaving the vehicle, always take theSmartKey with you and lock the vehicle. Neverleave children or animals unattended in thevehicle. Always keep the SmartKey out ofreach of children.

: & To lock the vehicle; % To unlock the vehicleX To unlock centrally: press the %

button.If you do not open the vehicle withinapproximately 40 seconds of unlocking:Rthe vehicle is locked again.Rthe theft deterrent locking system is

armed again.X To lock centrally: press the & button.

The SmartKey centrally locks/unlocks:Rthe doorsRthe rear doorRthe fuel filler flap

i When unlocking, the turn signals flashonce. When locking, they flash three times.

You can also set an audible signal to confirmthat the vehicle has been locked. The audiblesignal can be activated and deactivated usingthe on-board computer (Y page 221).When it is dark, the surround lighting alsocomes on if it is activated in the on-boardcomputer (Y page 219).

Changing the settings of the lockingsystem

You can change the setting of the lockingsystem in such a way that only the driver'sdoor and the fuel filler flap are unlocked. Thisis useful if you frequently travel on your own.i If the setting of the locking system is

changed within the signal range of thevehicle, pressing the & or % buttonlocks or unlocks the vehicle.

X To change the setting: press and holddown the % and & buttonssimultaneously for approximately sixseconds until battery check lamp :flashes twice.

The SmartKey now functions as follows:X To unlock the driver's door and fuel

filler flap: press the % button once.X To unlock centrally: press the %

button twice.X To lock centrally: press the & button.

SmartKey 69

Open

ing/

clos

ing

Z

Restoring the factory settings

X Press the % and & buttonssimultaneously for approximately sixseconds until battery check lamp :flashes twice.

Mechanical key

General notesIf the vehicle can no longer be unlocked withthe SmartKey, use the mechanical key.If you use the mechanical key to unlock andopen the driver's door or the rear door, theanti-theft alarm system will be triggered(Y page 65).X To end the alarm: insert the SmartKey into

the ignition lock.

Removing the mechanical key

: Release catch; Mechanical key

X Push release catch : in the direction ofthe arrow and at the same time removemechanical key ; from the SmartKey.

SmartKey battery

Important safety notes

G WARNINGBatteries contain toxic and corrosivesubstances. If batteries are swallowed, it canresult in severe health problems. There is arisk of fatal injury.Keep batteries out of the reach of children. Ifa battery is swallowed, seek medical attentionimmediately.

The SmartKey batteries contain perchloratematerial, which may require special handlingand regard for the environment. Nationalguidelines must be observed during disposal.In California, see www.dtsc.ca.gov/HazardousWaste/Perchlorate/index.cfm.Mercedes-Benz recommends that you havethe batteries replaced at a qualified specialistworkshop.

Checking the battery

X Press the & or % button.The battery is working properly if batterycheck lamp : lights up briefly.

70 SmartKeyOp

enin

g/cl

osin

g

If battery check lamp : does not light upduring the test, the battery is discharged.

X Change the battery (Y page 71).

i You can get a battery in any qualifiedspecialist workshop.

i Have the batteries replaced at a qualifiedspecialist workshop.

i If the SmartKey battery is checked withinthe signal reception range of the vehicle,pressing the & or % button:Rlocks orRunlocks the vehicle

Replacing the batteryYou require a CR 2025 3 V cell battery.X Take the mechanical key out of the

SmartKey (Y page 70).

: Battery compartment cover; Mechanical keyX Press mechanical key ; into the opening

in the SmartKey in the direction of thearrow until battery tray cover : opens. Donot hold the cover closed while doing so.

X Remove battery tray cover :.

= BatteryX Repeatedly tap the SmartKey against your

palm until battery = falls out.X Insert the new battery with the positive

terminal facing upwards. Use a lint-freecloth to do so.

X Make sure that the surface of the battery isfree from lint, grease and all other forms ofcontamination.

X Insert the front tabs of battery traycover : and then press to close it.

X Insert the mechanical key into theSmartKey.

X Check the function of all SmartKey buttonson the vehicle.

SmartKey 71

Open

ing/

clos

ing

Z

Problems with the SmartKey

Problem Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions

You cannot lock orunlock the vehicleusing the SmartKey.

The SmartKey battery is discharged or nearly discharged.X Point the tip of the SmartKey at the driver's door handle from a

distance of approximately 1.5 ft (50 cm) and try to unlock orlock the vehicle again.

If this does not work:X Check the SmartKey battery (Y page 70) and replace it if

necessary (Y page 71).X Lock (Y page 75) or unlock (Y page 76) the vehicle using

the mechanical key.

The SmartKey is faulty.X Lock or unlock the vehicle using the mechanical key

(Y page 75).X Have the SmartKey checked at a qualified specialist workshop.

You have lost aSmartKey.

X Have the SmartKey deactivated at a qualified specialistworkshop.

X Report the loss immediately to the vehicle insurers.X If necessary, have the locks changed as well.

You have lost themechanical key.

X Report the loss immediately to the vehicle insurers.X If necessary, have the locks changed as well.

72 SmartKeyOp

enin

g/cl

osin

g

Problem Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions

The engine cannot bestarted using theSmartKey.

The SmartKey has been in position 0(Y page 139) for aconsiderable time.X Remove the SmartKey and reinsert it into the ignition lock.X Start the engine.

The on-board voltage is too low.X Switch off non-essential consumers, e.g. seat heating or interior

lighting, and try to turn the SmartKey again.If this does not work:X Check the battery and charge it if necessary (Y page 307).orX Jump-start the vehicle (Y page 308).orX Consult a qualified specialist workshop.

Doors

Important safety notes

G WARNINGWhen leaving the vehicle, always remove theSmartKey from the ignition lock. Always takethe SmartKey with you and lock the vehicle.Do not leave children unsupervised in thevehicle, even if they are secured in a childrestraint system, and do not give them accessto an unlocked vehicle. A child's unsupervisedaccess to a vehicle could result in an accidentand/or serious personal injury. They could:Rinjure themselves on vehicle partsRbe seriously or fatally injured by extreme

heat or coldRinjure themselves or have an accident with

vehicle equipment that may still be inoperation even after the SmartKey hasbeen removed from the ignition, such as theseat adjustment, steering wheeladjustment or memory function.

If children open a door, they could causesevere or even fatal injury to other persons; ifthey get out of the vehicle, they could injure

themselves when doing so or be seriously oreven fatally injured by any passing traffic.Do not expose the child restraint system todirect sunlight. The child restraint system'smetal parts, for example, could become veryhot, and a child could be burned on theseparts.

G WARNINGDo not carry heavy or hard objects in thepassenger compartment or cargocompartment unless they are firmly securedin place.Unsecured or improperly positioned cargoincreases a child's risk of injury in the eventofRstrong braking maneuversRsudden changes of directionRan accident

Doors 73

Open

ing/

clos

ing

Z

G WARNINGIf children are left unsupervised in the vehicle,they could:Ropen the doors, thus endangering other

people or road users.Rget out and disrupt traffic.Roperate the vehicle's equipment.Additionally, children could set the vehicle inmotion if, for example, they:Rrelease the parking brake.Rshift the automatic transmission out of

parking position P.Rshift the manual transmission into neutral.Rstarting the engine.There is a risk of an accident and injury.When leaving the vehicle, always take theSmartKey with you and lock the vehicle. Neverleave children or animals unattended in thevehicle. Always keep the SmartKey out ofreach of children.

Unlocking and opening doors fromthe inside

If the vehicle has previously been locked withthe SmartKey, opening a door from the insidewill trigger the anti-theft alarm system.Switch off the alarm (Y page 65).Only open the door when the traffic situationpermits.

X Front doors: pull door handle ;.If the door is locked, locking knob : popsup. The door is unlocked and can beopened.

X Rear compartment doors: pullhandle : up.The door is unlocked.

X Pull door handle ;.

Centrally locking and unlocking thevehicle from the inside

G WARNINGIf children are left unsupervised in the vehicle,they could:Ropen the doors, thus endangering other

people or road users.Rget out and disrupt traffic.Roperate the vehicle's equipment.Additionally, children could set the vehicle inmotion if, for example, they:Rrelease the parking brake.Rshift the automatic transmission out of

parking position P.Rshift the manual transmission into neutral.Rstarting the engine.There is a risk of an accident and injury.When leaving the vehicle, always take theSmartKey with you and lock the vehicle. Neverleave children or animals unattended in thevehicle. Always keep the SmartKey out ofreach of children.

You can centrally lock or unlock the vehiclefrom the inside. This feature may be useful if,for example, you wish to unlock the front-passenger door from the inside or lock thevehicle before you pull away.The central locking button does not lock orunlock the fuel filler flap.

74 DoorsOp

enin

g/cl

osin

g

X To unlock: press button :.X To lock: press button ;.

If all the doors and the tailgate are closed,the vehicle locks.

You can open a front door from inside thevehicle even if it has been locked. Only openthe door when the traffic situation permits.If the vehicle has been locked with the centrallocking button:Rand the SmartKey is restored to the factory

settings, the entire vehicle is unlocked if afront door is opened from inside thevehicle.Rand the SmartKey is set to an individual

setting, only the front door that is openedfrom inside the vehicle is unlocked.

If the vehicle has been locked centrally withthe SmartKey, it does not unlock if you usethe central locking button.

i You cannot unlock the vehicle centrallyfrom the inside if the vehicle has beenlocked from the outside using theSmartKey.

i It is only possible to lock the vehiclecentrally if all doors are closed.

Automatic locking feature

: To deactivate; To activateX To disarm: press and hold button : for

about five seconds until a tone sounds.X To arm: press and hold button ; for about

five seconds until a tone sounds.

i If you press one of the two buttons anddo not hear a tone, the relevant setting hasalready been selected.

The vehicle is locked automatically when theignition is switched on and the vehicle'swheels are moving at a speed in excess of9 mph (15 km/h).You could therefore be locked out if:Rthe vehicle is being pushed.Rthe vehicle is being towed.Rthe vehicle is being tested on a

dynamometer.You can also switch the automatic lockingfunction on and off using the on-boardcomputer (Y page 220).

Unlocking the driver's door(mechanical key)

If the vehicle can no longer be centrallyunlocked with the SmartKey, use themechanical key.If you use the mechanical key to unlock andopen the driver's door, the anti-theft alarmsystem will be triggered (Y page 65).

Doors 75

Open

ing/

clos

ing

Z

Take the mechanical key out of the SmartKey(Y page 70).

X Insert the mechanical key into the lock ofthe driver's door as far as it will go.

X Turn the mechanical key counter-clockwiseto position 1.The door is unlocked.

X Turn the mechanical key back and removeit.

X Insert the mechanical key into theSmartKey.

Locking the vehicleIf the vehicle can no longer be centrallylocked with the SmartKey, use themechanical key.X Close the front-passenger door, the rear

doors and the tailgate.X Press the locking button (Y page 74).X Make sure that the locking knobs on the

doors are still visible. Press down thelocking knobs by hand, if necessary.

X Close the driver's door from the outside.

X Take the mechanical key out of theSmartKey (Y page 70).

X Insert the mechanical key into the lock ofthe driver's door as far as it will go.

X Turn the mechanical key clockwise as faras it will go to position 1.

X Turn the mechanical key back and removeit.

X Make sure that the doors and the tailgateare locked.

X Insert the mechanical key into theSmartKey.

i If you lock the vehicle as described above,the fuel filler flap is not locked. The anti-theft alarm system is not armed.

76 DoorsOp

enin

g/cl

osin

g

Rear door

Important safety notes

G WARNINGWhen leaving the vehicle, always remove theSmartKey from the ignition lock. Always takethe SmartKey with you and lock the vehicle.Do not leave children unsupervised in thevehicle, even if they are secured in a childrestraint system, and do not give them accessto an unlocked vehicle. A child's unsupervisedaccess to a vehicle could result in an accidentand/or serious personal injury. They could:Rinjure themselves on vehicle partsRbe seriously or fatally injured by extreme

heat or coldRinjure themselves or have an accident with

vehicle equipment that may still be inoperation even after the SmartKey hasbeen removed from the ignition, such as theseat adjustment, steering wheeladjustment or memory function.

If children open a door, they could causesevere or even fatal injury to other persons; ifthey get out of the vehicle, they could injurethemselves when doing so or be seriously oreven fatally injured by any passing traffic.Do not expose the child restraint system todirect sunlight. The child restraint system'smetal parts, for example, could become veryhot, and a child could be burned on theseparts.

G WARNINGDo not carry heavy or hard objects in thepassenger compartment or cargocompartment unless they are firmly securedin place.Unsecured or improperly positioned cargoincreases a child's risk of injury in the eventofRstrong braking maneuversRsudden changes of directionRan accident

G WARNINGCombustion engines emit poisonous exhaustgases such as carbon monoxide. If the reardoor is open when the engine is running,particularly if the vehicle is moving, exhaustfumes could enter the passengercompartment. There is a risk of poisoning.Turn off the engine before opening the reardoor. Never drive with the rear door open.

! The tailgate swings out to the side whenopened. Therefore, make sure that there issufficient clearance.

i Do not leave the SmartKey in the cargocompartment. Otherwise, you could lockyourself out.

OpeningYou can only open the rear door afterunlocking it first.X Press the % button on the SmartKey.

X Press release button : and pull doorhandle ;.

X Open the rear door.

ClosingX Push the rear door closed from outside the

vehicle.X If necessary, lock the vehicle with the& button on the SmartKey.

Rear door 77

Open

ing/

clos

ing

Z

Side windows

Important safety notes

G WARNINGWhile opening the side windows, body partscould become trapped between the sidewindow and the door frame as the sidewindow moves. There is a risk of injury.Make sure that nobody touches the sidewindow during the opening procedure. Ifsomebody becomes trapped, release theswitch or pull the switch to close the sidewindow again.

G WARNINGWhile opening the side windows, body partsin the closing area could become trapped.There is a risk of injury.Make sure that no body parts are in closeproximity during the closing procedure. Ifsomebody becomes trapped, release theswitch or press the switch to open the sidewindow again.

Opening and closing the sidewindows

The switches for all side windows are locatedon the driver's door. There is also a switch oneach door for the corresponding side window.The switches on the driver's door takeprecedence.The side windows cannot be operated fromthe rear when the override feature for the sidewindows is activated (Y page 59).

: Front left; Front right= Rear right? Rear leftX Turn the SmartKey to position 1 or 2 in the

ignition.X To open: press the corresponding switch.X To close: pull the corresponding switch.X To open automatically: press the

corresponding switch briefly beyond thepoint of resistance.The side window opens completely.

X To interrupt automatic operation: pressor pull the corresponding switch again.

i You can continue to operate the sidewindows after you switch off the engine orremove the SmartKey. This function isavailable for up to five minutes or until thedriver's or front-passenger door is opened.

i The side windows cannot be operatedfrom the rear when the override feature forthe side windows is activated (Y page 59).

Convenience openingi The convenience opening feature can

only be operated using the SmartKey. TheSmartKey must be close to the driver'sdoor handle.

78 Side windowsOp

enin

g/cl

osin

g

You can ventilate the vehicle before you startdriving. To do this, the SmartKey is used tocarry out the following functionssimultaneously:Runlock the vehicleRopen the side windowsRopen the sliding sunroofRswitch on the seat ventilation for the

driver's seat and front-passenger seatX Point the tip of the SmartKey at the driver's

door handle.X Press and hold the % button until the

side windows and the sliding sunroof are inthe desired position.

X To interrupt convenience opening:release the % button.

Problems with the side windows

G WARNINGClosing the side windows with increased forceor without the anti-entrapment feature couldlead to serious or even fatal injury. Make surethat nobody can become trapped whenclosing the side windows.

Problem: a side window cannot be closed because objects are trapped between the side window and the door frame.X Remove the objects.X Close the side window.Problem: a side window cannot be closed and you cannot see the cause.If a side window is obstructed during closingand reopens again slightly:X Immediately after the window blocks, pull

the corresponding switch again until theside window has closed.

If a side window is obstructed again duringclosing and reopens again slightly:X Immediately after the window blocks, pull

the corresponding switch again until theside window has closed.

i If a side window no longer opens or closesdue to a malfunction, contact a qualifiedspecialist workshop.

Sliding sunroof

Important safety notes! Only open the sliding sunroof if it is free

of snow and ice. Otherwise, malfunctionsmay occur.Do not allow anything to protrude from thesliding sunroof. Otherwise, the seals couldbe damaged.

! If the sliding sunroof still cannot beopened or closed as a result of amalfunction, contact a qualified specialistworkshop.

! The weather can change abruptly. It couldstart to rain or snow. Make sure that thesliding sunroof is closed when you leave thevehicle. The vehicle electronics can bedamaged if water enters the vehicleinterior.

i Resonance noises can occur in additionto the usual airflow noises when the slidingsunroof is open. They are caused by minorpressure fluctuations in the vehicle interior.Change the position of the sliding sunroofor open a side window slightly to reduce oreliminate these noises.

Sliding sunroof 79

Open

ing/

clos

ing

Z

Opening and closing the slidingsunroof

Overhead control panel: To raise; To open= To close/lowerX Turn the SmartKey to position 1 or

2(Y page 139) in the ignition.X Press or pull the ¡ switch in the

corresponding direction.X To open automatically: press the ¡

switch briefly beyond the point ofresistance in the direction of arrow ;.The sliding sunroof opens completely.

X To interrupt automatic operation: pressor pull the ¡ switch again.

i When opening and raising the roof,automatic operation is only available if thesliding sunroof is in the closed position.

Operating the sliding sunroofmanually

The actuator is located in the cargocompartment, on the left-hand side behindthe rear wall trim.

X Open the rear door.X Pull off edge protection : from the door

pillar in the direction of arrow ;.X Pull away rear panel trim = as far as

necessary in the direction of arrow ? untilthe electrical connections can beaccessed.

X Disconnect the electrical connections.X Remove rear panel trim = completely.

X Take lug wrench A out of the vehicle toolkit (Y page 302).

X Place lug wrench A onto the hexagonal nutof the actuator.

X To open: turn lug wrench A counter-clockwise.

X To close: turn lug wrench A clockwise.

80 Sliding sunroofOp

enin

g/cl

osin

g

X Reconnect the electrical connections.X Re-install rear panel trim =.

When doing so, hook lugs B of rear paneltrim = into vehicle side wall C.

X Re-install edge protection :.X Close the rear door.

Problems with the sliding sunroof

G WARNINGYou could be severely or even fatally injuredwhen closing the sliding sunroof withincreased closing force or if the anti-entrapment feature is deactivated. Make surethat nobody can become trapped whenclosing the sliding sunroof.

! If the sliding sunroof still cannot beopened or closed as a result of amalfunction, contact a qualified specialistworkshop.

Problem: the sunroof cannot be closed and you cannot see the cause.

If the sliding sunroof is obstructed duringclosing and reopens again slightly:X Immediately after the sliding sunroof

blocks, pull the ¡ switch in theoverhead control panel down to the pointof resistance and hold it until the slidingsunroof is closed.

If the sliding sunroof is obstructed againduring closing and reopens again slightly:X Immediately after the sliding sunroof

blocks, pull the ¡ switch in theoverhead control panel down to the pointof resistance and hold it until the slidingsunroof is closed.

Sliding sunroof 81

Open

ing/

clos

ing

Z

82

Useful information .............................. 84Correct driver's seat position ............ 84Seats .................................................... 85Steering wheel .................................... 90Mirrors ................................................. 93Memory functions ............................... 95

83

Seat

s, s

teer

ing

whe

el a

nd m

irror

s

Useful information

i This Operator's Manual describes allmodels and all standard and optionalequipment of your vehicle available at thetime of publication of the Operator'sManual. Country-specific differences arepossible. Please note that your vehicle maynot be equipped with all featuresdescribed. This also applies to safety-related systems and functions.

i Read the information on qualifiedspecialist workshops: (Y page 23).

Correct driver's seat position

: Steering wheel; Seat belts= BackrestX Observe the safety guidelines on seat

adjustment (Y page 85).X Make sure that seat = is adjusted

properly.Electrical seat adjustment (Y page 86)

When adjusting the seat, make sure that:Ryou are as far away from the driver's air bag

as possible.Ryou are sitting in a normal upright position.

Ryou can fasten the seat belt properly.Ryou have moved the backrest to an almost

vertical position.Ryou have set the seat cushion angle so that

your thighs are gently supported.Ryou can depress the pedals properly.X Check whether the head restraint is

adjusted properly (Y page 86).When doing so, make sure that you haveadjusted the head restraint so that the backof your head is supported at eye level bythe center of the head restraint.

X Observe the safety guidelines on steeringwheel adjustment (Y page 85).

X Make sure that steering wheel : isadjusted properly.Adjusting the steering wheel electrically(Y page 91)

When adjusting the steering wheel, makesure that:Ryou can hold the steering wheel with your

arms slightly bent.Ryou can move your legs freely.Ryou can see all the displays in the

instrument cluster clearly.X Observe the safety guidelines for seat belts

(Y page 48).X Check whether you have fastened seat

belt ; properly (Y page 51).The seat belt should:Rfit snugly across your bodyRbe routed across the middle of your

shoulderRbe routed in your pelvic area across the hip

jointsX Before starting off, adjust the rear-view

mirror and the exterior mirrors in such away that you have a good view of road andtraffic conditions (Y page 93).

X Vehicles with a memory function: savethe seat, steering wheel and exterior mirrorsettings with the memory function(Y page 95).

84 Correct driver's seat positionSe

ats,

ste

erin

g w

heel

and

mirr

ors

Seats

Important safety notes

G WARNINGThe seats can still be adjusted when there isno key in the ignition lock. For this reason,children should never be left unsupervised inthe vehicle. They could otherwise becometrapped when adjusting the seat.

G WARNINGIn order to avoid possible loss of vehiclecontrol, all seat, head restraint, steeringwheel and rear view mirror adjustments, aswell as fastening of seat belts, must be donebefore setting the vehicle in motion.

G WARNINGDo not adjust the driver's seat while driving.Adjusting the seat while driving could causethe driver to lose control of the vehicle.Never travel in a moving vehicle with the seatbackrest in an excessively reclined position asthis can be dangerous. You could slide underthe seat belt in a collision. If you slide underit, the seat belt would apply force at theabdomen or neck. This could cause serious orfatal injuries. The seat backrest and seat beltsprovide the best restraint when the wearer isin a position that is as upright as possible andseat belts are properly positioned on thebody.

G WARNINGYour seat belt must be adjusted so that youcan correctly fasten your seat belt.Observe the following points:Radjust the seat backrest until your arms are

slightly angled when holding the steeringwheel.Radjust the seat to a comfortable seating

position that still allows you to reach theaccelerator/brake pedal safely. Theposition should be as far back as possible

with the driver still able to operate thecontrols properly.Radjust the head restraint so that it is as

close to the head as possible and the centerof the head restraint supports the back ofthe head at eye level.Rnever place hands under the seat or near

any moving parts while a seat is beingadjusted.

Failure to do so could result in an accidentand/or serious personal injury.

G WARNINGAccording to accident statistics, children aresafer when properly restrained on the rearseats than on the front-passenger seat. Thus,we strongly recommend that children beplaced in the rear seat whenever possible.Regardless of seating position, children 12years old and under must be seated andproperly secured in an appropriately sizedchild restraint system or booster seatrecommended for the size and weight of thechild. For additional information, see the"Children in the vehicle" section.A child's risk of serious or fatal injuries issignificantly increased if the child restraintsare not properly secured in the vehicle and/or the child is not properly secured in the childrestraint.

G WARNINGFor your protection, drive only with properlypositioned head restraints.Adjust the head restraint so that it is as closeto the head as possible and the center of thehead restraint supports the back of the headat eye level. This will reduce the potential forinjury to the head and neck in the event of anaccident or similar situation.Do not drive the vehicle without the seat headrestraints. Head restraints are intended tohelp reduce injuries during an accident.

Seats 85

Seat

s, s

teer

ing

whe

el a

nd m

irror

s

Z

! To avoid damage to the seats and the seatheating, observe the following information:Rkeep liquids from spilling on the seats. If

liquid is spilled on the seats, dry them assoon as possible.Rif the seat covers are damp or wet, do not

switch on the seat heating. The seatheating should also not be used to drythe seats.Rclean the seat covers as recommended;

see the "Interior care" section.Rdo not transport heavy loads on the

seats. Do not place sharp objects on theseat cushions, e.g. knives, nails or tools.The seats should only be occupied bypassengers, if possible.Rwhen the seat heating is in operation, do

not cover the seats with insulatingmaterials, e.g. blankets, coats, bags,seat covers, child seats or booster seats.

! Make sure that there are no objects in thefootwell or behind the seats when resettingthe seats. There is a risk that the seatsand/or the objects could be damaged.

! When the rear bench seat is foldedforwards, the front seats cannot be movedto their rearmost position. You couldotherwise damage the seats and the rearbench seat.

! Make sure that the sun visor is folded upbefore adjusting the backrest and headrestraint height. The head restraint and sunvisor could otherwise collide when the headrestraint is fully extended.

i If the front door is open, the seats can beadjusted for up 30 minutes after theignition has been switched off.

i The rear-compartment head restraintscan be removed (Y page 88).For more information, contact a qualifiedspecialist workshop.

i You can find further information aboutenlarging the cargo compartment (folding

the rear bench seat forwards) on(Y page 266).

Adjusting the seats electrically! Make sure that the cup holder on the

center console is folded down before youmove the front-passenger seat forwards.

: Head restraint height; Seat cushion angle= Seat height? Seat fore-and-aft adjustmentA Backrest angle

i You can store the seat settings using thememory function (Y page 95).

Adjusting the head restraints

Important safety notes

G WARNINGFor safety reasons, always drive with the rearhead restraints in the upright position whenthe rear seats are occupied.Keep the area around head restraints clear ofarticles (e.g. clothing) to not obstruct thefolding operation of the head restraints.

G WARNINGFor your protection, drive only with properlypositioned head restraints.Adjust the head restraint so that it is as closeto the head as possible and the center of the

86 SeatsSe

ats,

ste

erin

g w

heel

and

mirr

ors

head restraint supports the back of the headat eye level. This will reduce the potential forinjury to the head and neck in the event of anaccident or similar situation.Do not drive the vehicle without the seat headrestraints. Head restraints are intended tohelp reduce injuries during an accident.

Adjusting the front seat head restraintheight

: Head restraint height; Seat cushion angle= Seat height? Seat fore-and-aft adjustmentA Backrest angleX Slide head restraint adjustment button :

up or down in the direction of the arrow.

Adjusting the luxury head restraints

G WARNINGWhen folding back the head restraint sidebolsters, do not put your hands between theside bolster and the cushion holder. There isa danger of becoming trapped.

X To adjust the side bolsters of the head restraint: push or pull right and/or left-hand side bolster : into the desiredposition.

X To adjust the angle of the head restraint: push or pull the head restraint inthe direction of arrow ;.

Resetting the front seat head restraintsIt is necessary to reset the front seat headrestraints after the voltage supply has beeninterrupted, e.g. if the battery has beencompletely discharged or disconnected.X Make sure that the cup holder on the center

console is folded down (Y page 268).X Move the seat as far forward as possible

and the head restraint in as far as possible.

Rear seat head restraints

Important safety notesG WARNINGFor safety reasons, always drive with the rearhead restraints in the upright position whenthe rear seats are occupied.Keep the area around head restraints clear ofarticles (e.g. clothing) to not obstruct thefolding operation of the head restraints.

G WARNINGFor your protection, drive only with properlypositioned head restraints.Adjust the head restraint in such a way that itis as close to the head as possible and the

Seats 87

Seat

s, s

teer

ing

whe

el a

nd m

irror

s

Z

center of the head restraint supports the backof the head at eye level. This will reduce thepotential for injury to the head and neck in theevent of an accident or similar situation.With a rear seat occupied, make sure to movethe respective head restraint up from thelowest non-use position and have theoccupant adjust the head restraint properly.Do not drive the vehicle without the seat headrestraints installed when the rear seats areoccupied. Head restraints are intended tohelp reduce injuries during an accident.

G WARNINGMake sure the rear seat head restraintsengage when placing them upright manually.Otherwise their protective function cannot beensured.The back of the head will not be supported inthe event of a collision. That could causeserious or even fatal injuries. Rear seatoccupants can be seriously injured or killed.

Adjusting the rear seat head restraintheight

X Once the head restraint is fully lowered,press release catch :.

X To raise: pull the head restraint up to thedesired position.

X To lower: press release catch : and pushthe head restraint down until it is in thedesired position.

Installing/removing the rear seat headrestraintsX To remove: pull the head restraint up to

the stop.X Press release catch : and pull the head

restraint out of the guides.X To re-install: place the head restraint in

the guides of the backrest.i The notches on the guide rod must be on

the left-hand side when viewed in thedirection of travel.

X Push the head restraint down until you hearit engage in position.

Adjusting the multicontour seat

: To adjust the thigh cushion; To adjust the backrest contour in the

lumbar region= To adjust the backrest contour in the

upper back region? To adjust the side bolsters of the seat

backrestYou can adjust the contour of the front seatsindividually so as to provide optimum supportfor your back and sides.X Make sure that the SmartKey is in position

1 or 2 (Y page 139) in the ignition lock.

88 SeatsSe

ats,

ste

erin

g w

heel

and

mirr

ors

Adjusting the 4-way lumbar supportYou can adjust the contour of the front seatbackrests individually to provide optimumsupport for your back.

: To raise the backrest contour; To soften the backrest contour= To lower the backrest contour? To harden the backrest contour

Switching the seat heating on/off

General notes

G WARNINGRepeatedly setting the seat heating to level3 may result in excessive seat temperatures.The health of passengers that have limitedtemperature sensitivity or a limited ability toreact to excessively high temperatures maybe affected or they may even suffer burn-likeinjuries. Therefore, do not use seat heatinglevel 3 repeatedly.

The red indicator lamps in the button indicatethe heating level you have selected.X Make sure that the SmartKey is in position

2 in the ignition lock.

i If the battery voltage is too low, the seatheating may switch off.One or more of the indicator lamps in theseat heating button are flashing.

Switching the front-seat heating on/off

X To switch on: press button : repeatedlyuntil the desired heating level is set.

X To switch off: press button : repeatedlyuntil all the indicator lamps go out.

i The system automatically switches downfrom level 3to level2 after approximately 8minutes.The system automatically switches downfrom level 2to level1 after approximately10 minutes.The system automatically switches offapproximately 35 minutes after it is set tolevel 1.

Switching the rear-seat heating on/off

X To switch on: press button : repeatedlyuntil the desired heating level is set.

X To switch off: press button : repeatedlyuntil all the indicator lamps go out.

i The system automatically switches downfrom level 3to level2 after approximately 8minutes.

Seats 89

Seat

s, s

teer

ing

whe

el a

nd m

irror

s

Z

The system automatically switches downfrom level 2to level1 after approximately10 minutes.The system automatically switches offapproximately 35 minutes after it is set tolevel 1.

Problems with the seat heatingIf the on-board voltage is too low, the seatheating is switched off automatically.X Switch off electrical consumers which you

do not need, such as the rear windowdefroster or interior lighting.If the on-board voltage is only interruptedbriefly, the seat heating will switch back onautomatically. If the seat heating is notswitched on automatically:

X Switch the seat heating on manually(Y page 89)

Switching the seat ventilation on/off

Activating/deactivating

Seat ventilation is only available for the frontseats.The three blue indicator lamps in the buttonsindicate the ventilation level you haveselected.X Make sure that the SmartKey is in

position 2 (Y page 139) in the ignition lock.X To switch on: press button : repeatedly

until the desired ventilation level is set.

i If you open the side windows and thesliding sunroof using the SmartKey(Y page 78), the driver's seat ventilationautomatically switches to the highest level.

X To switch off: press button : repeatedlyuntil all the indicator lamps go out.

i If the battery voltage is too low, the seatventilation may switch off.

Problems with the seat ventilationIf one or all of the indicator lamps in the seatventilation button are flashing, the seatventilation has switched off automatically.The vehicle's electrical system voltage is toolow because too many electrical consumersare switched on.X Switch off electrical consumers that you do

not need, such as the rear windowdefroster or interior lighting.Once the battery is sufficiently charged, theseat ventilation will switch back onautomatically.

Steering wheel

Important safety notes

G WARNINGDo not adjust the steering wheel while driving.Adjusting the steering wheel while drivingcould cause the driver to lose control of thevehicle.The electrical steering wheel adjustmentfeature can be operated at any time.Therefore, do not leave children unattendedin the vehicle, or with access to an unlockedvehicle. A child's unsupervised access to avehicle could result in an accident and/orserious personal injury.

90 Steering wheelSe

ats,

ste

erin

g w

heel

and

mirr

ors

Adjusting the steering wheel

: To adjust the steering wheel height; To adjust the steering wheel position

(fore-and-aft adjustment)

i If the driver's door is open, the steeringwheel can be adjusted for up to30 minutes after the ignition has beenswitched off.

i Further related subjects:REASY-ENTRY/EXIT feature

(Y page 92)RStoring settings (Y page 95)

Steering wheel heating

Activating/deactivating

: To switch on the steering-wheel heating; To switch off the steering-wheel heating= Indicator lamp

The steering-wheel heating heats the leatherareas of the steering wheel.

X To activate: make sure that the SmartKeyis in position 1 or 2 in the ignition lock.

X Turn the catch in the direction ofarrow :.Indicator lamp = lights up.

X To deactivate: make sure that theSmartKey is in position 1 or 2 in the ignitionlock.

X Turn the catch in the direction ofarrow ;.Indicator lamp = goes out.

i The steering wheel heating does notswitch off automatically.

i The steering wheel heating may switch offtemporarily if:Rthe temperature in the vehicle interior is

above 86 ‡ (30 †)Rthe temperature of the steering wheel is

above 95 ‡ (35 †)Indicator lamp = remains on.

i The steering wheel heating is deactivatedif you remove the SmartKey from theignition lock.

Problems with the steering wheelheating

: To switch on the steering-wheel heating; To switch off the steering-wheel heating= Indicator lamp

Steering wheel 91

Seat

s, s

teer

ing

whe

el a

nd m

irror

s

Z

If steering wheel heating indicator lamp = isflashing, the steering wheel heating hasswitched off automatically. The vehicle'selectrical system voltage is too low becausetoo many electrical consumers are switchedon.X Switch off electrical consumers that you do

not need, such as the rear windowdefroster or interior lighting.Once the battery is sufficiently charged, thesteering wheel heating will switch back onautomatically.

Steering wheel EASY-ENTRY/EXITfeature

Important safety notes

G WARNINGMake sure that nobody can become trappedwhen you activate the EASY-ENTRY/EXITfeature.If there is a risk of someone becomingtrapped, stop the adjustment procedure. Tohalt the procedure:Rpress the steering column adjustment

button.Rpress one of the memory function position

buttons.The steering column stops movingimmediately.Do not keep the memory function positionbutton pressed as this will start the memoryfunction and set the steering wheel and seatin motion.Do not leave children unattended in thevehicle. They could open the driver's door andthereby unintentionally activate the EASY-ENTRY/EXIT feature and become trapped.

G WARNINGLet the system complete the adjustmentprocedure before setting the vehicle inmotion. All steering wheel adjustment mustbe completed before setting the vehicle in

motion. Driving off with the steering wheelstill adjusting could cause the driver to losecontrol of the vehicle.

! Do not activate the EASY-ENTRY/EXITfeature, if the seat backrest is reclined toofar backwards. This can damage the frontor rear seats. You must first move thebackrest to a vertical position.

The EASY-ENTRY/EXIT feature makes gettingin and out of your vehicle easier.You can activate and deactivate the EASY-ENTRY/EXIT feature in the on-boardcomputer (Y page 221).

Position of the steering wheel when theEASY-ENTRY/EXIT feature is activeThe steering wheel moves upwards andtowards the dashboard if:Ryou remove the SmartKey from the ignition

lock orRyou open the driver's door with the

SmartKey in position 0 or 1 in the ignitionlock.

i The steering wheel only moves upwardsand towards the dashboard if it has notalready reached the upper end stop.

Position of the steering wheel fordrivingThe steering wheel is moved to the lastselected position when:Rthe driver's door is closed.Ryou insert the SmartKey into the ignition

lock.The last position of the steering wheel isstored when you switch off the ignition orwhen you store the setting with the memoryfunction (Y page 95).

92 Steering wheelSe

ats,

ste

erin

g w

heel

and

mirr

ors

Mirrors

Rear-view mirrorX Adjust the rear-view mirror by hand so you

have a good overview of the trafficconditions behind you.

Exterior mirrors

Adjusting the exterior mirrors

G WARNINGThe exterior mirrors reduce the size of theimage. Objects are actually closer than theyappear. You could misjudge the distance fromvehicles driving behind and cause anaccident, e.g. when changing lane. For thisreason, make sure of the actual distance fromthe vehicle driving behind by glancing overyour shoulder.

X Make sure that the SmartKey is in position1 or 2 (Y page 139) in the ignition lock.

X Press button : to select the left-handexterior mirror

orX Press button ; to select the right-hand

exterior mirror.X Press button = up, down, or to the left or

right until you have adjusted the exteriormirror to the correct position. You shouldhave a good overview of traffic conditions.

i The convex exterior mirrors provide alarger field of vision.

i The exterior mirrors are automaticallyheated if the rear window defroster isswitched on and the outside temperatureis low.

Folding the exterior mirrors in/outelectrically

X Make sure that the SmartKey is in position1 or 2 (Y page 139) in the ignition lock.

X Briefly press button :.Both exterior mirrors fold in or out.

i Make sure that the exterior mirrors arealways folded out fully while driving. Theycould otherwise vibrate.

i If you are driving faster than9 mph (15 km/h), you can no longer fold inthe exterior mirrors.

Setting the exterior mirrors

If the battery has been disconnected orcompletely discharged, the exterior mirrorsmust be reset. The exterior mirrors willotherwise not fold in when you select the

Mirrors 93

Seat

s, s

teer

ing

whe

el a

nd m

irror

s

Z

"Fold in mirrors when locking" function in theon-board computer (Y page 221).X Make sure that the SmartKey is in position

1(Y page 139) in the ignition lock.X Briefly press button :.

Folding the exterior mirrors in/outautomaticallyIf the "Fold in mirrors when locking" functionis activated in the on-board computer(Y page 221):Rthe exterior mirrors fold in automatically as

soon as you lock the vehicle from theoutside.Rthe exterior mirrors fold out again

automatically as soon as you unlock thevehicle and then open the driver's or front-passenger door.

Exterior mirror out of positionX Press button : repeatedly until you hear

the mirror engage in position.The mirror housing is engaged again andyou can adjust the exterior mirrors as usual(Y page 93).

Automatic anti-glare mirrors

G WARNINGIf incident light from headlamps is preventedfrom striking the sensor in the rear-viewmirror, for instance, by luggage piled too highin the vehicle, the mirror's automatic anti-glare function will not operate.Incident light could then blind you. This maydistract you from the traffic conditions and,as a result, you may cause an accident.

The rear-view mirror and the exterior mirroron the driver's side automatically go into anti-glare mode if:Rthe ignition is switched on andRincident light from headlamps strikes the

sensor in the rear-view mirror.

i The mirrors do not go into anti-glare modeif reverse gear is engaged or if the interiorlighting is switched on.

Parking position for the exteriormirror on the front-passenger side

Setting/storing the parking position

Using reverse gear

: Left-hand exterior mirror; Right-hand exterior mirror= Adjustment button? Memory button

You can position the front-passenger sideexterior mirror in such a way that you can seethe rear wheel on that side as soon as youengage reverse gear. You can store thisposition.X Make sure that the vehicle is stationary and

that the SmartKey is in position2(Y page 139) in the ignition lock.

X Press button ; for the exterior mirror onthe front-passenger side.

X Engage reverse gear.The exterior mirror on the front-passengerside moves to the preset parking position.

X Use adjustment button = to adjust theexterior mirror to a position that allows youto see the rear wheel and the curb.The parking position is stored.

i If you shift the transmission to anotherposition, the exterior mirror on the front-

94 MirrorsSe

ats,

ste

erin

g w

heel

and

mirr

ors

passenger side returns to the drivingposition.

Using the memory button

: Left-hand exterior mirror; Right-hand exterior mirror= Adjustment button? Memory button

You can position the front-passenger sideexterior mirror in such a way that you can seethe rear wheel on that side as soon as youengage reverse gear. This setting can bestored using memory button M ?.X Make sure that the SmartKey is in

position 2 (Y page 139) in the ignition lock.X With the exterior mirror on the front-

passenger side activated, use adjustmentbutton = to adjust the exterior mirror. Inthe exterior mirror, the rear wheel and thecurb should be visible.

X Press memory button M ? and one of thearrows on adjustment button = withinthree seconds.The parking position is stored if the exteriormirror does not move.

X If the mirror moves out of position, repeatthe steps.

Calling up a stored parking positionsetting

: Left-hand exterior mirror; Right-hand exterior mirror= Adjustment button? Memory buttonX Turn the SmartKey to position

2 (Y page 139) in the ignition lock.X Adjust the exterior mirror on the front-

passenger side using button ;.X Engage reverse gear.

The exterior mirror on the front-passengerside moves to the stored parking position.

The exterior mirror on the front-passengerside moves back to its original position:Ras soon as you exceed a speed of 9 mph

(15 km/h)Rif you press button : for the exterior

mirror on the driver's side

Memory functions

Storing settings

G WARNINGOnly use the memory function on the driver'sside when the vehicle is stationary. You couldotherwise be distracted from the trafficconditions by the seat moving of its ownaccord, and as a result cause an accident.

Memory functions 95

Seat

s, s

teer

ing

whe

el a

nd m

irror

s

Z

X Make sure that the SmartKey is in position2(Y page 139) or that the respective dooris open.

X Adjust the seat (Y page 86) and headrestraint (Y page 86).

X On the driver's side, adjust the steeringwheel (Y page 91) and the exterior mirrors(Y page 93).

X Press the M memory button.X Press one of memory buttons 1, 2 or 3

within three seconds.The settings are stored in the selectedstorage position.

Calling up a stored setting! If you want to move the seat from the fully

reclined position to a stored seat position,first raise the backrest using the seatswitch. The seat could otherwise bedamaged.

X Press and hold the relevant memory button1, 2 or 3, until the seat, head restraints,steering wheel and mirrors are in the storedposition.

i The setting procedure is interrupted assoon as you release the memory button.

96 Memory functionsSe

ats,

ste

erin

g w

heel

and

mirr

ors

Useful information .............................. 98Exterior lighting .................................. 98Interior lighting ................................. 105Replacing bulbs ................................. 108Windshield wipers ............................ 114

97

Ligh

ts a

nd w

inds

hiel

d w

iper

s

Useful information

i This Operator's Manual describes allmodels and all standard and optionalequipment of your vehicle available at thetime of publication of the Operator'sManual. Country-specific differences arepossible. Please note that your vehicle maynot be equipped with all featuresdescribed. This also applies to safety-related systems and functions.

i Read the information on qualifiedspecialist workshops: (Y page 23).

Exterior lighting

Important safety notesFor reasons of safety, Mercedes-Benzrecommends that you drive with the lightsswitched on even during the daytime. In somecountries, operation of the headlamps variesdue to legal requirements and self-imposedobligations.

Driving abroad

Conversion to symmetrical low beamSwitch the headlamps to symmetrical lowbeam in countries in which traffic drives onthe opposite side of the road from the countrywhere the vehicle is registered. This preventsglare to oncoming traffic. When usingsymmetrical lights, the edge of the road is notlit as widely and as far ahead as normal.Have the headlamps converted at a qualifiedspecialist workshop as close to the border aspossible before driving in these countries.

Conversion to asymmetrical low beamafter returningHave the headlamps converted back toasymmetrical low-beam headlamps at aqualified specialist workshop as soon aspossible after crossing the border again.

Light switch

Operation! Switch off the parking lamps and low-

beam headlamps when you leave thevehicle. This prevents the battery fromdischarging.

! If the battery has been excessivelydischarged, the parking lamps or standinglamps are automatically switched off toenable the next engine start. Always parkyour vehicle safely and sufficiently litaccording to legal standards. Avoid thecontinuous use of the T parking lampsfor several hours. If possible, switch on theX right or the W left standing lamp.

1W Left-hand standing lamps2X Right-hand standing lamps3T Parking lamps, side marker lamps,

license plate and instrument clusterlighting

4Ã Automatic headlamp mode/daytimerunning lamps

5L Low-beam/high-beam headlamps

If you hear a warning tone when you leave thevehicle, the lights may still be switched on.X Turn the light switch to Ã.The turn signals, high-beam headlamps andthe high-beam flasher are operated using thecombination switch (Y page 103).

98 Exterior lightingLi

ghts

and

win

dshi

eld

wip

ers

The exterior lighting (except the parking/standing lamps) switches off automatically ifyou:Rremove the SmartKey from the ignition lockRopen the driver's door with the SmartKey

in position 0.

Low-beam headlamps

1W Left-hand standing lamps2X Right-hand standing lamps3T Parking lamps, side marker lamps,

license plate and instrument clusterlighting

4Ã Automatic headlamp mode/daytimerunning lamps

5L Low-beam/high-beam headlampsX To switch on the low-beam headlamps:

turn the SmartKey in the ignition lock toposition 2 or start the engine.

X Turn the light switch to L.The L indicator lamp in the instrumentcluster lights up.

Daytime running lamps

Daytime running lamps in Canada

1W Left-hand standing lamps2X Right-hand standing lamps3T Parking lamps, side marker lamps,

license plate and instrument clusterlighting

4Ã Automatic headlamp mode/daytimerunning lamps

5L Low-beam/high-beam headlamps

The daytime running lamps function isrequired by law in Canada. It cannot thereforebe deactivated.X Turn the light switch to Ã.

With the engine running: depending on theambient light, the daytime running lamps orthe low-beam headlamps are switched on.When the low-beam headlamps areswitched on, the L indicator lamp in theinstrument cluster lights up.

When the engine is running and the vehicle isstationary: if you move the selector lever froma drive position to P, the daytime runninglamps/low-beam headlamps go out afterthree minutes.When the engine is running, the vehicle isstationary and in high ambient lightbrightness: if you turn the light switchto T, you turn on the daytime runninglamps and parking lamps.If the engine is running and you turn the lightswitch to L, the manual settings takeprecedence over the daytime running lamps.

Exterior lighting 99

Ligh

ts a

nd w

inds

hiel

d w

iper

s

Daytime running lamps in the USA

1W Left-hand standing lamps2X Right-hand standing lamps3T Parking lamps, side marker lamps,

license plate and instrument clusterlighting

4Ã Automatic headlamp mode/daytimerunning lamps

5L Low-beam/high-beam headlamps

In the USA, the daytime running lamps aredeactivated upon delivery from the factory.X To activate the daytime running

lamps: activate the daytime running lampsfunction in the on-board computer(Y page 219).

X Turn the light switch to Ã.With the engine running: depending on theambient light, the daytime running lamps orthe low-beam headlamps are switched on.When the low-beam headlamps areswitched on, the L indicator lamp in theinstrument cluster lights up.

If the engine is running and you turn the lightswitch to T or L, the manual settingstake precedence over the daytime runninglamps.

Automatic headlamp mode

G WARNINGIf the light switch is set to à and it is foggy,snowing or there is poor visibility, the low-beam headlamps will not come onautomatically. This could endanger you and

others. In such situations turn the light switchto L.The automatic headlamp feature is only anaid. The driver is responsible for the vehicle'slighting at all times.

1W Left-hand standing lamps2X Right-hand standing lamps3T Parking lamps, side marker lamps,

license plate and instrument clusterlighting

4Ã Automatic headlamp mode/daytimerunning lamps

5L Low-beam/high-beam headlampsX To switch on automatic headlamp

mode: turn the light switch to Ã.SmartKey in position 1 in the ignition lock:the parking lamps are switched on or offautomatically depending on the brightnessof the ambient light.With the engine running: if you haveactivated the daytime running lampsfunction in the on-board computer, thedaytime running lamps or the low-beamheadlamps are switched on or offautomatically depending on the brightnessof the ambient light.When the low-beam headlamps areswitched on, the L indicator lamp in theinstrument cluster lights up.

100 Exterior lightingLi

ghts

and

win

dshi

eld

wip

ers

Front fog lamps (except AMG vehicles)

G WARNINGIf you suspect that driving conditions will befoggy, turn the light switch to L before youstart your journey. Your vehicle mayotherwise not be visible and you couldendanger yourself and others.

1W Left-hand standing lamps2X Right-hand standing lamps3T Parking lamps, side marker lamps,

license plate and instrument clusterlighting

4Ã Automatic headlamp mode/daytimerunning lamps

5L Low-beam/high-beam headlampsBN Fog lamps (except AMG vehicles)CR Rear fog lampX To switch on the fog lamps: turn the

SmartKey in the ignition lock to position 2or start the engine.

X Turn the light switch to T, L orÃ.

X Press the N button.The green N indicator lamp in theinstrument cluster lights up.

X To switch off the front fog lamps: pressthe N button.The green N indicator lamp in theinstrument cluster goes out.

Only vehicles with front fog lamps have thefog lamps function.

Rear fog lamp

1W Left-hand standing lamps2X Right-hand standing lamps3T Parking lamps, side marker lamps,

license plate and instrument clusterlighting

4Ã Automatic headlamp mode/daytimerunning lamps

5L Low-beam/high-beam headlampsBN Fog lamps (except AMG vehicles)CR Rear fog lamp

Exterior lighting 101

Ligh

ts a

nd w

inds

hiel

d w

iper

s

Z

X To switch on the rear fog lamp: turn theSmartKey in the ignition lock to position 2or start the engine.

X Turn the light switch to L or Ã.X Press the R button.

The yellow R indicator lamp in theinstrument cluster lights up.

X To switch off the rear fog lamp: press theR button.The yellow R indicator lamp in theinstrument cluster goes out.

Parking lamps

1W Left-hand standing lamps2X Right-hand standing lamps3T Parking lamps, side marker lamps,

license plate and instrument clusterlighting

4Ã Automatic headlamp mode/daytimerunning lamps

5L Low-beam/high-beam headlamps

BN Fog lamps (except AMG vehicles)CR Rear fog lampX To switch on: turn light switch to T.

Standing lamps

1W Left-hand standing lamps2X Right-hand standing lamps3T Parking lamps, side marker lamps,

license plate and instrument clusterlighting

4Ã Automatic headlamp mode/daytimerunning lamps

5L Low-beam/high-beam headlampsBN Fog lamps (except AMG vehicles)CR Rear fog lamp

Switching on the standing lamps ensures thecorresponding side of the vehicle isilluminated.

102 Exterior lightingLi

ghts

and

win

dshi

eld

wip

ers

X To switch on the parking lamps: theSmartKey is not inserted in the ignition lockor it is in position 0(Y page 139).

X Turn the light switch to W (left-hand sideof the vehicle) or X (right-hand side ofthe vehicle).

Headlamp cleaning systemThe headlamps are cleaned automatically ifthe "Wipe with washer fluid" function isoperated ten times while the lights are on andthe engine is running (Y page 114). When youswitch off the ignition, the automaticheadlamp cleaning system is reset andcounting is resumed from 0.

Combination switch

Turn signals

: High-beam headlamps; Turn signal, right= High-beam flasher? Turn signal, leftX To indicate briefly: press the combination

switch briefly to the pressure point in thedirection of arrow ; or ?.The corresponding turn signal flashes threetimes.

X To indicate: press the combination switchbeyond the pressure point in the directionof arrow ; or ?.

High-beam headlamps

: High-beam headlamps; Turn signal, right= High-beam flasher? Turn signal, leftX To switch on the high-beam headlamps:

turn the SmartKey in the ignition lock toposition 2 or start the engine.

X Turn the light switch to L or Ã.X Press the combination switch beyond the

pressure point in the direction ofarrow :.In the à position, the high-beamheadlamps are only switched on when it isdark and the engine is running.The blue K indicator lamp in theinstrument cluster lights up when the high-beam headlamps are switched on.

X To switch off the high-beam headlamps: move the combination switchback to its normal position.The blue K indicator lamp in theinstrument cluster goes out.

Exterior lighting 103

Ligh

ts a

nd w

inds

hiel

d w

iper

s

Z

High-beam flasher

: High-beam headlamps; Turn signal, right= High-beam flasher? Turn signal, leftX To switch on: turn the SmartKey in the

ignition lock to position 1 or 2 or start theengine.

X Pull the combination switch briefly in thedirection of arrow =.

Hazard warning lamps

X To switch on the hazard warning lamps: press button :.All turn signals flash. If you now switch ona turn signal using the combination switch,only the turn signal lamp on thecorresponding side of the vehicle will flash.

X To switch off the hazard warning lamps: press button :.

The hazard warning lamps automaticallyswitch on if:Ran air bag is deployedRthe Emergency Tensioning Devices are

triggered, orRthe vehicle is slowed down rapidly from a

speed of over 45 mph (70 km/h) andcomes to a halt

The hazard warning lamps switch onautomatically if an air bag or the EmergencyTensioning Devices are triggered and theSmartKey is in position 1 in the ignition lock.The hazard warning lamps switch offautomatically if the vehicle reaches a speedof over 6mph (10km/h) again after a fullbrake application.

i The hazard warning lamps still operate ifthe ignition is switched off.

Cornering light function

The cornering light function improves theillumination of the road over a wide angle inthe direction you are turning, enabling bettervisibility in tight bends, for example. Thecornering light function can only be activatedif the low-beam headlamps are switched onand the fog lamps are switched off.Active: if you are driving at speeds below25 mph (40 km/h) and switch on the turnsignal or turn the steering wheelNot active: if you are driving at speeds above25 mph (40 km/h) or switch off the turn

104 Exterior lightingLi

ghts

and

win

dshi

eld

wip

ers

signal or turn the steering wheel to thestraight-ahead positionThe cornering light function may remain lit fora short time, but is automatically switched offafter no more than three minutes.

Headlamps and indicator lampsfogged up on the inside

The headlamps and the indicator lamps in theexterior mirrors may fog up on the inside ifthere is high atmospheric humidity.X Drive with the headlamps switched on.

The level of moisture diminishes,depending on the length of the journey andthe weather conditions (humidity andtemperature).

If the level of moisture does not diminish:X Have the headlamps checked at a qualified

specialist workshop.

Interior lighting

Overview of interior lighting

Front overhead control panel: p Switches the left-hand front reading

lamp on/off; c Switches the front interior lighting

on= t Switches the cargo compartment

lamp/rear interior lighting on/off? | Switches the front interior lighting/

automatic interior lighting control off

A p Switches the right-hand readinglamp on/off

B Switches the automatic interior lightingcontrol on

Rear-compartment overhead control panel: p Switches the right-hand reading

lamp on/off; p Switches the left-hand reading lamp

on/off

Interior lighting control

General notesIn order to prevent the vehicle's battery fromdischarging, the interior lighting functions areautomatically deactivated after some timeunless the SmartKey is in position 2 in theignition lock.The brightness of the ambient lighting may beset using the control on the instrumentcluster (Y page 209).

Interior lighting 105

Ligh

ts a

nd w

inds

hiel

d w

iper

s

Z

Automatic interior lighting control

Front overhead control panel: p Switches the left-hand front reading

lamp on/off; c Switches the front interior lighting

on= t Switches the cargo compartment

lamp/rear interior lighting on/off? | Switches the front interior lighting/

automatic interior lighting control offA p Switches the right-hand reading

lamp on/offB Switches the automatic interior lighting

control onX To switch on: set rocker switch B to the

center position.The interior lighting switches onautomatically when it is dark if you:Runlock the vehicleRopen a doorRremove the SmartKey from the ignition lockX To switch off: press the | symbol on

rocker switch B.The interior lighting remains switched offeven when it is dark if you:Runlock the vehicleRopen a door.Rremove the SmartKey from the ignition lockThe interior light is activated for a short whilewhen the SmartKey is removed from theignition lock. You can activate this delayedswitch-off using the on-board computer(Y page 220).

When a front door is opened, the front interiorlighting comes on. When a rear door isopened, the rear interior lighting comes on.In addition, the courtesy lights come on.

i If a door remains open and the SmartKeyis not in the ignition lock, the interiorlighting switches off after a short while.

Manual interior lighting control

Front interior lighting! If the interior lighting has been switched

on manually, it will not be switched offautomatically.This can cause the starter battery todischarge.Make sure that the interior lighting doesnot remain switched on too long after theengine has been switched off.

Front overhead control panel: p Switches the left-hand front reading

lamp on/off; c Switches the front interior lighting

on= t Switches the cargo compartment

lamp/rear interior lighting on/off? | Switches the front interior lighting/

automatic interior lighting control offA p Switches the right-hand reading

lamp on/offB Switches the automatic interior lighting

control on

106 Interior lightingLi

ghts

and

win

dshi

eld

wip

ers

X To switch on: press the c symbol onrocker switch B.

X To switch off: set rocker switch B to thecenter position.

Reading lamps

Front overhead control panel: p Switches the left-hand front reading

lamp on/off; c Switches the front interior lighting

on= t Switches the cargo compartment

lamp/rear interior lighting on/off? | Switches the front interior lighting/

automatic interior lighting control offA p Switches the right-hand reading

lamp on/offB Switches the automatic interior lighting

control onX To activate/deactivate: press the p

button.

Cargo compartment lampG WARNINGTo prevent possible personal injury, alwayskeep hands and fingers away from the cargocompartment opening when closing thetailgate. Be especially careful when smallchildren are around.

G WARNINGMake sure the tailgate is closed when theengine is running and while driving. Amongother dangers, deadly carbon monoxide (CO)

gases may enter vehicle interior resulting inunconsciousness and death.

! Switch off the cargo compartment lamp ifyou wish to leave the rear door open for alonger period. The battery may otherwisedischarge.

! Do not close the rear door while lock :is engaged at the bottom. Otherwise, youcould damage lock :.

Front overhead control panel: p Switches the left-hand front reading

lamp on/off; c Switches the front interior lighting

on= t Switches the cargo compartment

lamp/rear interior lighting on/off? | Switches the front interior lighting/

automatic interior lighting control offA p Switches the right-hand reading

lamp on/offB Switches the automatic interior lighting

control onX To switch on/off: press the t button.i If you open the rear door, the cargo

compartment lamp comes on. You will thenbe unable to switch it off using the tbutton.Switch off the cargo compartment lamp ifyou wish to leave the rear door open for alonger period. This prevents the batteryfrom discharging.

Interior lighting 107

Ligh

ts a

nd w

inds

hiel

d w

iper

s

Z

X Open the rear door.X To switch off with the rear door open:

press lock : down in the direction of thearrow until it engages.The cargo compartment lamp is switchedoff.

X To switch on with the rear door open:press lock cylinder ; on the door handle.The cargo compartment lamp resumes itsnormal function.

Rear interior lighting

Front overhead control panel: p Switches the left-hand front reading

lamp on/off; c Switches the front interior lighting

on= t Switches the cargo compartment

lamp/rear interior lighting on/off? | Switches the front interior lighting/

automatic interior lighting control off

A p Switches the right-hand readinglamp on/off

B Switches the automatic interior lightingcontrol on

X To switch on/off: press the t button.i The rear interior lighting switches on

when you open a rear door. You will thenbe unable to switch it off using the tbutton.Switch off the rear interior lighting if youwish to leave the rear doors open for alonger period. This prevents the batteryfrom discharging.

Replacing bulbs

Important safety notes

Xenon bulbs

G DANGERXenon bulbs carry a high voltage. You couldget an electric shock and be seriously or evenfatally injured if you touch the electriccontacts on Xenon bulbs. Therefore, neverremove the cover from Xenon bulbs.Do not change the Xenon bulbs yourself, buthave them replaced at a qualified workshop.

If your vehicle is equipped with Xenon bulbs,you can recognize this by the following: thecone of light from the Xenon bulbs movesfrom the top to the bottom and back againwhen you start the engine. For this to beobserved, the lights must be switched onbefore starting the engine.Bulbs and lamps are an important aspect ofvehicle safety. You must therefore make surethat these function correctly at all times.Have the headlamp setting checked regularly.

LED lampsYou can neither replace Xenon bulbs nor LEDbulbs. Have LED bulbs changed at a qualifiedspecialist workshop.

108 Replacing bulbsLi

ghts

and

win

dshi

eld

wip

ers

Bulbs and lamps are an important aspect ofvehicle safety. You must therefore make surethat these function correctly at all times.Have the headlamp setting checked regularly.

Other bulbs

G WARNINGBulbs and lamps can become very hot. Forthis reason, allow them to cool down beforechanging them. Otherwise, you could burnyourself when you touch them.Keep bulbs out of the reach of children.Otherwise, they could, for example, damagethe bulbs and injure themselves.Never use a bulb which has been dropped.Such a bulb may explode and injure you.Halogen bulbs are pressurized and couldexplode when you change them, especially ifthey are very hot. You should therefore weareye protection and gloves when you arechanging them.

There are bulbs other than the Xenon bulbsthat you cannot replace. Replace only thebulbs listed (Y page 109). Have the bulbs thatyou cannot replace yourself changed at aqualified specialist workshop.If you require assistance changing bulbs,consult a qualified specialist workshop.Do not touch the glass tube of new bulbs withyour bare hands. Even minor contaminationcan burn into the glass surface and reducethe service life of the bulbs. Always use a lint-free cloth or only touch the base of the bulbwhen installing.Only use bulbs of the correct type.If the new bulb still does not light up, consulta qualified specialist workshop.Bulbs and lamps are an important aspect ofvehicle safety. You must therefore make surethat these function correctly at all times.Have the headlamp setting checked regularly.

Before changing bulbsHave the following bulbs changed at aqualified specialist workshop:RAdditional turn signals in the exterior

mirrorsRHigh-mounted brake lampRHigh-beam/low-beam headlamps (Xenon

bulbs)RDaytime running lampsRParking lamp/standing lampRLicense plate lamp

i Individual segments of the license platelamp LEDs may fail without a displaymessage appearing in the multifunctiondisplay. Regularly check the license platelamp. If necessary, visit a qualifiedspecialist workshop.

You can replace the following bulbs:RFog lamp/cornering light with fog lamp

functionRTurn signal lamp (front)RBrake/tail lampRTurn signal lamp (rear)RTail lamp/standing lampRBackup lampRRear fog lampRSide marker lamps

Overview: changing bulbs/bulb types

Front lampsYou can change the following bulbs. The bulbtype can be found in the legend.

Replacing bulbs 109

Ligh

ts a

nd w

inds

hiel

d w

iper

s

Z

: Turn signal lamp: 1156 NA; Side marker lamp: T 4 W= Cornering light function with fog lamp

function: H11 55 W (except AMG vehicles)

Rear lampsYou can change the following bulbs. The bulbtype can be found in the legend.

: Tail lamp/standing lamp: W 5 W; Brake lamp/tail lamp: P 21/5 W= Turn signal lamp: PY 21 W? Side marker lamp: T 4 WA Backup lamp: P 21 WB Rear fog lamp: P 21 W

Changing the front bulbs

Front fog lamps/cornering lamps withfog lamp function

X Switch off the lights.X Unscrew screws :.X Remove cover ;.

X Unscrew screws =.i Only remove screws =. Do not turn

adjustment screw ?. If adjustmentscrew ? has been turned, the front foglamp adjustment must be checked at aqualified workshop.

X Remove lamp A.

110 Replacing bulbsLi

ghts

and

win

dshi

eld

wip

ers

X Hold lamp A.X Lightly press bulb holder B, turn it

counter-clockwise to the stop and pull itout.

X Take bulb C out of bulb holder B.X Insert the new bulb into bulb holder B.X Insert bulb holder B into lamp A and turn

it clockwise to the stop.

X Insert lamp A.X Replace and tighten screws =.

X Position cover ;.X Replace and tighten screws :.

Turn signals! Make sure that the protective grille does

not hit any painted surfaces.You could otherwise damage thepaintwork.

! Do not fasten the screws too tightly. Youcould otherwise damage the lens.

Turn signal lamp with protection grille (AMGvehicles)X Switch off the lights.X AMG vehicles: pull protection grille : in

the direction of the arrow out ofmounting ;.

X Fold up protection grille :.

Example: turn signal lampX Switch off the lights.X Unscrew screws =.X Remove lens ?.

Example: turn signal lamp

Replacing bulbs 111

Ligh

ts a

nd w

inds

hiel

d w

iper

s

Z

X Turn bulb A counter-clockwise, applyingslight pressure, and remove it from the bulbholder.

X Insert the new bulb into the bulb holder andturn it clockwise until it engages.

X Install lens ?.X Replace and tighten screws =.

X AMG vehicles: fold down protectiongrille : and allow it to engage inmounting ;.

Side marker lamps! Do not fasten the screws too tightly. You

could otherwise damage the lens.

Front side marker lamp (example)

The bulbs of the front and rear side markerlamps are changed in the same way.X Switch off the lights.X Unscrew screws :.X Remove housing ;.

X Remove dust cover =.X Push the catch to the side and pull the bulb

holder with the bulb out of housing ;.

X Lightly press bulb ?, turn it counter-clockwise and pull it out.

X Insert the new bulb and, applying slightpressure, turn it clockwise until it engages.

X Insert the bulb holder into housing ;.X Attach dust cover =.X Insert housing ;.X Replace and tighten screws :.

Changing the rear bulbs

G 55 AMG only: protective grille! Make sure that the protective grille does

not hit any painted surfaces.You could otherwise damage thepaintwork.

Protection grille (AMG vehicles)

You must remove the protective grille beforeyou can change the bulbs in the tail lamps.

112 Replacing bulbsLi

ghts

and

win

dshi

eld

wip

ers

X Unscrew screws ;.X Swing protection grille : to the right.X After changing the bulbs, swing protection

grille : to the left.X Tighten screws ;.

Tail lamp! When installing the lens, make sure that

the seal is positioned correctly.

! Do not fasten the screws too tightly. Youcould otherwise damage the lens.

X Switch off the lights.X Unscrew screws :.X Remove lens ;.

= Turn signals? Brake/tail lampA Tail lamp/standing lamp

X Turn the bulb counterclockwise, applyingslight pressure, and remove it from bulbholder.

X Insert the new bulb into the bulb holder andturn it clockwise until it engages.

X Install lens ;.X Replace and tighten screws :.X AMG vehicles: secure the protection grille

(Y page 112).

Backup lamp/rear fog lamp! Do not fasten the screws too tightly. You

could otherwise damage the lens.

Example: rear fog lampX Switch off the lights.X Unscrew screws ;.X Remove lens :.

X Turn bulb = counter-clockwise, applyingslight pressure, and remove it from the bulbholder.

X Insert the new bulb into the bulb holder andturn it clockwise until it engages.

Replacing bulbs 113

Ligh

ts a

nd w

inds

hiel

d w

iper

s

Z

X Install lens :.X Replace and tighten screws ;.

Windshield wipers

Switching the windshield wipers on/off

G WARNINGThe windshield will not longer be wipedproperly if the wiper blades are worn. Thiscould prevent you from observing the trafficconditions, thereby causing an accident.Replace the wiper blades twice a year, ideallyin spring and fall.

! Do not operate the windshield wiperswhen the windshield is dry, as this coulddamage the wiper blades. Moreover, dustthat has collected on the windshield/rearwindow can scratch the glass if wipingtakes place when the windshield/rearwindow is dry.If it is necessary to switch on the windshieldwipers in dry weather conditions, alwaysuse washer fluid when operating thewindshield wipers.

! If the windshield wipers leave smears onthe windshield/rear window after thevehicle has been washed in an automaticcar wash, this may be due to wax or otherresidue. Clean the windshield/rear windowwith washer fluid after an automatic carwash.

! Intermittent wiping with rain sensor: dueto optical influences and the windshieldbecoming dirty in dry weather conditions,the windshield wipers may be activatedinadvertently. This could then damage thewindshield wiper blades or scratch thewindshield.For this reason, you should always switchoff the windshield wipers in dry weather.

Combination switch1 $ Windshield wipers off2 Ä Intermittent wipe, low (rain sensor

set to low sensitivity)3 Å Intermittent wipe, high (rain sensor

set to high sensitivity)4 ° Continuous wipe, slow5 ¯ Continuous wipe, fastB í Single wipeC î To wipe with washer fluidX Switch on the ignition.X Turn the combination switch to the

corresponding position.Intermittent wiping is interrupted if you stopand open a front door. This protects peoplegetting into and out of the vehicle from beingsprayed with water.Intermittent wiping continues when all doorsare closed and:Ryou shift the automatic transmission to

drive position D or reverse gear RorRyou change the wipe setting on the

combination switch.In the Ä or Å position, the appropriatewiping frequency is set automaticallyaccording to the intensity of the rain. Inthe Å position, the rain sensor is moresensitive than in the Ä position, causingthe windshield wipers to wipe morefrequently.

114 Windshield wipersLi

ghts

and

win

dshi

eld

wip

ers

Switching the rear window wiper on/off

Combination switch: è Switch2 b To wipe with washer fluid3 I To switch on intermittent wiping4 0 To switch off intermittent wiping5 b To wipe with washer fluidX Turn the SmartKey to position 1 or 2 in the

ignition lock.X Turn switch : on the combination switch

to the corresponding position.When the rear window wiper is switched on,the icon appears in the instrument cluster.

i The rear window wiper comes onautomatically if you shift the selector leverto R while the windshield wipers are on.

Replacing the wiper blades

Important safety notes

G WARNINGFor safety reasons, switch off the wipers andremove the SmartKey from the starter switchbefore replacing a wiper blade. Otherwise, thewiper motor could suddenly turn on and causeinjury.

! To avoid damaging the wiper blades,make sure that you touch only the wiperarm of the wiper.

! Never open the hood if a windshield wiperarm has been folded away from thewindshield.Never fold a windshield wiper arm withouta wiper blade back onto the windshield/rear window.Hold the windshield wiper arm firmly whenyou change the wiper blade. If you releasethe windshield wiper arm without a wiperblade and it falls onto the windshield, thewindshield may be damaged by the force ofthe impact.Mercedes-Benz recommends that you havethe wiper blades changed at a qualifiedspecialist workshop.

Removing the wiper blade

: Windshield wiper arm; Wiper blade= Locking spring? Hinge pieceX Remove the SmartKey from the ignition

lock.X Fold wiper arm : away from the

windshield until it engages.X Position wiper blade ; horizontally.X Press locking spring =.X Slide wiper blade ; with hinge piece ?

from wiper arm :.

Windshield wipers 115

Ligh

ts a

nd w

inds

hiel

d w

iper

s

Z

Installing the wiper blade

: Windshield wiper arm; Wiper blade= Locking spring? Hinge pieceX Slide new wiper blade ; with the recess

onto wiper arm :.X Engage locking spring = into the end of

the wiper arm.X Make sure that wiper blade ; is seated

correctly.X Fold wiper arm : back onto the

windshield.

Problems with the windshield wipers

The windshield wipers are obstructedLeaves or snow, for example, may beobstructing the windshield wiper movement.The wiper motor has been deactivated.X For safety reasons, you should remove the

SmartKey from the ignition lock.X Remove the cause of the obstruction.X Switch the windshield wipers back on.

The windshield wipers are inoperativeThe windshield wiper drive is malfunctioning.X Select another wiper speed on the

combination switch.X Have the windshield wipers checked at a

qualified specialist workshop.

116 Windshield wipersLi

ghts

and

win

dshi

eld

wip

ers

Useful information ............................ 118Overview of climate control sys-tems ................................................... 118Operating the climate control sys-tems ................................................... 121Setting the air vents ......................... 134

117

Clim

ate

cont

rol

Useful information

i This Operator's Manual describes allmodels and all standard and optionalequipment of your vehicle available at thetime of publication of the Operator'sManual. Country-specific differences arepossible. Please note that your vehicle maynot be equipped with all featuresdescribed. This also applies to safety-related systems and functions.

i Read the information on qualifiedspecialist workshops: (Y page 23).

Overview of climate control systems

Important safety notes

G WARNINGSevere conditions (e.g. strong air pollution)may require replacement of the filter beforeits scheduled replacement interval. A cloggedfilter will reduce the air volume to the interiorand the windows could fog up, impairingvisibility and endangering you and others.Have a blocked filter replaced at a Mercedes-Benz Center as soon as possible.

G WARNINGFollow the recommended settings for heatingand cooling given on the following pages.Otherwise, the windows could fog up,impairing visibility and endangering you andothers.

Automatic climate control controls thetemperature and the humidity in the vehicleinterior and filters undesirable substancesfrom the air.Automatic climate control is only operationalwhen the engine is running. Optimumoperation is only achieved if you drive with theside windows and sliding sunroof closed.The climatic comfort deteriorates whilst thesliding sunroof is open. The automatic climatecontrol cannot maintain the set temperature

with the sliding sunroof open. You have toadjust the climate control manually.

i The "residual heat" function can only beactivated or deactivated with the ignitionswitched off.

i The residual heat function can only beactivated or deactivated with the ignitionswitched off (Y page 134).

i Ventilate the vehicle for a brief periodduring warm weather, e.g. using theconvenience opening feature (Y page 78).This will speed up the cooling process andthe desired vehicle interior temperaturewill be reached more quickly.

i The integrated filter can filter out mostparticles of dust, and completely filters outpollen. A clogged filter reduces the amountof air supplied to the vehicle interior. Forthis reason, you should always observe theinterval for replacing the filter, which isspecified in the Maintenance Booklet.Since the replacement interval depends onenvironmental conditions, e.g. heavy airpollution, the interval may be shorter thanstated in the Maintenance Booklet.

118 Overview of climate control systemsCl

imat

e co

ntro

l

Control panel for dual-zone automatic climate control

Canada only: Sets the temperature, left (Y page 131); Defrosts the windshield (Y page 131)= Switches the ZONE function on/off (Y page 131)? Activates/deactivates cooling with air dehumidification (Y page 124)A Switches the rear window defroster on/off(Y page 133)B Sets the temperature, right (Y page 131)C Activates/deactivates air-recirculation mode (Y page 134)D Sets the air distribution (Y page 131)E Increases the airflow (Y page 131)F Reduces the airflow (Y page 131)G DisplayH Switches climate control on/off (Y page 121)I Sets climate control to automatic (Y page 130)

Overview of climate control systems 119

Clim

ate

cont

rol

Z

USA only: Sets the temperature, left (Y page 131); Defrosts the windshield (Y page 131)= Switches maximum cooling MAX COOL on/off (Y page 132)? Activates/deactivates cooling with air dehumidification (Y page 124)A Switches the rear window defroster on/off(Y page 133)B Sets the temperature, right (Y page 131)C Activates/deactivates air-recirculation mode (Y page 134)D Sets the air distribution (Y page 131)E Increases the airflow (Y page 131)F Reduces the airflow (Y page 131)G DisplayH Switches climate control on/off (Y page 121)I Sets climate control to automatic (Y page 130)

Information about using automaticclimate control

The following contains notes andrecommendations on optimum use ofautomatic climate control.RActivate climate control using the à andÁ buttons. The indicator lamps in theà and Á buttons light up.RSet the temperature to 72 ‡ (22 †).ROnly use the "defrosting" function briefly

until the windshield is clear again.

ROnly use "air-recirculation" mode briefly,e.g. if there are unpleasant outside odorsor when in a tunnel. The windows couldotherwise fog up, since no fresh air is drawninto the vehicle in air-recirculation mode.RUse the ZONE function to adopt the

temperature settings on the driver's sidefor the front-passenger side as well. Theindicator lamp in the á button goes out.

120 Overview of climate control systemsCl

imat

e co

ntro

l

Operating the climate control systems

Activating/deactivating climate control

Points to observe before use

G WARNINGWhen the climate control system is deactivated, the outside air supply and circulation are alsodeactivated. Only choose this setting for a short time. Otherwise the windows could fog up,impairing visibility and endangering you and others.

Switching the air conditioning on

Canada only: Sets the temperature, left (Y page 131); Defrosts the windshield (Y page 131)= Switches the ZONE function on/off (Y page 131)? Activates/deactivates cooling with air dehumidification (Y page 124)A Switches the rear window defroster on/off(Y page 133)B Sets the temperature, right (Y page 131)C Activates/deactivates air-recirculation mode (Y page 134)D Sets the air distribution (Y page 131)E Increases the airflow (Y page 131)F Reduces the airflow (Y page 131)G DisplayH Switches climate control on/off (Y page 121)I Sets climate control to automatic (Y page 130)

Operating the climate control systems 121

Clim

ate

cont

rol

Z

X Turn the SmartKey to position 2 (Y page 139) in the ignition lock.X Press the à button.

The indicator lamp in the à button lights up. Airflow and air distribution are set toautomatic mode.

orX Press the ^ button.

The indicator lamp in the ^ button goes out. The previously selected settings arerestored.

USA only: Sets the temperature, left (Y page 131); Defrosts the windshield (Y page 131)= Switches maximum cooling MAX COOL on/off (Y page 132)? Activates/deactivates cooling with air dehumidification (Y page 124)A Switches the rear window defroster on/off(Y page 133)B Sets the temperature, right (Y page 131)C Activates/deactivates air-recirculation mode (Y page 134)D Sets the air distribution (Y page 131)E Increases the airflow (Y page 131)F Reduces the airflow (Y page 131)G DisplayH Switches climate control on/off (Y page 121)I Sets climate control to automatic (Y page 130)

122 Operating the climate control systemsCl

imat

e co

ntro

l

X Turn the SmartKey to position 2 (Y page 139) in the ignition lock.X Press the à button.

The indicator lamp in the à button lights up. Airflow and air distribution are set toautomatic mode.

orX Press the ^ button.

The indicator lamp in the ^ button goes out. The previously selected settings arerestored.

Switching off climate control

Canada only: Sets the temperature, left (Y page 131); Defrosts the windshield (Y page 131)= Switches the ZONE function on/off (Y page 131)? Activates/deactivates cooling with air dehumidification (Y page 124)A Switches the rear window defroster on/off(Y page 133)B Sets the temperature, right (Y page 131)C Activates/deactivates air-recirculation mode (Y page 134)D Sets the air distribution (Y page 131)E Increases the airflow (Y page 131)F Reduces the airflow (Y page 131)G DisplayH Switches climate control on/off (Y page 121)I Sets climate control to automatic (Y page 130)X Press the ^ button.

The indicator lamp in the ^ button lights up.

Operating the climate control systems 123

Clim

ate

cont

rol

Z

USA only: Sets the temperature, left (Y page 131); Defrosts the windshield (Y page 131)= Switches maximum cooling MAX COOL on/off (Y page 132)? Activates/deactivates cooling with air dehumidification (Y page 124)A Switches the rear window defroster on/off(Y page 133)B Sets the temperature, right (Y page 131)C Activates/deactivates air-recirculation mode (Y page 134)D Sets the air distribution (Y page 131)E Increases the airflow (Y page 131)F Reduces the airflow (Y page 131)G DisplayH Switches climate control on/off (Y page 121)I Sets climate control to automatic (Y page 130)X Press the ^ button.

The indicator lamp in the ^ button lights up.

Activating/deactivating cooling with air dehumidification

Points to observe before use

G WARNINGIf you switch off the cooling function, the vehicle will not be cooled when weather conditions arewarm. The windows can fog up more quickly. Window fogging may impair visibility and endangeryou and others.

The cooling with air dehumidification function is only available when the engine is running.The air inside the vehicle is cooled and dehumidified according to the temperature selected.

124 Operating the climate control systemsCl

imat

e co

ntro

l

Condensation may drip from the underside of the vehicle when it is in cooling mode. This isnormal and not a sign that there is a malfunction.

i The cooling with air dehumidification function uses refrigerant R134a. This coolant doesnot contain chlorofluorocarbons, and therefore does not damage the ozone layer.

Activating the cooling with air dehumidification function! If the cooling with air dehumidification does not switch on, it is possible that the climate

control system has lost coolant.Have the cooling with air dehumidification checked at a qualified specialist workshop.

Canada only: Sets the temperature, left (Y page 131); Defrosts the windshield (Y page 131)= Switches the ZONE function on/off (Y page 131)? Activates/deactivates cooling with air dehumidification (Y page 124)A Switches the rear window defroster on/off (Y page 133)B Sets the temperature, right (Y page 131)C Activates/deactivates air-recirculation mode (Y page 134)D Sets the air distribution (Y page 131)E Increases the airflow (Y page 131)F Reduces the airflow (Y page 131)G DisplayH Switches climate control on/off (Y page 121)I Sets climate control to automatic (Y page 130)X Press the Á button.

The indicator lamp in the Á button lights up.

Operating the climate control systems 125

Clim

ate

cont

rol

Z

USA only: Sets the temperature, left (Y page 131); Defrosts the windshield (Y page 131)= Switches maximum cooling MAX COOL on/off (Y page 132)? Activates/deactivates cooling with air dehumidification (Y page 124)A Switches the rear window defroster on/off (Y page 133)B Sets the temperature, right (Y page 131)C Activates/deactivates air-recirculation mode (Y page 134)D Sets the air distribution (Y page 131)E Increases the airflow (Y page 131)F Reduces the airflow (Y page 131)G DisplayH Switches climate control on/off (Y page 121)I Sets climate control to automatic (Y page 130)X Press the Á button.

The indicator lamp in the Á button lights up.

126 Operating the climate control systemsCl

imat

e co

ntro

l

Deactivating the cooling with air dehumidification function

Canada only: Sets the temperature, left (Y page 131); Defrosts the windshield (Y page 131)= Switches the ZONE function on/off (Y page 131)? Activates/deactivates cooling with air dehumidification (Y page 124)A Switches the rear window defroster on/off (Y page 133)B Sets the temperature, right (Y page 131)C Activates/deactivates air-recirculation mode (Y page 134)D Sets the air distribution (Y page 131)E Increases the airflow (Y page 131)F Reduces the airflow (Y page 131)G DisplayH Switches climate control on/off (Y page 121)I Sets climate control to automatic (Y page 130)X Press the Á button.

The indicator lamp in the Á button goes out. The cooling with air dehumidificationfunction has a delayed switch-off feature.

Operating the climate control systems 127

Clim

ate

cont

rol

Z

USA only: Sets the temperature, left (Y page 131); Defrosts the windshield (Y page 131)= Switches maximum cooling MAX COOL on/off (Y page 132)? Activates/deactivates cooling with air dehumidification (Y page 124)A Switches the rear window defroster on/off (Y page 133)B Sets the temperature, right (Y page 131)C Activates/deactivates air-recirculation mode (Y page 134)D Sets the air distribution (Y page 131)E Increases the airflow (Y page 131)F Reduces the airflow (Y page 131)G DisplayH Switches climate control on/off (Y page 121)I Sets climate control to automatic (Y page 130)X Press the Á button.

The indicator lamp in the Á button goes out. The cooling with air dehumidificationfunction has a delayed switch-off feature.

128 Operating the climate control systemsCl

imat

e co

ntro

l

Problems with the cooling with air dehumidification function

Canada only: Sets the temperature, left (Y page 131); Defrosts the windshield (Y page 131)= Switches the ZONE function on/off (Y page 131)? Activates/deactivates cooling with air dehumidification (Y page 124)A Switches the rear window defroster on/off(Y page 133)B Sets the temperature, right (Y page 131)C Activates/deactivates air-recirculation mode (Y page 134)D Sets the air distribution (Y page 131)E Increases the airflow (Y page 131)F Reduces the airflow (Y page 131)G DisplayH Switches climate control on/off (Y page 121)I Sets climate control to automatic (Y page 130)

When you press the Á button, the indicator lamp in the button flashes three times orremains off. You can no longer switch on the cooling with air dehumidification function.X Visit a qualified specialist workshop.

Operating the climate control systems 129

Clim

ate

cont

rol

Z

USA only: Sets the temperature, left (Y page 131); Defrosts the windshield (Y page 131)= Switches maximum cooling MAX COOL on/off (Y page 132)? Activates/deactivates cooling with air dehumidification (Y page 124)A Switches the rear window defroster on/off(Y page 133)B Sets the temperature, right (Y page 131)C Activates/deactivates air-recirculation mode (Y page 134)D Sets the air distribution (Y page 131)E Increases the airflow (Y page 131)F Reduces the airflow (Y page 131)G DisplayH Switches climate control on/off (Y page 121)I Sets climate control to automatic (Y page 130)

When you press the Á button, the indicator lamp in the button flashes three times orremains off. You can no longer switch on the cooling with air dehumidification function.X Visit a qualified specialist workshop.

Setting climate control to automatic

G WARNINGIf you switch off the cooling function, thevehicle will not be cooled when weatherconditions are warm. The windows can fog upmore quickly. Window fogging may impairvisibility and endanger you and others.

In automatic mode, the set temperature ismaintained at a constant level. The systemautomatically regulates the temperature ofthe dispensed air, the airflow and the airdistribution.Automatic mode will achieve optimaloperation if cooling with air dehumidificationis also activated. If desired, cooling with airdehumidification can be deactivated.

130 Operating the climate control systemsCl

imat

e co

ntro

l

X Turn the SmartKey to position2 (Y page 139) in the ignition lock.

X Set the desired temperature.X To switch on: press the à button.

The indicator lamp in the à button lightsup. Automatic air distribution and airfloware activated.

X To deactivate: press the _ button.orX Press the I or K button.

The indicator lamp in the à button goesout.

Setting the temperatureYou can set the temperature separately forthe driver's and front-passenger sides withcontrols : or B(Y page 119).X Turn the SmartKey to position

2 (Y page 139) in the ignition lock.X Set control : or B(Y page 119) to the

desired temperature.Only change the temperature setting insmall increments. Start at 72 ‡ (22 †).

Setting the air distributionX Turn the SmartKey to position

2 (Y page 139) in the ignition lock.X Press the _ button repeatedly until the

desired symbol appears in the display.P Directs the airflow through the center

ventsO Directs the airflow through the

footwell air ventsS Directs the airflow through the center

and footwell vents¯ Directs air through the defroster ventsb Canada only: directs the airflow

through the defroster and center vents

a Directs air through the defroster andfootwell vents

_ Canada only: directs the airflowthrough the defroster, center and sideair vents and the footwell

Setting the airflowX Turn the SmartKey to position

2 (Y page 139) in the ignition lock.X To increase: press the K button.X To reduce: press the I button.

i The airflow from the rear-compartmentvents and the center vents is the same.

Activating/deactivating the zonefunctionX To switch on: press the á button.

The indicator lamp in the á button lightsup.

i The temperature setting for the driver'sside is not adopted for the front-passengerside and the rear compartment. Thetemperature for the front-passenger sideand the rear compartment must be setseparately.

X To switch off: press button á.The indicator lamp in the á button goesout.

i The temperature setting for the driver'sside is adopted for the front-passenger sideand the rear compartment.

Defrosting the windshieldYou can use this function to defrost thewindshield or to defrost the inside of thewindshield and the side windows.i You should only select the defrosting

function until the windshield is clear again.

Operating the climate control systems 131

Clim

ate

cont

rol

Z

X Turn the SmartKey to position2 (Y page 139) in the ignition lock.

X To activate: press the ¬ button.The indicator lamp in the ¬ button lightsup.The climate control system switches to thefollowing functions:Rcooling with air dehumidification (only

with engine running)Rhigh airflow (depending on the outside

temperature)Rhigh temperature (depending on the

outside temperature)Rair distribution to the windshield and

front side windowsRair-recirculation mode off

X To deactivate: press the ¬ button.The indicator lamp in the ¬ button goesout. The previously selected settings arerestored. The cooling with airdehumidification function remains on. Air-recirculation mode remains deactivated.

orX Press the à button.

The indicator lamp in the ¬ button goesout. Airflow and air distribution are set toautomatic mode.

orX Turn controls : or B clockwise or

counter-clockwise (Y page 119).orX Press the K or I button.

Activating/deactivating MAX COOLmaximum cooling

The MAX COOL function is only available invehicles for the USA.

MAX COOL is only operational when theengine is running.X To activate: press the Ù button.

The indicator lamp in the button lights up.X To activate: press off-road button Ù

again.The indicator lamp goes out. The previouslyselected settings are restored.

When you activate MAX COOL, climatecontrol switches to the following functions:Rmaximum coolingRmaximum airflowRair-recirculation mode on

Defrosting the windows

Windows fogged up on the insideX Activate the Á cooling with air

dehumidification function.X Activate automatic mode Ã.X If the windows continue to fog up, activate

the defrosting function (Y page 131).i You should only select this setting until

the windshield is clear again.

Windows fogged up on the outsideX Switch on the windshield wipers

(Y page 114).X Press the _ button repeatedly until theP or O symbol appears in thedisplay.

132 Operating the climate control systemsCl

imat

e co

ntro

l

i You should only select this setting untilthe windshield is clear again.

Switching the windshield defrosteron/off

G WARNINGAny accumulation of snow and ice should beremoved from the windshield before driving.Otherwise, your vision may be impaired,which could endanger you or others.

X Turn the SmartKey to position2 (Y page 139) in the ignition lock.

X To switch on: press button ;.Indicator lamp : lights up.

X To switch off: press button ;.Indicator lamp : goes out.

i At outside temperatures above50 ‡(10 †), the windshield heating cannotbe activated. Indicator lamp : lights upbriefly when you attempt to activate it andthen goes out again.

i The windshield defroster has a highcurrent draw. You should therefore switchit off as soon as the windshield is clear. Thewindshield heating otherwise switchesitself off automatically after 10 minutes.

i If you turn on the windshield heating forthe fourth consecutive time, the windshieldheating will automatically switch off after5 minutes.

i If the vehicle's electrical system voltageis too low because too many electrical

consumers are switched on, indicatorlamp : flashes. After approximately30 seconds, the windshield heating turnsoff automatically.

Switching the rear window defrosteron/off

Activating/deactivating

G WARNINGAny accumulation of snow and ice should beremoved from the rear window before driving.Visibility could otherwise be impaired,endangering you and others.

X Turn the SmartKey to position2 (Y page 139) in the ignition lock.

X USA only: press the ª button.The indicator lamp in the ª button lightsup or goes out.

i The rear window defroster has a highcurrent draw. You should therefore switchit off as soon as the rear window is clear.as it only switches off automatically afterseveral minutes.

i If the battery voltage is too low, the rearwindow defroster may switch off.

Problems with the rear windowdefrosterIf the indicator lamp in the ª rear windowdefroster button flashes, the on-boardvoltage is too low. The rear window defrosterhas deactivated prematurely or cannot beactivated.X Switch off any consumers that are not

required, e.g. reading lamps or interiorlighting.When the battery is sufficiently charged,the rear window defroster is activatedagain automatically.

Operating the climate control systems 133

Clim

ate

cont

rol

Z

Activating/deactivating air-recirculation mode

G WARNINGFogged windows impair visibility,endangering you and others. If the windowsbegin to fog on the inside, switching off theair recirculation mode immediately shouldclear interior window fogging. If interiorwindow fogging persists, make sure the airconditioning is activated, or press the ¬button.

X Turn the SmartKey to position2 (Y page 139) in the ignition lock.

X To switch on: press the d button.The indicator lamp in the d button lightsup.

i Air-recirculation mode is automaticallyactivated at high levels of pollution or athigh outside temperatures. When air-recirculation mode is activatedautomatically, the indicator lamp in thed button is not lit.Outside air is added after approximately30 minutes.

X To deactivate: press the d button.The indicator lamp in the d button goesout.

i Air-recirculation mode switches offautomatically:Rafter approximately five minutes at

outside temperatures belowapproximately 41 ‡Rafter approximately five minutes if

cooling with air dehumidification isdeactivatedRafter approximately 30 minutes at

outside temperatures aboveapproximately 41 ‡ (5 †)

Activating/deactivating the residualheat function

The "residual heat" function is only availablein Canada.It is possible to make use of the residual heatof the engine to continue heating thestationary vehicle for up to 30 minutes afterthe engine has been switched off. The heatingtime depends on the coolant temperature andon the interior temperature that has been set.i The blower will run at a low speed

regardless of the airflow setting.

i If you activate the residual heat functionat high temperatures, only the ventilationwill be activated.

X Turn the SmartKey to position0(Y page 139) in the ignition lock orremove it.

X To activate: press the Á button.The indicator lamp in the Á button lightsup.

X To deactivate: press the Á button.The indicator lamp in the Á button goesout.

i Residual heat is deactivatedautomatically:Rafter approximately 30 minutesRwhen the ignition is switched onRif the battery voltage dropsRif the coolant temperature is too low

Setting the air vents

Important safety notes

G WARNINGWhen operating the climate control, the airthat enters the passenger compartmentthrough the air vents can be very hot or verycold (depending on the set temperature). Thiscould cause burns or frostbite to unprotectedskin in the immediate area of the air vents.

134 Setting the air ventsCl

imat

e co

ntro

l

Always keep sufficient distance betweenunprotected parts of the body and the airvents. If necessary, use the air distributionadjustment to direct the air to air vents in thevehicle interior that are not in the immediatearea of unprotected skin.

General notesIn order to ensure the direct flow of fresh airthrough the air vents into the vehicle interior,please observe the following notes:Rkeep the air intake grill on the hood free of

blockages, such as ice, snow or leaves.Rnever cover the air vents or air intake grilles

in the vehicle interior.

i For virtually draft-free ventilation, adjustthe sliders of the air vents to the centerposition.

i If the automatic climate controlconstantly differs from the set temperatureor if undesired drafts are noticeable,proceed as follows:X Open the side air ventsX Open the center air ventsX Open the rear air ventsX Set the temperature to 72 ‡ (22 †).

The automatic climate control adjustsitself to the set temperature.

Setting the center air vents

Center air vents: Center air vent, left; Center air vent, right= Center vent thumbwheel, right? Center vent thumbwheel, leftX To open/close: turn thumbwheels =

and ? to the right or left.

Setting the side air vents

Side air vents: Side air vent; Swiveling side air vent= Control for side air ventX To open/close: turn thumbwheel = to the

left or right.

Setting the air vents 135

Clim

ate

cont

rol

Z

Setting the rear-compartment airvents

X To open/close: turn thumbwheel : up ordown.

X To set the air direction: move slider ;for the corresponding rear-compartmentair vent to the left, right, up or down.

136 Setting the air ventsCl

imat

e co

ntro

l

Useful information ............................ 138Breaking-in notes .............................. 138Driving ............................................... 138Automatic transmission ................... 145Refueling ............................................ 153Parking ............................................... 156Driving tips ........................................ 158Driving systems ................................ 169Off-road driving systems .................. 198Towing a trailer ................................. 203

137

Driv

ing

and

park

ing

Useful information

i This Operator's Manual describes allmodels and all standard and optionalequipment of your vehicle available at thetime of publication of the Operator'sManual. Country-specific differences arepossible. Please note that your vehicle maynot be equipped with all featuresdescribed. This also applies to safety-related systems and functions.

i Read the information on qualifiedspecialist workshops: (Y page 23).

Breaking-in notes

Important safety notesNew and replaced brake pads and discs onlyreach their optimum braking effect afterseveral hundred kilometers of driving.Compensate for this by applying greater forceto the brake pedal.

The first 1,000 miles (1,500 km)The more you look after the engine when it isnew, the more satisfied you will be with itsperformance in the future.RYou should therefore drive at varying

vehicle and engine speeds for the first1,000 miles (1,500 km).RAvoid heavy loads, e.g. driving at full

throttle, during this period.RChange gear in good time, before the

tachometer needle is Ô of the way to thered area of the tachometer.RDo not manually shift to a lower gear to

brake the vehicle.RIf possible, do not depress the accelerator

pedal past the point of resistance(kickdown).ROnly select shift ranges 3, 2 or 1 when

driving slowly, e.g. in mountainous terrain.

After 1,000 miles (1,500 km), you canincrease the engine speed gradually and bringthe vehicle up to full speed.Additional breaking-in notes for AMGvehicles:RDo not drive faster than 85 mph

(140 km/h for the first 1,000 miles(1,500 km)ROnly allow the engine to reach a maximum

engine speed of 4,500 rpm briefly.RChange gear in good time.RAvoid driving off-road before the

differential oil change at 2,000 miles(3,000 km).RIdeally, drive for the first

1,000 miles(1,500 km) in drive program C.

i You should also observe these breaking-in notes if the engine or parts of the drivetrain on your vehicle have been replaced.

i Always observe the respective speedlimits.

AMG vehicles with rear axle lockingdifferential

To improve the protection of the differential,change the oil after a break-in distance of2,000 miles (3,000 km). This oil change willlengthen the service life of the differential.Have the oil change carried out at a qualifiedspecialist workshop. Mercedes-Benzrecommends that you use an authorizedMercedes-Benz Center for this purpose.

Driving

Important safety notes

G WARNINGObjects in the driver's footwell can restrict thepedal travel or obstruct a depressed pedal.The operating and road safety of the vehicleis jeopardized. There is a risk of an accident.

138 DrivingDr

ivin

g an

d pa

rkin

g

Make sure that all objects in the vehicle arestowed correctly, and that they cannot enterthe driver's footwell. Install the floormatssecurely and as specified in order to ensuresufficient clearance for the pedals. Do not useloose floormats.

G WARNINGUnsuitable footwear can hinder correct usageof the pedals, e.g.:Rshoes with thick solesRshoes with high heelsRslippersThere is a risk of an accident.Wear suitable footwear to ensure correctusage of the pedals.

G WARNINGIf you switch off the ignition while driving,safety-relevant functions are only availablewith limitations, or not at all. This could affect,for example, the power steering and the brakeboosting effect. You will require considerablymore effort to steer and brake. There is a riskof an accident.Do not switch off the ignition while driving.

G WARNINGIf the parking brake has not been fullyreleased when driving, the parking brake can:Roverheat and cause a fireRlose its hold function.There is a risk of fire and an accident. Releasethe parking brake fully before driving off.

! Warm up the engine quickly. Do not usethe engine's full performance until it hasreached operating temperature.Only shift the automatic transmission tothe desired drive position when the vehicleis stationary.Where possible, avoid spinning the drivewheels when pulling away on slipperyroads. You could otherwise damage thedrive train.

! Avoid high engine speeds when theengine is cold. The engine's service lifecould otherwise be significantly shortened.Do not use the engine's full performanceuntil it has reached operating temperature.

! AMG vehicles: at low engine oiltemperatures below 68 ‡ (+20 †), themaximum engine speed is restricted inorder to protect the engine. To protect theengine and maintain smooth engineoperation, avoid driving at full throttle whenthe engine is cold.

SmartKey positions

g To remove the SmartKey1 Power supply for some consumers, such

as the windshield wipers2 Ignition (power supply for all consumers)

and drive position3 To start the engine

As soon as the ignition is switched on, all theindicator lamps in the instrument cluster lightup. If an indicator lamp does not go out afterstarting the engine or lights up while driving,see (Y page 249).If the SmartKey is in position 0 in the ignitionlock for an extended period of time, it can nolonger be turned in the ignition lock. Thesteering is then locked. To unlock, remove theSmartKey and reinsert it into the ignition lock.The steering is locked when you remove theSmartKey from the ignition lock.

Driving 139

Driv

ing

and

park

ing

Z

X Remove the SmartKey when the engine isswitched off.The starter battery could otherwise bedischarged.

If you cannot turn the SmartKey in the ignitionlock, the starter battery may not be chargedsufficiently.X Check the starter battery and charge it if

necessary (Y page 307).orX Jump-start the vehicle (Y page 308).

i You can only remove the SmartKey if:Rthe SmartKey is in position 0 in the

ignition lock.Rthe automatic transmission selector

lever is in P.

Starting the engine

Important safety notes

G WARNINGCombustion engines emit poisonous exhaustgases such as carbon monoxide. Inhalingthese exhaust gases leads to poisoning. Thereis a risk of fatal injury. Therefore never leavethe engine running in enclosed spaceswithout sufficient ventilation.

G WARNINGInhalation of exhaust gas is hazardous to yourhealth. All exhaust gas contains carbonmonoxide (CO), and inhaling it can causeunconsciousness and possible death.Do not run the engine in confined areas (suchas a garage) which are not properly ventilated.If you think that exhaust gas fumes areentering the vehicle while driving, have thecause determined and correctedimmediately. If you must drive under theseconditions, drive only with at least onewindow fully open at all times.

! Do not depress the accelerator pedalwhen starting the engine.

Starting procedureX Shift the automatic transmission to

position P.The transmission position display in themultifunction display shows P.

i For further information about theautomatic transmission, see(Y page 145).

i If you depress the brake when starting theengine, pedal travel is unusually long andthere is less pedal resistance.

X Make sure that the parking brake isapplied.

X Turn the SmartKey in the ignition lock toposition 3 (Y page 139) and release it assoon as the engine is running.

i You can also use the touch-start function.To do this, turn the SmartKey to position 3 (Y page 139) and release it immediately.The engine then starts automatically.

Pulling away

Automatic transmission

G WARNINGIf the engine speed is above the idling speedand you engage transmission position D orR, the vehicle could pull away suddenly. Thereis a risk of an accident.When engaging transmission position D or R,always firmly depress the brake pedal and donot simultaneously accelerate.

! Only shift the automatic transmission toreverse gear R or park position P when thevehicle is stationary. Otherwise, theautomatic transmission could be damaged.

! Do not depress the accelerator pedalwhile depressing the brake pedal. Thisimpairs engine performance and results inpremature wear on the brake system anddrivetrain.

140 DrivingDr

ivin

g an

d pa

rkin

g

! If a warning tone sounds and theRelease Park. Brake message appearsin the multifunction display, the parkingbrake is still applied. Release the parkingbrake.

X Depress the brake pedal and keep itdepressed.

X Shift the automatic transmission toposition D or R.

i Before driving off, wait until the gearchange is fully completed.

X Release the parking brake (Y page 157).X Release the brake pedal.X Carefully depress the accelerator pedal.

i It is only possible to shift the automatictransmission from position P to a differentposition if you depress the brake pedal.Only then is the selector lever lockreleased.

i The vehicle locks centrally once you havepulled away. The locking knobs in the doorsdrop down.You can open the doors from the inside atany time.You can also deactivate the automaticlocking feature (Y page 220).

i Upshifts take place at higher enginespeeds after a cold start. This helps thecatalytic converter to reach its operatingtemperature more quickly.

Hill start assist

G WARNINGAfter a short time, hill start assist will nolonger brake your vehicle and it could rollaway. There is a risk of an accident and injury.Therefore, quickly move your foot from thebrake pedal to the accelerator pedal. Neverleave the vehicle when it is held by hill startassist.

Hill start assist helps you when pulling awayforwards or in reverse on an uphill gradient.

It holds the vehicle for a short time after youhave removed your foot from the brake pedal.This gives you enough time to move your footfrom the brake pedal to the accelerator pedaland to depress it before the vehicle begins toroll.X Take your foot off the brake pedal.i Once you have taken your foot off the

brake pedal, the vehicle is held for aroundone second.

X Pull away.Hill start assist will not function if:Ryou are pulling away on a level road or on

a downhill gradient.Rthe transmission is in position N.Rthe parking brake is applied.RESP® is malfunctioning.

ECO start/stop function (AMGvehicles)

Important safety notes

G WARNINGIf the engine is switched off automatically andyou exit the vehicle, the engine is restartedautomatically. The vehicle may begin moving.There is a risk of accident and injury.If you wish to exit the vehicle, always turn offthe ignition and secure the vehicle againstrolling away.

General notesThe ECO start/stop function is only availablefor the G 63 AMG.The ECO start/stop function switches theengine off automatically when the vehiclestops moving.The engine starts automatically when thedriver wants to pull away again. The ECOstart/stop function thereby helps you toreduce the fuel consumption and emissionsof your vehicle.

Driving 141

Driv

ing

and

park

ing

Z

The ECO start/stop function is activated eachtime the engine is switched on.The ECO start/stop function is only availablein drive program C.The system is operational when the ¤symbol is shown in green in the multifunctiondisplay.The system is operational if all conditions forautomatic engine switch-off have beenfulfilled (Y page 142) and the ¤ symbol isshown in green in the multifunction display.In addition, the Stop/Start activemessage is shown in the AMG menu in themultifunction display.If not all conditions for automatic engineswitch-off (Y page 142) are fulfilled, the¤ symbol is shown in yellow in themultifunction display.In addition, the Stop/Start inactivemessage is shown in the AMG menu in themultifunction display.If the ECO start/stop function has beenmanually deactivated (Y page 142) or amalfunction has caused the system to bedeactivated, the ¤ symbol is notdisplayed.The Stop/Start active or Stop/Start inactive message in the AMG menu in themultifunction display goes out.

Deactivating/activating the ECO start/stop function

ECO button

X To switch off: press button : in driveprogram C.

orX Switch to drive program S or M

(Y page 149).Indicator lamp ; on button : and the¤ symbol in the multifunction display goout.The Stop/Start active or Stop/Start inactive message in the AMG menu in themultifunction display goes out.

X To switch on: press button :.Indicator lamp ; lights up. If driveprogram S or M is active, the automatictransmission switches to drive program C.If all conditions for automatic engineswitch-off (Y page 142) are fulfilled, the¤ symbol is shown in green in themultifunction display. In addition, theStop/Start active message is shown inthe AMG menu in the multifunction display.If conditions for automatic engine switch-off (Y page 142) have not been fulfilled, the¤ symbol will be shown in yellow. If thisis the case, the ECO start/stop function isnot available. In addition, the Stop/Start inactive message is shown in the AMGmenu in the multifunction display.

i If indicator lamp ; is off, the ECO start/stop function has been deactivatedmanually or as the result of a malfunction.The engine will then not be switched offautomatically when the vehicle stops.

Automatic engine switch-offIf the vehicle is braked to a standstill in D orN, the ECO start/stop function switches offthe engine automatically.The ECO start/stop function is operationaland the ¤ symbol is displayed in green inthe multifunction display, if:Rthe indicator lamp in the ECO button is lit

green.Rno off-road program has been selected.

142 DrivingDr

ivin

g an

d pa

rkin

g

Rthe vehicle is stationary.Rthe outside temperature is within the

comfort range.Rthe engine is at normal operating

temperature.Rthe set temperature for the vehicle interior

has been reached.Rthe battery is sufficiently charged.Rthe system detects that the windshield is

not fogged up when the air-conditioningsystem is switched on.Rthe hood is closed.Rthe driver's door is closed and the driver's

seat belt is fastened.If conditions for automatic engine switch-offhave not been fulfilled, the ¤ symbol willbe shown in yellow.In addition, the Stop/Start inactivemessage is shown in the AMG menu in themultifunction display.

i If you shift the transmission from R to D,the ECO start/stop function is availableagain once the ¤ symbol reappears ingreen in the multifunction display.

i The engine can be automatically switchedoff an unlimited number of times.

i You can still activate the HOLD functionwhen the vehicle is stationary, even if theengine has been switched offautomatically. It is then not necessary tocontinue applying the brakes during theautomatic stop phase. When you depressthe accelerator pedal, the engine startsautomatically and the braking effect of theHOLD function is deactivated. Depress theaccelerator pedal carefully, as the enginemust be started first.

i During automatic engine switch-off, theclimate control system only operates at areduced capacity. If you require full climatecontrol capacity, the ECO start/stopfunction can be deactivated by pressing theECO button (Y page 142).

Automatic engine startThe engine starts automatically if:RIn general:

- you switch off the ECO start/stopfunction by pressing the ECO button.

- you release the brakes when intransmission position D or N and whenthe HOLD function is not active.

RBy the driver:- you release the brakes when in

transmission position D or N.- you depress the accelerator pedal.- you engage reverse gear R.- you move the transmission out of

position P.- you switch to drive program S or M.- you unfasten your seat belt or open the

driver's door.RBy the system:

- the vehicle starts to roll.- the brake system requires this.- the temperature in the vehicle interior

deviates from the set range.- the system detects moisture on the

windshield when the air-conditioningsystem is switched on.

- the charge level of the battery is too low.

i Shifting the transmission to position Pdoes not start the engine.

Driving 143

Driv

ing

and

park

ing

Z

Problems with the engine

Problem Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions

The engine does notstart. The starter motorcan be heard.

RThere is a malfunction in the engine electronics.RThere is a malfunction in the fuel supply.X Turn the SmartKey back to position 0 in the ignition lock before

attempting to start the engine again.X Try to start the engine again (Y page 140). Avoid excessively

long and frequent attempts to start the engine, as this(Y page 139) will drain the battery.

If the engine does not start after several attempts:X Consult a qualified specialist workshop.

The engine does notstart. The starter motorcan be heard. Theyellow reserve fuelwarning lamp is lit andthe needle of the fuelgauge display shows 0.

The fuel tank is empty.X Refuel the vehicle.

The engine does notstart. You cannot hearthe starter motor.

The on-board voltage is too low because the battery is too weakor discharged.X Jump-start the vehicle (Y page 308).If the engine does not start despite attempts to jump-start it:X Consult a qualified specialist workshop.

The starter motor was exposed to a thermal load that was too high.X Allow the starter motor to cool down for approximately two

minutes.X Try to start the engine again.If the engine still does not start:X Consult a qualified specialist workshop.

The engine is notrunning smoothly andis misfiring.

There is a malfunction in the engine electronics or in a mechanicalcomponent of the engine management system.X Only depress the accelerator pedal slightly.

Otherwise, non-combusted fuel may get into the catalyticconverter and damage it.

X Have the cause rectified immediately at a qualified specialistworkshop.

144 DrivingDr

ivin

g an

d pa

rkin

g

Problem Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions

The coolanttemperature display isshowing more than248 ‡ (120 †). Adisplay message mayalso appear in themultifunction displayand a warning tone maysound.

The coolant level is too low. The coolant is too hot and the engineis no longer being cooled sufficiently.X Stop as soon as possible and allow the engine and the coolant

to cool down.X Check the coolant level (Y page 291). Observe the warning

notes as you do so and add coolant if necessary.

If the coolant level is correct, the radiator fan may be faulty. Thecoolant is too hot and the engine is no longer being cooledsufficiently.X At coolant temperatures below 248 ‡ (120 †), drive to the next

qualified specialist workshop.X Avoid heavy loads on the engine as you do so, e.g. driving in

mountainous terrain and stop-and-go traffic.

Automatic transmission

Important safety notes

G WARNINGIf the engine speed is above the idling speedand you engage transmission position D orR, the vehicle could pull away suddenly. Thereis a risk of an accident.When engaging transmission position D or R,always firmly depress the brake pedal and donot simultaneously accelerate.

G WARNINGThe automatic transmission switches toneutral position N when you switch off theengine. The vehicle may roll away. There is arisk of an accident.After switching off the engine, always switchto parking position P. Prevent the parkedvehicle from rolling away by applying theparking brake.

i Bear in mind that the power transmissionbetween the engine and the transmissionis interrupted when the engine is switchedoff. Therefore, to prevent the vehicle fromrolling away, shift the automatictransmission to position P and apply the

parking brake when the engine is switchedoff and the vehicle is stationary.

Selector lever

Overview of transmission positions! If the engine speed is too high or if the

vehicle is rolling, do not shift thetransmission directly from D to R, from Rto D or directly to P.Do not open the driver's door while thevehicle is in motion. At low speeds intransmission position D or R, park positionP is otherwise engaged automatically.The transmission could be damaged.

Automatic transmission 145

Driv

ing

and

park

ing

Z

Selector leverj Park positionk Reverse geari Neutralh Drive

When you select a transmission position, theselector lever subsequently returns to itsoriginal position.The current transmission position P, R, N orD appears in the transmission positiondisplay in the multifunction display.

Transmission position and driveprogram display! If the transmission position display in the

multifunction display is not working, youshould pull away carefully to check whetherthe desired transmission position isengaged. Select transmission position D.Do not restrict the shift range.

: Transmission position; Drive program

Current transmission position : and currentdrive program ; appear in the multifunctiondisplay.

The current position of the selector lever isshown by the indicators next to the selectorlever.The indicators light up when the SmartKey isinserted into the ignition lock. The indicatorsgo out when the SmartKey is removed fromthe ignition lock.When the selector lever is in position D, youcan influence the gearshifts made by theautomatic transmission by:Rrestricting the shift rangeRchanging gear yourself

Engaging park position PX When the vehicle is stationary, depress the

brake pedal and keep it depressed.X Press the P button in the center console.

i If you depress the brake pedal and pushthe selector lever forwards or back to thefirst point of resistance, park position P isdisengaged. The transmission shifts toneutral N.

Park position P is automatically engaged:Rif you remove the SmartKey from the

ignition lockRif you open the driver's door while traveling

at low speed in transmission position D orRRif DISTRONIC PLUS (Y page 177) brakes

your vehicle until it is stationary and at leastone of the following conditions is fulfilled:- the engine is switched off.- the driver's door is open and the seat belt

is not fastened.- there is a system malfunction.- the power supply is insufficient.

Engaging reverse gear R! Only shift the automatic transmission to

R when the vehicle is stationary.

146 Automatic transmissionDr

ivin

g an

d pa

rkin

g

X When the vehicle is stationary, depress thebrake pedal and keep it depressed.

X Push the selector lever forwards past thefirst point of resistance.Transmission position R is engaged.

i For AMG vehicles: when reverse gear isengaged and the ECO start/stop functionis switched on, the engine starts upautomatically (Y page 141).

Shifting to neutral N

G WARNINGWhen leaving the SmartKey in the starterswitch, do not leave children unattended inthe vehicle. It is possible for children to switchon the ignition which could result inunsupervised use of vehicle equipment.Unsupervised use of vehicle equipment couldresult in an accident and/or serious personalinjury.

If the vehicle is stationary:X Depress the brake pedal.X Depending on the current transmission

position, press the selector lever forwardsor backwards to the first point ofresistance.The automatic transmission shifts to N.

If the engine has been switched off, theautomatic transmission automatically shiftsto N.

i For AMG vehicles: the ECO start/stopfunction switches the engine offautomatically if the vehicle is braked to astandstill when in neutral N and the brakeis still depressed (Y page 141).

Remaining in neutral N

G WARNINGIf children are left unsupervised in the vehicle,they could:Ropen the doors, thus endangering other

people or road users.Rget out and disrupt traffic.Roperate the vehicle's equipment.Additionally, children could set the vehicle inmotion if, for example, they:Rrelease the parking brake.Rshift the automatic transmission out of

parking position P.Rstarting the engine.There is a risk of an accident and injury.When leaving the vehicle, always take theSmartKey with you and lock the vehicle. Neverleave children or animals unattended in thevehicle. Always keep the SmartKey out ofreach of children.

X Make sure that the ignition is switched on.X When the vehicle is stationary, depress the

brake pedal and keep it depressed.X Shift to neutral N.X Release the brake pedal.X If the parking brake is applied, release it.X Switch off the ignition and leave the

SmartKey in the ignition lock.

Shifting to transmission position DX When the vehicle is stationary, depress the

brake pedal and keep it depressed.X Push the selector lever back past the first

point of resistance.Transmission position D is engaged.

i For AMG vehicles: the ECO start/stopfunction switches the engine offautomatically if the vehicle is braked to astandstill when in transmission position Dand the brake is still depressed(Y page 141).

Automatic transmission 147

Driv

ing

and

park

ing

Z

Transmission positions

B Park positionDo not shift the transmission intoposition P (Y page 145) unless thevehicle is stationary. The parkinglock should not be used as a brakewhen parking. In addition toengaging the parking lock, youmust always apply the parkingbrake to secure the vehicle.

i The SmartKey can only beremoved if the transmission is inposition P. When there is noSmartKey in the ignition lock, theselector lever is locked inposition P.

Have the vehicle electronicschecked immediately at a qualifiedspecialist workshop.

C Reverse gearOnly shift the transmission to Rwhen the vehicle is stationary.

A NeutralNo power is transmitted from theengine to the drive wheels.Releasing the brakes will allow youto move the vehicle freely, e.g. topush it or tow it.Do not shift the transmission to Nwhile driving. Otherwise, theautomatic transmission could bedamaged.If ESP® is deactivated or faulty:only shift the transmission toposition N if the vehicle is in dangerof skidding, e.g. on icy roads.If you want to engage the transfercase, shift briefly into N (Y page 199).

! Rolling in neutral N can damagethe drive train.

7 DriveThe automatic transmissionchanges gear automatically. Allforward gears are available.

Changing gearThe automatic transmission shifts to theindividual gears automatically when it is intransmission position D. This automaticgearshifting behavior is determined by:Ra shift range restriction, if selectedRthe position of the transfer case (HIGH

RANGE or LOW RANGE)Rthe position of the accelerator pedalRthe road speed

148 Automatic transmissionDr

ivin

g an

d pa

rkin

g

Driving tips

Accelerator pedal positionYour style of driving influences how theautomatic transmission shifts gear:Rlittle throttle: early upshiftsRmore throttle: late upshifts

KickdownUse kickdown for maximum acceleration.X Depress the accelerator pedal beyond the

pressure point.The transmission shifts to a lower geardepending on the engine speed.

X Ease off the accelerator pedal once thedesired speed is reached.The automatic transmission shifts back up.

Rocking the vehicle freeRocking the vehicle free by shifting back andforth between transmission positions D andR can help to free a vehicle that has becomestuck in mud or snow. The vehicle's enginemanagement restricts repeated shiftingbetween transmission positions D and R upto a maximum speed of up to 5 mph(9 km/h). To shift back and forth betweentransmission positions D and R, move theselector lever forwards and backwards pastthe point of resistance.

Towing a trailerX Drive in the middle of the engine speed

range on uphill gradients.X Limit shift range to 3 or 2 depending on the

uphill or downhill gradient (Y page 150),even if cruise control or SPEEDTRONIC isactivated.

X Shift the transfer case into low-rangedriving position LOW RANGE on extremeuphill gradients or steep downhill gradients(Y page 199).

Program selector button

General notesThe program selector button allows you tochoose between drive programs withdifferent driving characteristics.

i In AMG vehicles, drive program E is calleddrive program C.

Drive programs

E EconomyC ControlledEfficiency

Comfortable, economicaldriving

S Sport Sporty driving style

M Manual Manual gear shifting

i When the engine is started, the automatictransmission always switches to automaticdrive program E (drive program C in AMGvehicles).

i For further information on the automaticdrive program, see (Y page 150).

i Only change from automatic driveprogram E or S to manual drive programM when the vehicle is stationary.

Selecting the drive program

Example: program selector buttonX Press program selector button :

repeatedly until the letter for the desired

Automatic transmission 149

Driv

ing

and

park

ing

Z

gearshift program appears in themultifunction display.

i Only change from automatic driveprogram E or S to manual drive programM when the vehicle is stationary.

Steering wheel paddle shifters

In the automatic drive program, you canrestrict or derestrict the shift range by usingsteering wheel paddle shifters : and ;(Y page 150).In the manual drive program you can changegears manually using steering wheel paddleshifters : and ;(Y page 151).

i You can only change gear with thesteering wheel paddle shifters when thetransmission is in position D.

Automatic drive programDrive program E (drive program C on AMGvehicles) is characterized by the following:Rcomfort-oriented engine and transmission

settingsRoptimal fuel consumption resulting from

the automatic transmission shifting upsoonerRthe vehicle pulling away more gently in

forward and reverse gears, unless theaccelerator pedal is depressed fully

Rincreased sensitivity. This improves drivingstability on slippery road surfaces, forexampleRthe automatic transmission shifting up

sooner. This results in the vehicle beingdriven at lower engine speeds and thewheels being less likely to spin

Drive program S is characterized by thefollowing:Rsporty engine and transmission settingsRthe vehicle pulling away in first gearRthe automatic transmission shifting up

laterRthe fuel consumption possibly being higher

as a result of the later automatictransmission shift points

Shift ranges

IntroductionWhen the automatic transmission is inposition D, it is possible to restrict orderestrict the shift range.The shift range selected is shown in themultifunction display. The automatictransmission shifts only as far as the selectedgear.Driving situations

= You can use the engine's brakingeffect.

5 The braking effect of the engine canbe utilized on downhill gradients orwhen driving:Ron steep mountain roadsRin mountainous terrainRin arduous conditions

4 The braking effect of the engine canbe utilized on extremely steepdownhill gradients and longdownhill stretches.

150 Automatic transmissionDr

ivin

g an

d pa

rkin

g

Restricting the shift rangeX Pull the left-hand steering wheel paddle

shifter (Y page 150).The automatic transmission shifts downone gear and restricts the shift range to therelevant gear.

i If the engine exceeds the maximumengine speed when shifting down, theautomatic transmission protects againstengine damage by not shifting down.

i If the maximum engine speed for the shiftrange is reached and you continue toaccelerate, the automatic transmissionshifts up in order to prevent the enginefrom overrevving, even if the shift range isrestricted.

Derestricting the shift rangeX Pull the right-hand steering wheel paddle

shifter (Y page 150).The automatic transmission shifts up onegear and restricts the shift range to therelevant gear.

Clearing the shift range restrictionX Pull and hold the right-hand steering wheel

paddle shifter (Y page 150) until D is shownagain in the multifunction display.The automatic transmission shifts from thecurrent shift range directly to D.

Selecting the ideal shift rangeX Pull the left-hand steering wheel paddle

shifter (Y page 150) and hold it in position.The automatic transmission shifts to thegear which allows optimum accelerationand deceleration. To do this, the automatictransmission shifts down one or moregears.

i The automatic transmission cannot shiftdown beyond second gear. To shift to firstgear, you have to pull the left steeringwheel paddle shifter.

Manual drive program

IntroductionIn drive program M, you can change gearmanually using the steering wheel paddleshifters. For this, the transmission must be inposition D. The gear currently selected andengaged is shown in the multifunctiondisplay.Manual drive program M differs from driveprograms E and S with regard to spontaneity,responsiveness and smoothness of gearchanges.

Switching on the manual drive programX Press the program selector button

(Y page 149) repeatedly until M appears inthe multifunction display.

Upshifting (except AMG vehicles)X Pull the right-hand paddle (Y page 150).

The automatic transmission shifts up to thenext gear.

Shifting up (AMG vehicles)! In manual drive program M, the automatic

transmission does not shift upautomatically even when the enginelimiting speed for the current gear isreached. When the engine limiting speed isreached, the fuel supply is cut to preventthe engine from overrevving. Always makesure that the engine speed does not reachthe red area of the tachometer. There isotherwise a risk of engine damage.

X Pull the right-hand paddle (Y page 150).The automatic transmission shifts up to thenext gear.

Before the engine speed reaches the red area,an upshift indicator will be shown in themultifunction display.X If the color in the speedometer

multifunction display changes to red and

Automatic transmission 151

Driv

ing

and

park

ing

Z

the UP display message is shown, shift upa gear.

DownshiftingX Pull the left-hand paddle (Y page 150).

The automatic transmission shifts down tothe next gear.

i If you slow down or stop without shiftingdown, the automatic transmissionautomatically shifts down.

Selecting the optimal gear formaximum accelerationX Pull the left-hand steering wheel paddle

shifter until the transmission selects theoptimum gear for the current speed.

KickdownYou can also use kickdown for maximumacceleration in manual drive program M.X Depress the accelerator pedal beyond the

pressure point.The transmission shifts to a lower geardepending on the engine speed.

X Shift back up once the desired speed isreached.

i Vehicles with an AMG engine: it is notpossible to use kickdown in manual driveprogram M.

i Vehicles without an AMG engine: if youapply full throttle, the automatictransmission shifts up to the next gearwhen the maximum engine speed isreached. This prevents the engine fromoverrevving.

Switching off the manual drive programX Press the program selector button

(Y page 149) repeatedly until E (C in AMGvehicles) or S appears in the multifunctiondisplay.

152 Automatic transmissionDr

ivin

g an

d pa

rkin

g

Problems with the automatic transmission

Problem Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions

The acceleration abilityis deteriorating.The transmission nolonger changes gear.

The transmission is in emergency mode.It is only possible to shift into second gear and reverse gear.X Stop the vehicle.X Shift the transmission to position P.X Turn the SmartKey to position 0 in the ignition lock.X Wait at least ten seconds before restarting the engine.X Shift the transmission to position D or R.

If D is selected, the transmission shifts into second gear; if R isselected, the transmission shifts into reverse gear.

X Have the transmission checked at a qualified specialistworkshop immediately.

You hear a warningtone.

You have:Rswitched off the engineRopened the driver's doorRnot moved the selector lever to position PX Move the selector lever to position P.

Refueling

Important safety notes

G WARNINGGasoline is highly flammable and poisonous.It burns violently and can cause seriouspersonal injury.Never allow sparks, flames or smokingmaterials near gasoline.Turn off the engine before refueling.Whenever you are around gasoline, avoidinhaling fumes and any skin or clothingcontact.Direct skin contact with fuels and theinhalation of fuel vapors are damaging to yourhealth.

! Do not use diesel to refuel vehicles with agasoline engine. Even small amounts of thewrong fuel result in damage to the fuelsystem and engine.

! Do not switch on the ignition if youaccidentally refuel with the wrong fuel.Otherwise, the fuel will enter the fuel lines.Notify a qualified specialist workshop andhave the fuel tank and fuel lines drainedcompletely.

! Overfilling the fuel tank could damage thefuel system.

! Take care not to spill any fuel on paintedsurfaces. You could otherwise damage thepaintwork.

! Use a filter when refueling from a fuel can.Otherwise, the fuel lines and/or injectionsystem could be blocked by particles fromthe fuel can.

If you overfill the fuel tank, pressure may buildup in the fuel tank. This could cause fuel tospray out when the fuel pump nozzle isremoved. There is a risk of injury. The fueltank is full when the fuel pump nozzle firstswitches off. End the refueling process.

Refueling 153

Driv

ing

and

park

ing

Z

For further information on fuel and fuel quality(Y page 350).

Refueling

Fuel filler flap

Example: G 550 fuel filler cap: To open the fuel filler flap; Tire pressure table= Fuel type? To insert the fuel filler cap

When you open or close the vehicle with theSmartKey, the fuel filler flap is automaticallyunlocked or locked.The position of the fuel filler cap is displayed8 in the instrument cluster. The arrownext to the filling pump indicates the side ofthe vehicle. The fuel filler flap is located to therear on the right.

Opening

: To open the fuel filler flap; Tire pressure table

= Fuel type? To insert the fuel filler capX Switch off the engine.i When the engine is running and the fuel

filler flap is open, the yellow reserve fuelwarning lamp and the = (USA only)or ; (Canada only) Check Enginewarning lamp may light up.Further information about warning andindicator lamps in the instrument clustercan be found in the Digital Operator'sManual.

X Remove the SmartKey from the ignitionlock.

X Press the fuel filler flap in the direction ofarrow :.The fuel filler flap opens slightly.

X Open the fuel filler flap.X Turn the fuel filler cap counterclockwise

and remove it.X Insert the fuel filler cap into the holder

bracket on the inside of filler flap ?.

X Completely insert the filler neck of the fuelpump nozzle into the tank and refuel.

i Do not add any more fuel after the pumpstops filling for the first time. Otherwise,fuel may leak out.

ClosingX Replace the fuel filler cap and turn it

clockwise. The fuel filler cap audiblyengages.

X Close the fuel filler flap.

i Close the fuel filler flap before locking thevehicle. A locking pin otherwise preventsthe fuel filler flap from closing after thevehicle has been locked.

154 RefuelingDr

ivin

g an

d pa

rkin

g

Fuel filler flap emergency release

The emergency release is located in the cargocompartment, on the right-hand side whenviewed in the direction of travel, behind therear panel trim.i The vehicle body in the emergency

release area has sharp edges. There is arisk of injury. Avoid contact with the edgeson the inside of the vehicle body.

X Open the rear door.X Remove edge protection :.X Remove rear panel trim ;.

X Pull emergency release = in the directionof the arrow.The fuel filler flap is unlocked.

X Open the fuel filler flap.

Refueling 155

Driv

ing

and

park

ing

Z

Problems with the fuel and fuel tank

Problem Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions

Fuel is leaking from thevehicle.

G Risk of explosion or fireThe fuel line or the fuel tank is defective.X Turn the SmartKey to position 0(Y page 139) in the ignition lock

immediately and remove it.X Do not restart the engine under any circumstances.X Consult a qualified specialist workshop.

The fuel filler flapcannot be opened.

The fuel filler flap is not unlocked.orThe SmartKey batteries are discharged.X Unlock the vehicle (Y page 68).orX Unlock the vehicle using the mechanical key (Y page 70).X Open the rear door.X Manually unlock the fuel filler flap using the emergency release

(Y page 155).

The fuel filler flap is unlocked, but the opening mechanism isjammed.X Manually unlock the fuel filler flap using the emergency release

(Y page 155).X Consult a qualified specialist workshop.

Parking

Important safety notes

G WARNINGIf you leave children unsupervised in thevehicle, they could set it in motion by, forexample:Rreleasing the parking brakeRshifting the automatic transmission out of

the parking position PRstarting the engine.They could also operate the vehicle'sequipment. There is a risk of an accident andinjury.

When leaving the vehicle, always take theSmartKey with you and lock the vehicle. Neverleave children unsupervised in the vehicle.

G WARNINGIf flammable materials such as leaves, grassor twigs are exposed to prolonged contact toparts of the exhaust system that heat up, theycould ignite. There is a risk of fire.Park the vehicle so that no flammablematerials come into contact with parts of thevehicle which are hot. Take particular care notto park on dry grassland or harvested grainfields.

156 ParkingDr

ivin

g an

d pa

rkin

g

G WARNINGIf you switch off the ignition while driving,safety-relevant functions are only availablewith limitations, or not at all. This could affect,for example, the power steering and the brakeboosting effect. You will require considerablymore effort to steer and brake. There is a riskof an accident.Do not switch off the ignition while driving.

Switching off the engine

Important safety notes

G WARNINGIf you switch off the ignition while driving,safety-relevant functions are only availablewith limitations, or not at all. This could affect,for example, the power steering and the brakeboosting effect. You will require considerablymore effort to steer and brake. There is a riskof an accident.Do not switch off the ignition while driving.

G WARNINGThe automatic transmission switches toneutral position N when you switch off theengine. The vehicle may roll away. There is arisk of an accident.After switching off the engine, always switchto parking position P. Prevent the parkedvehicle from rolling away by applying theparking brake.

Vehicles with automatic transmissionX Shift the transmission to position P.X Turn the SmartKey to position 0 in the

ignition lock (Y page 139) and remove it.The immobilizer is activated.

X Apply the parking brake firmly.X Turn the steering wheel until the steering

wheel lock engages.

i If you turn off the engine with theSmartKey and then remove it from the

ignition lock or open a front door, theautomatic transmission shifts to Pautomatically.

i The SmartKey can only be removed if theautomatic transmission is in position P.

Parking brake

G WARNINGIf you must brake the vehicle with the parkingbrake, the braking distance is considerablylonger and the wheels could lock. There is anincreased danger of skidding and accidents.Only use the parking brake to brake thevehicle when the service brake is faulty. Donot apply the parking brake too firmly. If thewheels lock, release the parking brake untilthe wheels begin turning again.

G WARNINGIf you leave children unsupervised in thevehicle, they could set it in motion by, forexample:Rreleasing the parking brakeRshifting the automatic transmission out of

the parking position PRstarting the engine.They could also operate the vehicle'sequipment. There is a risk of an accident andinjury.When leaving the vehicle, always take theSmartKey with you and lock the vehicle. Neverleave children unsupervised in the vehicle.

Parking 157

Driv

ing

and

park

ing

Z

i When you apply parking brake ; to brakethe vehicle, the brake lamps do not light up.

X To apply: pull parking brake ; up firmly.Parking brake ; is applied.When the ignition is switched on or theengine is running, the F (USA only) orJ (Canada only) indicator lamp is lit inthe instrument cluster.

X To release: depress the brake pedal andkeep it depressed.The selector lever lock is released.

X Pull parking brake ; up firmly.X Press release button : on parking

brake ; and move parking brake ; downto the stop.When the ignition is switched on or theengine is running, the F (USA only)or ! (Canada only) indicator lamp goesout in the instrument cluster.

i If you pull away with parking brake ;applied, a warning tone sounds.

Parking the vehicle for a long periodIf you leave the vehicle parked for longer thanfour weeks, the battery may be damaged byexhaustive discharge.X Connecting a trickle charger.i You can obtain information about trickle

chargers from a qualified specialistworkshop.

If you leave the vehicle parked for longer thansix weeks, the vehicle may suffer damage asa result of lack of use.X Visit a qualified specialist workshop and

seek advice.

Driving tips

General driving tips

Important safety notes

G WARNINGAlways remember that you must concentrateprimarily on driving the vehicle. The driver'sconcentration must always be directedprimarily at road traffic. For your own safetyand that of others, we recommend that youstop the vehicle at a safe place and inaccordance with the traffic conditions beforemaking or accepting a phone call.Comply with all legal requirements if you usethe telephone while driving. Use the hands-free system and only use the telephone whenroad, weather and traffic conditions permit. Insome jurisdictions, it is forbidden for driversto use mobile phones while driving.Only operate COMAND (Cockpit Managementand Data System) in compliance with all legalrequirements and when the road, weather andtraffic conditions permit. You may otherwisenot be able to observe the traffic conditions,endangering yourself and others.Remember that your vehicle covers a distanceof 44 ft (approximately 14 m) a second whenit is traveling at only 30 mph (approximately50 km/h).

G WARNINGIf you switch off the ignition while driving,safety-relevant functions are only availablewith limitations, or not at all. This could affect,for example, the power steering and the brakeboosting effect. You will require considerablymore effort to steer and brake. There is a riskof an accident.Do not switch off the ignition while driving.

158 Driving tipsDr

ivin

g an

d pa

rkin

g

Drive sensibly – save fuelObserve the following tips to save fuel:X The tires should always be inflated to the

recommended tire pressure.X Remove unnecessary loads.X Remove roof carriers when they are not

needed.X Warm up the engine at low engine speeds.X Avoid frequent acceleration or braking.X Have all maintenance work performed at

the service intervals specified in theService Booklet or indicated by the serviceinterval indicator.

Fuel consumption also increases whendriving in cold weather, in stop-and-go trafficand in mountainous terrain.

Drinking and driving

G WARNINGDrinking and driving and/or taking drugs anddriving are very dangerous combinations.Even a small amount of alcohol or drugs canaffect your reflexes, perceptions andjudgment.The possibility of a serious or even fatalaccident are greatly increased when you drinkor take drugs and drive.Do not drink or take drugs and drive or allowanyone to drive who has been drinking ortaking drugs.

Pedals

G WARNINGObjects in the driver's footwell can restrict thepedal travel or obstruct a depressed pedal.The operating and road safety of the vehicleis jeopardized. There is a risk of an accident.Make sure that all objects in the vehicle arestowed correctly, and that they cannot enterthe driver's footwell. Install the floormatssecurely and as specified in order to ensuresufficient clearance for the pedals. Do not useloose floormats.

Exhaust check

G WARNINGInhalation of exhaust gas is hazardous to yourhealth. All exhaust gas contains carbonmonoxide (CO), and inhaling it can causeunconsciousness and possible death.Do not run the engine in confined areas (suchas a garage) which are not properly ventilated.If you think that exhaust gas fumes areentering the vehicle while driving, have thecause determined and correctedimmediately. If you must drive under theseconditions, drive only with at least onewindow fully open at all times.

Certain engine systems are designed to keepthe level of poisonous components in exhaustfumes within legal limits.These systems only work at peak efficiency ifthey are serviced exactly in accordance withthe manufacturer's specifications. For thisreason, all work on the engine should only becarried out by qualified and authorizedMercedes-Benz technicians.The engine settings must not be changedunder any circumstances. Furthermore, allspecific service work must be carried out atregular intervals and in accordance with theMercedes-Benz service requirements. Detailscan be found in the Maintenance Booklet.

Braking

Important safety notes

G WARNINGIf you activate the LOW off-road gear whiledriving on a slippery road surface, the wheelsmay lose traction:Rif you remove your foot from the

accelerator pedal when drivingRif off road ABS intervenes when brakingIf the wheels lose traction. the vehicle can nolonger be steered. There is an increaseddanger of skidding and accidents.

Driving tips 159

Driv

ing

and

park

ing

Z

Never activate the LOW off-road gear whiledriving on a slippery road surface.

Downhill gradients! On long and steep gradients, you must

reduce the load on the brakes by shiftingearly to a lower gear. This allows you to takeadvantage of the engine braking effect andhelps avoid overheating and excessivewear of the brakes.When you take advantage of the enginebraking effect, a drive wheel may not turnfor some time, e.g. on a slippery roadsurface. This could cause damage to thedrive train. This type of damage is notcovered by the Mercedes-Benz warranty.

Heavy and light loads

G WARNINGIf you rest your foot on the brake pedal whiledriving, the braking system can overheat. Thisincreases the stopping distance and can evencause the braking system to fail. There is arisk of an accident.Never use the brake pedal as a footrest. Neverdepress the brake pedal and the acceleratorpedal at the same time.

! Depressing the brake pedal constantlyresults in excessive and premature wear tothe brake pads.

If the brakes have been subjected to a heavyload, do not stop the vehicle immediately, butdrive on for a short while. This allows theairflow to cool the brakes more quickly.

Wet roadsIf driving in heavy rain for a prolonged periodof time without braking, there may be adelayed reaction from the brakes whenbraking for the first time. This may also occurafter the vehicle has been washed.

You have to depress the brake pedal morefirmly. Maintain a greater distance from thevehicle in front.After driving on a wet road or having thevehicle washed, brake firmly while payingattention to the traffic conditions. This willwarm up the brake discs, thereby drying themmore quickly and protecting them againstcorrosion.

Limited braking performance on salt-treated roadsIf you drive on salted roads, a layer of saltresidue may form on the brake discs andbrake pads. This can result in a significantlylonger braking distance.RBrake occasionally to remove any possible

salt residue. Make sure that you do notendanger other road users when doing so.RCarefully depress the brake pedal and the

beginning and end of a journey.RMaintain a greater distance to the vehicle

ahead.

Servicing the brakes! If the brake warning lamp lights up in the

instrument cluster and you hear a warningtone even though the parking brake hasbeen released, the brake fluid level may betoo low. Observe additional warningmessages in the multifunction display.The brake fluid level may be too low due tobrake pad wear or leaking brake lines.Have the brake system checkedimmediately. This work should be carriedout at a qualified specialist workshop.

! A function or performance test shouldonly be carried out on a 2-axledynamometer. If you are planning to havethe vehicle tested on such a dynamometer,contact an authorized Mercedes-BenzCenter to obtain further information first.Otherwise, you could damage the drivetrain or the brake system.

160 Driving tipsDr

ivin

g an

d pa

rkin

g

! As the ESP® system operatesautomatically, the engine and the ignitionmust be switched off (the SmartKey mustbe in position 0 or 1 in the ignition lock) ifthe parking brake is tested on a brakedynamometer (for a maximum of tenseconds).Braking applications triggeredautomatically by ESP® may otherwiseseriously damage the brake system.

Mercedes-Benz recommends that you onlyhave brake pads/linings installed on yourvehicle which have been approved forMercedes-Benz vehicles or which correspondto an equivalent quality standard. Brakepads/linings which have not been approvedfor Mercedes-Benz vehicles or which are notof an equivalent quality could affect yourvehicle's operating safety.Mercedes-Benz recommends that you onlyuse brake fluid that has been speciallyapproved for your vehicle by Mercedes-Benz,or which corresponds to an equivalent qualitystandard. Brake fluid which has not beenapproved for Mercedes-Benz vehicles orwhich is not of an equivalent quality couldaffect your vehicle's operating safety.All checks and maintenance work on thebrake system must be carried out at aqualified specialist workshop.Have brake pads installed and brake fluidreplaced at a qualified specialist workshop.If your brake system is subject only tomoderate loads, you should test thefunctionality of your brakes at regularintervals by pressing firmly on the brake pedalat high speeds. This improves the grip of thebrake pads.You can find a description of Brake Assist(BAS) on (Y page 61).

High-performance brake system forAMG vehiclesThe high-performance brake system is onlyinstalled on the G 63 AMG and the G 65 AMG.

The high-performance brake system isdesigned for heavy loads. This may lead tonoise when braking. This will depend on:RSpeedRBraking forceREnvironmental conditions, such as

temperature and humidityThe wear of individual components of thebrake system, such as the brake pads/liningsor brake discs, depends on the individualdriving style and operating conditions.For this reason, it is impossible to state amileage that will be valid under allcircumstances. An aggressive driving stylewill lead to high wear. You can obtain furtherinformation about this from your authorizedMercedes-Benz Center.New and replaced brake pads and discs onlyreach their optimum braking effect afterseveral hundred kilometers of driving.Compensate for this by applying greater forceto the brake pedal. Keep this in mind, andadapt your driving and braking accordinglyduring this break-in period.Excessive heavy braking results incorrespondingly high brake wear. Observethe brake system warning lamp in theinstrument cluster and note any brake statusmessages in the multifunction display. Forhigh-performance driving in particular, it isimportant to maintain and have the brakesystem checked regularly.

Parking brake

G WARNINGIf you must brake the vehicle with the parkingbrake, the braking distance is considerablylonger and the wheels could lock. There is anincreased danger of skidding and accidents.Only use the parking brake to brake thevehicle when the service brake is faulty. Donot apply the parking brake too firmly. If thewheels lock, release the parking brake untilthe wheels begin turning again.

Driving tips 161

Driv

ing

and

park

ing

Z

If you brake the vehicle with the parkingbrake, the brake lamps will not light up.If you drive on wet roads or dirt-coveredsurfaces, road salt and/or dirt could get intothe parking brake.In order to prevent corrosion and a reductionin the braking power of the parking brake,observe the following:Rpull the parking brake upwards with the

release button depressed from time to timebefore beginning the journey(Y page 157).Rdrive for approximately 110 yds (100 m) at

a maximum speed of 12 mph (20 km/h).

Driving on wet roads

HydroplaningIf water has accumulated to a certain depthon the road surface, there is a danger ofhydroplaning occurring, even if:Ryou drive at low speeds.Rthe tires have adequate tread depth.For this reason, in the event of heavy rain orin conditions in which hydroplaning mayoccur, you must drive in the followingmanner:Rlower your speed.Ravoid ruts.Rbrake carefully.

Driving on flooded roads! Do not drive through flooded areas.

Check the depth of any water before drivingthrough it. Drive slowly through standingwater. Otherwise, water may enter thevehicle interior or the engine compartment.This can damage the electroniccomponents in the engine or the automatictransmission. Water can also be drawn inby the engine's air suction nozzles and thiscan cause engine damage.

If you have to drive on stretches of road onwhich water has collected, please bear inmind that:Rthe maximum permissible fording depth in

still water is 24 in (60 cm)Ryou should drive no faster than at walking

pace.

Off-road fording! The water depth may not exceed a

maximum of 24 in (60 cm). Note that thepossible fording depth is less in flowingwater.

! Under no circumstances should youaccelerate before entering the water. Thebow wave could cause water to enter anddamage the engine and other assemblies.

! Do not open any of the vehicle's doorswhile fording. Otherwise, water could getinto the vehicle interior and damage thevehicle's electronics and interiorequipment.

: Fording depth: 24 in (60 cm)

The fording depth must not exceed 24 in(60 cm) when the vehicle is loaded and readyto drive.

i You may only drive through fresh water.RObserve the safety notes (Y page 164) and

the general notes (Y page 164) on off-roaddriving.REstablish how deep the water is and the

characteristics of the body of water beforefording.

162 Driving tipsDr

ivin

g an

d pa

rkin

g

RSwitch off the air-conditioning system.R

RShift the transfer case to LOW RANGE(Y page 198).REngage the differential locks, if necessary

(Y page 201).RRestrict the shift range to 1 or

2(Y page 150).RAvoid high engine speeds.REnter and exit the water at a flat place and

at a steady walking pace.RDrive slowly and at an even speed through

the water.RDo not stop and do not switch off the

engine.RWater offers a high degree of resistance,

and the ground is slippery and in somecases unstable. Therefore, it is difficult anddangerous to pull away in the water.REnsure that a bow wave does not form as

you drive.RClean any mud from the tire tread after

fording.RApply the brakes to dry them after fording.RWater offers a high degree of resistance,

and the ground is slippery and in somecases unstable. Therefore, it is difficult anddangerous to pull away in the water.REnsure that a bow wave does not form as

you drive.RClean any mud from the tire tread after

fording.RApply the brakes to dry them after fording.

Winter driving

General notes

G DANGERIf the exhaust pipe is blocked or adequateventilation is not possible, poisonous gasessuch as carbon monoxide (CO) may enter thevehicle. This is the case, e.g. if the vehicle

becomes trapped in snow. There is a risk offatal injury.If you leave the engine or the auxiliary heatingrunning, make sure the exhaust pipe and areaaround the vehicle are clear of snow. Toensure an adequate supply of fresh air, opena window on the side of the vehicle that is notfacing into the wind.

G WARNINGIf snow chains are installed to the frontwheels, they may drag against the vehiclebody or chassis components. This couldcause damage to the vehicle or the tires.There is a risk of an accident.To avoid hazardous situations:Rnever install snow chains to the front

wheelsRalways install snow chains in pairs to the

rear wheels.

Have your vehicle winterproofed at a qualifiedspecialist workshop at the onset of winter.Observe the notes in the "Winter operation"section (Y page 320).

Driving with summer tiresObserve the notes in the "Winter operation"section (Y page 320).

Slippery road surfaces

G WARNINGIf you shift down on a slippery road surface inan attempt to increase the engine's brakingeffect, the drive wheels could lose their grip.There is an increased danger of skidding andaccidents.Do not shift down for additional enginebraking on a slippery road surface.

G WARNINGThe outside temperature indicator is notdesigned to serve as an ice-warning deviceand is therefore unsuitable for that purpose.

Driving tips 163

Driv

ing

and

park

ing

Z

Indicated temperatures just above thefreezing point do not guarantee that the roadsurface is free of ice. The road may still be icy,especially in wooded areas or on bridges.

G WARNINGIf you activate the LOW off-road gear whiledriving on a slippery road surface, the wheelsmay lose traction:Rif you remove your foot from the

accelerator pedal when drivingRif off road ABS intervenes when brakingIf the wheels lose traction. the vehicle can nolonger be steered. There is an increaseddanger of skidding and accidents.Never activate the LOW off-road gear whiledriving on a slippery road surface.

Drive particularly carefully on slippery roadsurfaces. Avoid sudden acceleration, steeringand braking maneuvers. Do not use cruisecontrol.If the vehicle threatens to skid or cannot bestopped when moving at low speed:X Shift the transmission to position N.X Try to bring the vehicle under control using

corrective steering.i For more information on driving with

snow chains, see (Y page 321).

Off-road driving

Important safety notes

G WARNINGDo not load items on the basic carrier bars. Itmay cause instability during some maneuverswhich could result in an accident.Drive slowly in unknown terrain. This willmake it easier to recognize unexpectedobstacles and avoid damage to the vehicle.To help avoid the vehicle rolling over, neverturn it around on steep inclines. If the vehicle

cannot complete the attempted climb, back itdown in reverse gear.Do not drive along the side of a slope. Thevehicle might otherwise rollover. If in doing sothe vehicle begins to show a tendency to roll,immediately steer into a line of gravity(straight up or downhill).Never let the vehicle roll backwards in idle.You may lose control of the vehicle if you useonly the service brake. For information ondriving downhill, see "Driving downhill".

When driving off-road, sand, mud and water,possibly mixed with oil, for example, could getinto the brakes. This could result in a reducedbraking effect or in total brake failure and alsoin increased wear and tear. The brakingcharacteristics change depending on thematerial ingressing the brakes. Clean thebrakes after driving off-road. If you detect areduced braking effect or grinding noises,have the brake system checked in a qualifiedspecialist workshop as soon as possible.Adapt your driving style to the differentbraking characteristics.Driving off-road increases the likelihood ofdamage to the vehicle, which, in turn, can leadto failure of the mechanical assembly orsystems. Adapt your driving style to suit theterrain conditions. Drive carefully. Havedamage to the vehicle rectified immediatelyat a qualified specialist workshop.

General notes

H Environmental noteProtection of the environment is of primaryimportance. Treat nature with respect.Observe all prohibiting signs.

Read this section carefully before driving yourvehicle off-road. Practice by driving over moregentle off-road terrain first.Familiarize yourself with the characteristicsof your vehicle and the gear shift operationbefore driving through difficult terrain.

164 Driving tipsDr

ivin

g an

d pa

rkin

g

The following driving systems are speciallyadapted to off-road driving:R4ETS (Y page 62)RTransfer case (Y page 198)RDifferential locks (Y page 201) Observe the following notes:Rstop your vehicle and, if necessary, shift the

transfer case to LOW RANGE(Y page 199) before driving off-road.RAMG vehicles: to shift the transfer case to

LOW RANGE, deactivate the ECO start/stop function (Y page 142).Rengage the differential locks, if necessary

(Y page 201)

i ABS, 4ETS, ESP® and BAS are deactivatedwhen the differential locks are activated.This allows the front wheels to lock briefly,so that these can dig into a loose surface.However, please note that locked wheelsskid and can no longer steer.RCheck that items of luggage and loads are

stowed safely and are well secured(Y page 267).RTo avoid damaging the vehicle, make sure

there is always sufficient ground clearance.RAlways keep the engine running and in gear

when driving on a downhill gradient.RAlways keep the engine running and in gear

when driving on a slope.RDrive slowly and evenly, if necessary at a

walking pace.REnsure that the wheels are in contact with

the ground at all times.RDrive with extreme care on unknown off-

road routes where visibility is poor. Forsafety reasons, get out of the vehicle firstand survey the off-road route.RCheck the depth of water before fording

rivers and streams.RWhen fording, do not stop and do not

switch off the engine.

RLook out for obstacles such as rocks, holes,tree stumps and furrows.RAlways keep the doors, rear door, side

windows and the sliding sunroof closedwhile the vehicle is in motion.RSwitch off cruise control.RDo not stray from marked routes or paths.RAdapt your speed to the terrain. The

rougher, steeper or more ruts on theterrain, the slower your speed should be.RDrive slowly and at an even speed through

the water. Ensure that a bow wave does notform as you drive.ROn sand, drive quickly to overcome the

rolling resistance. Otherwise, the vehiclecould dig itself into the sand.RDo not jump with the vehicle as this will

interrupt the vehicle's propulsion.RAvoid high engine speeds. Drive at

appropriate engine speeds (maximum3,000 rpm).RDo not shift the automatic transmission to

transmission position N.RAlways check the vehicle for damage after

off-road driving.

i Information about retrofitting special all-terrain tires is available from any qualifiedspecialist workshop.

i Do not use the HOLD function whendriving off-road, on steep uphill or downhillgradients or on slippery or loose surfaces.The HOLD function cannot hold the vehicleon such surfaces.

Checklist before driving off-road! If the engine oil warning lamp lights up

while the vehicle is in motion, stop thevehicle in a safe place as soon as possible.Check the engine oil level. The engine oilwarning lamp warning must not be ignored.Continuing the journey while the symbol isdisplayed could lead to engine damage.

Driving tips 165

Driv

ing

and

park

ing

Z

X Engine oil level: check the engine oil leveland add oil if necessary.Only then does the engine receive enoughoil when the vehicle is standing on a steepincline.

X Tire-changing tool kit: check that the jackis working and make sure you have the lugwrench, a robust tow cable and a foldingspade in the vehicle.

X Wheels and tires: check the tire treaddepth and tire pressure.

X Check for damage and remove any foreignobjects, e.g. small stones, from thewheels/tires.

X Replace any missing valve caps.X Replace dented or damaged wheels.X Carry a sound spare wheel.

Checklist after driving off-roadDriving over rough terrain places greaterdemands on your vehicle than driving onnormal roads. After driving off-road, checkthe vehicle. This allows you to detect damagepromptly and reduce the risk of an accidentto yourself and other road users.X Shift the transfer case to HIGH

RANGE(Y page 199).X Disengage the differential locks

(Y page 201).X Clean the headlamps and rear lights and

check for damage.X Clean the front and rear license plates.X Clean the wheels and tires with a water jet

and remove any foreign objects.X Clean the wheels, tires, wheel housings and

the vehicle underside with a water jet;check for any foreign objects and damage.

X Check whether twigs or other parts ofplants have become trapped. Theseincrease the risk of fire and can damagefuel pipes, brake hoses or the rubberbellows of the axle joints and propellershafts.

X After the trip, examine without fail theentire undercarriage, wheels, tires, brakes,bodywork structure, steering, chassis andexhaust system for damage.

X After driving for extended periods acrosssand, mud, gravel, water or in similarly dirtyconditions, have the brake discs, wheels,brake pads/linings and axle joints checkedand cleaned.

X If you notice strong vibrations after off-roaddriving, check for foreign objects in thewheels and drive train and, if necessary,remove them. Foreign objects can disturbthe balance and cause vibrations.

X Test the brakes.

Driving on sandObserve the following rules when driving onsand:RShift the transfer case to LOW

RANGE(Y page 199).RAvoid high engine speeds.RLimit the shift range of the automatic

transmission according to the off-roadconditions.RDrive quickly to overcome the rolling

resistance. Otherwise, the vehicle could digitself into the sand.RDrive in the tracks of other vehicles if

possible. Make sure that the ruts are nottoo deep, that the sand is firm enough andthat your vehicle has sufficient groundclearance.

Tire ruts and gravel roads! Check that the ruts are not too deep and

that your vehicle has sufficient clearance.Otherwise, your vehicle could be damagedor bottom out and get stuck.

Observe the following rules when drivingalong ruts in off-road terrain or on roads withloose gravel:

166 Driving tipsDr

ivin

g an

d pa

rkin

g

RShift the transfer case to LOW RANGE(Y page 199).RAvoid high engine speeds.RObserve the safety notes (Y page 164) and

the general notes (Y page 164) on off-roaddriving.RRestrict the shift range of the automatic

transmission to 1(Y page 150).RDrive slowly.RWhere ruts are too deep, drive with the

wheels of one side on the center grassyarea, if possible.

Driving over obstacles! Obstacles could damage the floor of the

vehicle or components of the chassis. Askpassengers for guidance when driving overlarge obstacles. The passenger shouldalways keep a safe distance from thevehicle when doing so in order to avoidinjury as a result of unexpected vehiclemovements. After driving off-road or overobstacles, check the vehicle for possibledamage, especially to the underbody andthe components of the chassis.

! Drive with particular care when drivingover an obstacle while driving up or downa steep slope.The vehicle could otherwise tilt and slidesideways or tip over.

Observe the following rules when driving overtree stumps, large stones and otherobstacles:

RObserve the safety notes (Y page 164) andthe general notes (Y page 164) on off-roaddriving.RShift the transfer case to LOW

RANGE(Y page 199).RAvoid high engine speeds.RRestrict the shift range to 1(Y page 150).RMake sure that you have enough ground

clearance before driving across anobstacle.RDrive very slowly.RTry to drive straight over the center of

obstacles: front wheel first, then rearwheel.

Traveling uphill

Approach/departure angle

G WARNINGIf you drive on a steep incline at an angle orturn when driving on an incline, the vehiclecould slip sideways, tip and rollover. There isa risk of an accident.Always drive on a steep incline in the line offall (straight up or down) and do not turn thevehicle.

Driving tips 167

Driv

ing

and

park

ing

Z

: ;

G 550 34° 29°

G 63 AMG Value notavailable atthe time ofgoing toprint.

Value notavailable atthe time ofgoing toprint.

RObserve the safety notes (Y page 164) andthe general notes (Y page 164) on off-roaddriving.RDo not drive at an angle on slopes, inclines

or gradients, but instead follow the directline of fall. The maximum gradient-climbingcapability of your vehicle is 80%, whichcorresponds to an approach/departureangle of 38°. Note that the vehicle'sgradient-climbing capability depends onthe off-road conditions.RBefore driving on extreme uphill and

downhill gradients, shift the transfer caseto LOW RANGE(Y page 199).REngage the differential locks, if necessary

(Y page 201).RDrive slowly.RAccelerate gently and make sure that the

wheels are gripping.RAvoid high engine speeds, except when

driving on sandy and muddy routes withhigh driving resistance.RAvoid high engine speeds – drive at an

appropriate engine speed (maximum3,000 rpm).RWhen driving down an incline, make use of

the engine's braking effect. Observe theengine speed; do not overrev the engine.

i Further information on the maximumengine speed: (Y page 210).

RSelect a shift range appropriate to thegradient.RBefore tackling steep downhill gradients,

select shift range 1(Y page 150).RAlways check the brakes after driving off-

road.

i Hill start assist will aid you when pullingaway on a hill.For more information, see "Hill start assist"(Y page 141).

Maximum gradient-climbing capabilityOn good road surfaces the maximumgradient-climbing capability of your vehicle is80%, which corresponds to an approach/departure angle of 38°. Note that thevehicle's gradient-climbing capabilitydepends on the off-road conditions.Accelerate carefully and make sure that thewheels do not spin when driving on steepterrain.

i If the load on the front axle is reducedwhen pulling away on a steep uphill slope,the front wheels have a tendency to spin.4ETS detects this and brakes the wheelsaccordingly. The rear wheel torque isincreased, making it easier to drive off.

HilltopsWhen driving on an uphill gradient, reducepressure slightly on the acceleratorimmediately before reaching the top of the hill(do not shift the transmission to position N).Use the vehicle's own impetus to drive overthe top of the hill.This style of driving prevents:Rthe vehicle from lifting off the ground on the

brow of a hillRloss of tractionRthe vehicle from traveling too quickly down

the other side

168 Driving tipsDr

ivin

g an

d pa

rkin

g

Driving downhillRBefore tackling steep downhill gradients,

select shift range 1(Y page 150).This way you use the engine's brakingeffect to reduce the speed. If this is notsufficient, brake gently. When doing so,make sure that the vehicle is facing in thedirection of the line of fall.RObserve the notes on driving in

mountainous terrain (Y page 168).RDrive slowly.RDo not drive at an angle down steep

inclines. Steer into the line of fall and drivewith the front wheels aligned straight.Otherwise, the vehicle could slip sideways,tip and roll over.RCheck that the brakes are working normally

after a long downhill stretch.

i The special off-road ABS setting(Y page 61) enables repeated, brief,precise locking of the front wheels, whichleads to the wheels digging into the looseground. Note that when the front wheelsare fully braked, they slide easily over thesurface of the ground, making it difficult tosteer.

Driving systems

Cruise control

Important safety notes

G WARNINGThe brake pedal moves when cruise controlbrakes the vehicle. A foot in the area underthe brake pedal could become trapped. Themovement of the pedal, and therefore thevehicle's ability to brake, may be restricted byobjects in the area under the brake. There isa risk of an accident and injury.Do not place your foot under the brake pedal.Keep the area under the brake pedal free fromobstructions.

If you fail to adapt your driving style, cruisecontrol can neither reduce the risk ofaccident nor override the laws of physics.Cruise control cannot take account of road,weather and traffic conditions. Cruise controlis only an aid. You are responsible for thedistance to the vehicle in front, for vehiclespeed and for braking in good time. Adjustyour driving style to the traffic conditions.Only engage cruise control when the currentroad, weather and traffic conditions permit itto be done safely. Drive carefully andmaintain a suitable distance to the vehicle infront.Do not use cruise control:Rin traffic conditions that do not allow you

to drive at a constant speed, e.g. heavytraffic, on winding roads or off-roadRon slippery road surfaces. Braking or

accelerating could cause the drive wheelsto lose traction and the vehicle could thenskidRwhen there is poor visibility, e.g. due to fog,

heavy rain or snow

General notesCruise control maintains a constant roadspeed for you. On long and steep downhillgradients, especially if the vehicle is laden,you must select shift range 1, 2 or 3 in goodtime. By doing so, you will make use of thebraking effect of the engine, which relievesthe load on the brake system and preventsthe brakes from overheating and wearing tooquickly.Use cruise control only if road and trafficconditions make it appropriate to maintain asteady speed for a prolonged period. You canstore any road speed above 20 mph(30 km/h).

i Cruise control should not be activatedduring off-road driving.

Driving systems 169

Driv

ing

and

park

ing

Z

Cruise control lever

: To activate or increase speed; LIM indicator lamp= To activate at the current speed/last

stored speed? To activate or reduce speedA To switch between cruise control and

variable SPEEDTRONICB To deactivate cruise control

You can operate cruise control and variableSPEEDTRONIC with the cruise control lever.When you activate cruise control, the storedspeed is shown in the multifunction displayfor five seconds.The full range of cruise control functions willbecome available again once you confirm theDEF display message:X Briefly press the V, U, & or* button on the multifunction steeringwheel.

orX Briefly press the reset button on the

instrument cluster.The LIM indicator lamp on the cruise controllever indicates which system you haveselected:RLIM indicator lamp off: cruise control is

selected.RLIM indicator lamp on: variable

SPEEDTRONIC is selected.

Activation conditionsTo activate cruise control, all of the followingactivation conditions must be fulfilled:Rthe parking brake must be released.Ryou are driving faster than 20 mph

(30 km/h).RESP® must be active, but not intervening.Rthe transmission must be in position D.

Selecting cruise control

: To activate or increase speed; LIM indicator lamp= To activate at the current speed/last

stored speed? To activate or reduce speedA To switch between cruise control and

variable SPEEDTRONICB To deactivate cruise controlX Check whether LIM indicator lamp ; is off.

If it is off, cruise control is already selected.If it is not, press the cruise control lever inthe direction of arrow A.LIM indicator lamp ; in the cruise controllever goes out. Cruise control is selected.

170 Driving systemsDr

ivin

g an

d pa

rkin

g

Storing and maintaining the currentspeed

Storing and maintaining

: To activate or increase speed; LIM indicator lamp= To activate at the current speed/last

stored speed? To activate or reduce speedA To switch between cruise control and

variable SPEEDTRONICB To deactivate cruise control

You can store the current speed if you aredriving faster than 20 mph (30 km/h).X Accelerate the vehicle to the desired

speed.X Briefly press the cruise control lever

up : or down ?.X Remove your foot from the accelerator

pedal.Cruise control is activated. The vehicleautomatically maintains the stored speed.

i Cruise control may be unable to maintainthe stored speed on uphill and downhillgradients. The stored speed is resumedwhen the gradient levels out. Cruise controlmaintains the stored speed on downhillgradients by automatically applying thebrakes.

Calling up the last speed storedG WARNINGIf you call up the stored speed and it is lowerthan the current speed, the vehicle

decelerates. If you do not know the storedspeed, the vehicle could decelerateunexpectedly. There is a risk of an accident.Pay attention to the road and trafficconditions before calling up the stored speed.If you do not know the stored speed, store thedesired speed again.

: To activate or increase speed; LIM indicator lamp= To activate at the current speed/last

stored speed? To activate or reduce speedA To switch between cruise control and

variable SPEEDTRONICB To deactivate cruise controlX Briefly pull the cruise control lever towards

you =.X Remove your foot from the accelerator

pedal.Cruise control is activated and adjusts thevehicle's speed to the last speed stored.

i If no speed is stored, cruise control storesthe current speed and maintains it.

Driving systems 171

Driv

ing

and

park

ing

Z

Calling up the last speed stored

Storing and maintaining

: To activate or increase speed; LIM indicator lamp= To activate at the current speed/last

stored speed? To activate or reduce speedA To switch between cruise control and

variable SPEEDTRONICB To deactivate cruise control

You can store the current speed if you aredriving faster than 20 mph (30 km/h).X Accelerate the vehicle to the desired

speed.X Briefly press the cruise control lever

up : or down ?.X Remove your foot from the accelerator

pedal.Cruise control is activated. The vehicleautomatically maintains the stored speed.

i Cruise control may be unable to maintainthe stored speed on uphill and downhillgradients. The stored speed is resumedwhen the gradient levels out. Cruise controlmaintains the stored speed on downhillgradients by automatically applying thebrakes.

Calling up the last speed storedG WARNINGIf you call up the stored speed and it is lowerthan the current speed, the vehicledecelerates. If you do not know the stored

speed, the vehicle could decelerateunexpectedly. There is a risk of an accident.Pay attention to the road and trafficconditions before calling up the stored speed.If you do not know the stored speed, store thedesired speed again.

: To activate or increase speed; LIM indicator lamp= To activate at the current speed/last

stored speed? To activate or reduce speedA To switch between cruise control and

variable SPEEDTRONICB To deactivate cruise controlX Briefly pull the cruise control lever towards

you =.X Remove your foot from the accelerator

pedal.Cruise control is activated and adjusts thevehicle's speed to the last speed stored.

i If no speed is stored, cruise control storesthe current speed and maintains it.

172 Driving systemsDr

ivin

g an

d pa

rkin

g

Setting a speed

Adjusting

: To activate or increase speed; LIM indicator lamp= To activate at the current speed/last

stored speed? To activate or reduce speedA To switch between cruise control and

variable SPEEDTRONICB To deactivate cruise control

Keep in mind that it may take a brief momentuntil the vehicle accelerates or decelerates tothe set speed.X To increase the speed: press the cruise

control lever up :.X To decrease the speed: press the cruise

control lever down ?.X Keep the cruise control lever pressed until

the desired speed is reached.X Release the cruise control lever.

The new speed is stored.

Making adjustments in 1 mph increments(1 km/h increments in Canada)

: To activate or increase speed; LIM indicator lamp= To activate at the current speed/last

stored speed? To activate or reduce speedA To switch between cruise control and

variable SPEEDTRONICB To deactivate cruise controlX Briefly press the cruise control lever

up : for a higher speed or down ? for alower speed.The last speed stored is increased orreduced.

Adjusting in 5 mph increments (10 km/hincrements):

: To activate or increase speed; LIM indicator lamp= To activate at the current speed/last

stored speed? To activate or reduce speed

Driving systems 173

Driv

ing

and

park

ing

Z

A To switch between cruise control andvariable SPEEDTRONIC

B To deactivate cruise controlX Briefly press the cruise control lever

up : or down ? to beyond the pressurepoint.The last speed stored is increased orreduced.

i Cruise control is not deactivated if youdepress the accelerator pedal. Forexample, if you accelerate briefly toovertake, cruise control adjusts thevehicle's speed to the last speed storedafter you have finished overtaking.

Deactivating cruise control

: To activate or increase speed; LIM indicator lamp= To activate at the current speed/last

stored speed? To activate or reduce speedA To switch between cruise control and

variable SPEEDTRONICB To deactivate cruise control

There are several ways to deactivate cruisecontrol:X Briefly press the cruise control lever

forwards B.orX Brake.

orX Briefly press the cruise control lever in the

direction of arrow A.Variable SPEEDTRONIC is selected. LIMindicator lamp ; in the cruise control leverlights up.

Cruise control is automatically deactivated if:Ryou apply the parking brake.Ryou are driving at less than 20 mph

(30 km/h).RESP® intervenes or you deactivate ESP®.Ryou shift the transmission to position N

while driving.

i The last speed stored is cleared when youswitch off the engine.

SPEEDTRONIC

Important safety notes

G WARNINGIf you rest your foot on the brake pedal whiledriving, the braking system can overheat. Thisincreases the stopping distance and can evencause the braking system to fail. There is arisk of an accident.Never use the brake pedal as a footrest. Neverdepress the brake pedal and the acceleratorpedal at the same time.

! Depressing the brake pedal constantlyresults in excessive and premature wear tothe brake pads.

If you fail to adapt your driving style,SPEEDTRONIC can neither reduce the risk ofaccident nor override the laws of physics.SPEEDTRONIC cannot take account of road,weather and traffic conditions.SPEEDTRONIC is only an aid. You areresponsible for the distance to the vehicle infront, for vehicle speed, for braking in goodtime and for staying in lane. Only engageSPEEDTRONIC when the current road,weather and traffic conditions permit it to be

174 Driving systemsDr

ivin

g an

d pa

rkin

g

done safely. Drive carefully and maintain asuitable distance to the vehicle in front.

General notesSPEEDTRONIC brakes automatically so thatyou do not exceed the set speed. On long andsteep downhill gradients, especially if thevehicle is laden or towing a trailer, you mustselect shift range 1, 2 or 3 in good time. Bydoing so, you will make use of the brakingeffect of the engine, which relieves the loadon the brake system and prevents the brakesfrom overheating and wearing too quickly. Ifyou need additional braking, depress thebrake pedal repeatedly rather thancontinuously.

i The speed indicated in the speedometermay differ slightly from the limit speedstored.

Cruise control lever

: To store the current speed or a higherspeed

; LIM indicator lamp= To call up the last speed stored? To store the current speed or a lower

speedA To switch between cruise control and

variable SPEEDTRONICB To deactivate variable SPEEDTRONIC

You can operate cruise control and variableSPEEDTRONIC with the cruise control lever.

The LIM indicator lamp on the cruise controllever indicates which system you haveselected:RLIM indicator lamp off: cruise control is

selected.RLIM indicator lamp on: variable

SPEEDTRONIC is selected.You can use the cruise control lever to limitthe speed to any speed above 30 km/h whilethe engine is running.

Selecting variable SPEEDTRONIC

: To activate or increase speed; LIM indicator lamp= To activate at the current speed/last

stored speed? To activate or reduce speedA To switch between cruise control and

variable SPEEDTRONICB To deactivate cruise control

If you fail to adapt your driving style,SPEEDTRONIC can neither reduce the risk ofaccident nor override the laws of physics.SPEEDTRONIC cannot take account of road,weather and traffic conditions.SPEEDTRONIC is only an aid. You areresponsible for the distance to the vehicle infront, for vehicle speed, for braking in goodtime and for staying in lane. Only engageSPEEDTRONIC when the current road,weather and traffic conditions permit it to bedone safely. Drive carefully and maintain asuitable distance to the vehicle in front.X Check whether LIM indicator lamp ; is on.

Driving systems 175

Driv

ing

and

park

ing

Z

If it is on, variable SPEEDTRONIC is alreadyselected.If it is not, press the cruise control lever inthe direction of arrow A.LIM indicator lamp ; in the cruise controllever lights up. Variable SPEEDTRONIC isselected.

Storing the current speed

: To activate or increase speed; LIM indicator lamp= To activate at the current speed/last

stored speed? To activate or reduce speedA To switch between cruise control and

variable SPEEDTRONICB To deactivate cruise control

You can use the cruise control lever to limitthe speed to any speed above 18 km/h whilethe engine is running.X Briefly press the cruise control lever

up : or down ?.The current speed is stored and shown inthe multifunction display.

i On downhill gradients, the speed can beexceeded despite variable SPEEDTRONIC.If this is the case, you will hear a warningtone and the Limit Exceeded messageappears in the multifunction display. Applythe brakes yourself if required.

Calling up the last speed stored

Calling up the last speed stored

: To activate or increase speed; LIM indicator lamp= To activate at the current speed/last

stored speed? To activate or reduce speedA To switch between cruise control and

variable SPEEDTRONICB To deactivate cruise control

If you fail to adapt your driving style,SPEEDTRONIC can neither reduce the risk ofaccident nor override the laws of physics.SPEEDTRONIC cannot take account of road,weather and traffic conditions.SPEEDTRONIC is only an aid. You areresponsible for the distance to the vehicle infront, for vehicle speed, for braking in goodtime and for staying in lane. Only engageSPEEDTRONIC when the current road,weather and traffic conditions permit it to bedone safely. Drive carefully and maintain asuitable distance to the vehicle in front.X Briefly pull the cruise control lever towards

you =.

i If you call up the stored speed and yourcurrent speed is higher, you will hear awarning tone. The Limit Exceededmessage appears in the multifunctiondisplay.

i If no speed is stored, variableSPEEDTRONIC stores the current speedand maintains it.

176 Driving systemsDr

ivin

g an

d pa

rkin

g

Deactivating variable SPEEDTRONIC

There are several ways to deactivate variableSPEEDTRONIC:X Briefly press the cruise control lever

forwards B.orX Briefly press the cruise control lever in the

direction of arrow A.LIM indicator lamp ; in the cruise controllever goes out. Variable SPEEDTRONIC isdeactivated.Cruise control is selected.

It is not possible to deactivate variableSPEEDTRONIC by braking.Variable SPEEDTRONIC is deactivatedautomatically when you depress theaccelerator pedal beyond the pressure point(kickdown), but only if your current speeddoes not differ by more than 12 mph from thestored speed.

DISTRONIC PLUS

Important safety notes

G WARNINGDISTRONIC PLUS does not react to:Rpeople or animalsRstationary obstacles on the road, e.g.

stopped or parked vehiclesRoncoming and crossing traffic

As a result, DISTRONIC PLUS may neither givewarnings nor intervene in such situations.There is a risk of an accident.Always pay careful attention to the trafficsituation and be ready to brake.

G WARNINGDISTRONIC PLUS cannot always clearlyidentify other road users and complex trafficsituations.In such cases, DISTRONIC PLUS may:Rgive an unnecessary warning and then

brake the vehicleRneither give a warning nor interveneRaccelerate unexpectedlyThere is a risk of an accident.Continue to drive carefully and be ready tobrake, in particular when warned to do so byDISTRONIC PLUS.

G WARNINGDISTRONIC PLUS brakes your vehicle with upto 40% of the maximum braking force. If thisbraking force is insufficient, DISTRONIC PLUSwarns you visually and audibly. There is a riskof an accident.In such cases, apply the brakes yourself andtry to take evasive action.

G WARNINGIf you call up the stored speed and it differsfrom the current speed, the vehicleaccelerates or decelerates. If you do not knowthe stored speed, the vehicle could accelerateor brake unexpectedly. There is a risk of anaccident.Pay attention to the road and trafficconditions before calling up the stored speed.If you do not know the stored speed, store thedesired speed again.

If you fail to adapt your driving style,DISTRONIC PLUS can neither reduce the riskof accident nor override the laws of physics.DISTRONIC PLUS cannot take account of

Driving systems 177

Driv

ing

and

park

ing

Z

road, weather and traffic conditions.DISTRONIC PLUS is only an aid. You areresponsible for the distance to the vehicle infront, for vehicle speed, for braking in goodtime and for staying in lane. Only engageDISTRONIC PLUS when the current road,weather and traffic conditions permit it to bedone safely, and adapt your driving styleaccordingly. Drive carefully and maintain asuitable distance to the vehicle in front.If DISTRONIC PLUS detects a risk of collisionbut cannot sufficiently decelerate the vehiclein order to maintain the set distance, you willbe warned visually and acoustically.DISTRONIC PLUS cannot prevent a collisionwithout your intervention. An intermittentwarning tone will then sound and the distancewarning lamp will light up in the instrumentcluster. Brake immediately in order toincrease the distance from the vehicle infront, or take evasive action, provided it issafe to do so.DISTRONIC PLUS may not detect narrowvehicles driving in front, e.g. motorcycles, orvehicles driving on a different line. Therefore,always pay attention to traffic conditionseven when DISTRONIC PLUS is activated.Otherwise, you may fail to recognize dangersin time, cause an accident and injure yourselfand others.In particular, the detection of obstacles canbe impaired if there is:Rthe sensor is dirty or coveredRsnow or heavy rainRinterference by other radar sourcesRthere is the possibility of strong radar

reflections, for example, in parkinggarages.

If DISTRONIC PLUS is activated, the vehiclebrakes automatically in certain situations.This can happen unexpectedly, especiallywhen towing or in a car wash. There is a riskof an accident. In these or similar situations,deactivate DISTRONIC PLUS.If you want DISTRONIC PLUS to assist you,the following activation conditions must be

fulfilled (Y page 179) and the radar sensorsystem must be operational.

General notesDISTRONIC PLUS regulates the speed andautomatically helps you maintain thedistance to the vehicle detected in front.DISTRONIC PLUS brakes automatically sothat the set speed is not exceeded.On long and steep downhill gradients,especially if the vehicle is laden or towing atrailer, you must select shift range 1, 2 or 3in good time. By doing so, you will make useof the braking effect of the engine, whichrelieves the load on the brake system andprevents the brakes from overheating andwearing too quickly.If DISTRONIC PLUS detects a slower-movingvehicle in front, your vehicle is braked in orderto maintain the preset distance to the vehiclein front.If there is no vehicle in front, DISTRONICPLUS operates in the same way as cruisecontrol in the speed range between 20 mph(Canada: 30 km/h) and120 mph (Canada:200 km/h). If a vehicle is driving in front ofyou, it operates in the speed range between0 mph (0 km/h) and 120 mph (Canada:200 km/h).Do not use DISTRONIC PLUS while driving onroads with steep gradients.As DISTRONIC PLUS transmits radar waves,it can resemble the radar detectors of theresponsible authorities. You can refer to therelevant chapter in the Operator's Manual ifquestions are asked about this.

i USA only:This device has been approved by the FCCas a “Vehicular Radar System”. The radarsensor is intended for use in an automotiveradar system only. Removal, tampering, oraltering of the device will void anywarranties, and is not permitted by theFCC. Do not tamper with, alter, or use inany non-approved way.

178 Driving systemsDr

ivin

g an

d pa

rkin

g

Any unauthorized modification to thisdevice could void the user’s authority tooperate the equipment.

i Canada only: This device complies withRSS-210 of Industry Canada. Operation issubject to the following two conditions:1. This device may not cause interference,and2. this device must accept any interferencereceived, including interference that maycause undesired operation of the device.Removal, tampering, or altering of thedevice will void any warranties, and is notpermitted. Do not tamper with, alter, or usethe device in any non-approved way.Any unauthorized modification to thisdevice could void the user's authority tooperate the equipment.

Cruise control lever

: To activate or increase speed; To set the specified minimum distance= LIM indicator lamp? To activate at the current speed/last

stored speedA To activate or reduce speedB To switch between DISTRONIC PLUS and

variable SPEEDTRONICC To deactivate DISTRONIC PLUS

With the cruise control lever, you can operateDISTRONIC PLUS and variableSPEEDTRONIC.

X To switch between variable SPEEDTRONIC and DISTRONIC PLUS: press the cruise control lever in thedirection of arrow B.

LIM indicator lamp = on the cruise controllever indicates which function you haveselected:RLIM indicator lamp = off: DISTRONIC

PLUS is selected.RLIM indicator lamp = on: variable

SPEEDTRONIC is selected.

Activating DISTRONIC PLUS

Activation conditionsIn order to activate DISTRONIC PLUS, thefollowing conditions must be fulfilled:Rthe engine must be started. It may take up

to two minutes after pulling away beforeDISTRONIC PLUS is operational.Rthe parking brake must be released.Rthe differential lock must be deactivated.RESP® must be active, but not intervening.Rthe transmission must be in position D.Rthe driver's door must be closed when you

shift from P to D or your seat belt must befastened.Rthe front-passenger door and rear doors

must be closed.Rthe vehicle must not skid.Rthe DISTRONIC PLUS function must be

selected (Y page 179).Rthe transfer case must be in the HIGH

RANGE transmission position.Rthe vehicle must not be on an uphill or

downhill gradient of more than 22-25%.Rthe radar sensor must be free from dirt

(Y page 297).

Driving systems 179

Driv

ing

and

park

ing

Z

Activating while driving

When driving at speeds below 20 mph(30 km/h) you can activate DISTRONIC PLUSif the vehicle in front has been detected andis shown in the multifunction display. If thevehicle in front is no longer detected anddisplayed, DISTRONIC PLUS switches off anda tone sounds.X Briefly pull the cruise control lever towards

you ?, or press it up : or down A.DISTRONIC PLUS is selected.

X Press the cruise control lever up : ordown A repeatedly until the desired speedis set.

X Remove your foot from the acceleratorpedal.Your vehicle adapts its speed to that of thevehicle in front, but only up to the desiredstored speed.

i If you do not fully release the acceleratorpedal, the DISTRONIC PLUS Passivemessage appears in the multifunctiondisplay. The set distance to a slower-moving vehicle in front will then not bemaintained. You will be driving at the speedyou determine by the position of theaccelerator pedal.

Switching on while stationaryThis function may be useful if you want tokeep up with the traffic flow, e.g. at the endof a tailback.You can only activate DISTRONIC PLUS if:Rthe vehicle in front andRyour vehicle are stationaryX Briefly pull the cruise control lever towards

you ?, or press it up : or down A.DISTRONIC PLUS is selected.

i DISTRONIC PLUS can be activated at astandstill at under 20 mph (30 km/h) onlyif a vehicle in front has been detected.Therefore, the DISTRONIC PLUS distancedisplay in the instrument cluster should beactivated (Y page 218).

X Keep the cruise control lever pressedup : or down A until the desired speedis set.

i You can use the cruise control lever to setthe stored speed and the control on thecruise control lever to set the specifiedminimum distance (Y page 183).

Activating at the current speed/laststored speedG WARNINGIf you call up the stored speed and it differsfrom the current speed, the vehicleaccelerates or decelerates. If you do not knowthe stored speed, the vehicle could accelerateor brake unexpectedly. There is a risk of anaccident.Pay attention to the road and trafficconditions before calling up the stored speed.If you do not know the stored speed, store thedesired speed again.

X Briefly pull the cruise control lever towardsyou ?.

X Remove your foot from the acceleratorpedal.DISTRONIC PLUS is activated. The firsttime it is activated, the current speed is

180 Driving systemsDr

ivin

g an

d pa

rkin

g

stored. Otherwise, it sets the vehicle cruisespeed to the previously stored value.

Driving with DISTRONIC PLUS

Pulling away and driving

X If the vehicle in front pulls away: removeyour foot from the brake pedal.

X Briefly pull the cruise control lever towardsyou ?, or press it up : or down A.

orX Accelerate briefly.

Your vehicle pulls away and adapts itsspeed to that of the vehicle in front.

If there is no vehicle in front, DISTRONICPLUS operates in the same way as cruisecontrol.If DISTRONIC PLUS detects that the vehiclein front has slowed down, it brakes yourvehicle. In this way, the distance you haveselected is maintained.If DISTRONIC PLUS detects that the vehiclein front is driving faster, it accelerates yourvehicle, but only up to the speed you havestored.If you depress the brake, DISTRONIC PLUS isdeactivated unless your vehicle is stationary.

Changing lanesIf you change to the passing lane, DISTRONICPLUS supports you when:Ryou are driving faster than 40 mph

(60 km/h).RDISTRONIC PLUS is maintaining the

distance to a vehicle in front.Ryou switch on the appropriate turn signal.RDISTRONIC PLUS does not detect a danger

of collision.If these conditions are fulfilled, your vehicleis accelerated. Acceleration will beinterrupted if changing lanes takes too longor if the distance between your vehicle andthe vehicle in front becomes too small.

i When changing lanes, DISTRONIC PLUSmonitors the left lane on left-hand drivevehicles and the right lane on right-handdrive vehicles.

StoppingG WARNINGWhen leaving the vehicle, even if it is brakedonly by DISTRONIC PLUS, it could roll away if:Rthere is a malfunction in the system or in

the voltage supply.RDISTRONIC PLUS has been deactivated

with the cruise control lever, e.g. by avehicle occupant or from outside thevehicle.Rthe electrical system in the engine

compartment, the battery or the fuses havebeen tampered with.Rthe battery is disconnected.Rthe accelerator pedal has been depressed,

e.g. by a vehicle occupant.There is a risk of an accident.If you wish to exit the vehicle, always turn offDISTRONIC PLUS and secure the vehicleagainst rolling away.

If DISTRONIC PLUS detects that the vehiclein front is stopping, it brakes your vehicle untilit is stationary.

Driving systems 181

Driv

ing

and

park

ing

Z

Once your vehicle is stationary, it remainsstationary and you do not need to depress thebrake.

i Depending on the specified minimumdistance, your vehicle will come to astandstill at a sufficient distance behind thevehicle in front. The specified minimumdistance is set using the control on thecruise control lever.

On steep uphill or downhill inclines or if thereis a malfunction, the transmission may alsoautomatically be shifted into position P.

Displays in the instrument cluster

Displays in the speedometer

Example: DISTRONIC PLUS displays in thespeedometer

When DISTRONIC PLUS is activated, one ortwo segments ; in the set speed range lightup.If DISTRONIC PLUS detects a vehicle in front,segments ; between speed of the vehicle infront : and stored speed = light up.

i For design reasons, the speed displayedin the speedometer may differ slightly fromthe speed set for DISTRONIC PLUS.

Display when DISTRONIC PLUS isdeactivated

Distance display when DISTRONIC PLUS isdeactivated: Vehicle in front, if detected; Distance indicator, current distance to

the vehicle in front= Specified minimum distance to the

vehicle in front; adjustable? Own vehicle

You can select the distance display in theAssistance menu (Y page 218) of the on-board computer.X Select the Distance Display function

using the on-board computer.

Display when DISTRONIC PLUS isactivated

Distance display with DISTRONIC PLUS activatedin the multifunction display: DISTRONIC PLUS activated; Own vehicle

182 Driving systemsDr

ivin

g an

d pa

rkin

g

= Specified minimum distance to thevehicle in front; adjustable

? Vehicle in front, if detected

In the Assistance menu (Y page 218) of theon-board computer, you can select thedistance display.X Select the Distance Display function

using the on-board computer(Y page 218).

You will see the stored speed for about fiveseconds when you activate DISTRONIC PLUS.

Setting a speed

: To store the current speed or a higherspeed

; To store the current speed or a lowerspeed

X Press the cruise control lever up : for ahigher speed or down ; for a lower speed.

X Keep the cruise control lever pressed untilthe desired speed is reached.

X Release the cruise control lever.The new speed is stored. DISTRONIC PLUSis activated and adjusts the vehicle's speedto the new speed stored.

X To adjust the set speed in 1 mph increments (1 km/h increments): briefly

press the cruise control lever up : ordown ; to the pressure point.Every time the cruise control lever ispressed up : or down ; the last speedstored is increased or reduced.

X To adjust the set speed in 5 mph increments (10 km/h increments): briefly press the cruise control leverup : or down ; to the pressure point.Every time the cruise control lever ispressed up : or down ;, the last speedstored is increased or reduced.

i DISTRONIC PLUS is not deactivated if youdepress the accelerator pedal. If youaccelerate to overtake, DISTRONIC PLUSadjusts the vehicle's speed to the lastspeed stored after you have finishedovertaking.

Setting the specified minimum distance

You can set the specified minimum distancefor DISTRONIC PLUS by varying the time spanbetween one and two seconds. With thisfunction, you can set the minimum distancethat DISTRONIC PLUS keeps to the vehicle infront, dependent on vehicle speed. You cansee this distance in the multifunction display(Y page 218).

Driving systems 183

Driv

ing

and

park

ing

Z

X To increase: turn control = indirection ;.DISTRONIC PLUS then maintains a greaterdistance between your vehicle and thevehicle in front.

X To decrease: turn control = indirection :.DISTRONIC PLUS then maintains a shorterdistance between your vehicle and thevehicle in front.

i Make sure that you maintain theminimum distance to the vehicle in front asrequired by law. Adjust the distance to thevehicle in front if necessary.

Deactivating DISTRONIC PLUS

There are several ways to deactivateDISTRONIC PLUS:X Briefly press the cruise control lever

forwards :.orX Brake, unless the vehicle is stationary.orX Briefly press the cruise control lever in the

direction of arrow =.Variable SPEEDTRONIC is selected. LIMindicator lamp ; in the cruise control leverlights up.

When you deactivate DISTRONIC PLUS, youwill see the DISTRONIC PLUS Off messagein the multifunction display for approximatelyfive seconds.

i The last speed stored remains stored untilyou switch off the engine.

DISTRONIC PLUS is automaticallydeactivated if:Ryou engage the parking brake.Ryou are driving more slowly than 15 mph

(25 km/h) and there is no longer a vehiclein front, or if the vehicle in front is no longerdetected.RESP® intervenes or you deactivate ESP®.Rthe transmission is in the P, R or N position.Ryou pull the cruise control lever towards

you in order to pull away and the front-passenger door or one of the rear doors isopen.Rthe vehicle has skidded.If DISTRONIC PLUS is deactivated, you willhear a warning tone. You will see theDISTRONIC PLUS Off message in themultifunction display for approximately fiveseconds.In the Assistance menu (Y page 218) of theon-board computer, you can select thedistance display.

Tips for driving with DISTRONIC PLUS

General notesThe following contains descriptions of certainroad and traffic conditions in which you mustbe particularly attentive. In such situations,brake if necessary. DISTRONIC PLUS is thendeactivated.

184 Driving systemsDr

ivin

g an

d pa

rkin

g

Cornering, going into and coming out of abend

The ability of DISTRONIC PLUS to detectvehicles when cornering is limited. Yourvehicle may brake unexpectedly or late.

Vehicles traveling on a different line

DISTRONIC PLUS may not detect vehiclestraveling on a different line. The distance tothe vehicle in front will be too short.

Other vehicles changing lanes

DISTRONIC PLUS has not detected thevehicle cutting in yet. The distance to thisvehicle will be too short.

Narrow vehicles

DISTRONIC PLUS has not yet detected thevehicle in front on the edge of the road,because of its narrow width. The distance tothe vehicle in front will be too short.

Obstructions and stationary vehicles

DISTRONIC PLUS does not brake forobstacles or stationary vehicles. If, forexample, the detected vehicle turns a cornerand reveals an obstacle or stationary vehicle,DISTRONIC PLUS will not brake for these.

Driving systems 185

Driv

ing

and

park

ing

Z

Crossing vehicles

DISTRONIC PLUS may detect vehicles thatare crossing your lane by mistake. ActivatingDISTRONIC PLUS at traffic lights withcrossing traffic, for example, could causeyour vehicle to pull away unintentionally.

Blind Spot Assist

Important safety notes

G WARNINGBlind Spot Assist does not react to:Rvehicles overtaken too closely on the side,

placing them in the blind spot areaRvehicles approaching and driving by with a

speed difference of more thanapproximately 11 km/h

As a result, Blind Spot Assist may not givewarnings in such situations. There is a risk ofan accident.Always observe the traffic conditionscarefully, and maintain a safe lateral distance.

G WARNINGBlind Spot Assist does not react to:Rvehicles overtaken too closely on the side,

placing them in the blind spot areaRvehicles approaching and driving by with a

speed difference of more than 6.8 mph(11 km/h)

As a result, Blind Spot Assist may not givewarnings in such situations. There is a risk ofan accident.

Always observe the traffic conditionscarefully, and maintain a safe lateral distance.

Blind Spot Assist is only an aid. It may fail todetect some vehicles and is no substitute forattentive driving.In particular, the detection of obstacles canbe impaired if there is:Rdirt on the sensors or anything else

covering the sensors.Rvisibility is poor, e.g. due to fog, heavy rain

or snow.Rthere is a narrow vehicle traveling in front,

e.g. a motorcycle or bicycle.Rthe road has very wide lanes.Rthe road has narrow lanes.Ryou are not driving in the middle of the lane.Rthere are barriers or other road boundaries.

i USA only:This device has been approved by the FCCas a “Vehicular Radar System”. The radarsensor is intended for use in an automotiveradar system only. Removal, tampering, oraltering of the device will void anywarranties, and is not permitted by theFCC. Do not tamper with, alter, or use inany non-approved way.Any unauthorized modification to thisdevice could void the user’s authority tooperate the equipment.

General notesBlind Spot Assist uses a radar sensor systemto monitor both the left and right sides of yourvehicle. It supports you from a speed ofapproximately 20 mph (30 km/h). A warningdisplay in the exterior mirrors draws yourattention to vehicles detected in themonitored area. If you then switch on thecorresponding turn signal to change lane, youwill also receive an optical and audiblecollision warning. For this purpose, Blind SpotAssist uses sensors in the rear bumper.

186 Driving systemsDr

ivin

g an

d pa

rkin

g

Monitoring range of the sensors

Blind Spot Assist monitors the area up to10 ft (3 m) behind your vehicle and directlynext to your vehicle, as shown in the diagram.If the lanes are narrow, vehicles driving in thelane beyond the lane next to your vehicle maybe indicated, especially if the vehicles are notdriving in the middle of their lane. This maybe the case if the vehicles are driving on theinner side of their lane.Due to the nature of the system:Rwarnings may be issued in error when

driving close to crash barriers or similarsolid lane borders.Rthe warning is canceled when driving for an

extended period next to long vehicles, suchas trucks.

The two sensors for Blind Spot Assist areintegrated into the sides of the rear bumper.Make sure that the bumper is free from dirt,ice or slush around the sensors. The rearsensors must not be covered, for example bybicycle racks or overhanging loads. Followinga severe impact or in the event of damage tothe bumpers, have the function of the radarsensors checked at a qualified specialistworkshop. Blind Spot Assist may otherwisenot work properly.

Indicator and warning display

G WARNINGBlind Spot Assist does not react to:Rvehicles overtaken too closely on the side,

placing them in the blind spot areaRvehicles approaching and driving by with a

speed difference of more than 6.8 mph(11 km/h)

As a result, Blind Spot Assist may not givewarnings in such situations. There is a risk ofan accident.Always observe the traffic conditionscarefully, and maintain a safe lateral distance.

: Yellow indicator lamp/red warning lamp

When Active Blind Spot Assist is activated,indicator lamp : in the exterior mirrors lightsup yellow at speeds of up to20 mph(30 km/h). At speeds above 20 mph(30 km/h) the indicator lamp goes out andBlind Spot Assist is operational.If a vehicle is detected within the monitoringrange of Blind Spot Assist at speeds above20 mph (30 km/h), warning lamp : on thecorresponding side lights up red. This warningis always emitted when a vehicle enters theblind spot monitoring range from behind orfrom the side. When you overtake a vehicle,the warning only occurs if the difference inspeed is less than 7 mph (12 km/h).The yellow indicator lamp goes out if reversegear is engaged. In this event, Blind SpotAssist is no longer active.

Driving systems 187

Driv

ing

and

park

ing

Z

The brightness of the indicator/warninglamps is adjusted automatically according tothe ambient light.

Collision warning

: Yellow indicator lamp/red warning lamp

If a vehicle is detected in the monitoring rangeof Blind Spot Assist and you switch on thecorresponding turn signal, a double warningtone sounds. Red warning lamp : flashes. Ifthe turn signal remains on, vehicles detectedare indicated by the flashing of red warninglamp :. There are no further warning tones.

Switching on Blind Spot Assist

: Yellow indicator lamp/red warning lamp

X Make sure that Blind Spot Assist isactivated in the on-board computer(Y page 218).

X Turn the SmartKey to position2 (Y page 139) in the ignition lock.Warning lamps : in the exterior mirrorslight up red for approximately1.5 seconds and then turn yellow.

Active Blind Spot Assist

Important safety notes

G WARNINGActive Blind Spot Assist does not react to:Rvehicles overtaken too closely on the side,

placing them in the blind spot areaRvehicles approaching and driving by with a

speed difference of more thanapproximately 11 km/h

As a result, Active Blind Spot Assist mayneither give warnings nor intervene in suchsituations. There is a risk of an accident.Always observe the traffic conditionscarefully, and maintain a safe lateral distance.

G WARNINGActive Blind Spot Assist does not react to:Rvehicles overtaken too closely on the side,

placing them in the blind spot areaRvehicles approaching and driving by with a

speed difference of more thanapproximately 6.8 mph (11 km/h)

As a result, Active Blind Spot Assist mayneither give warnings nor intervene in suchsituations. There is a risk of an accident.Always observe the traffic conditionscarefully, and maintain a safe lateral distance.

Active Blind Spot Assist is only an aid. It mayfail to detect some vehicles and is nosubstitute for attentive driving.

188 Driving systemsDr

ivin

g an

d pa

rkin

g

In particular, the detection of obstacles canbe impaired if there is:Rdirt on the sensors or anything else

covering the sensors.Rvisibility is poor, e.g. due to fog, heavy rain

or snow.Rthere is a narrow vehicle traveling in front,

e.g. a motorcycle or bicycle.Rthe road has very wide lanes.Rthe road has narrow lanes.Ryou are not driving in the middle of the lane.Rthere are barriers or other road boundaries.

i USA only:This device has been approved by the FCCas a “Vehicular Radar System”. The radarsensor is intended for use in an automotiveradar system only. Removal, tampering, oraltering of the device will void anywarranties, and is not permitted by theFCC. Do not tamper with, alter, or use inany non-approved way.Any unauthorized modification to thisdevice could void the user’s authority tooperate the equipment.

i Canada only: This device complies withRSS-210 of Industry Canada. Operation issubject to the following two conditions:1. This device may not cause interference,and2. this device must accept any interferencereceived, including interference that maycause undesired operation of the device.Removal, tampering, or altering of thedevice will void any warranties, and is notpermitted. Do not tamper with, alter, or usethe device in any non-approved way.Any unauthorized modification to thisdevice could void the user's authority tooperate the equipment.

General notesActive Blind Spot Assist uses a radar sensorsystem to monitor the side areas of yourvehicle which are in back of the driver. A

warning display in the exterior mirrors drawsyour attention to vehicles detected in themonitored area. If you then switch on thecorresponding turn signal to change lanes,you will also receive an optical and audiblecollision warning. If a risk of lateral collisionis detected, corrective braking may help youavoid a collision. To support the course-correcting brake application, Active BlindSpot Assist also uses the forward-facing radarsensor system.Active Blind Spot Assist supports you from aspeed of approximately 20 mph(30 km/h).

Monitoring area

G WARNINGActive Blind Spot Assist monitors certainareas in the immediate vicinity of your vehicle.Vehicles that approach and drive past at highspeeds are not detected. No visual noraudible warnings are emitted and the systemdoes not brake the vehicle to correct yourcourse.If the lanes are very wide, it may not bepossible to monitor the complete width of theneighboring lane. For this reason, vehicles inthe next lane may not be detected, especiallyif they are driving in a staggered formation.This may be the case if vehicles are driving atthat edge of their lane which is furthest awayfrom your vehicle.Always pay attention to traffic conditions andyour surroundings. Otherwise, you may fail torecognize dangers in time, cause an accidentand injure yourself and others.

Driving systems 189

Driv

ing

and

park

ing

Z

Active Blind Spot Assist monitors the area upto 10 ft (3.0 m) behind your vehicle anddirectly next to your vehicle, as shown in thediagram. For this purpose, Active Blind SpotAssist uses radar sensors in the rear bumper.If the lanes are narrow, vehicles driving in thelane beyond the lane next to your vehicle maybe indicated, especially if the vehicles are notdriving in the middle of their lane. This maybe the case if there are vehicles driving at theinner edge of their lanes.Due to the nature of the system:Rwarnings may be issued in error when

driving close to crash barriers or similarsolid lane borders.Rwarnings may be interrupted when driving

alongside particularly long vehicles, forexample trucks, for a prolonged time.

Two Active Blind Spot Assist radar sensorsare integrated into the front and rear bumpersrespectively. An additional radar sensor islocated behind the cover in the radiator grill.Make sure that the bumpers and the cover inthe radiator grill are free of dirt, ice or slush.The rear sensors must not be covered, forexample by cycle racks or overhanging cargo.Following a severe impact or in the event ofdamage to the bumpers, have the function ofthe radar sensors checked at a qualified

specialist workshop. Active Blind Spot Assistmay otherwise no longer work properly.

Indicator and warning display

G WARNINGActive Blind Spot Assist is not active at speedsbelow 20 mph (30km/h). The indicator lampsin the exterior mirrors are yellow. Vehicles inthe monitoring range are then not indicated.Always pay attention to traffic conditions andyour surroundings. Otherwise, you may fail torecognize dangers in time, cause an accidentand injure yourself and others.

: Yellow indicator lamp/red warning lamp

When Active Blind Spot Assist is activated,indicator lamp : in the exterior mirrors lightsup yellow at speeds of up to 20 mph(30 km/h). At speeds above20 mph(30 km/h), the indicator lamp goesout and Active Blind Spot Assist isoperational.If a vehicle is detected within the monitoringrange of Blind Spot Assist at speeds above20 mph (30 km/h), warning lamp : on thecorresponding side lights up red. This warningis always emitted when a vehicle enters theblind spot monitoring range from behind orfrom the side. When you overtake a vehicle,the warning only occurs if the difference inspeed is less than 7 mph (12 km/h).The yellow indicator lamp goes out if reversegear is engaged. In this event, Active BlindSpot Assist is no longer active.

190 Driving systemsDr

ivin

g an

d pa

rkin

g

The brightness of the indicator/warninglamps is adjusted automatically according tothe ambient light.

Visual and audible collision warnings

When you switch on the turn signals tochange lanes and a vehicle is detected in theside monitoring range, you receive a visualand acoustic collision warning. You then heara double warning tone and red warninglamp : flashes. If the turn signal remains on,detected vehicles are indicated by theflashing of red warning lamp :. There are nofurther warning tones.

Course-correcting brake application

G WARNINGActive Blind Spot Assist is only an aiddesigned to assist driving. It is not a substitutefor attentive driving. In some cases, thecourse-correcting brake application is notsufficient to avoid a collision. In such a case,you must steer, brake or accelerate.In very rare cases, the system mayerroneously detect a danger of collision in thearea of crash barriers or similar lane bordersand apply the brakes. Active Blind Spot Assistdoes not detect all traffic situations and roadusers. Always make sure that there issufficient distance on the side for other trafficor obstacles. An inappropriate brakeapplication may be interrupted at any time ifyou steer slightly in the opposite direction oraccelerate.

You are responsible for driving at appropriatespeeds, braking in good time, and steeringcorrectly. Always adapt your driving style tosuit the prevailing road and weatherconditions. Always pay attention to trafficconditions and your surroundings. Otherwise,you may fail to recognize dangers in time,cause an accident and injure yourself andothers.

If a course-correcting brake applicationoccurs, red warning lamp : flashes in theexterior mirror and a dual warning tonesounds. In addition, display ; appears in themultifunction display.If Active Blind Spot Assist detects a risk of alateral collision in the monitoring range, acourse-correcting brake application is carriedout. This is meant to assist you in avoiding acollision.The course-correcting brake application isavailable in the speed range between20 mph (30 km/h) and 120 mph (200 km/h).

Driving systems 191

Driv

ing

and

park

ing

Z

There will be either no or only a weak course-correcting brake application if:Rthere are vehicles or obstacles, e.g. crash

barriers, located on both sides of yourvehicle.Ra vehicle approaches you too closely at the

side.Ryou have adopted a sporty driving style with

high cornering speeds.Ryou clearly brake or accelerate.Ra driving safety system intervenes, e.g.

ESP®.RESP® is switched off.Rthe LOW RANGE off-road gear is activated.Ra loss of tire pressure has been detected.

Switching on Active Blind Spot Assist

X Make sure that active Blind Spot Assist(Y page 218) is activated in the on-boardcomputer.

X Turn the SmartKey to position 2 in theignition lock.Warning lamps : in the exterior mirrorslight up red for approximately1.5 seconds and then turn yellow.

Towing a trailerWhen you attach a trailer, make sure you havecorrectly established the electricalconnection. This can be accomplished bychecking the trailer lighting. Active Blind SpotAssist is then deactivated. The indicator lamplights up yellow in the exterior mirrors and the

Active Blind Spot Assist Currently Unavailable See Operator's Manualmessage appears in the multifunctiondisplay.

HOLD function

General notesThe HOLD function can assist the driver in thefollowing situations:Rwhen pulling away, especially on steep

slopesRwhen maneuvering on steep slopesRwhen waiting in trafficThe vehicle is kept stationary without thedriver having to depress the brake pedal.The braking effect is canceled and the HOLDfunction deactivated when you depress theaccelerator pedal to pull away.

i Do not use the HOLD function whendriving off-road, on steep uphill or downhillgradients or on slippery or loose surfaces.The HOLD function cannot hold the vehicleon such surfaces.

Activation conditionsYou can activate the HOLD function if:Rthe vehicle is stationary.Rthe engine is running or it has been

switched off by the ECO start/stopfunction (AMG vehicles).Rthe engine is running.Rthe driver's door is closed or your seat belt

is fastened.Rthe transmission is in position D, R or N.RDISTRONIC PLUS is deactivated.

Activating the HOLD functionThe vehicle's brakes are applied when theHOLD function is activated. For this reason,deactivate the HOLD function while in the carwash or while towing.

192 Driving systemsDr

ivin

g an

d pa

rkin

g

X Make sure that the activation conditionsare met.

X Depress the brake pedal.X Quickly depress the brake pedal further

until ë appears in the multifunctiondisplay.The HOLD function is activated. You canrelease the brake pedal.

i If depressing the brake pedal the firsttime does not activate the HOLD function,wait briefly and then try again.

Deactivating the HOLD function

G WARNINGWhen leaving the vehicle, it can still roll awaydespite being braked by the HOLD function if:Rthere is a malfunction in the system or in

the voltage supply.Rthe HOLD function has been deactivated by

pressing the accelerator pedal or the brakepedal, e.g. by a vehicle occupant.Rthe electrical system in the engine

compartment, the battery or the fuses havebeen tampered with.Rthe battery is disconnectedThere is a risk of an accident.If you wish to exit the vehicle, always turn offthe HOLD function and secure the vehicleagainst rolling away.

The HOLD function is deactivatedautomatically if:Ryou accelerate and the transmission is in

position D or R.Ryou shift the transmission to position P.Ryou depress the brake pedal again with a

certain amount of pressure until ëdisappears from the multifunction display.Ryou activate DISTRONIC PLUS.On steep uphill or downhill gradients or ifthere is a malfunction, the transmission mayalso be automatically shifted into position P.

4MATIC (permanent four-wheel drive)! Never tow the vehicle with one axle

raised. This may damage the transfer case.Damage of this sort is not covered by theMercedes-Benz Limited Warranty. Allwheels must remain either on the groundor be fully raised. Observe the instructionsfor towing the vehicle with all wheels in fullcontact with the ground.

! When testing the parking brake, operatethe vehicle only briefly (for a maximum often seconds) on a brake test dynamometer.When doing this, turn the SmartKey toposition 0 or 1 in the ignition. Failure to dothis can cause damage to the drive train orthe brake system.

! A function or performance test shouldonly be carried out on a two-axledynamometer. Before you operate thevehicle on such a dynamometer, pleaseconsult a qualified workshop. You couldotherwise damage the drive train or thebrake system.

4MATIC ensures that all four wheels arepermanently driven. Together with ESP® and4ETS, it improves the traction of your vehiclewhenever a drive wheel spins due toinsufficient grip.If a drive wheel spins due to insufficient grip:ROnly depress the accelerator pedal as far

as necessary when pulling away.RAccelerate less when driving.If you fail to adapt your driving style, 4MATICcan neither reduce the risk of accident noroverride the laws of physics. 4MATIC cannottake account of road, weather and trafficconditions. 4MATIC is only an aid. You areresponsible for the distance to the vehicle infront, for vehicle speed, for braking in goodtime and for staying in lane. Only engage4MATIC when the current road, weather andtraffic conditions permit it to be done safely,and adapt your driving style accordingly.Drive carefully and maintain a suitabledistance to the vehicle in front.

Driving systems 193

Driv

ing

and

park

ing

Z

i In wintry driving conditions, the maximumeffect of 4MATIC can only be achieved ifyou use winter tires (M+S tires), with snowchains if necessary.

For information about driving off-road, see(Y page 164).

PARKTRONIC

Important safety notes! When parking, pay particular attention to

objects above or below the sensors, suchas flower pots or trailer drawbars.PARKTRONIC does not detect such objectswhen they are in the immediate vicinity ofthe vehicle. You could damage the vehicleor the objects.The sensors may not detect snow and otherobjects that absorb ultrasonic waves.Ultrasonic sources such as an automaticcar wash, the compressed-air brakes on atruck or a pneumatic drill could causePARKTRONIC to malfunction.PARKTRONIC may not function correctly onuneven terrain.

PARKTRONIC is an electronic parking aid withultrasonic sensors. It indicates visually andaudibly the distance between your vehicleand an object.PARKTRONIC is only an aid. It is not areplacement for your attention to yourimmediate surroundings. You are alwaysresponsible for safe maneuvering, parkingand exiting a parking space. Check in front,behind and to the sides of the vehicle beforemaneuvering, parking or exiting a parkingspace. There must not be any persons,animals or objects in the area in which youare maneuvering.PARKTRONIC cannot identify any persons orobjects outside of the detection range. As aresult, PARKTRONIC cannot warn you aboutobjects in this area.

PARKTRONIC is activated automatically whenyou:Rswitch on the ignitionRshift the transmission to position D, R or NRrelease the parking brakePARKTRONIC is deactivated at speeds above11 mph (18 km/h). It is reactivated at lowerspeeds.PARKTRONIC monitors the area around yourvehicle using six sensors in the front bumperand four sensors in the rear bumper.

Range of the sensors

General notes

: Example: sensors in the front bumper,left-hand side

Side view

194 Driving systemsDr

ivin

g an

d pa

rkin

g

Top view

The sensors must be free from dirt, ice orslush. Otherwise, they may not functioncorrectly. Clean the sensors regularly, takingcare not to scratch or damage them(Y page 297).

Front sensors

Center Approximately 40 in(approximately 100 cmfrom brush guard)

Corners Approximately 24 in(approximately 60cm)

Rear sensors

Center Approximately 36 in(approximately 90 cm)from spare wheel

Corners Approximately 32 in(approximately 80 cm)

Minimum distance

Center Approximately 8 in(approximately 20 cm)

Corners Approximately 8 in(approximately 20 cm)

If there is an obstacle within this range, therelevant warning displays light up and awarning tone sounds. If the distance fallsbelow the minimum, the distance may nolonger be shown.

Warning displays

Warning display for the front area: Segments on the left-hand side of the

vehicle; Segments on the right-hand side of the

vehicle= Segments showing operational readiness

The warning displays show the distancebetween the sensors and the obstacle. Thewarning display for the front area is locatedon the dashboard above the center air vents.The warning display for the rear area islocated on the headliner in the rearcompartment.The warning display for each side of thevehicle is divided into five yellow and two redsegments. PARKTRONIC is operational ifyellow segments showing operationalreadiness = light up.The selected transmission position and thedirection in which the vehicle is rollingdetermine which warning display is activewhen the engine is running.

Transmission position

Warning display

D Front area activated

R, N or the vehicleis rollingbackwards

Rear and front areasactivated

P No areas activated

Driving systems 195

Driv

ing

and

park

ing

Z

One or more segments light up as the vehicleapproaches an obstacle, depending on thevehicle's distance from the obstacle.From the:Rsixth segment onwards, you will hear an

intermittent warning tone forapproximately two seconds.Rseventh segment onwards, you will hear a

warning tone for approximately twoseconds. This indicates that you have nowreached the minimum distance.

Deactivating/activating PARKTRONIC

: Indicator lamp; To deactivate/activate PARKTRONIC

If indicator lamp : lights up, PARKTRONIC isdeactivated.

i PARKTRONIC is automatically activatedwhen you turn the SmartKey to position 2in the ignition lock.

Towing a trailerPARKTRONIC is deactivated for the rear areawhen you establish an electrical connectionbetween your vehicle and a trailer.

196 Driving systemsDr

ivin

g an

d pa

rkin

g

Problems with PARKTRONIC

Problem Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions

Only the red segmentsin the PARKTRONICwarning displays are lit.You also hear a warningtone for approximatelytwo seconds.PARKTRONIC isdeactivated after a fewseconds, and theindicator lamp in thePARKTRONIC buttonlights up.

PARKTRONIC has malfunctioned and has switched off.X If problems persist, have PARKTRONIC checked at a qualified

specialist workshop.

Only the red segmentsin the PARKTRONICwarning displays are lit.PARKTRONIC isdeactivated after a fewseconds.

The PARKTRONIC sensors are dirty or there is interference.X Clean the PARKTRONIC sensors (Y page 297).X Switch the ignition back on.

The problem may be caused by an external source of radio orultrasound waves.X See if PARKTRONIC functions in a different location.

Rear view camera

Important safety notesThe rear view camera is only an aid. It is nota replacement for your attention to yourimmediate surroundings. You are alwaysresponsible for safe maneuvering andparking. When maneuvering or parking, makesure that there are no persons, animals orobjects in the area in which you aremaneuvering.Under the following circumstances, the rearview camera will not function, or will functionin a limited manner:Rthe rear door is openRin heavy rain, snow or fogRat night or in very dark placesRif the camera is exposed to very bright lightRif the area is lit by fluorescent light or LED

lighting (the display may flicker)

Rif there is a sudden change in temperature,e.g. when driving into a heated garage inwinterRif the camera lens is dirty or obstructedRif the rear of your vehicle is damaged. In

this event, have the camera position andsetting checked at a qualified specialistworkshop. Mercedes-Benz recommendsthat you use an authorized Mercedes-BenzCenter for this purpose

Driving systems 197

Driv

ing

and

park

ing

Z

Activating/deactivating the rear viewcamera

: Rear view camera

X To activate: make sure that the SmartKeyis in position 2 in the ignition lock.

X Make sure that the rear view camerafunction is selected in COMAND (see theseparate operating instructions forCOMAND).

X Engage reverse gear.The area behind the vehicle is shown in theCOMAND display with guide lines.

X To change the function mode: using theCOMAND controller, select symbol : forthe "Reverse parking" function orsymbol ; for "Coupling up a trailer" (seethe separate COMAND operatinginstructions).The symbol of the selected function ishighlighted.

To deactivate: the rear view camera isdeactivated if you:Rshift the transmission to position PRdrive forward ten metersRshift the transmission from R to another

position (after 15 seconds)Rdrive forwards at a speed of over 5 mph

(10 km/h)

Off-road driving systems

Transfer case

General notesThe vehicle has permanent all-wheel drive.Power is always transmitted to both axles.For further information on driving off-road,see (Y page 164).

Shift ranges

G WARNINGIf you do not wait for the transfer case gearchange process to complete, the transfercase could remain in the neutral position. Thepower transmission to the driven wheels isthen interrupted. There is a danger of thevehicle rolling away unintentionally. There isa risk of an accident.Wait until the transfer case shift process iscompleted.

Do not turn off the engine while changing gearand do not shift the automatic transmissionto another gear.

198 Off-road driving systemsDr

ivin

g an

d pa

rkin

g

HIGH RANGE

Position for all normal on-road driving conditions.

LOW RANGE

Low-range position fordriving off-road.Also for use on steep uphillor downhill gradients,especially when towing atrailer.The vehicle travels aroundhalf the speed of on-roaddriving range HIGH RANGE.The tractive power iscorrespondingly higher.

Shifting the transfer case

Important safety notesG WARNINGWhen the transfer case is in the neutralposition, power transmission to the drivenwheels is interrupted. As a result, the vehiclecould roll away. There is a risk of an accident.Secure the vehicle with the parking brake, andon uphill or downhill gradients, also secure itwith a device such as a wheel chock.

G WARNINGWhen the transfer case is in the neutralposition, power transmission to the drivenwheels is interrupted. As a result, the vehiclecould roll away. There is a risk of an accident.Secure the vehicle with the parking brake, andon uphill or downhill gradients, also secure itwith a device such as a wheel chock.

Always wait for the gear change process fromHIGH RANGE to LOW RANGE and fromLOW RANGE to HIGH RANGE to complete.Do not turn off the engine while changing gearand do not shift the automatic transmissionto another gear.

General notes

: Current shift range

: Indicator lamp; LOW RANGE button

Switching on the off-road gear ratio! Only carry out the gear selection if:Rthe engine is running.Rthe vehicle is rolling.Rthe automatic transmission is in selector

lever position N.Ryou are driving no faster than 25 mph

(40 km/h).You could otherwise damage the transfercase.

Off-road driving systems 199

Driv

ing

and

park

ing

Z

i AMG vehicles: to shift the transfer caseto LOW RANGE, deactivate the ECO start/stop function (Y page 142).

X Press LOW RANGE button ;.When the shift procedure is complete, theLOW RANGE transfer case position appearsin the multifunction display.Indicator lamp : lights up.

X Shift the transmission to position D.

Switching off the off-road gear ratioG WARNINGWhen the transfer case is in the neutralposition, power transmission to the drivenwheels is interrupted. As a result, the vehiclecould roll away. There is a risk of an accident.Secure the vehicle with the parking brake, andon uphill or downhill gradients, also secure itwith a device such as a wheel chock.

! Only carry out the gear selection if:Rthe engine is running.Rthe vehicle is rolling.Rthe automatic transmission is in selector

lever position N.Ryou are driving no faster than 43 mph

(70 km/h).You could otherwise damage the transfercase.

X Press button ;.When the shift procedure is complete, theHIGH RANGE transfer case position appearsin the multifunction display.Indicator lamp : goes out.

If the gear change is not completed, thefollowing messages could appear in thedisplay:RTC Shift Conditions Not Fulfilled

You have not met one or more shiftconditions.RTC NEUTRAL On

The transfer case has canceled the gearchange process and is in N. The N transfer

case position appears in the multifunctiondisplay.RTC Shift Canceled

The transfer case has not performed thegear change process.

X Carry out the gear change process again.Make sure to meet all conditions forchanging gears.R TC Malfunction Visit Workshop

There is a malfunction in the transfer case.X Do not shift the transfer case.X Have the vehicle checked as soon as

possible at a qualified specialist workshop.

Shifting to neutralG WARNINGWhen the transfer case is in the neutralposition, power transmission to the drivenwheels is interrupted. As a result, the vehiclecould roll away. There is a risk of an accident.Secure the vehicle with the parking brake, andon uphill or downhill gradients, also secure itwith a device such as a wheel chock.

X Turn the SmartKey to position2 (Y page 139) in the ignition lock.

X Apply the parking brake.X Depress the brake pedal.X Move the selector lever to position

N(Y page 145).X Press and hold LOW RANGE button ; for

approximately 10 seconds.Once the gear change procedure iscomplete, TC Neutral On messageappears in the multifunction display forapproximately 5 seconds.

If the gear change is not completed, thefollowing messages could appear in thedisplay (Y page 238).

i If the transfer case is in Neutral, theSmartKey is in the ignition lock and youopen the driver's door, the TC Neutral On message appears in the multifunction

200 Off-road driving systemsDr

ivin

g an

d pa

rkin

g

display. If you then release the parkingbrake, a warning tone will sound.

Differential locks

General notes

G WARNINGWhen differential locks are engaged on a firm,high-grip surface, the vehicle's steerability isgreatly impaired. In particular, engaging thedifferential locks when cornering could leadto you losing control of the vehicle. There is arisk of an accident.Disengage the differential locks immediatelyon firm, high-grip surfaces.

G WARNINGABS, 4ETS, ESP® and BAS are deactivatedwhile the differential locks are engaged. As aresult, the wheels could lock when brakingand the braking distance is increased. Thereis a risk of an accident.Disengage the differential locks immediatelyon firm, high-grip surfaces.

! In order to avoid damage to the transfercase, you must operate the vehicle on adynamometer (1-axle dynamometer) onlyif:Rthe axle not driven on is jacked up

orRthe corresponding propeller shaft is

disconnected and the transfer casedifferential lock is activated.

Otherwise, the transfer case can bedamaged.Differential locks improve the traction of thevehicle.

Your vehicle is equipped with a differentiallock for:Rthe transfer case: this controls the balance

between the front and rear axles.Rthe rear axle: this controls the balance

between the wheels on the rear axle.Rthe front axle: this controls the balance

between the wheels on the front axle.

Information on differential anddifferential locksWhen the vehicle drives around a curve, thewheels on the outside of the curve must covera greater distance. Therefore, the wheels turnmore rapidly than on the inside. Thedifferential, a transmission in the drive train,compensates for these different rotationalspeeds, making cornering possible.The disadvantage of a differential is that morepower is transferred to the wheels that havethe least grip. An example: a wheel of a drivenaxle is on a snow-covered surface andtherefore does not have any traction. Thedifferential causes this wheel to be subjectedto the strongest driving force, as the flow offorce takes the path of least resistance. Theopposite wheel on this axle, however, whichstands on firm ground and could thereforeallow propulsion, receives no driving power.4ETS compensates for this disadvantage.4ETS provides good steerability byautomatically braking the spinning wheel.4ETS provides the wheel on the firm surfacewith more drive force, which in turn providespropulsion.ESP® and 4ETS are traction systems that areideal for road driving and suitable for light off-road driving. The LOW RANGE off-road gearalso improves off-road capability.Moreover, the more difficult conditions in off-road driving require further measures such aslocking one or several differentials. Yourvehicle is equipped with three differentiallocks:

Off-road driving systems 201

Driv

ing

and

park

ing

Z

Ra central differential lock for the transfercase,Ra differential lock for the front axle andRa differential lock for the rear axle.Each differential lock can be engaged with therespective switch on the center console. Ifthe transfer case differential is disabled, thefront and rear wheels turn at the same speed.If the differential for the rear axle is locked,both rear wheels turn at the same speed,regardless of their individual torques. Pleasenote that activating the differential locksseverely restricts the vehicle's steerability.Please note that the functions of thedifferential are absolutely necessary fordriving on paved roads. The differential locksmust never be engaged when driving onpaved roads. Otherwise, the vehicle may notbe steerable and you could lose control of thevehicle. The differential locks must thereforeonly be engaged when driving off-road. Youmay only engage the differential locks if thefunctions of the 4ETS and ESP® drivingsystems and the LOW RANGE off-road gearare insufficient.

i The differential locks are only available inthe LOW RANGE off-road gear.

Activating the differential lock

Important safety notesG WARNINGWhen differential locks are engaged on a firm,high-grip surface, the vehicle's steerability isgreatly impaired. In particular, engaging thedifferential locks when cornering could leadto you losing control of the vehicle. There is arisk of an accident.Disengage the differential locks immediatelyon firm, high-grip surfaces.

G WARNINGABS, 4ETS, ESP® and BAS are deactivatedwhile the differential locks are engaged. As aresult, the wheels could lock when braking

and the braking distance is increased. Thereis a risk of an accident.Disengage the differential locks immediatelyon firm, high-grip surfaces.

! Only activate the differential locks when:Ryou are driving at walking pace.Rthe driven wheels are not spinning.Ryou are not driving on a firm road surface.

General notesThe switches are located on the centerconsole.

: Function indicator lamps (red); Differential lock for the front axle= Differential lock for the transfer case? Differential lock for the rear axleA Activation indicator lamps (yellow)

Activate the differential locks:Roff-roadRto deactivate ABS, 4ETS, ESP® and BAS

while off-roadRwhen fordingFor further information on driving off-road,see (Y page 164).

i You can only engage the differential locksif the transfer case is in the LOW RANGEoff-road driving position (Y page 198).

i You can activate the differential locks inthe following order =, ?, ;.

202 Off-road driving systemsDr

ivin

g an

d pa

rkin

g

Differential lock for the transfer caseX To engage: switch the transfer case to the

LOW RANGE off-road driving position(Y page 199).

X Press switch =.When the transfer case is in the LOW RANGE off-road driving position, the yellowactivation indicator lamp below switch =lights up.The å warning lamp in the instrumentpanel lights up.When the differential is locked, the redfunction indicator lamp above switch =lights up.In the multifunction display you see the:ABS not available Differential LockedThe å!÷ warning lamps in theinstrument cluster light up.The differential lock for the transfer case isengaged.4ETS, ESP®, BAS and ABS are deactivated.

The vehicle's ability to steer is severelyrestricted. Drive carefully and accelerategently for optimum traction.

i You can now engage the differential lockfor rear axle ? and the differential lock forfront axle ; as required.

Differential lock for the rear axleX To engage: press switch ?.

Yellow activation indicator lamp A lightsup first, followed by red function indicatorlamp : of switch ?.The differential lock for the rear axle isengaged.

Differential lock for the front axleX To engage: press switch ;.

First, the yellow activation indicator lamplights up, followed by the red functionindicator lamp.

The differential lock for the front axle isengaged.

Deactivating the differential lockYou can deactivate the differential locks inthis order: ;, ?, =.X To simultaneously deactivate all

differential locks: press switch =.Yellow activation indicator lamps A andred function indicator lamps : go out.After approximately three seconds ofnormal driving, ABS, 4ETS, ESP® and BASare activated.The ABS not available Differential Locked message disappears from themultifunction display and the å, !and ÷ warning lamps in the instrumentcluster go out.

X Shift the transfer case to the HIGH RANGE on-road position (Y page 199).

i If red function indicator lamps : do notgo out after disengaging the differentiallocks, bring the vehicle to a standstill inaccordance with the traffic conditions.Then continue driving, as the load changecan release the differential locks.

Towing a trailer

Notes on towing a trailer

Important safety notes

G WARNINGIf you rest your foot on the brake pedal whiledriving, the braking system can overheat. Thisincreases the stopping distance and can evencause the braking system to fail. There is arisk of an accident.Never use the brake pedal as a footrest. Neverdepress the brake pedal and the acceleratorpedal at the same time.

Towing a trailer 203

Driv

ing

and

park

ing

Z

G WARNINGWhen the vehicle/trailer combination beginsto lurch, you could lose control of it. Thevehicle/trailer combination could evenrollover. There is a risk of an accident.On no account should you attempt tostraighten up the vehicle/trailer combinationby increasing the speed. Reduce vehiclespeed and do not countersteer. Apply thebrake as necessary.

G WARNINGIf you install a ball coupling other than the onedelivered with the vehicle, the trailer tow hitchand the rear axle may be overloaded. Thisapplies especially if the ball coupling inquestion is longer or angled differently. Thiscould seriously impair the drivingcharacteristics and the trailer can comeloose. There is a risk of an accident.Only install the ball coupling delivered withthe vehicle or a ball coupling that is designedto meet your trailer towing requirements. Donot modify the ball coupling or the trailer towhitch.

G WARNINGIf the ball coupling is not installed correctly ornot secured with the bolt provided and thecorresponding spring cotter, the trailer maycome loose. There is a risk of an accident.Always install and secure the ball coupling asdescribed. Before every journey, ensure thatthe ball coupling is secured with the bolt andthe corresponding spring cotter.

Please observe the manufacturer's operatinginstructions for the trailer coupling if adetachable trailer coupling is used.You will find the applicable permissiblevalues, which must not be exceeded, in thevehicle documents. You will find the valuesapproved by the manufacturer on the vehicleidentification plates and those for the towingvehicle in the "Technical data" section(Y page 349).

Couple and uncouple the trailer carefully. Ifyou do not couple the trailer to the towingvehicle correctly, the trailer could becomedetached.Make sure that the following values are notexceeded:Rthe permissible trailer drawbar noseweightRthe permissible trailer loadRthe permissible rear axle load of the towing

vehicleRthe maximum permissible gross vehicle

weight of both the towing vehicle and thetrailer

When towing a trailer, your vehicle's handlingcharacteristics will be different in comparisonwith when driving without a trailer.The vehicle/trailer combination:Ris heavierRis restricted in its acceleration and

gradient-climbing capabilityRhas an increased braking distanceRis affected more by strong crosswindsRdemands more sensitive steeringRhas a larger turning circleThis could impair the handlingcharacteristics.When towing a trailer, always adjust yourspeed to the current road and weatherconditions. Do not exceed the maximumpermissible speed for your vehicle/trailercombination.

General notesRDo not exceed the legally prescribed

maximum speed for vehicle/trailercombinations in the relevant country.This lowers the risk of an accident.ROnly install an approved trailer coupling on

your vehicle.Further information on availability and oninstallation is available from any authorizedMercedes-Benz Center.

204 Towing a trailerDr

ivin

g an

d pa

rkin

g

RThe bumpers of your vehicle are notsuitable for installing detachable trailercouplings.RDo not install hired trailer couplings or

other detachable trailer couplings on thebumpers of your vehicle.RIf you do not need the ball coupling, remove

the ball coupling from the ball couplingrecess. This reduces the risk of damage tothe ball coupling.

i When towing a trailer, set the tirepressure on the rear axle of the towingvehicle for a maximum load; see the tirepressure table in the fuel filler flap(Y page 322).

You will find installation dimensions and loadsin the technical data (Y page 358).The maximum permissible trailer drawbarnoseweight on the ball coupling for up to 3persons is 562 lbs (255 kg). The maximumpermissible trailer drawbar noseweight formore than 3 persons and the maximum loadin the trunk can be found in the trailerdrawbar noseweight table (Y page 358).However, the actual noseweight must notexceed the value given on the trailer tow hitchor trailer identification plates. The lowestweight applies.

i When towing a trailer, set the tirepressure on the rear axle of the towingvehicle for a maximum load; see the tirepressure table in the fuel filler flap(Y page 322).

Please note that when towing a trailer,PARKTRONIC (Y page 194) and Blind SpotAssist (Y page 186) are only available withlimitations, or not at all.

i On vehicles without level control, theheight of the ball coupling will alteraccording to the load placed on the vehicle.If necessary, use a trailer with a height-adjustable drawbar.

Driving tipsX On long and steep downhill gradients,

select shift range 1, 2 or 3 (Y page 150) ingood time.

i This also applies if you have activatedcruise control or SPEEDTRONIC.

X If necessary, shift the transfer case to LOW RANGE(Y page 199).This will use the braking effect of theengine, so that less braking will be requiredto maintain the speed. which relieves theload on the brake system and prevents thebrakes from overheating and wearing tooquickly. If you need additional braking,depress the brake pedal repeatedly ratherthan continuously.

The maximum permissible speed for vehicle/trailer combinations depends on the type oftrailer. Before beginning the journey, checkthe trailer's documents to see what themaximum permitted speed is. Observe thelegally prescribed maximum speed in therelevant country.For certain Mercedes-Benz vehicles, themaximum permissible rear axle load isincreased when towing a trailer. Refer to the"Technical data" section to find out whetherthis applies to your vehicle. If you utilize anyof the added maximum rear axle load whentowing a trailer, the vehicle/trailercombination may not exceed a maximumspeed of 60 mph (100 km/h) for reasonsconcerning the operating permit. This alsoapplies in countries in which the permissiblemaximum speed for vehicle/trailercombinations is above 60 mph (100 km/h).When towing a trailer, your vehicle's handlingcharacteristics will be different in comparisonto when driving without a trailer and it willconsume more fuel.On long and steep downhill gradients, youmust select shift range 1, 2 or 3 in good time.

i This also applies if you have activatedcruise control or DISTRONIC PLUS.

Towing a trailer 205

Driv

ing

and

park

ing

Z

This will use the braking effect of the engine,so that less braking will be required tomaintain the speed. which relieves the loadon the brake system and prevents the brakesfrom overheating and wearing too quickly. Ifyou need additional braking, depress thebrake pedal repeatedly rather thancontinuously.

Driving tipsIf the trailer swings from side to side:X Do not accelerate.X Do not counter-steer.X Brake if necessary.RMaintain a greater distance from the

vehicle in front than when driving without atrailer.RAvoid braking abruptly. If possible, brake

gently at first to allow the trailer to run on.Then, increase the braking force rapidly.RThe values given for gradient-climbing

capabilities from a standstill refer to sealevel. When driving in mountainous areas,note that the power output of the engine,and consequently the vehicle's gradient-climbing capability, decrease withincreasing altitude.

Trailer power supply! You can connect accessories with a

maximum power consumption of 180 W tothe permanent power supply.You must not charge a trailer battery usingthe power supply.

The trailer socket of your vehicle is equippedat the factory with a permanent power supply.The permanent power supply is supplied viatrailer socket pin 9.A qualified specialist workshop can providemore information about installing the trailerelectrics.

Trailer with 7-pin connector

General notesYou can make a connection to the 13-pinsocket on the ball coupling using an adapteror, if necessary, an adapter cable. Both canbe obtained in a qualified specialistworkshop.

Installing the adapter! Make sure that there is enough slack in

the cable for cornering so that the cablecannot become detached.

X Open the socket cover.X Insert the connector with lug : into

groove ; on the socket and turn theconnector clockwise to the stop.

X Make the cover engage.X If you are using an adapter cable, secure

the cable to the trailer with cable ties.

i When the socket is connected, theultrasonic backing up aid is deactivated.

206 Towing a trailerDr

ivin

g an

d pa

rkin

g

Useful information ............................ 208Important safety notes .................... 208Displays and operation .................... 209Menus and submenus ...................... 212Display messages ............................. 224Warning and indicator lamps in theinstrument cluster ............................ 247

207

On-b

oard

com

pute

r and

dis

play

s

Useful information

i This Operator's Manual describes allmodels and all standard and optionalequipment of your vehicle available at thetime of publication of the Operator'sManual. Country-specific differences arepossible. Please note that your vehicle maynot be equipped with all featuresdescribed. This also applies to safety-related systems and functions.

i Read the information on qualifiedspecialist workshops: (Y page 23).

Important safety notes

G WARNINGThe driver's concentration must always bedirected primarily at road traffic.For your safety and the safety of others,selecting features through the multifunctionsteering wheel should only be done by thedriver when traffic and road conditions permitit to be done safely.Bear in mind that at a speed of only 30 mph(approximately 50 km/h), the vehicle coversa distance of 44 feet (approximately 14 m) persecond.

G WARNINGNo messages will be displayed if either theinstrument cluster or the multifunctiondisplay is inoperative.As a result, you will not be able to seeinformation about your driving conditions,such asRspeedRoutside temperatureRwarning/indicator lampsRmalfunction/warning messagesRfailure of any systemsDriving characteristics may be impaired.

If you must continue to drive, do so with addedcaution. Contact an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center as soon as possible.

G WARNINGMalfunction and warning messages are onlydisplayed for certain systems and areintentionally not very detailed. Themalfunction and warning messages aresimply a reminder with respect to theoperation of certain systems. They do notreplace the owner's and/or driver'sresponsibility to maintain the vehicle'soperating safety. Have all requiredmaintenance services and safety checksperformed on the vehicle. Bring the vehicle toan authorized Mercedes-Benz Center toaddress the malfunction and warningmessages.

G WARNINGAll categories of messages contain importantinformation which should be taken note ofand, where a malfunction is indicated,addressed as soon as possible at anauthorized Mercedes-Benz Center.Failure to repair the condition noted maycause damage not covered by the Mercedes-Benz Limited Warranty, or result in propertydamage or personal injury.

For an illustration of the instrument cluster,see (Y page 209).

208 Important safety notesOn

-boa

rd c

ompu

ter a

nd d

ispl

ays

Displays and operation

Instrument cluster

Instrument cluster: miles: Speedometer with segments (Y page 210); Multifunction display (Y page 212)= Tachometer (Y page 210)? Coolant temperature (Y page 209)A Fuel gaugeB Instrument cluster lighting (Y page 209)

Instrument lightingThe lighting in the instrument cluster, in thedisplays and the controls in the vehicleinterior can be adjusted using the brightnesscontrol knob.The brightness control knob is located on thebottom left of the instrument cluster(Y page 209).X Turn the brightness control knob clockwise

or counter-clockwise.If the light switch is set to Ã, T orL, the brightness is dependent uponthe brightness of the ambient light.

i The light sensor in the instrument clusterautomatically controls the brightness ofthe multifunction display.

In daylight, the displays in the instrumentcluster are not illuminated.

Displaying the coolant temperature

G WARNINGDriving when your engine is overheated cancause some fluids which may have leaked intothe engine compartment to catch fire. Youcould be seriously burned.Steam from an overheated engine can causeserious burns which can occur just by openingthe engine hood. Stay away from the engineif you see or hear steam coming from it.Stop the vehicle in a safe location away fromother traffic. Turn off the engine, get out of the

Displays and operation 209

On-b

oard

com

pute

r and

dis

play

s

Z

vehicle and do not stand near the vehicle untilthe engine has cooled down.

! A display message is shown if the coolanttemperature is too high.If the coolant temperature is over248 ‡(120 †), do not continue driving. Theengine will otherwise be damaged.

The coolant temperature gauge is in theinstrument cluster on the right-hand side(Y page 209).Under normal operating conditions and withthe specified coolant level, the coolanttemperature may rise to 248 ‡ (120 †).

Tachometer! Do not drive in the overrevving range, as

this could damage the engine.The red band in the tachometer indicates theengine's overrevving range.The fuel supply is interrupted to protect theengine when the red band is reached.

Outside temperature display

G WARNINGThe outside temperature indicator is notdesigned to serve as an ice-warning deviceand is therefore unsuitable for that purpose.Indicated temperatures just above thefreezing point do not guarantee that the roadsurface is free of ice. The road may still be icy,especially in wooded areas or on bridges.

The outside temperature display is in themultifunction display (Y page 212).Changes in the outside temperature aredisplayed after a short delay.

Speedometer with segmentsThe segments in the speedometer indicatewhich speed range is available.RCruise control activated (Y page 169):

The segments light up from the storedspeed to the maximum speed.RVariable SPEEDTRONIC activated

(Y page 174):The segments light up from the start of thescale to the selected limit speed.RDISTRONIC PLUS activated (Y page 179):

One or two segments in the set speedrange light up.RDISTRONIC PLUS detects a vehicle in front:

The segments between the speed of thevehicle in front and the stored speed lightup.

Operating the on-board computer

Overview

: Multifunction display; To switch on the Voice Control System;

see the separate operating instructions= Right control panel? Left control panelA Back button

210 Displays and operationOn

-boa

rd c

ompu

ter a

nd d

ispl

ays

X To activate the on-board computer: turnthe SmartKey to position 1(Y page 139) inthe ignition lock.

You can control the multifunction display andthe settings in the on-board computer usingthe buttons on the multifunction steeringwheel.

Left control panel

=

;

RCalls up the menu and menu bar

9

:

Press briefly:RScrolls in listsRSelects a submenu or functionRIn the Audio menu: selects a

stored station, an audio track ora video sceneRIn the Tel (telephone) menu:

switches to the phone book andselects a name or telephonenumber

9

:

Press and hold:RIn the Audio menu: selects the

previous/next station or selectsan audio track or a video sceneusing rapid scrollingRIn the Tel (telephone) menu:

starts rapid scrolling if the phonebook is open

a RConfirms a selection/displaymessageRIn the Tel (telephone) menu:

switches to the telephone bookand starts dialing the selectednumberRIn the Audio menu: stops the

station search function at thedesired station

Right control panel

~ RRejects or ends a callRExits phone book/redial

memory

6 RMakes or accepts a callRSwitches to the redial memory

WX

RAdjusts the volume

8 RMute

Back button

% Press briefly:RBackRSwitches off the Voice Control

System; see the separateoperating instructionsRHides display messages/calls

up the last Trip menu functionusedRExits the telephone book/redial

memory

% Press and hold:RCalls up the standard display in

the Trip menu

Displays and operation 211

On-b

oard

com

pute

r and

dis

play

s

Z

Multifunction display

: Transmission position (Y page 148); Drive program (Y page 149)= Description field? Menu barA Outside temperature or speed

(Y page 219)B TimeC Transfer case position (Y page 198)X To show menu bar ?: press the =

or ; button on the steering wheel.

Menu bar ? disappears after a few seconds.Text field = shows the selected menu orsubmenu as well as display messages.For further information on displaying thetransmission position, see (Y page 146).

i You can set the time using the audiosystem or COMAND, see the separateoperating instructions.

The following messages may appear in themultifunction display:Z Upshift indicator (Y page 151)¯ Cruise control (Y page 169)LIM SPEEDTRONIC (Y page 174)¤ ECO start/stop function (AMG

vehicles) (Y page 141)

LOW RANGE

LOW RANGE off-road gear(Y page 199)

ë HOLD function (Y page 192)

Menus and submenus

Menu overviewPress the = or ; button on thesteering wheel to call up the menu bar andselect a menu.Operating the on-board computer(Y page 210).Depending on the equipment installed in thevehicle, you can call up the following menus:RTrip menu (Y page 212)RNavi menu (navigation instructions)

(Y page 214)RAudio menu (Y page 215)RTel menu (telephone) (Y page 216)RDriveAssist menu (assistance)

(Y page 218)RServ. menu (Y page 218)RSett. menu (Y page 218)RAMG menu in AMG vehicles (Y page 222)

Trip menu

Standard display

X Press and hold the % button on thesteering wheel until the Trip menu withtrip odometer : and odometer ; isshown.

212 Menus and submenusOn

-boa

rd c

ompu

ter a

nd d

ispl

ays

Trip computer "From start" or "Fromreset"

Example: trip computer "From Start": Distance; Time= Average speed? Average fuel consumptionX Press the = or ; button on the

steering wheel to select the Trip menu.X Press 9 or : to select From Start

or From Reset.The values in the From Start submenu arecalculated from the start of a journey whilstthe values in the From Reset submenu arecalculated from the last time the submenuwas reset (Y page 214).The From Start trip computer isautomatically reset when:RThe ignition has been switched off for more

than four hours.R999 hours have been exceeded.R9,999 miles have been exceeded.The From Reset trip computer isautomatically reset if the value exceeds9,999 hours or 99,999 miles.

Displaying the range and current fuelconsumption

: Approximate range; Current fuel consumption (not for AMG

vehicles)X Press the = or ; button on the

steering wheel to select the Trip menu.X Press the 9 or : button to select the

current fuel consumption (not for AMGvehicles) and the approximate range.

The approximate range that can be covereddepends on the fuel level and your currentdriving style. If there is only a small amountof fuel left in the fuel tank, the display showsa vehicle being refueled C instead of therange.

Digital speedometer

: Digital speedometerX Press the = or ; button on the

steering wheel to select the Trip menu.X Press the 9 or : button to select the

digital speedometer.

Menus and submenus 213

On-b

oard

com

pute

r and

dis

play

s

Z

Resetting values

Example: resetting the trip computer "From Start"X Press the = or ; button on the

steering wheel to select the Trip menu.X Press the 9 or : button to select the

function that you wish to reset.X Press the a button.X Press the : button to select Yes and

press the a button to confirm.

You can reset the values of the followingfunctions:RTrip odometerR"From Start" trip computerR"From Reset" trip computer

Navigation system menu

Displaying navigation instructionsIn the Navi menu, the multifunction displayshows navigation instructions.For more information, see the separateoperating instructions.X Switch on COMAND (see the separate

operating instructions).X Press the = or ; button on the

steering wheel to select the Navi menu.

Route guidance not active

: Direction of travel; Current street

Route guidance active

No change of direction announced

: Distance to the destination; Distance to the next change of direction= Current street? Symbol "follow the road's course"

Change of direction announced without alane recommendation

: Road into which the change of directionleads

; Distance to change of direction and visualdistance display

= Change-of-direction icon

When a change of direction has beenannounced, you will see visual distancedisplay ; next to the symbol for change ofdirection =. This shortens from the bottom

214 Menus and submenusOn

-boa

rd c

ompu

ter a

nd d

ispl

ays

to the top of the display as you approach thepoint of the announced change of direction.

Change of direction announced with alane recommendation

: Road into which the change of directionleads

; Distance to change of direction and visualdistance display

= Lane recommendation? New lane during a change of directionA Uninterrupted laneB Change-of-direction icon

On multilane roads, the system can displaylane recommendation = for the next changeof direction. During the change of direction,additional lanes may be displayed.Lane recommendations are only displayed ifthe relevant data is available on the digitalmap.

Other status indicators of thenavigation systemRO: you have reached the destination or an

intermediate destination.RNew Route... or Calculating Route:

calculating a new routeROff Map or Off Mapped Road: the vehicle

position is outside the area of the digitalmap (off-map position).RNo Route: no route could be calculated to

the selected destination.

Audio menu

Selecting a radio station

: Waveband; Station frequency with memory position

i Station ; is displayed with the stationfrequency or station name. The memoryposition is only displayed along withstation ; if this has been stored.

X Switch on COMAND and select Radio; seethe separate operating instructions.

X Press the = or ; button on thesteering wheel to select the Audio menu.

X To select a stored station: briefly pressthe 9 or : button.

X To select a station from the station list: press and briefly hold the 9or : button.

If no station list is received:X To select a station using the station

search: press and briefly hold the 9or : button.

i For information on switching wavebandand storing stations; see the separateoperating instructions.

i SIRIUS XM satellite radio functions like anormal radio.For more information on satellite radiooperation, see the separate operatinginstructions.

Menus and submenus 215

On-b

oard

com

pute

r and

dis

play

s

Z

Operating audio devices or media

Display CD/DVD changer (example): Current CD in the CD/DVD changer; Current title

Audio data from various audio devices ormedia can be played, depending on theequipment installed in the vehicle.X Switch on COMAND and select the audio

player or medium (see the separateoperating instructions).

X Press the = or ; button on thesteering wheel to select the Audio menu.

X To select the next/previous track:briefly press the 9 or : button.

X To select a track from the track list (rapid scrolling): press and hold the9 or : button until desiredtrack ; has been reached.If you press and hold 9 or :, therapid scrolling speed is increased. Not allaudio drives or data carriers support thisfunction.

If track information is stored on the audiodevice or medium, the multifunction displaywill show the number and title of the track.The current track does not appear in audioAUX mode (Auxiliary audio mode: externalaudio source connected).

Video DVD operation

Display CD/DVD changer (example): Current DVD in the CD/DVD changer; Current sceneX Switch on COMAND and select video DVD;

see the separate operating instructions.X Press the = or ; button on the

steering wheel to select the Audio menu.X To select the next/previous scene:

briefly press the 9 or : button.X To select a scene from the scene list

(rapid scrolling): press and hold the9 or : button until desiredscene ; has been reached.

Telephone menu

Introduction

G WARNINGThe driver's attention to the road must alwaysbe his/her primary focus when driving. Foryour safety and the safety of others, werecommend that you pull over to a safelocation and stop before placing or taking atelephone call. If you choose to use thetelephone while driving, please use the hands-free device and only use the telephone whenroad, weather and traffic conditions permit.Some jurisdictions prohibit the driver fromusing a mobile phone while driving a vehicle.Bear in mind that at a speed of just 30 mph(approximately 50 km/h), your vehicle coversa distance of 44 feet (approximately 14 m)every second.

216 Menus and submenusOn

-boa

rd c

ompu

ter a

nd d

ispl

ays

X Switch on the mobile phone (see theseparate operating instructions).

X Switch on COMAND (see the separateoperating instructions).

X Establish a Bluetooth® connection toCOMAND; see the separate operatinginstructions.

X Press the = or ; button on thesteering wheel to select the Tel menu.

You will see one of the following displaymessages in the multifunction display:RPhone READY or the name of the network

provider: the mobile phone has found anetwork and is ready to receive.RPhone No Service: there is no network

available or the mobile phone is searchingfor a network.

Accepting a call

Example: incoming call

If someone calls you when you are in theTel menu, a display message appears in themultifunction display.X Press the 6 button on the steering

wheel to accept an incoming call.You can accept a call even if you are not inthe Tel menu.

Rejecting or ending a callX Press the ~ button on the steering

wheel.You can end or reject a call even if you are notin the Tel menu.

Dialing a number from the phone bookX Press the = or ; button on the

steering wheel to select the Tel menu.X Press the 9, : or a button to

switch to the phone book.X Press the 9 or : button to select the

desired name.orX To begin rapid scrolling: press and hold

the 9 or : button for longer thanone second.Rapid scrolling stops when you release thebutton or reach the end of the list.

X If only one telephone number is stored for a name: press the 6 or a buttonto start dialing.

orX If there is more than one number for a

particular name: press the 6 or abutton to display the numbers.

X Press the 9 or : button to select thenumber you want to dial.

X Press the 6 or a button to startdialing.

orX To exit the telephone book: press the~ or % button.

RedialingThe on-board computer saves the last namesor numbers dialed in the redial memory.X Press the = or ; button on the

steering wheel to select the Tel menu.X Press the 6 button to switch to the

redial memory.X Press the 9 or : button to select the

desired name or number.X Press the 6 or a button to start

dialing.orX To exit the redial memory: press the~ or % button.

Menus and submenus 217

On-b

oard

com

pute

r and

dis

play

s

Z

Assistance menu

Introduction

In the DriveAssist menu, you have thefollowing options:Rshow the distance display (Y page 218)Ractivate/deactivate Blind Spot Assist or

Active Blind Spot Assist (Y page 218)

Showing the distance displayX Press = or ; on the steering wheel

to select the DriveAssist menu.X Press the 9 or : button to selectDistance Display.

X Press the a button.The DISTRONIC PLUS distance displayappears in the multifunction display(Y page 182).

Activating/deactivating Blind SpotAssistX Press = or ; on the steering wheel

to select the DriveAssist menu.X Press the 9 or : button to selectBlind Spot Asst.

X Press the a button.The current selection is displayed.

X To activate/deactivate: press the abutton again.

For further information about Blind SpotAssist, see (Y page 186).For further information about Active BlindSpot Assist, see (Y page 188).

Service menu

Example: service menu

In the Serv. menu, you have the followingoptions:Rcalling up display messages (Y page 225)Rchecking the tire pressure electronically

(Y page 327)Rcalling up when a service is due

(Y page 293)

Settings menu

Introduction

Example: settings menu

In the Sett. menu, you have the followingoptions:Rchanging the instrument cluster settings

(Y page 219)Rchanging the light settings (Y page 219)Rchanging the vehicle settings

(Y page 220)Rchanging the convenience settings

(Y page 221)Rrestoring the factory settings

(Y page 222)

218 Menus and submenusOn

-boa

rd c

ompu

ter a

nd d

ispl

ays

Instrument cluster

Selecting the unit of measurement fordistanceThe Display Unit Speed-/Odometer:function allows you to choose whethercertain displays appear in kilometers or milesin the multifunction display.You can determine whether the multifunctiondisplay shows some messages in miles orkilometers.X Press the = or ; button on the

steering wheel to select the Sett. menu.X Press the : or 9 button to select theInst. Cluster submenu.

X Press a to confirm.X Press the : or 9 button to select theDisplay Unit Speed-/Odometer:function.You will see the selected setting: km ormiles.

X Press the a button to save the setting.

The selected unit of measurement fordistance applies to:RVehicles with instrument cluster in

kilometers: digital speedometer in theTrip menuRthe odometer and the trip odometerRthe trip computerRthe current consumption and the rangeRthe navigation instructions in the Navi

menuRcruise controlRSPEEDTRONICRDISTRONIC PLUSRthe service interval display

Selecting the permanent display functionYou can determine whether the multifunctiondisplay permanently shows your speed or theoutside temperature.X Press the = or ; button on the

steering wheel to select the Sett. menu.X Press the : or 9 button to select theInstr. Cluster submenu.

X Press a to confirm.X Press the : or 9 button to select thePermanent Display: function.You will see the selected setting: Outside Temperature or Speedometer [mph].

X Press the a button to save the setting.

i Speed is displayed in mph.

Lights

Setting the daytime running lampsi This function is not available in Canada.X Press the = or ; button on the

steering wheel to select the Sett. menu.X Press the : or 9 button to select theLights submenu.

X Press a to confirm.X Press : or 9 to select the Daytime Running Lights function.If the Daytime Running Lights: havebeen switched on, the cone of light and theW symbol in the multifunction displayare shown in red.

X Press the a button to save the setting.

Further information on daytime runninglamps (Y page 99).

Surround lighting and exterior lightingdelayed switch-offX Press the = or ; button on the

steering wheel to select the Sett. menu.X Press the : or 9 button to select theLights submenu.

X Press a to confirm.

Menus and submenus 219

On-b

oard

com

pute

r and

dis

play

s

Z

X Press : or 9 to select theSurround Lighting function.When the Surround Lighting function isactivated, the cone of light in themultifunction display is shown in red.

X Press the a button to save the setting.

Deactivating delayed switch-off of theexterior lighting temporarily:X Before leaving the vehicle, turn the

SmartKey to position 0(Y page 139) in theignition lock.

X Turn the SmartKey to position 2 in theignition lock (Y page 139).The exterior lighting delayed switch-off isdeactivated.

Delayed switch-off of the exterior lighting isreactivated the next time you start theengine.If you have activated the Surround Lighting function and the light switch is setto Ã, the following functions are activatedwhen it is dark:RSurround lighting: the exterior lighting

remains lit for 40 seconds after unlockingwith the SmartKey. If you start the engine,the surround lighting is switched off andautomatic headlamp mode is activated(Y page 100).RExterior lighting delayed switch-off: the

exterior lighting remains lit for60 seconds after the engine is switched off.If you close all the doors and the trunk lid,the exterior lighting goes off after15 seconds.

i Depending on your vehicle's equipment,when the surround lighting and delayedswitch-off exterior lighting are on, thefollowing light up:RParking lampsRFront fog lampsRLow-beam headlampsRDaytime running lampsRSide marker lampsRSurround lighting in the exterior mirrors

Activating/deactivating the interiorlighting delayed switch-offIf you activate the Interior Lighting Delay function, the interior lighting remainson for 20 seconds after you remove theSmartKey from the ignition lock.X Press the = or ; button on the

steering wheel to select the Sett. menu.X Press the : or 9 button to select theLights submenu.

X Press a to confirm.X Press : or 9 to select theInterior Lighting Delay function.When the Interior Lighting Delayfunction is activated, the vehicle interior isdisplayed in red in the multifunctiondisplay.

X Press the a button to save the setting.

Vehicle

Activating/deactivating the automaticdoor locking mechanismIf you activate the Automatic Door Lockfunction, the vehicle is centrally locked abovea speed of around 9 mph (15 km/h).X Press the = or ; button on the

steering wheel to select the Sett. menu.X Press the : or 9 button to select theVehicle submenu.

X Press a to confirm.X Press : or 9 to select theAutomatic Door Lock function.When the Automatic Door Lock functionis activated, the vehicle doors are displayedin red in the multifunction display.

X Press the a button to save the setting.

For further information on the automaticlocking feature, see (Y page 75).

220 Menus and submenusOn

-boa

rd c

ompu

ter a

nd d

ispl

ays

Activating/deactivating the acousticlocking verification signalIf you switch on the Acoustic Lock function,an acoustic signal sounds when you lock thevehicle.X Press the = or ; button on the

steering wheel to select the Sett. menu.X Press : or 9 to select the Vehicle

submenu.X Press a to confirm.X Press the : or 9 button to select theAcoustic Lock function.If the Acoustic Lock function is activated,the & symbol in the multifunctiondisplay lights up red.

X Press the a button to save the setting.

Convenience

Activating/deactivating the EASY-ENTRY/EXIT featureG WARNINGYou must make sure no one can becometrapped or injured by the moving steeringwheel when the easy-entry/exit feature isactivated.To stop steering wheel movement, movesteering wheel adjustment lever or press oneof the memory position buttons.Do not leave children unattended in thevehicle, or with access to an unlocked vehicle.Children could open the driver's door andunintentionally activate the easy-entry/exitfeature, which could result in an accidentand/or serious personal injury.

X Press the = or ; button on thesteering wheel to select the Sett. menu.

X Press the : or 9 button to select theConvenience submenu.

X Press a to confirm.

X Press : or 9 to select the Easy Entry/Exit: function.If the Easy Entry/Exit function isactivated, the vehicle steering wheel isdisplayed in red in the multifunctiondisplay.

X Press the a button to save the setting.

Further information on the EASY-ENTRY/EXITfeature (Y page 92).

Switching the fold-in mirrors whenlocking feature on/offWhen you activate the Auto. Mirror Folding function, the exterior mirrors arefolded in when the vehicle is locked. If youunlock the vehicle and then open a door, theexterior mirrors fold out again.X Press the = or ; button on the

steering wheel to select the Sett. menu.X Press the : or 9 button to select theConvenience submenu.

X Press a to confirm.X Press : or 9 to select the Auto. Mirror Folding function.If the Auto. Mirror Folding function isactivated, the vehicle's exterior mirror isdisplayed in red in the multifunctiondisplay.

X Press the a button to save the setting.

: To fold the exterior mirrors in or out

If you have switched the Auto. Mirror Folding on and you fold the exterior mirrorsin using button :, they will not fold outautomatically (Y page 93).

Menus and submenus 221

On-b

oard

com

pute

r and

dis

play

s

Z

You can then only fold out the exterior mirrorsusing button :.

Restoring the factory settingsX Press the = or ; button on the

steering wheel to select the Sett. menu.X Press the : or 9 button to select theFactory Setting submenu.

X Press a to confirm.The Reset All Settings? messageappears.

X Press the : or 9 button to selectNo or Yes.

X Press a to confirm the selection.If you select Yes, the multifunction displayshows a confirmation message.

For safety reasons, the Daytime Running Lights function in the Lights submenu isonly reset if the vehicle is stationary.

AMG menu in AMG vehicles

AMG displays

: Digital speedometer; Gear indicator= Upshift indicator? Engine oil temperatureA Coolant temperatureB Status indicator for ECO start/stop

function (Y page 141)X Press = or ; on the steering wheel

to select the AMG menu.Upshift indicator UP = indicates that theengine has reached the overrevving rangewhen in the manual gearshift program.

Upshift indicator UP = fades out othermessages until you have shifted up.If the engine oil temperature is below 176 ‡(80 †), the oil temperature is shown in blue.Avoid driving at full engine output during thistime.

SETUP

: Drive program (C/SS+/M); ESP® mode (ON/OFF)= Suspension tuning (SPORT/COMFORT)

SETUP shows the drive program, the ESP®

(Electronic Stability Program) mode and theSPORT handling mode.X Press = or ; on the steering wheel

to select the AMG menu.X Press the 9 button repeatedly until

SETUP is displayed.

RACETIMER

Displaying and starting RACETIMERG WARNINGThe RACETIMER feature is only for use onroads and in conditions where high speeddriving is permitted. Racing on public roads isprohibited under all circumstances. The driveris and must always remain responsible forfollowing posted speed limits.

222 Menus and submenusOn

-boa

rd c

ompu

ter a

nd d

ispl

ays

: Lap; RACETIMER

You can start the RACETIMER when theengine is running or if the SmartKey is inposition 2(Y page 139) in the ignition lock.X Press = or ; on the steering wheel

to select the AMG menu.X Press the 9 button repeatedly until the

RACETIMER is shown.X To start: press the a button to start the

RACETIMER.

Displaying the intermediate time

X Press the = or ; button to selectInterm. Time.

X Press a to confirm.The intermediate time is displayed for fiveseconds.

Starting a new lap

: RACETIMER; Fastest lap time (best lap)= LapX Press a to confirm New Lap.

i It is possible to store a maximum ofsixteen laps. The 16th lap can only becompleted with Finish Lap.

Stopping the RACETIMER

X Press the % button on the steeringwheel.

X Press a to confirm Yes.

The RACETIMER is interrupted if you stop thevehicle and turn the SmartKey to position1(Y page 139) in the ignition lock. If you turnthe SmartKey to position 2 or3(Y page 139) and then press a toconfirm Start, timing is continued.

Resetting the current lapX Stop the RACETIMER (Y page 223).X Press = or ; to select Reset Lap.X Press a to reset the lap time to "0".

Deleting all laps

If you switch off the engine, the RACETIMERis reset to "0" after 30 seconds. All laps aredeleted.You cannot delete individual stored laps. Ifyou have stopped 16 laps, the current lapdoes not have to be reset.

Menus and submenus 223

On-b

oard

com

pute

r and

dis

play

s

Z

X Reset the current lap (Y page 223).X Press a to confirm Reset.Reset Race Timer? appears in themultifunction display.

X Press the : button to select Yes andpress the a button to confirm.All laps are deleted.

Overall statistics

: RACETIMER overall evaluation; Total time driven= Average speed? Distance coveredA Maximum speed

This function is shown if you have stored atleast one lap and stopped the RACETIMER.X Press = or ; on the steering wheel

to select the AMG menu.X Press the 9 button repeatedly until the

overall evaluation is shown.

Lap statistics

: Lap; Lap time= Average lap speed? Lap lengthA Top speed during lap

This function is only available if you havestored at least two laps and have stopped theRACETIMER.X Press = or ; on the steering wheel

to select the AMG menu.X Press the 9 button repeatedly until the

lap evaluation is shown.Each lap is shown in a separate submenu.The fastest lap is indicated by flashingsymbol :.

X Press the 9 or : button to select adifferent lap evaluation.

Display messages

Introduction

General notesDisplay messages appear in the multifunctiondisplay.Display messages with graphic displays maybe shown in simplified form in the Operator'sManual and may differ from the messagesshown in the multifunction display.Please respond in accordance with thedisplay messages and follow the additionalnotes in this Operator's Manual.Certain display messages are accompaniedby an audible warning tone or a continuoustone.When you stop and park the vehicle, pleaseobserve the notes on:RHOLD function (Y page 192)RParking (Y page 156)

Hiding display messagesX Press the a or % button on the

steering wheel to hide the display message.The display message is cleared.

Display messages with a high priority areshown in red.You cannot hide display messages of thehighest priority. The multifunction display

224 Display messagesOn

-boa

rd c

ompu

ter a

nd d

ispl

ays

shows these messages continuously until thecauses for the messages have beenremedied.

Message memory menuThe on-board computer saves certain displaymessages. You can call up the displaymessages in the message memory.X Press the = or ; button on the

steering wheel to select the Serv. menu.If there are display messages, themultifunction display shows 2 Messages,for example.

X Press the 9 or : button to select theentry, e.g. 2 Messages.

X Press a to confirm.X Press the 9 or : button to scroll

through the display messages.When the ignition is switched off, all displaymessages are deleted, apart from some high-priority display messages. Once the causes ofthe high-priority display messages have beenrectified, the corresponding displaymessages are also deleted.

Display messages 225

On-b

oard

com

pute

r and

dis

play

s

Z

Safety systems

Display messages Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions

!÷Currently Unavailable See Operator's Manual

ABS (Anti-lock Braking System), ESP® (Electronic StabilityProgram), BAS (Brake Assist), the HOLD function, hill start assistand ESP® trailer stabilization are temporarily unavailable.BAS and the adaptive brake lights may also have failed.In addition, the ÷, å and ! warning lamps light up inthe instrument cluster.Possible causes are:RSelf-diagnosis is not yet complete.RThe on-board voltage may be insufficient.

G WARNINGThe brake system continues to function normally, but without thefunctions listed above. The wheels could therefore lock if youbrake hard, for example.The steerability and braking characteristics may be severelyaffected. The braking distance in an emergency braking situationcan increase.If ESP® is not operational, ESP® is unable to stabilize the vehicle.There is an increased risk of skidding and an accident.X Carefully drive a suitable distance making slight steering

movements at a speed above 12 mph (20 km/h).If the display message disappears, the functions mentionedabove are available again.

If the display message continues to be displayed:X Drive on carefully.X Visit a qualified specialist workshop.

!÷Inoperative See Operator's Manual

ABS, ESP®, BAS, the HOLD function, hill start assist andESP® trailer stabilization are unavailable due to a malfunction.BAS and the adaptive brake lights may also have failed.The $ (USA only)/J (Canada only), ÷, å and !warning lamps in the instrument cluster also light up.

G WARNINGThe brake system continues to function normally, but without thefunctions listed above. The wheels could therefore lock if youbrake hard, for example.The steerability and braking characteristics may be severelyaffected. The braking distance in an emergency braking situationcan increase.

226 Display messagesOn

-boa

rd c

ompu

ter a

nd d

ispl

ays

Display messages Possible causes/consequences and M SolutionsIf ESP® is not operational, ESP® is unable to stabilize the vehicle.There is an increased risk of skidding and an accident.X Drive on carefully.X Visit a qualified specialist workshop immediately.

÷Currently Unavailable See Operator's Manual

ESP®, BAS, the HOLD function, hill start assist and ESP® trailerstabilization are unavailable due to a malfunction.BAS and the adaptive brake lights may also have failed.In addition, the ÷ and å warning lamps light up in theinstrument cluster.The self-diagnosis function might not be complete, for example.

G WARNINGThe brake system continues to function normally, but without thefunctions listed above.The braking distance in an emergency braking situation can thusincrease.If ESP® is not operational, ESP® is unable to stabilize the vehicle.There is an increased risk of skidding and an accident.X Carefully drive a suitable distance making slight steering

movements at a speed above 12 mph (20 km/h).If the display message disappears, the functions mentionedabove are available again.

If the display message continues to be displayed:X Drive on carefully.X Visit a qualified specialist workshop.

Display messages 227

On-b

oard

com

pute

r and

dis

play

s

Z

Display messages Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions

÷Inoperative See Operator's Manual

ESP®, BAS, the HOLD function, hill start assist and ESP® trailerstabilization are unavailable due to a malfunction.BAS and the adaptive brake lights may also have failed.In addition, the ÷ and å warning lamps light up in theinstrument cluster.

G WARNINGThe brake system continues to function normally, but without thefunctions listed above.The braking distance in an emergency braking situation can thusincrease.If ESP® is not operational, ESP® is unable to stabilize the vehicle.There is an increased risk of skidding and an accident.X Drive on carefully.X Visit a qualified specialist workshop.

T!÷Inoperative See Operator's Manual

EBD (electronic brake force distribution), ABS, ESP®, BAS, theHOLD function, hill start assist and ESP® trailer stabilization areunavailable due to a malfunction.BAS and the adaptive brake lights may also have failed.In addition, the ÷, å and ! warning lamps light up inthe instrument cluster and a warning tone sounds.

G WARNINGThe brake system continues to function normally, but without thefunctions listed above. The front and rear wheels could thereforelock if you brake hard, for example.The steerability and braking characteristics may be severelyaffected. The braking distance in an emergency braking situationcan increase.If ESP® is not operational, ESP® is unable to stabilize the vehicle.There is an increased risk of skidding and an accident.X Drive on carefully.X Visit a qualified specialist workshop immediately.

F(USA

only)!(Canadaonly)Release Park. Brake

You are driving with the parking brake applied. A warning tone alsosounds.X Release the parking brake.

228 Display messagesOn

-boa

rd c

ompu

ter a

nd d

ispl

ays

Display messages Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions

$(USA

only)J(Canadaonly)Check Brake Fluid Level

There is not enough brake fluid in the brake fluid reservoir. Inaddition, the $ (USA only)/J (Canada only) warning lamplights up in the instrument cluster and a warning tone sounds.

G WARNINGThe braking effect may be impaired.There is a risk of an accident.X Pull over and stop the vehicle safely as soon as possible, paying

attention to road and traffic conditions. Do not continue drivingunder any circumstances.

X Secure the vehicle against rolling away (Y page 156).X Consult a qualified specialist workshop.X Do not add brake fluid. This does not correct the malfunction.

#Check Brake Pad Wear

The brake pads/linings have reached their wear limit.X Visit a qualified specialist workshop.

Gmbrace Inoperative

USA only: one or more main functions of the mbrace system aremalfunctioning.Canada only: one or more main functions of the TELE AID systemare malfunctioning.X USA only: have the mbrace system checked at a qualified

specialist workshop.X Canada only: have the Tele AID system checked at a qualified

specialist workshop.

6SRS Malfunction Service Required

There is a malfunction in the SRS (Supplemental RestraintSystem). The 6 warning lamp also lights up in the instrumentcluster.

G WARNINGThe air bags or Emergency Tensioning Devices may either betriggered unintentionally or, in the event of an accident, may notbe triggered.There is an increased risk of injury.X Visit a qualified specialist workshop.For further information about SRS, see (Y page 39).

Display messages 229

On-b

oard

com

pute

r and

dis

play

s

Z

Display messages Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions

6Front Left Malfunction Service RequiredorFront Right Malfunction Service Required

SRS has malfunctioned at the front on the left or right. The 6warning lamp also lights up in the instrument cluster.

G WARNINGThe air bags or Emergency Tensioning Devices may either betriggered unintentionally or, in the event of an accident, may notbe triggered.There is an increased risk of injury.X Visit a qualified specialist workshop.

6Rear Left Malfunction Service RequiredorRear Right Malfunction Service Required

SRS has malfunctioned at the rear on the left or right. The 6warning lamp also lights up in the instrument cluster.

G WARNINGThe air bags or Emergency Tensioning Devices may either betriggered unintentionally or, in the event of an accident, may notbe triggered.There is an increased risk of injury.X Visit a qualified specialist workshop.

6Rear Center Malfunction Service Required

SRS has malfunctioned at the rear center. The 6 warning lampalso lights up in the instrument cluster.

G WARNINGThe air bags or Emergency Tensioning Devices may either betriggered unintentionally or, in the event of an accident, may notbe triggered.There is an increased risk of injury.X Visit a qualified specialist workshop.

6Left Side Curtain Airbag Malfunction Service Required or Right Side Curtain Airbag Malfunction Service Required

There is a malfunction in the left-hand or right-hand windowcurtain air bag. The 6 warning lamp also lights up in theinstrument cluster.

G WARNINGThe left or right window curtain air bag may either be triggeredunintentionally or, in the event of an accident, may not betriggered.There is an increased risk of injury.X Visit a qualified specialist workshop.

230 Display messagesOn

-boa

rd c

ompu

ter a

nd d

ispl

ays

Display messages Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions

Front Passenger Airbag Disabled See Operator's Manual

A special BabySmart™-compatible child restraint system ismounted on the front-passenger seat.The 45 indicator lamp also lights up.The front-passenger air bag is therefore disabled.Further information on BabySmart™(Y page 44).

Front Passenger Airbag Enabled See Operator's Manual

The 45 indicator lamp does not remain lit if a specialBabySmart™-compatible child restraint system has been installedon the front-passenger seat.The BabySmart™ system is malfunctioning.

G WARNINGThe front-passenger front air bag can be triggered unintentionallyin the event of an accident.There is a risk of an accident.X Make sure there is nothing between the seat and the child

restraint system.X Check that the child restraint system is installed correctly.X If the 45 indicator lamp does not light up, have the

BabySmart™ system checked as soon as possible at a qualifiedspecialist workshop.Do not transport a child on the front-passenger seat until theair bag deactivation system has been repaired.

Lightsi Display messages about LEDs:

This display message will only appear if all LEDs have failed.

Display messages Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions

bCheck Left Low Beam or Check Right Low Beam

The left or right-hand low-beam headlamp is defective.X Visit a qualified specialist workshop.

bCheck Trailer Left Tail Lamp or Check Trailer Right Tail Lamp

The left or right-hand trailer tail lamp is faulty.X Check whether you are permitted to change the bulb yourself.orX Visit a qualified specialist workshop.

Display messages 231

On-b

oard

com

pute

r and

dis

play

s

Z

Display messages Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions

bCheck Trailer Left Turn Signal or Check Trailer Right Turn Signal

The left or right-hand trailer turn signal lamp is defective.X Check whether you are permitted to change the bulb yourself.orX Visit a qualified specialist workshop.

bCheck Trailer Brake Lamp

The trailer brake lamp is defective.X Check whether you are permitted to change the bulb yourself.orX Visit a qualified specialist workshop.

bCheck Rear Left Turn Signal or Check Rear Right Turn Signal

The rear left-hand or rear right-hand turn signal is defective.X Check whether you are permitted to replace the bulb yourself

(Y page 109).orX Visit a qualified specialist workshop.

bCheck Front Left Turn Signal or Check Front Right Turn Signal

The front left-hand or front right-hand turn signal is defective.X Check whether you are permitted to replace the bulb yourself

(Y page 109).orX Visit a qualified specialist workshop.

bCheck Left Mirror Turn Signal or Check Right Mirror Turn Signal

The turn signal in the left-hand or right-hand exterior mirror isdefective.X Visit a qualified specialist workshop.

bCheck Center Brake Lamp

The high-mounted brake lamp is faulty.X Visit a qualified specialist workshop.

bCheck Left Brake LamporCheck Right Brake Lamp

The left or right-hand brake lamp is defective.X Replace the bulb (Y page 108).

bCheck Left High BeamorCheck Right High Beam

The left or right-hand high beam is defective.X Visit a qualified specialist workshop.

232 Display messagesOn

-boa

rd c

ompu

ter a

nd d

ispl

ays

Display messages Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions

bLicense Plate Lamp

There is a short circuit in the LED lamps. The LEDs have beenswitched off.X Visit a qualified specialist workshop.

bCheck Left Fog LamporCheck Right Fog Lamp

The left-hand or right-hand front fog lamp is defective.X Replace the bulb (Y page 108).

bRear Fog Lamp

The rear fog lamp is defective.X Check whether you are permitted to replace the bulb yourself

(Y page 109).orX Visit a qualified specialist workshop.

bCheck Front Left Parking Lamp or Check Front Right Parking Lamp

The front left or front right parking or standing lamp is defective.X Check whether you are permitted to replace the bulb yourself

(Y page 109).orX Visit a qualified specialist workshop.

bBackup Light

The backup lamp is defective.X Replace the bulb (Y page 108).

bCheck Front Left Sidemarker LamporCheck Front Right Sidemarker Lamp

The left or right front side marker lamp is defective.X Check whether you are permitted to replace the bulb yourself

(Y page 109).orX Visit a qualified specialist workshop.

bCheck Left Tail LamporCheck Right Tail Lamp

The left or right-hand tail lamp is defective.X Check whether you are permitted to replace the bulb yourself

(Y page 109).orX Visit a qualified specialist workshop.

Display messages 233

On-b

oard

com

pute

r and

dis

play

s

Z

Display messages Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions

bCheck Left Daytime Running Light or Check Right Daytime Running Light

The left or right-hand daytime running lamp is defective.X Visit a qualified specialist workshop.

bMalfunction See Operator's Manual

The exterior lighting is defective.X Visit a qualified specialist workshop.

bAuto Lamp Function Inoperative

The light sensor is defective.X Visit a qualified specialist workshop.

bSwitch Off Lights

The lights are still switched on when you leave the vehicle. Awarning tone also sounds.X Turn the light switch to Ã.

Engine

Display messages Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions

+Check Coolant Level See Operator's Manual

The coolant level is too low.X Add coolant, observing the warning notes before doing so

(Y page 291).X Have the coolant system checked at a qualified specialist

workshop if the coolant needs topping up more often than usual.

? The fan motor is faulty.X At coolant temperatures below 248 ‡ (120 †), drive to the next

qualified specialist workshop.X Avoid heavy loads on the engine as you do so, e.g. driving in

mountainous terrain and stop-start traffic.

234 Display messagesOn

-boa

rd c

ompu

ter a

nd d

ispl

ays

Display messages Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions

?Coolant Too Hot Stop Vehicle Turn Engine Off

The coolant is too hot.A warning tone also sounds.

G WARNINGDo not drive when your engine is overheated. This can cause somefluids which may have leaked into the engine compartment tocatch fire.Steam from the overheated engine can also cause serious burnswhich can occur just by opening the hood.There is a risk of injury.X Pull over and stop the vehicle safely and switch off the engine,

paying attention to road and traffic conditions.X Secure the vehicle against rolling away (Y page 156).X Leave the vehicle and keep a safe distance from the vehicle until

the engine has cooled down.X Make sure that the air supply to the engine radiator is not

blocked, e.g. by snow, slush or ice.X Do not start the engine again until the display message goes out

and the coolant temperature is below 248 ‡ (120 †).Otherwise, the engine could be damaged.

X Pay attention to the coolant temperature display.X If the temperature increases again, visit a qualified specialist

workshop immediately.Under normal operating conditions and with the specified coolantlevel, the coolant temperature may rise to 248 ‡ (120 †).

The poly-V-belt may have torn.X Pull over and stop the vehicle safely and switch off the engine,

paying attention to road and traffic conditions.X Check the poly-V-belt.If the poly-V-belt is torn:! Do not continue driving. The engine could otherwise overheat.X Consult a qualified specialist workshop.If the poly-V-belt is not damaged:X Wait until the display message disappears before restarting the

engine. Otherwise, the engine could be damaged.X Pay attention to the coolant temperature display.X Visit a qualified specialist workshop.

Display messages 235

On-b

oard

com

pute

r and

dis

play

s

Z

Display messages Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions

# The battery is not being charged.A warning tone also sounds.Possible causes are:Ra defective alternatorRa torn poly-V-beltRa malfunction in the electronicsX Pull over and stop the vehicle safely and switch off the engine,

paying attention to road and traffic conditions.X Open the hood.X Check whether the poly-V-belt is torn.If the poly-V-belt is torn:! Do not continue driving. The engine could otherwise overheat.X Consult a qualified specialist workshop.If the poly-V-belt is not damaged:X Visit a qualified specialist workshop.

4Check Engine Oil At Next Refueling

The engine oil level has dropped to the minimum level.A warning tone also sounds.X Check the oil level when next refueling, at the latest

(Y page 289).X If necessary, add engine oil (Y page 291).X Have the engine checked at a qualified specialist workshop if

engine oil needs to be added more often than usual.

! Avoid long journeys with too little engine oil. The engine willotherwise be damaged.

Information on approved engine oils can be obtained from anyqualified specialist workshop or on the Internet at http://www.mbusa.com (USA only).

4Engine Oil Level Low Stop Vehicle Turn Engine Off

The engine oil level is too low. There is a risk of engine damage.X Pull over and stop the vehicle safely and switch off the engine,

paying attention to road and traffic conditions.X Add engine oil (Y page 291) and check the oil level

(Y page 289).

236 Display messagesOn

-boa

rd c

ompu

ter a

nd d

ispl

ays

Display messages Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions

4Check Engine Oil Level (Add 1 quart)

AMG vehicles: the engine oil level is too low.X Check the oil level when next refueling, at the latest

(Y page 289).X If necessary, add engine oil (Y page 291).X Have the engine checked at a qualified specialist workshop if

engine oil needs to be added more often than usual.

! Avoid long journeys with too little engine oil. The engine willotherwise be damaged.

Information on approved engine oils can be obtained from anyqualified specialist workshop or on the Internet at http://www.mbusa.com (USA only).

4Engine Oil Level Cannot Be Measured

The measuring system is malfunctioning.X Visit a qualified specialist workshop.

8Fuel Level Low

The fuel level has dropped into the reserve range.X Refuel at the nearest gas station.

C There is only a very small amount of fuel in the fuel tank.X Refuel at the nearest gas station without fail.

8Gas Cap Loose

The fuel system pressure is too low. The fuel filler cap is not closedcorrectly or the fuel system is leaking.X Check that the fuel filler cap is correctly closed.

If the fuel filler cap is not correctly closed:X Close the fuel filler cap.

If the fuel filler cap is correctly closed:X Visit a qualified specialist workshop.

Display messages 237

On-b

oard

com

pute

r and

dis

play

s

Z

Driving systems

Display messages Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions

TC Shift Conditions Not FulfilledApply Brake/Parking Brake

The parking brake has not been applied and the brake pedal hasnot been depressed. The transfer case has canceled the gearchange process and is in Neutral. There is no connection betweenthe engine and the drive wheels.X Pull over and stop the vehicle safely as soon as possible, paying

attention to road and traffic conditions.X Depress the brake pedal and apply the parking brake.X Shift the automatic transmission to neutral position N.X Make sure all conditions for changing gears are met

(Y page 199).X Repeat the gearshift process.

TC MalfunctionVisit WorkshopTo park, apply the parking brake

There is a malfunction in the transfer case.X Do not shift the transfer case.X When parking, secure the vehicle against rolling away

(Y page 156).X Have the vehicle checked at a qualified specialist workshop.

TC Shift CanceledPlease Reactivate

The transfer case has not performed the gear change process.X Repeat the gearshift process.X Make sure all conditions for changing gears are met

(Y page 199).

TC Shift Condition Not FulfilledDrive at Max. 25 mph

You have exceeded the maximum speed for the gearshift process.X Drive more slowly.X Repeat the gearshift process.

TC Shift Condition Not FulfilledShift to NEUTRAL

You have not met one or more shift conditions.X Shift the automatic transmission to neutral position N.X Repeat the gearshift process.

TC shift condition not fulfilledDrive at Max. 40 mph

You have exceeded the maximum speed for the gearshift process.X Drive more slowly.X Repeat the gearshift process.

LOW RANGEOn

The transfer case is in the LOW RANGE off-road position.

HIGH RANGEOn

The transfer case is in the HIGH RANGE on-road position.

238 Display messagesOn

-boa

rd c

ompu

ter a

nd d

ispl

ays

Display messages Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions

Differential Locks Available Only in LOW RANGE

The LOW RANGE button has been pressed. The transfer case is inthe LOW RANGE off-road driving position and a differential lockis engaged.X Disengage the differential locks (Y page 201).X Repeat the gearshift process.

TC-NEUTRALOn

The transfer case is in the Neutral neutral position.A warning tone will also sound when the driver's door is openedand the brake pedal is not depressed.X Close the driver's door.X Secure the vehicle against rolling away (Y page 156).X Shift the transfer case according to driving conditions

(Y page 198).

Differential Lock Preselected ESP Not Available

A differential lock has been engaged. The differential gear has notyet locked the respective differential. The activation indicatorlamp (yellow) (Y page 201) of the switch lights up.ESP is unavailable.ABS is still available.

Differential Locks ActiveABS and ESP Not Available

A differential lock was engaged and the differential gear haslocked the respective differential. The activation indicator lamp(yellow) and function indicator lamp (red) (Y page 201) on theswitch light up.ABS and ESP are unavailable.

Display messages 239

On-b

oard

com

pute

r and

dis

play

s

Z

Display messages Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions

Blind Spot Assist Currently Unavailable See Operator's ManualorActive Blind Spot Assist Currently Unavailable See Operator's Manual

Blind Spot Assist or Active Blind Spot Assist is temporarilyinoperative. Possible causes are:Ryou have established the electrical connection between the

trailer and your vehicle.Rthe sensors are dirty.Rfunction is impaired due to heavy rain or snow.Rthe radar sensor system is outside the operating temperature

range.Rthe radar sensor system is temporarily inoperative, e.g. due to

electromagnetic radiation emitted by nearby TV or radiostations or other sources of electromagnetic radiation.

The yellow 9 indicator lamps also light up in the exteriormirrors.X When towing a trailer, confirm the display message with a.

If you are driving without a trailer and the display message doesnot disappear:X Pull over and stop the vehicle safely as soon as possible, paying

attention to road and traffic conditions.X Apply the parking brake.X Clean the sensors (Y page 297).X Restart the engine.If the system detects that the sensors are fully operational, thedisplay message disappears.Blind Spot Assist or Active Blind Spot Assist is operational again.

Blind Spot Assist InoperativeorActive Blind Spot Assist Inoperative

Blind Spot Assist or Active Blind Spot Assist is defective.The yellow 9 indicator lamps also light up in the exteriormirrors.X Visit a qualified specialist workshop.

DISTRONIC PLUSOff

DISTRONIC PLUS has been deactivated (Y page 177).If it was deactivated automatically, a warning tone also sounds.

DISTRONIC PLUSNow Available

DISTRONIC PLUS is operational again after having beentemporarily unavailable. You can now reactivate DISTRONIC PLUS(Y page 177).

240 Display messagesOn

-boa

rd c

ompu

ter a

nd d

ispl

ays

Display messages Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions

DISTRONIC PLUSCurrently Unavailable See Operator's Manual

DISTRONIC is deactivated and temporarily inoperative. Possiblecauses are:Rthe DISTRONIC PLUS cover in the radiator trim is dirtyRfunction is impaired due to heavy rain or snow.Rthe sensors in the bumpers are dirty.Rthe radar sensor system is temporarily inoperative, e.g. due to

electromagnetic radiation emitted by nearby TV or radiostations or other sources of electromagnetic radiation.Rthe system is outside the operating temperature range.Rthe transfer case is in the LOW RANGE transmission position.Rthe vehicle is on an uphill or downhill gradient of greater than

22%-25%.Rthe on-board voltage is too low.A warning tone also sounds.If the display message does not disappear:X Pull over and stop the vehicle safely as soon as possible, paying

attention to road and traffic conditions.X Apply the parking brake.X Clean the DISTRONIC PLUS cover in the radiator trim and the

bumper (Y page 297).X Restart the engine.If the system detects that the sensors are fully operational, thedisplay message disappears.DISTRONIC is operational again.

DISTRONIC PLUS Inoperative

DISTRONIC PLUS is defective.BAS (Brake Assist) may also have failed.A warning tone also sounds.X Visit a qualified specialist workshop.

DISTRONIC PLUSPassive

You have depressed the accelerator pedal. DISTRONIC PLUS is nolonger controlling the speed of the vehicle.X Remove your foot from the accelerator pedal.

DISTRONIC PLUS--- mph

An activation condition for DISTRONIC PLUS is not fulfilled.X Check the activation conditions for DISTRONIC PLUS

(Y page 177).

DISTRONIC PLUS and SPEEDTRONIC Inoperative

DISTRONIC PLUS and SPEEDTRONIC are faulty. A warning tonealso sounds.X Visit a qualified specialist workshop.

Display messages 241

On-b

oard

com

pute

r and

dis

play

s

Z

Display messages Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions

Cruise Control and SPEEDTRONIC Inoperative

Cruise control and SPEEDTRONIC are malfunctioning.X Visit a qualified specialist workshop.

Limit--- mph

While depressing the accelerator pedal beyond the pressure point(kickdown), SPEEDTRONIC cannot be activated.

Cruise Control--- mph

A condition for activating cruise control has not been fulfilled.You have tried to store a speed below 20 mph (30 km/h), forexample.X If conditions permit, drive faster than 20 mph (30 km/h) and

store the speed.X Check the activation conditions for cruise control

(Y page 169).

Tires

Display messages Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions

Tire pressure will be displayed after driving a few minutes

The tire pressure monitor is measuring the tire pressure.X Drive on.

The tire pressures appear in the multifunction display after youhave been driving for a few minutes.

Tire Press. Monitor Inoperative

The tire pressure monitor is faulty.X Visit a qualified specialist workshop.

Tire Pressure Monitor Inoperative No Wheel Sensors

The wheels mounted do not have a suitable tire pressure sensor.The tire pressure monitor is deactivated.X Mount wheels with suitable tire pressure sensors.

The tire pressure monitor is activated automatically after drivingfor a few minutes.

242 Display messagesOn

-boa

rd c

ompu

ter a

nd d

ispl

ays

Display messages Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions

Check Tires The tire pressure in one or more tires has dropped significantly.The wheel position is displayed in the multifunction display.A warning tone also sounds.

G WARNINGWith tire pressures which are too low, there is a risk of thefollowing hazards:Rthey may burst, especially as the load and vehicle speed

increase.Rthey may wear excessively and/or unevenly, which may greatly

impair tire traction.Rthe driving characteristics, as well as steering and braking, may

be greatly impaired.There is a risk of an accident.X Stop the vehicle without making any sudden steering or braking

maneuvers. Pay attention to the traffic conditions as you do so.X Secure the vehicle against rolling away (Y page 156).X If there is a flat tire, inspect the tires (Y page 304).X Check the tire pressure (Y page 325).X If necessary, correct the tire pressure.

Warning Tire Malfunction

The tire pressure in one or more tires has dropped suddenly. Thewheel position is shown in the multifunction display.

G WARNINGIf you drive with a flat tire, there is a risk of the following hazards:RA flat tire affects the ability to steer or brake the vehicle.RYou could lose control of the vehicle.RContinued driving with a flat tire will cause excessive heat build-

up and possibly a fire.There is a risk of an accident.X Stop the vehicle without making any sudden steering or braking

maneuvers. Pay attention to the traffic conditions as you do so.X Secure the vehicle against rolling away (Y page 156).X If there is a flat tire, inspect the tires (Y page 304).

Correct Tire Pressure

The tire pressure is too low in at least one of the tires, or the tirepressure difference between the wheels is too great.X Check the tire pressures at the next opportunity (Y page 325).X If necessary, correct the tire pressure.X Restart the tire pressure monitor (Y page 327).

Display messages 243

On-b

oard

com

pute

r and

dis

play

s

Z

Display messages Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions

TirePress. Sensor(s) Missing

There is no signal from the tire pressure sensor of one or severalwheels. The pressure of the affected tire is not displayed in themultifunction display.X Have the faulty tire pressure sensor replaced at a qualified

specialist workshop.

Tire Press. Monitor Currently Unavailable

Due to a source of radio interference, no signals can be receivedfrom the wheel sensors. The tire pressure monitor is temporarilymalfunctioning.X Drive on.

The tire pressure monitor restarts automatically as soon as theproblem has been solved.

hTire Pressure Warning Tire Failure

The tire pressure in one or more tires has dropped suddenly.A warning tone also sounds.

G WARNINGIf you drive with a flat tire, there is a risk of the following hazards:RA flat tire affects the ability to steer or brake the vehicle.RYou could lose control of the vehicle.RContinued driving with a flat tire will cause excessive heat build-

up and possibly a fire.There is a risk of an accident.

X Stop the vehicle without making any sudden steering or brakingmaneuvers. Pay attention to the traffic conditions as you do so.

X Secure the vehicle against rolling away (Y page 156).X If there is a flat tire, inspect the tires (Y page 304).

244 Display messagesOn

-boa

rd c

ompu

ter a

nd d

ispl

ays

Display messages Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions

hCheck Tire Pressure

The tire pressure in one or more tires has dropped significantly.

G WARNINGWith tire pressures which are too low, there is a risk of thefollowing hazards:Rthey may burst, especially as the load and vehicle speed

increase.Rthey may wear excessively and/or unevenly, which may greatly

impair tire traction.Rthe driving characteristics, as well as steering and braking, may

be greatly impaired.There is a risk of an accident.

X Stop the vehicle without making any sudden steering or brakingmaneuvers. Pay attention to the traffic conditions as you do so.

X Secure the vehicle against rolling away (Y page 156).X If there is a flat tire, inspect the tires (Y page 304).X Check the tire pressure (Y page 325).X If necessary, correct the tire pressure.

hCorrect Tire Pressure

The tire pressure is too low in at least one of the tires, or the tirepressure difference between the wheels is too great.X Check the tire pressures at the next opportunity (Y page 325).X If necessary, correct the tire pressure.

Vehicle

Display messages Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions

Shift to 'P' or 'N' to Start Engine

You have attempted to start the engine with the transmission inposition R or D.X Shift the transmission to position P or N.

Auxiliary Battery Malfunction

The auxiliary battery for the automatic transmission is no longerbeing charged.X Visit a qualified specialist workshop at the next opportunity.X Until then, set the automatic transmission to position P before

you switch off the engine.X Before leaving the vehicle, apply the parking brake.

Display messages 245

On-b

oard

com

pute

r and

dis

play

s

Z

Display messages Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions

A The rear door is open.

G WARNINGWhen the engine is running, exhaust gases can enter the vehicleinterior if the rear door is open.There is a risk of poisoning.X Close the rear door.

? The hood is open.

G WARNINGThe open hood may block your view when the vehicle is in motion.There is a risk of an accident.X Pull over and stop the vehicle safely as soon as possible, paying

attention to road and traffic conditions.X Secure the vehicle against rolling away (Y page 156).X Close the hood.

C At least one door is open.A warning tone also sounds.X Close all the doors.

DPower Steering Malfunction See Operator's Manual

The power steering is malfunctioning.A warning tone also sounds.

G WARNINGYou will need to use more force to steer.There is a risk of an accident.X Check whether you are able to apply the extra force required.X If you are able to steer safely: carefully drive on to a qualified

specialist workshop.X If you are unable to steer safely: do not drive on. Contact the

nearest qualified specialist workshop.

Phone No Service Your vehicle is outside the network provider's transmitter/receiver range.X Wait until the mobile phone operational readiness symbol

appears in the multifunction display.

¥Check Washer Fluid

The washer fluid level in the washer fluid reservoir has droppedbelow the minimum.X Add washer fluid (Y page 292).

246 Display messagesOn

-boa

rd c

ompu

ter a

nd d

ispl

ays

SmartKey

Display messages Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions

ÂKey Does Not Belong to Vehicle

You have put the wrong SmartKey in the ignition lock.X Use the correct SmartKey.

ÂTake Your Key from Ignition

The SmartKey is in the ignition lock.X Remove the SmartKey.

ÂObtain a New Key

The SmartKey needs to be replaced.X Visit a qualified specialist workshop.

Warning and indicator lamps in theinstrument cluster

Overview of warning and indicatorlamps

L Low-beamheadlamps(Y page 99)

#! Turn signals (Y page 103)K High-beam headlamps

(Y page 103)N Fog lamps (Y page 101)R Rear fog lamp (Y page 101)ü Seat belts (Y page 248)$ (USA) Brakes (Y page 249)J (Canada) Brakes (yellow)

(Y page 249)! ABS (Y page 250)÷ ESP®(Y page 252)å ESP® OFF (Y page 252)6 SRS (Y page 255); Check Engine (Y page 256)8 Reserve fuel (Y page 256)? Coolant (Y page 256)· Distance warning signal

(Y page 258)h Tire pressure monitor

(Y page 259)

Warning and indicator lamps in the instrument cluster 247

On-b

oard

com

pute

r and

dis

play

s

Z

Safety

Seat belts

Problem Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions

ü

After starting theengine, the red seatbelt warning lamp lightsup for six seconds.

The seat belt warning lamp reminds the driver and front passengerto fasten their seat belts.X Fasten your seat belt (Y page 50).

ü

After starting theengine, the red seatbelt warning lamp lightsup. In addition, awarning tone soundsfor up to six seconds.

The driver's seat belt is not fastened.X Fasten your seat belt (Y page 50).

The warning tone ceases.

ü

The red seat beltwarning lamp lights upafter the engine starts,as soon as the driver'sor the front-passengerdoor is closed.

The driver or front passenger has not fastened their seat belt.X Fasten your seat belt (Y page 50).

The warning lamp goes out.

There are objects on the front-passenger seat.X Remove the objects from the front-passenger seat and stow

them in a secure place.The warning lamp goes out.

ü

The red seat beltwarning lamp flashesand an intermittentaudible warningsounds.

The driver or front passenger has not fastened their seat belt. Inaddition, you are driving faster than 15 mph (25 km/h) or you havebriefly driven faster than 15 mph (25 km/h).X Fasten your seat belt (Y page 50).

The warning lamp goes out and the intermittent warning toneceases.

There are objects on the front-passenger seat. In addition, you aredriving faster than 15 mph (25 km/h) or you have briefly drivenfaster than 15 mph (25 km/h).X Remove the objects from the front-passenger seat and stow

them in a secure place.The warning lamp goes out and the intermittent warning toneceases.

248 Warning and indicator lamps in the instrument clusterOn

-boa

rd c

ompu

ter a

nd d

ispl

ays

Safety systems

Problem Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions

$ (USA only)J (Canada only)USA only: the redbrake system warninglamp is lit while theengine is running. Awarning tone alsosounds.Canada only: theyellow brake systemwarning lamp is lit whilethe engine is running. Awarning tone alsosounds.

G WARNINGThe brake boosting effect is malfunctioning and the brakingcharacteristics may be affected.There is a risk of an accident.X Pull over and stop the vehicle safely as soon as possible, paying

attention to road and traffic conditions. Do not continue drivingunder any circumstances.

X Secure the vehicle against rolling away (Y page 156).X Consult a qualified specialist workshop.X Observe the additional display messages in the multifunction

display.

$ (USA only)J (Canada only)USA only: the redbrake system warninglamp is lit while theengine is running. Awarning tone alsosounds.Canada only: theyellow brake systemwarning lamp is lit whilethe engine is running. Awarning tone alsosounds.

There is not enough brake fluid in the brake fluid reservoir.

G WARNINGThe braking effect may be impaired.There is a risk of an accident.X Pull over and stop the vehicle safely as soon as possible, paying

attention to road and traffic conditions. Do not continue drivingunder any circumstances.

X Secure the vehicle against rolling away (Y page 156).X Do not add brake fluid. Topping up will not remedy the

malfunction.X Consult a qualified specialist workshop.X Observe the additional display messages in the multifunction

display.

Warning and indicator lamps in the instrument cluster 249

On-b

oard

com

pute

r and

dis

play

s

Z

Problem Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions

!

The yellow ABS warninglamp is lit while theengine is running.

ABS (Anti-lock Brake System) is deactivated due to a malfunction.BAS (Brake Assist), ESP® (Electronic Stability Program), the HOLDfunction, hill start assist, the adaptive brake lights and ESP® trailerstabilization, for example, are therefore also deactivated.

G WARNINGThe brake system continues to function normally, but without thefunctions listed above. The wheels could therefore lock if youbrake hard, for example.The steerability and braking characteristics may be severelyaffected. The braking distance in an emergency braking situationcan increase.If ESP® is not operational, ESP® is unable to stabilize the vehicle.There is an increased risk of skidding and an accident.X Observe the additional display messages in the multifunction

display.X Drive on carefully.X Visit a qualified specialist workshop.If the ABS control unit is faulty, there is also a possibility that othersystems, such as the navigation system or the automatictransmission, will not be available.

250 Warning and indicator lamps in the instrument clusterOn

-boa

rd c

ompu

ter a

nd d

ispl

ays

Problem Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions

!

The yellow ABS warninglamp is lit while theengine is running.

ABS is temporarily unavailable. BAS, ESP®, EBD (electronic brakeforce distribution), the HOLD function, hill start assist, ESP® trailerstabilization and the adaptive brake lights, for example, aretherefore also deactivated.Possible causes are:RSelf-diagnosis is not yet complete.RThe on-board voltage may be insufficient.

G WARNINGThe brake system continues to function normally, but without thefunctions listed above. The front and rear wheels could thereforelock if you brake hard, for example.The steerability and braking characteristics may be severelyaffected. The braking distance in an emergency braking situationcan increase.If ESP® is not operational, ESP® is unable to stabilize the vehicle.There is a risk of an accident.X Carefully drive a suitable distance making slight steering

movements at a speed above 12 mph (20 km/h).The functions mentioned above are available again when thewarning lamp goes out.

If the warning lamp is still on:X Observe the additional display messages in the multifunction

display.X Drive on carefully.X Visit a qualified specialist workshop.

Warning and indicator lamps in the instrument cluster 251

On-b

oard

com

pute

r and

dis

play

s

Z

Problem Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions

!

The yellow ABS warninglamp is lit while theengine is running. Awarning tone alsosounds.

EBD is malfunctioning. Therefore, ABS, BAS, ESP®, the HOLDfunction, hill start assist, the adaptive brake lights and ESP® trailerstabilization are also not available, for example.

G WARNINGThe brake system continues to function normally, but without thefunctions listed above. The front and rear wheels could thereforelock if you brake hard, for example.The steerability and braking characteristics may be severelyaffected. The braking distance in an emergency braking situationcan increase.If ESP® is not operational, ESP® is unable to stabilize the vehicle.There is an increased risk of skidding and an accident.X Observe the additional display messages in the multifunction

display.X Drive on carefully.X Visit a qualified specialist workshop.

!

The yellow ABS warninglamp is lit while theengine is running.

You have engaged the differential locks. ABS is deactivated.X Disengage the differential locks.

Subsequently ABS is reactivated.

$ (USA only)J (Canada only)֌!

The yellow brakewarning lamp, theyellow ESP® andESP® OFF warninglamps and the yellowABS warning lamp arelit while the engine isrunning.

ABS and ESP® are malfunctioning. Therefore, BAS, EBD, the HOLDfunction, hill start assist, the adaptive brake lights and ESP® trailerstabilization, for example, are also not available.

G WARNINGThe brake system continues to function normally, but without thefunctions listed above. The front and rear wheels could thereforelock if you brake hard, for example.The steerability and braking characteristics may be severelyaffected. The braking distance in an emergency braking situationcan increase.If ESP® is not operational, ESP® is unable to stabilize the vehicle.There is an increased risk of skidding and an accident.X Observe the additional display messages in the multifunction

display.X Drive on carefully.X Visit a qualified specialist workshop.

252 Warning and indicator lamps in the instrument clusterOn

-boa

rd c

ompu

ter a

nd d

ispl

ays

Problem Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions

÷

The yellow ESP®

warning lamp flasheswhile the vehicle is inmotion.

ESP® or traction control has intervened because there is a risk ofskidding or at least one wheel has started to spin.Cruise control or DISTRONIC PLUS is deactivated.X When pulling away, only depress the accelerator pedal as far as

necessary.X Ease off the accelerator pedal while the vehicle is in motion.X Adapt your driving style to suit the road and weather conditions.X Do not deactivate ESP®.

For exceptions, see: (Y page 62).

å

The yellow ESP® OFFwarning lamp is lit whilethe engine is running.

ESP® is deactivated.

G WARNING

If ESP® is switched off, ESP® is unable to stabilize the vehicle.There is an increased risk of skidding and an accident.X Reactivate ESP®.

For exceptions, see: (Y page 62).X Adapt your driving style to suit the road and weather conditions.

If ESP® cannot be activated:X Have ESP® checked at a qualified specialist workshop.

֌

The yellow ESP® andESP® OFF warninglamps are lit while theengine is running.

ESP®, BAS, the HOLD function, hill start assist, the adaptive brakelights and ESP® trailer stabilization are not available due to amalfunction.

G WARNINGThe brake system continues to function normally, but without thefunctions listed above.The braking distance in an emergency braking situation can thusincrease.If ESP® is not operational, ESP® is unable to stabilize the vehicle.There is an increased risk of skidding and an accident.X Observe the additional display messages in the multifunction

display.X Drive on carefully.X Visit a qualified specialist workshop.

Warning and indicator lamps in the instrument cluster 253

On-b

oard

com

pute

r and

dis

play

s

Z

Problem Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions

֌

The yellow ESP® andESP® OFF warninglamps are lit while theengine is running.

ESP®, BAS, the HOLD function, hill start assist and ESP® trailerstabilization are temporarily unavailable.BAS and the adaptive brake lights may also have failed.Self-diagnosis is not yet complete.

G WARNINGThe brake system continues to function normally, but without thefunctions listed above.The braking distance in an emergency braking situation can thusincrease.If ESP® is not operational, ESP® is unable to stabilize the vehicle.There is an increased risk of skidding and an accident.X Carefully drive a suitable distance making slight steering

movements at a speed above 12 mph (20 km/h).The functions mentioned above are available again when thewarning lamp goes out.

If the warning lamp is still on:X Observe the additional display messages in the multifunction

display.X Drive on carefully.X Visit a qualified specialist workshop.

å

The yellow ESP® OFFwarning lamp is lit whilethe engine is running.

You have engaged the differential locks. ABS, ESP®, 4ETS and BAShave been deactivated.X Disengage the differential locks.

ESP®, 4ETS and BAS are subsequently reactivated.X Observe the additional display messages in the multifunction

display.

254 Warning and indicator lamps in the instrument clusterOn

-boa

rd c

ompu

ter a

nd d

ispl

ays

Problem Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions

(Canada only)(USA only)The red parking brakewarning lamp comes onwhile the vehicle ismoving. A warning tonealso sounds.

You are driving with the parking brake applied.X Release the parking brake.

The warning lamp goes out and the warning tone ceases.

6

The red SRS warninglamp is lit while theengine is running.

There is a malfunction in the SRS (Supplemental RestraintSystem).

G WARNINGThe air bags or Emergency Tensioning Devices may either betriggered unintentionally or, in the event of an accident, may notbe triggered.There is an increased risk of injury.X Drive on carefully.X Have SRS checked at a qualified specialist workshop

immediately.For further information about SRS, see (Y page 39).

Warning and indicator lamps in the instrument cluster 255

On-b

oard

com

pute

r and

dis

play

s

Z

Engine

Problem Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions

;

The yellow CheckEngine warning lamplights up while theengine is running.

There may be a malfunction, for example:Rin the engine managementRin the fuel injection systemRin the exhaust systemRin the ignition systemRin the fuel systemThe emission limit values may be exceeded and the engine maybe running in emergency mode.X Have the vehicle checked as soon as possible at a qualified

specialist workshop.

i In some states, you must immediately visit a qualifiedspecialist workshop as soon as the yellow Check Engine warninglamp lights up. This is due to the legal requirements in effect inthese states. If in doubt, check whether such legal regulationsapply in the state in which you are currently driving.

8

The yellow reserve fuelwarning lamp lights upwhile the engine isrunning.

The fuel level has dropped into the reserve range.X Refuel at the nearest gas station.

8

The yellow reserve fuelwarning lamp flasheswhile the vehicle is inmotion.In addition, the ;Check Engine warninglamp may light up.

The fuel system pressure is too low. The fuel filler cap is not closedcorrectly or the fuel system is leaking.X Check that the fuel filler cap is correctly closed.X If the fuel filler cap is not correctly closed: close the fuel filler

cap.X If the fuel filler cap is closed: visit a qualified specialist

workshop.

?

The red coolantwarning lamp lights upwhile the engine isrunning and the coolanttemperature gauge isat the start of the scale.

The temperature sensor for the coolant temperature gauge isdefective.The coolant temperature is no longer being monitored. There is arisk of engine damage if the coolant temperature is too high.X Pull over and stop the vehicle safely and switch off the engine,

paying attention to road and traffic conditions. Do not continuedriving under any circumstances.

X Apply the parking brake.X Consult a qualified specialist workshop.

256 Warning and indicator lamps in the instrument clusterOn

-boa

rd c

ompu

ter a

nd d

ispl

ays

Problem Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions

?

The red coolantwarning lamp comes onwhile the engine isrunning.

The coolant level is too low.

! Avoid making long journeys with too little coolant in the enginecooling system. The engine will otherwise be damaged.

If the coolant level is correct, the airflow to the engine radiatormay be blocked or the electric engine radiator fan may bemalfunctioning.The coolant is too hot and the engine is no longer being cooledsufficiently.X Observe the additional display messages in the multifunction

display.X Pull over and stop the vehicle safely and switch off the engine,

paying attention to road and traffic conditions.X Apply the parking brake.X Leave the vehicle and keep a safe distance from the vehicle until

the engine has cooled down.X Check the coolant level and add coolant, observing the warning

notes (Y page 291).X If you need to add coolant more often than usual, have the

engine coolant system checked.X Make sure that the air supply to the engine radiator is not

blocked, e.g. by snow, slush or ice.X Do not start the engine again until the coolant temperature is

below 248 ‡ (120 †). Otherwise, the engine could be damaged.X Drive to the nearest qualified specialist workshop.X Avoid subjecting the engine to heavy loads, e.g. driving in

mountainous terrain, and stop-start driving.

?

The red coolantwarning lamp comes onwhile the engine isrunning. A warning tonealso sounds.

The coolant temperature has exceeded 248 ‡ (120 †). Theairflow to the engine radiator may be blocked or the coolant levelmay be too low.

G WARNINGThe engine is not being cooled sufficiently and may be damaged.Do not drive when your engine is overheated. This can cause somefluids which may have leaked into the engine compartment tocatch fire.Steam from the overheated engine can also cause serious burnswhich can occur just by opening the hood.There is a risk of injury.

Warning and indicator lamps in the instrument cluster 257

On-b

oard

com

pute

r and

dis

play

s

Z

Problem Possible causes/consequences and M SolutionsX Observe the additional display messages in the multifunction

display.X Pull over and stop the vehicle safely and switch off the engine,

paying attention to road and traffic conditions.X Secure the vehicle against rolling away (Y page 156).X Leave the vehicle and keep a safe distance from the vehicle until

the engine has cooled down.X Check the coolant level and add coolant, observing the warning

notes (Y page 291).X If you need to add coolant more often than usual, have the

engine coolant system checked.X Make sure that the air supply to the engine radiator is not

blocked, e.g. by snow, slush or ice.X At coolant temperatures below 248 ‡ (120 †), drive to the next

qualified specialist workshop.X Avoid subjecting the engine to heavy loads, e.g. driving in

mountainous terrain, and stop-start driving.

Driving systems

Problem Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions

·

The red distancewarning lamp lights upwhile the vehicle is inmotion.

The distance to the vehicle in front is too small for the speedselected.X Increase the distance.

·

The red distancewarning lamp lights upwhile the vehicle is inmotion. A warning tonealso sounds.

You are approaching a vehicle or a stationary obstacle in your lineof travel at too high a speed.X Be prepared to brake immediately.X Pay careful attention to the traffic situation. You may have to

brake or take evasive action.Further information on DISTRONIC PLUS (Y page 177).

258 Warning and indicator lamps in the instrument clusterOn

-boa

rd c

ompu

ter a

nd d

ispl

ays

Tires

Problem Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions

h

USA only:The yellow tire pressuremonitor warning lamp(pressure loss/malfunction) is lit.Canada only:The yellow tire pressuremonitor warning lamp(pressure loss) is lit.

The tire pressure monitor has detected a loss of pressure in atleast one of the tires.

G WARNINGWith tire pressures which are too low, there is a risk of thefollowing hazards:Rthey may burst, especially as the load and vehicle speed

increase.Rthey may wear excessively and/or unevenly, which may greatly

impair tire traction.Rthe driving characteristics, as well as steering and braking, may

be greatly impaired.There is a risk of an accident.

X Stop the vehicle without making any sudden steering or brakingmaneuvers. Pay attention to the traffic conditions as you do so.

X Secure the vehicle against rolling away (Y page 156).X Observe the additional display messages in the multifunction

display.X If there is a flat tire, inspect the tires (Y page 304).X Check the tire pressure (Y page 325).X If necessary, correct the tire pressure.

h

USA only:The yellow tire pressuremonitor warning lamp(pressure loss/malfunction) flashes forapproximately oneminute and thenremains lit.

The tire pressure monitor is faulty.

G WARNINGThe system is possibly unable to recognize or register low tirepressure.There is a risk of an accident.X Observe the additional display messages in the multifunction

display.X Visit a qualified specialist workshop.

Warning and indicator lamps in the instrument cluster 259

On-b

oard

com

pute

r and

dis

play

s

Z

260

Useful information ............................ 262Loading guidelines ............................ 262Stowage areas .................................. 263Features ............................................. 268

261

Stow

age

and

feat

ures

Useful information

i This Operator's Manual describes allmodels and all standard and optionalequipment of your vehicle available at thetime of publication of the Operator'sManual. Country-specific differences arepossible. Please note that your vehicle maynot be equipped with all featuresdescribed. This also applies to safety-related systems and functions.

i Read the information on qualifiedspecialist workshops: (Y page 23).

Loading guidelines

G WARNINGAlways fasten items being carried as securelyas possible using cargo tie-down rings andfastening materials appropriate for the weightand size of the load.In an accident, during hard braking or suddenmaneuvers, loose items will be thrown aroundinside the vehicle. This can cause injury tovehicle occupants unless the items aresecurely fastened in the vehicle.To help avoid personal injury during a collisionor sudden maneuver, exercise care whentransporting cargo. Do not pile luggage orcargo higher than the seat backrests.Never drive a vehicle with the tailgate open.Deadly carbon monoxide (CO) gases mayenter vehicle interior resulting inunconsciousness and death.

The handling characteristics of a ladenvehicle are dependent on the distribution ofthe load within the vehicle. You shouldtherefore load your vehicle as shown in theillustrations.The gross vehicle weight (GVW) is the vehicleweight including fuel, vehicle tool kit, sparewheel, installed accessories, vehicleoccupants and luggage/cargo.The gross load limit and the gross vehicleweight rating (GVWR) for your vehicle mustnever be exceeded. The gross load limit andthe GVWR are specified on the vehicleidentification plate on the B-pillar of thedriver's door (Y page 349).The load must also be distributed so that theweight on each axle never exceeds the grossaxle weight rating (GAWR) for the front andrear axles. The specifications for GVWR andGAWR are on the vehicle identification plateon the B-pillar of the driver's door(Y page 349).Further information can be found in the"Loading the vehicle" section (Y page 328).Observe the following notes whentransporting a load:Rposition heavy loads as far forwards as

possible and as low down in the cargocompartment as possible.

i Transport loads when possible in thecargo compartment. You should only usethe cargo compartment enlargement if theload does not fit in the cargo compartment.Ralways place the load against the front or

rear seat backrests.

262 Loading guidelinesSt

owag

e an

d fe

atur

es

If the rear bench seat is not occupied:X Insert the belt tongue on the outer seat

belts into the buckle of opposite seatbelt :.

X Secure the load with sufficiently strong andwear-resistant tie downs.

X Pad sharp edges for protection.

Stowage areas

Stowage space

Important safety notes

G WARNINGTo help avoid personal injury during a collisionor sudden maneuver, exercise care whenstoring objects in the vehicle. Put luggage orcargo in the cargo compartment if possible.Do not pile luggage or cargo higher than theseat backrests.Keep compartment lids closed. This will helpto prevent stored objects from being thrownabout and injuring vehicle occupants duringRbrakingRvehicle maneuversRan accident

Stowage compartments in the front

Glove box

X To open: pull handle : and open glove boxflap ;.

X To close: fold glove box flap ; upwardsuntil it engages.

1 Glove box unlocked2 Glove box lockedX To lock:(Y page 70) insert the mechanical

key into the lock and turn it 90° clockwiseto position 2.

X To unlock:(Y page 70) insert themechanical key into the lock and turn it 90°counter-clockwise to position 1.

i The glove box can only be locked andunlocked using the mechanical key.

Stowage compartment/telephonecompartment under the armrest/in thecenter console

: Small stowage compartment; Release button for the armrest

Stowage areas 263

Stow

age

and

feat

ures

Z

Stowage compartment/telephonecompartment under the armrestX To open: press button ;.X Fold up armrest.i In the stowage compartment, there is a

stowage tray.X To close: fold the armrest down.

The armrest engages audibly.

Stowage space in the rear

Stowage pocketsG WARNINGStorage bags are intended for storing light-weight items only.Heavy objects, objects with sharp edges orfragile objects may not be transported in thestorage bag. In an accident, during hardbraking, or sudden maneuvers, they could bethrown around inside the vehicle and causeinjury to vehicle occupants.Storage bags cannot protect transportedgoods in the event of an accident.

The stowage pockets are located on the rearside of the front seats.

Stowage nets

G WARNINGStowage nets are only intended fortransporting light loads such as road maps,mail, etc.Do not use stowage nets to transport heavy,bulky, sharp-edged or fragile objects. In anaccident, during hard braking or during achange of direction, they could be thrownaround inside the vehicle and cause injury tovehicle occupants.Stowage nets cannot protect the transportedloads in the event of an accident.

The stowage net is in the front-passengerfootwell.

Cargo compartment enlargement

Important safety notes

G WARNINGAlways lock the seat backrest in its uprightposition when the rear seat bench isoccupied, or the extended cargo volume is notin use.Check for secure locking by pushing andpulling on the seat backrest.In an accident, during hard braking or suddenmaneuvers, loose items will be thrown aroundinside the vehicle. This can cause injury tovehicle occupants unless the items aresecurely fastened in the vehicle.To help avoid personal injury during a collisionor sudden maneuver, exercise care whentransporting cargo.

G WARNINGFailure to assure that the seat bench and seatbackrests are locked into place could resultin an increased chance of injury in anaccident.Never place hands under seat or near anymoving parts while a seat is being adjusted.For safety reasons, the rear seat bench mustonly be adjusted when the vehicle isstationary.Never drive a vehicle with the tailgate open.Deadly carbon monoxide (CO) gases mayenter vehicle interior resulting inunconsciousness and death.

! Ensure that you remove all containersfrom the cup holder in the rear beforefolding the seat backrest and the seatcushion of the rear bench seat forwards.

The rear bench seat is split symmetrically.The left-hand and right-hand rear seats canbe folded down to increase the cargocompartment capacity. The followingchanges are possible:Rfold the seat backrests forwardRfold the rear bench seat back fully.

264 Stowage areasSt

owag

e an

d fe

atur

es

Folding the seat backrest forward

To fold forward the seat backrests, proceedas follows:X Open the rear doors.

This allows you better access to releaselever :.

X Remove the center head restraint(Y page 88).

X Pull catch : in the direction of the arrow.The corresponding rear seat backrest is notengaged.

X Fold the backrest forwards.The rear seat backrest engages audibly.

; Backrest folded forward

Folding the seat backrest back! Make sure that the seat belt does not

become trapped when folding the rear seatbackrest back. Otherwise, it could bedamaged.

X Pull release lever :.The corresponding seat backrest isreleased.

X Fold backrest ; backwards in thedirection of the arrow.The seat catch engages audibly.

X Install the head restraint (Y page 88).

Rear bench seat

Seat backrest release lever

Seat backrest release lever: Long lever; Short leverX Remove the head restraints (Y page 88).X Pull short lever ; in the direction of the

arrow and hold it.X Pull long lever : in the direction of the

arrow and fold the seat backrest forwards.

Stowage areas 265

Stow

age

and

feat

ures

Z

Folding the rear bench seat forward

X Fold rear seat backrest (Y page 265)forwards.

X Pull catch : in the direction of the arrow.The corresponding rear bench seat isreleased.

X Fold rear bench seat ; forwards.

; Rear bench seat folded forward

Folding the rear bench seat into anupright positionG WARNINGMake sure that the rear bench seat and frontseat backrest are correctly engaged inposition.If the seat backrests or rear bench seat arenot fully engaged and the following occurs:Rsharp brakingRa sudden change of directionRan accidentthe seat backrests or rear bench seat may foldforwards and instead of being restrained bythe seats as intended you could be injured by

them. Occupants could then also be injuredin the event of an accident, e.g. by objectsbeing thrown forwards from the cargocompartment.

X Fold the rear bench seat back.The seat catch engages audibly.

X Fold the backrest backwards(Y page 265).

X Install the head restraints (Y page 88).

Securing cargo

Important safety notes

G WARNINGDistribute the load on the cargo tie down ringsevenly.Otherwise, vehicle occupants could beinjured by objects being thrown around if you:Rbrake sharplyRchange direction suddenlyRare involved in an accidentPlease observe the loading guidelines.

Observe the following notes on securingloads:Rsecure the load using the cargo tie-down

rings.Rdo not use elastic straps or nets to secure

a load, as these are only intended as ananti-slip protection for light loads.Rdo not route tie-downs across sharp edges

or corners.Rpad sharp edges for protection.Ronly use tie downs that have been checked

in accordance with applicable standards,e.g. lashing nets or lashing straps.Rfill the spaces between the load and the

cargo compartment walls and the wheelmountings in a form-locking way. Only usedimensionally stable transportation aidsfor this, such as chocks, wooden fixings orpadding.

266 Stowage areasSt

owag

e an

d fe

atur

es

Cargo tie-down rings in the cargocompartment

There are four cargo tie-down rings :mounted at the sides in the cargocompartment.

Cargo compartment cover

Important safety notes! When loading the vehicle, make sure that

you do not stack the load in the cargocompartment higher than the lower edge ofthe side windows. Do not place heavyobjects on top of the cargo compartmentcover.

The cargo compartment cover is locatedbehind the rear bench seat backrest.

Opening and closing the cargocompartment cover

X To open: pull cargo compartmentcover : back and clip it into the retainerson the left and right of the rear door.

X To close: unclip cargo compartmentcover : and guide it forwards until it iscompletely rolled up.

Installing/removing the cargocompartment cover

X To remove: make sure that cargocompartment cover ; is rolled up.

X Slide catches : on the left-hand and right-hand sides of cargo compartmentcover ; towards the center of the vehicle.

X Swing cargo compartment cover ; up andout.

X To install: slide catches : towards thecenter of the vehicle.

X Insert cargo compartment cover ; intothe recesses in the side trim.

X Push down the right-hand and left-handsides of cargo compartment cover ; untilit engages.

X Slide catches : in the direction of the sidetrim.

Roof carrier

G WARNINGDo not load items on the roof. It may causeinstability during some maneuvers whichcould result in an accident.

Stowage areas 267

Stow

age

and

feat

ures

Z

The roof is not suited for transporting loads.Never use roof rails or other accessoriesmounted on the roof.

Features

Cup holders

Important safety notes

G WARNINGIn order to help prevent spilling liquids onvehicle occupants and/or vehicle equipment,only use containers that fit into the cupholder. Use lids on open containers and donot fill containers to a height where thecontents, especially hot liquids, could spillduring braking, vehicle maneuvers, or in anaccident. Liquids spilled on vehicle occupantsmay cause serious personal injury. Liquidsspilled on vehicle equipment may causedamage not covered by the Mercedes-BenzLimited Warranty.When not in use, keep the cup holder closed.An open cup holder may cause injury to youor others when contacted during braking,vehicle maneuvers, or in an accident.Keep in mind that objects placed in the cupholder may come loose during braking,vehicle maneuvers, or in an accident and bethrown around in the vehicle interior. Objectsthrown around in the vehicle interior maycause an accident and/or serious personalinjury.

Cup holder on the center console

X Fold cup holder : all the way up.

Cup holders in the rear compartment! Ensure that you remove all containers

from the cup holder in the rear beforefolding the seat backrest and the seatcushion of the rear bench seat forwards.

: Cup holders

Sun visors

Overview of sun visors

G WARNINGDo not use the vanity mirror while driving.Keep the vanity mirrors in the sun visorsclosed while the vehicle is in motion.Reflected glare can endanger you and others.

: Sun visor; Bracket= Mirror cover? Mirror light

268 FeaturesSt

owag

e an

d fe

atur

es

Vanity mirror in the sun visor

: Sun visor; Bracket= Mirror cover? Mirror light

Mirror lights ? will only function if sunvisor : is clipped into bracket ;.X Fold down sun visor :.X Fold up mirror cover =.

Mirror lights ? are switched onautomatically.

Glare from the side

: Sun visor; Bracket= Mirror cover? Mirror lightX Fold down sun visor :.X Pull sun visor : from bracket ;.X Swing sun visor : to the side.

Stowage compartment/ashtray

Stowage compartment/ashtray in thecenter console

: Cover; Insert

i On new vehicles, insert ; is stored in theglove box. Install the insert before using theashtray.

X To open: press cover : and then releaseit.The ashtray opens.

X To remove the insert: make sure that theengine is switched off and that the parkingbrake has been applied to secure thevehicle against rolling away.

X Move the selector lever to N.X Press down cover :.

Insert ; is released.X Pull insert ; upwards and remove it.X To install the insert: install insert ; from

above.X Push insert ; down.

Insert ; audibly engages.X To close: close cover : fully.

i The ashtray is lit up if the low-beamheadlamps are on.

Features 269

Stow

age

and

feat

ures

Z

Ashtray in the rear compartment

X To open: fold cover ; out in the directionof the arrow.

X To remove the insert: press retaininglug : and pull insert = upwards and out.

X To install the insert: install insert = fromabove.

X To close: close cover ; fully.

Cigarette lighter

G WARNINGWhen leaving the vehicle, always remove theSmartKey from the ignition lock. Always takethe SmartKey with you and lock the vehicle.Do not leave children unattended in thevehicle, even if they are secured in a childrestraint system, or with access to anunlocked vehicle. A child's unsupervisedaccess to a vehicle could result in an accidentand/or serious personal injury. The childrencould:Rinjure themselves on parts of the vehicleRbe seriously or fatally injured through

excessive exposure to extreme heat or coldRinjure themselves or cause an accident with

vehicle equipment that can be operatedeven if the SmartKey is removed from theignition lock or removed from the vehicle,such as seat adjustment, steering wheeladjustment, or the memory function

If children open a door, they could injure otherpersons or get out of the vehicle and injurethemselves or be injured by following traffic.Do not expose the child restraint system todirect sunlight. The child restraint system'smetal parts, for example, could become veryhot, and the child could be burned on theseparts.

G WARNINGNever touch the heating element or sides ofthe lighter; they are extremely hot. Hold theknob only.Make sure any children traveling with you donot injure themselves or start a fire with thehot cigarette lighter.

! The 12 V socket in the cigarette lightercan be used for accessories (up to amaximum of 180 W), as long as they havethe standard socket type for cigarettelighters.Note that the socket in the cigarette lightercan be damaged when connectingaccessories, for example by:Rfrequent insertion and removalRsockets that do not fit correctlyA damaged socket can cause the cigarettelighter to stop working.

X Press in cigarette lighter :.Cigarette lighter : will pop outautomatically when the heating element isred-hot.

270 FeaturesSt

owag

e an

d fe

atur

es

12 V sockets

General notes! If you are simultaneously using all three

sockets in the vehicle, make sure that youdo not exceed the maximum current drawof 45 A. Otherwise, you will overload thefuses.

The sockets can be used for accessories witha maximum current draw of 180 W (15 A), e.g.lamps or chargers for mobile phones.If you use the sockets for long periods whenthe engine is switched off, the battery maydischarge.X Turn the SmartKey to position 2 in the

ignition lock.

Socket in the front-passenger footwell

X Lift up the cover of the socket.i The cigarette lighter socket can be also

used (Y page 270). This is the case even ifthe SmartKey has been removed from theignition lock.

Socket in the rear compartment

The socket is located on the center consolein the rear compartment.X Lift up the cover of the socket.

Socket in the cargo compartment

The socket is located in the cargocompartment on the left-hand side, whenviewed in the direction of travel, next to therear door.X Lift up the cover of the socket.

115 V socket

G WARNINGThe 115 V AC power socket operates on highvoltage. Use the 115 V AC power socket inthe vehicle with the same caution and carethat you would take with power sockets athome. Keep fluids away from the 115 V ACpower socket. Do not use liquids or sharptools to clean the power socket. Keep thecover of the 115 V AC power socket closed

Features 271

Stow

age

and

feat

ures

Z

when not in use. Otherwise, you could sufferan electric shock and be seriously or evenfatally injured.

G WARNINGAny device that you connect must have asuitable plug and meet U.S. standards. Neverpull at a cable to disconnect a plug from a115 V AC power socket. Never use a damagedconnection cable. The 115 V AC power socketmust never be connected to another 115 VAC power source. Do not use a converter withan earthed plug for the 115 V AC powersocket. This could cause serious injury to youand/or other people.

G WARNINGIf the 115 V AC power socket is damaged orpulled out of the trim, do not use or touch the115 V AC power socket. The use of a 115 VAC power socket that has been damaged orpulled out of the trim could cause seriousinjury to you or others.

115 V power socket : provides an ACvoltage of 115 V so that small electronicdevices can be connected. These devices,such as games consoles, chargers andlaptops, should not consume more than amaximum of 150 W altogether.

Requirements for operation of these devices:Rthe 12 V sockets in the rear compartment

and the cargo compartment areoperational (Y page 271).Rthe plug of the electronic device is plugged

into 115 V power socket :.Rthe on-board power supply is within a

permissible voltage range.Rthe electronic device's maximum power

output does not exceed 150 W.X Open flap =.X Switch on the ignition.X Insert the plug of the electronic device into

115 V power socket :.Indicator lamp ; lights up.If indicator lamp ; does not light up,please read the section on malfunctions.

X To turn off: disconnect the plug from115 V power socket :.Ensure that you do not pull on the cord.

X Close flap =.Possible causes of malfunctions:Rthe on-board power supply is not within a

permissible voltage range.Rthe temperature of the DC/AC converter is

temporarily too high.Rsome small electronic devices have a

constant nominal power of less than150 W, but a very high switch-on current.In that case, there is a possibility that thesedevices will not function properly as 115 Vsocket : is not able to provide a highenough current.

X If indicator lamp ; still does not light up,contact a qualified specialist workshop.

mbrace

Important safety notes! You must have a license agreement to

activate the mbrace service. Ensure thatyour system is activated and ready for use,

272 FeaturesSt

owag

e an

d fe

atur

es

and press the E MB Info call button toregister. If one of these steps is not carriedout, it may not be possible to activate thesystem.If you have questions about the activation,contact one of the following telephonehotlines:RUSA: Response Center at

1-888-990-9007RCanada: Customer Service at

1-888-923-8367USA only: shortly after successfullyregistering with the mbrace service a user IDand password will be sent to you by post. Youcan use this password to log onto the mbracearea under "Owners Online" at http://www.mbusa.com.The mbrace system is available if:Rit has been activated and is operational.

Activation requires an available mobilephone network, a valid SIM card and asubscription to a security service.Rthe battery is sufficiently charged.Rthe corresponding mobile phone network

is available for transmitting data to theCustomer Center.

i Determining the location of the vehicle ona map is only possible if there is sufficientGPS reception and the vehicle position canbe forwarded to the Customer Center.

The mbrace systemTo adjust the volume during an mbrace call,proceed as follows:X Press the W or X button on the

multifunction steering wheel.orX Use the COMAND volume control.The mbrace system provides three differentservices:Rautomatic and manual emergency callRRoadside Assistance callRMB Info call

USA only: you can find further informationand a description of all available featuresunder "Owners Online" at http://www.mbusa.com.

System self-test

G WARNINGA malfunction in the system has beendetected if one of the following conditionsoccurs:Rthe indicator lamp in the SOS button does

not light up during the system self-diagnosis.Rthe indicator lamp in the º Roadside

Assistance button does not light up duringthe system self-diagnosis.Rthe indicator lamp in the E information

button does not light up during the systemself-diagnosis.Rthe indicator lamp in the SOS button,º Roadside Assistance button or Einformation button continues to be lit redafter the system self-diagnosis.Rthe Tele Aid inoperative or Tele Aid not activated message appears on themultifunction display after the system self-diagnosis.

If a malfunction is indicated as outlined above,the system may not operate as expected. Inthe event of an emergency, assistance mustbe summoned by other means.Have the system checked at the nearestauthorized Mercedes-Benz Center or contactthe following service hotlines:RUSA: Response Center at

1-888-990-9007RCanada: Customer Service at

1-888-923-8367

After you have switched on the ignition, thesystem carries out a self-diagnosis.

Features 273

Stow

age

and

feat

ures

Z

Emergency call

Important safety notesG WARNINGIf the indicator lamp in the SOS button isflashing continuously and there was no voiceconnection to the Response Centerestablished, then the mbrace system couldnot initiate an emergency call (e.g. therelevant cellular phone network is notavailable).The message Call Failed appears in themultifunction display for approximately10 seconds.Should this occur, assistance must besummoned by other means.

! You must have a license agreement toactivate the mbrace service. Ensure thatyour system is activated and ready for use,and press the E MB Info call button toregister. If one of these steps is not carriedout, it may not be possible to activate thesystem.If you have questions about the activation,contact one of the following telephonehotlines:RUSA: Response Center at

1-888-990-9007RCanada: Customer Service at

1-888-923-8367An emergency call is dialed automatically ifan air bag or Emergency Tensioning Device istriggered.

i An automatically dialed mbraceemergency call cannot be canceled.

An emergency call can also be initiatedmanually.As soon as the emergency call has beeninitiated, the indicator lamp in the SOS buttonflashes. The Connecting Call messageappears on the multifunction display.COMAND is muted.

Once the connection has been made, theCall Connected message appears in themultifunction display.All important information on the emergencyis provided, for example:RCurrent location of the vehicle (as

determined by the GPS system)RVehicle modelRVehicle colorRVehicle identification numberA short time after the emergency call isinitiated, a voice connection is automaticallyestablished between the Response Centerand the vehicle occupants. If the vehicleoccupants are able to respond, the ResponseCenter will attempt to obtain more detailedinformation on the emergency.

i If there is no response from the vehicleoccupants, an ambulance is immediatelysent to the vehicle.

Making an emergency callG WARNINGIf you feel at any way in jeopardy when in thevehicle (e.g. smoke or fire in the vehicle,vehicle in a dangerous road location), pleasedo not wait for voice contact after you havepressed the SOS button. Carefully leave thevehicle and move to a safe location. TheResponse Center will automatically contactlocal emergency officials with the vehicle'sapproximate location if they receive anautomatic SOS signal and cannot make voicecontact with the vehicle occupants.

274 FeaturesSt

owag

e an

d fe

atur

es

X To initiate an emergency call manually: press cover : briefly to open.

X Press SOS button ; briefly.The indicator lamp in SOS button ;flashes until the emergency call isconcluded.

X Wait for the voice connection with theResponse Center.

X After the emergency call, close cover :.

Roadside Assistance button

X Open the stowage compartment under thearmrest (Y page 263).

X Press Roadside Assistance button : formore than two seconds.A call to a Mercedes-Benz RoadsideAssistance Representative is initiated.Indicator lamp ; in Roadside Assistancebutton : flashes while the call is active.The Connecting Call message appears inthe multifunction display and the COMANDsystem is muted.

If a connection can be made, the Call Connected message appears in themultifunction display.If a mobile phone network is available andthere is sufficient GPS reception, the mbracesystem transmits data to the ResponseCenter, for example:RCurrent location of the vehicleRVehicle identification number

RVehicle modelRVehicle color

i The COMAND display shows that anmbrace call is active. You can switch to thenavigation menu during the call by pressingthe NAVI button on COMAND. Voice outputis not available.

A voice connection is established betweenthe Mercedes-Benz Roadside AssistanceRepresentative and the vehicle occupants.The Mercedes-Benz Roadside AssistanceRepresentative either sends a qualifiedMercedes-Benz technician or makesarrangements for your vehicle to betransported to the nearest authorizedMercedes-Benz Center. You may be chargedfor services such as repair work and/ortowing. Further details are available in yourmbrace manual.X Describe the type of assistance needed.i If the indicator lamp in Roadside

Assistance button : is flashingcontinuously and no voice connection withthe Response center has been established,then the mbrace system has not been ableto initiate a Roadside Assistance call (e.g.the relevant mobile phone network is notavailable). The Call Failed messageappears in the multifunction display.

X To end a call: press the ~ button on themultifunction steering wheel.

orX Press the corresponding button for ending

a phone call on COMAND.

i Sign and drive services1: you are notcharged for services such as jump-starting,providing a few gallons of fuel for a fuel tankthat has been run dry or changing a faultytire with the vehicle's own spare wheel.

1 USA only.

Features 275

Stow

age

and

feat

ures

Z

MB Info call button

X Open the stowage compartment under thearmrest (Y page 263).

X Press Roadside Assistance button : formore than two seconds.A call to a Mercedes-Benz RoadsideAssistance Representative is initiated.Indicator lamp ; in Roadside Assistancebutton : flashes while the call is active.The Connecting Call message appears inthe multifunction display and the COMANDsystem is muted.

If a connection can be made, the Call Connected message appears in themultifunction display.If a mobile phone network is available andthere is sufficient GPS reception, the mbracesystem transmits data to the ResponseCenter, for example:RCurrent location of the vehicleRVehicle identification numberRVehicle modelRVehicle color

i The COMAND display shows that anmbrace call is active. You can switch to thenavigation menu during the call by pressingthe NAVI button on COMAND. Voice outputis not available.

A voice connection between the ResponseCenter and the vehicle occupants isestablished. You can obtain information onhow to operate your vehicle's systems, on the

location of the nearest authorized Mercedes-Benz Center, and on further products andservices offered by Mercedes-Benz USA.You can find further information on thembrace system at http://www.mbusa.com2 Log in under "OwnersOnline".

i If the indicator lamp in MB Info callbutton : is flashing continuously and novoice connection with the Response centerhas been established, then the mbracesystem has not been able to initiate an MBInfo call (e.g. the relevant mobile phonenetwork is not available). The Call Failed message appears in themultifunction display.

X To end a call: press the ~ button on themultifunction steering wheel.

orX Press the corresponding button for ending

a phone call on COMAND.

Call priorityWhen service calls are active, e.g. RoadsideAssistance or MB Info calls, an emergencycall can still be initiated. In this case, anemergency call has the highest priority andtakes precedence over all other active calls.The indicator lamp of the respective buttonflashes until the call is ended. An emergencycall can only be terminated by the ResponseCenter. All other calls can be ended bypressing the ~ button on themultifunction steering wheel or thecorresponding COMAND button for ending atelephone call.

i When an mbrace call has been initiated,COMAND is muted. The mobile phone is nolonger connected to COMAND. However, ifyou want to use your mobile phone, werecommend that you do this only when thevehicle is stationary and in a safe location.

2 USA only.

276 FeaturesSt

owag

e an

d fe

atur

es

Downloading destinations in COMANDDestination Download gives you access to adatabase with over ten million points ofinterest (POIs) which can be downloaded ontothe navigation system of your vehicle. If youknow the destination, you can download theaddress or obtain the location of points ofinterest (POIs) or important destinations inthe surrounding area.You are prompted to confirm route guidanceto the address entered.i Information on the components and

operating principles of the COMANDsystem can be found in the separateCOMAND operating instructions.

X Select Yes with the = or ; buttonon COMAND.

X Confirm with the 9 button on COMAND.

The system calculates the route andsubsequently starts the route guidance withthe address entered.

i If you select No, the address can be storedin the address book.

i The Destination Download function isavailable if the corresponding mobilephone network is available and datatransfer is possible.

Search & Send"Search & Send" is a destination entryservice. You can find further information on"Search & Send" in the separate COMANDoperating instructions.

Vehicle remote openingIf you have unintentionally locked yourvehicle (e.g. the SmartKey is inside thevehicle) and a replacement key is notavailable:X Contact the following service hotlines:

RUSA: Response Center at1-888-990-9007RCanada: Customer Service at

1-888-923-8367You will be asked for your password.

X Return to your vehicle at the time arrangedwith the Response Center.

X Press the release button on the door handleof the rear door for at least 20 seconds untilthe indicator lamp in the SOS button(Y page 274) flashes.The Connecting Call message appearson the multifunction display.

Alternatively, the vehicle can be opened viathe Internet in the "Owner's Online" sectionusing your identification number andpassword3.

i Vehicle remote opening is only possible ifthe corresponding mobile phone networkis accessible.The SOS button flashes and theConnecting Call message appears in themultifunction display to confirm that thecommand for vehicle remote unlocking hasbeen received.If the lock cylinder on the rear door ispressed for longer than 20 seconds beforereceiving authorization for remoteunlocking from the Response center, youmust wait 15 minutes before you can pressthe lock cylinder on the rear door again.

Vehicle remote closingThe remote closing feature can be used whenyou have forgotten to lock the vehicle and youare no longer nearby. The vehicle can then belocked by the Mercedes-Benz CustomerAssistance Center.The vehicle can be remotely locked withinfour days of the ignition being turned off.X Contact the following service hotlines:

3 USA only.

Features 277

Stow

age

and

feat

ures

Z

RUSA: Mercedes-Benz CustomerAssistance Center at 1-800-FOR-MERCedes (1-800-367-6372) or1-888-990-9007RCanada: Customer Service at

1-888-923-8367You will be asked for your PIN.

The next time you are inside the vehicle andyou switch on the ignition, the Tele Aid Doors Locked Remotely message appearsin the multifunction display.USA only: alternatively, the vehicle can belocked via:Rthe Internet, under the "Owners Online"

sectionRthe telephone application (e.g. iPhone®,

Blackberry)To do this, you will need your identificationnumber and password.

i The vehicle remote closing feature isavailable when the relevant mobile phonenetwork is available and data connection ispossible.

Stolen vehicle recovery serviceIf your vehicle has been stolen:X Contact the police.

The police will issue an incident report. Thisreport has a number.

X Forward this number to the ResponseCenter together with your PIN.The Response Center will then attempt tocovertly contact the mbrace system. TheResponse Center contacts you and thelocal law enforcement authority if thevehicle is located. However, only the lawenforcement agency is informed of thelocation of the vehicle.

i If the anti-theft alarm system is active forlonger than 30 seconds, mbrace isautomatically connected with theCustomer Assistance center.

Vehicle remote malfunction diagnosisWith the vehicle remote malfunctiondiagnosis (Vehicle Health Check), theCustomer Assistance center can provideimproved support for problems with yourvehicle. During an existing call, vehicle datais transferred to the Customer Assistancecenter. The customer service representativecan use the received data to decide what kindof assistance is required. You are then, forexample, guided to the nearest Mercedes-Benz Service center or a recovery vehicle iscalled.If vehicle data needs to be transferred duringan MB Info call or a Roadside Assistance call,this is initiated by the Customer Assistancecenter. You will see the Roadside Assistance Connected message in theCOMAND display. If the vehicle remotemalfunction diagnosis is able to be started,the Request for vehicle diagnosis received. Start vehicle diagnosis?message appears in the display.X Press Yes to confirm the message.X If the Vehicle Diagnosis: Please start ignition message appears: turnthe SmartKey to position 2 in the ignitionlock.

X If the Please follow the instructions received by phone and move your vehicle into a safe position message appears: follow theinstructions of the customer servicerepresentative.The message in the display disappears.If you select Cancel, the vehicle remotemalfunction diagnosis is canceledcompletely.The vehicle operating state check begins.Meanwhile, the Vehicle diagnosis activated message appears.

When the check is finished, the Sending vehicle diagnosis data... (Voice connection may be interrupted during data transfer) message appears.

278 FeaturesSt

owag

e an

d fe

atur

es

The vehicle data can now be sent to theCustomer Assistance center.X Press OK to confirm the message.

The voice connection with the CustomerAssistance center is terminated.The Vehicle Diagnosis: Transferring data... messageappears.The vehicle data is sent to the CustomerAssistance center.

Depending on what the customer servicerepresentative agreed with you, the voiceconnection is re-established after the transferis complete. If necessary, you will becontacted at a later time by another means,e.g. by e-mail or phone.Further functions of the vehicle remotemalfunction diagnosis include, for example:Rtransfer of service data to the Customer

Assistance center. If a service is overdue,the COMAND display shows a messageabout various special offers at yourworkshop.Rmonthly status information e-mail on oil

level, air pressure, maintenance, brakes,etc. If applicable, you will receiveinformation on special offers in the e-mail.USA only: this information can also becalled up under "Owners Online" at http://www.mbusa.com.

Information on the data stored in the vehicle(Y page 24).Information on Roadside Assistance(Y page 22).

Downloading routesDownloading routes allows you to transferand save predefined routes in the navigationsystem. To do this, an SD memory card mustbe inserted into the COMAND system. If noSD memory card is inserted, you must insertthe card into the card slot on the COMANDsystem before saving.A route can be prepared and sent either by acustomer service representative or via the

mbrace portal on the Internet. Each route caninclude up to 20 way points. When a route hasbeen received by the navigation system, the'Route name' has been saved to memory card. Do you want to start route guidance? message appears on theCOMAND display. The route is saved to theSD memory card.X To start route guidance: select Yes.

An overview of the route is shown in thedisplay.

i If you select No, the saved route can becalled up later in the navigation menu.

X Select Start.Route guidance is started.

i Downloaded and saved data can be calledup again in COMAND. Further informationcan be found in the "COMAND", "Onlineand Internet services" and "Downloaddestination/route" sections.

Speed alertYou can define the upper speed limit, whichmust not be exceeded by the vehicle. If thisselected speed is exceeded by the vehicle, amessage will be sent to the CustomerAssistance center. The Customer Assistancecenter then forwards this information to you.You can select the way in which you receivethis information beforehand. Possible optionsinclude text message, e-mail or an automatedcall.The data which is sent to the CustomerAssistance center contains the followinginformation:Rthe location where the speed limit was

exceededRthe time at which the speed limit was

exceededRthe selected speed limit which was

exceeded

Features 279

Stow

age

and

feat

ures

Z

Geo fencingGeo fencing allows you to select areas whichthe vehicle should not enter or leave. You willbe informed if the vehicle crosses theboundaries of the selected areas. You canselect the way in which you receive thisinformation beforehand. Possible optionsinclude text message, e-mail or an automatedcall.The area can be determined as either a circleor a polygon with a maximum of ten corners.You can specify up to ten areassimultaneously. Different settings arepossible for each area.USA only: these settings can be called upunder "Owners Online" at http://www.mbusa.com.Alternatively, you can trigger an MB Info calland inform the customer servicerepresentative that you wish to activate geofencing.Currently inactive areas can be activated bytext message.

Triggering the vehicle alarmWith this function, you can trigger thevehicle's panic alarm via text message. Analarm sounds and the exterior lightingflashes. Depending on the setting, the panicalarm lasts five or ten seconds. Afterwards,the alarm switches off.

Brush guard (USA only)

G WARNINGThe brush guard is designed solely to enhancethe appearance of the vehicle and helpprotect grille and headlamps from minormishaps, either on or off road.Since the safety characteristics are limited inthe event of an accident, brush guard are notintended to prevent injury or damage in theevent of an accident. Also observe state andlocal regulations on installation and use.

Raise and lower the brush guard in an openspace with plenty of room.

i If you wish to remove the brush guard,contact a qualified specialist workshop.

Garage door opener

Important safety notes

G WARNINGBefore programming the integrated remotecontrol to a garage door opener or gateoperator, make sure people and objects areout of the way of the device to preventpotential harm or damage. Whenprogramming a garage door opener, the doormoves up or down. When programming a gateoperator, the gate opens or closes.Do not use the integrated remote control withany garage door opener that lacks safety stopand reverse features as required by U.S.federal safety standards (this includes anygarage door opener model manufacturedbefore April 1, 1982). A garage door thatcannot detect an object - signaling the doorto stop and reverse - does not meet currentU.S. federal safety standards.When programming a garage door opener,park vehicle outside the garage.Do not run the engine while programming theintegrated remote control. Inhalation ofexhaust gas is hazardous to your health. Allexhaust gas contains carbon monoxide (CO),and inhaling it can cause unconsciousnessand possible death. All exhaust gas containscarbon monoxide (CO), and inhaling it cancause unconsciousness and possible death.

You can use the HomeLink® garage dooropener integrated into the rear-view mirror tooperate up to three different gate/garagedoor opener systems.

280 FeaturesSt

owag

e an

d fe

atur

es

i Certain garage door drives areincompatible with the integrated garagedoor opener. If you have difficultyprogramming the integrated garage dooropener, contact an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center. You can also contact thefollowing service hotlines:RUSA: Mercedes-Benz Customer

Assistance Center at1-800-FOR-MERCedesRCanada: Customer Service at

1-800-387-0100

i USA only:This device complies with Part 15 of theFCC Rules. Operation is subject to thefollowing two conditions:1. This device may not cause harmfulinterference, and2. this device must accept any interferencereceived, including interference that maycause undesired operation.Any unauthorized modification to thisdevice could void the user's authority tooperate the equipment.

i Canada only:This device complies with the RSS-210Rules of Industry Canada. Operation issubject to the following two conditions:1. This device may not cause harmfulinterference, and2. this device must accept any interferencereceived, including interference that maycause undesired operation of the device.Any unauthorized modification to thisdevice could void the user's authority tooperate the equipment.

Programming the remote control

ProgrammingG WARNINGOnly press the button on the integratedgarage door opener if there are no persons orobjects present within the sweep of the

garage door. Persons could otherwise beinjured as the door moves.

Integrated remote control in the rear-view mirror: Indicator lamp;=? Transmitter buttonsA Garage door remote controlB Transmitter button on the garage

door remote controlGarage door remote control A is not part ofthe garage door opener.i To achieve the best result, insert new

batteries in garage door remote controlA of your garage door drive beforeprogramming.

X Delete the memory of the integratedremote control (Y page 284) beforeprogramming it for the first time.

X Turn the SmartKey to position2(Y page 139) in the ignition lock.

X Press and hold transmitter button ;, =or ?.After a short time, indicator lamp : willstart flashing. It flashes approximatelyonce per second.

i Indicator lamp : flashes immediatelythe first time that the transmitter button isprogrammed. If this transmitter button hasalready been programmed, indicatorlamp : will only start flashing at a rate ofonce a second after 20 seconds haveelapsed.

X Continue to hold the transmitter button.

Features 281

Stow

age

and

feat

ures

Z

X Point transmitter button A of garage doorremote control B towards the transmitterbuttons on the rear-view mirror at adistance of 2 to 12 inches (5 to 30 cm).

i The distance between garage doorremote control A and the integratedgarage door opener depends on the systemof the garage door drive. Several attemptsmight be necessary. You should test everyposition for at least 20 seconds beforetrying another position.

X Keep transmitter button B on garage doorremote control A pressed until indicatorlamp : starts to flash rapidly.The programming has been successful ifindicator lamp : flashes rapidly.

X Release transmitter buttons ;, = or ?on the integrated remote control andtransmitter button B on the garage doorremote control.

If indicator lamp : goes out afterapproximately 20 seconds and has notflashed rapidly:X Release transmitter buttons ;, = or ?

on the integrated remote control andtransmitter button B on the garage doorremote control.

X Repeat the procedure for the othertransmitter buttons. When doing so, varythe distance between the garage door'sremote control and the transmitter buttonsin the rear-view mirror.

i If the garage door system works with arolling code, you must synchronize theremote control integrated in the rear-viewmirror with the garage door systemreceiver after programming.You will find further information in thegarage door opening system's operatinginstructions, e.g. the sections on"Synchronizing the transmitter" or"Registering a new transmitter". You canalso call the hotline mentioned above.

Synchronizing the rolling code

Integrated remote control in the rear-view mirror: Indicator lamp;=? Transmitter buttonsA Garage door remote controlB Transmitter button on the garage

door remote controlYour vehicle must be within reach of thegarage door or exterior gate drive. Make surethat neither your vehicle nor any persons/objects are present within the sweep of thedoor or gate.Observe the safety notes when performingthe rolling code synchronization(Y page 280).X Turn the SmartKey to position

2(Y page 139) in the ignition lock.X Press the programming button of the door

or gate drive (see the door or gate driveoperating instructions, e.g. under"Programming of additional remotecontrols").

i Usually, you now have 30 seconds toinitiate the next step.

X Press previously programmed button ;,= or ? of the integrated garage dooropener until the door closes.The rolling code synchronization is thencomplete.

Notes on programming the remotecontrolCanadian radio frequency laws require a"break" (or interruption) of the transmission

282 FeaturesSt

owag

e an

d fe

atur

es

signals after broadcasting for a few seconds.Therefore, these signals may not last longenough for the integrated remote control torecognize the signal during programming.Comparable with Canadian law, Americangarage door openers also have a built-in"interruption".If you live in Canada or have difficultiesprogramming the garage door opener(regardless of where you live) when using theprogramming steps, proceed as follows:

Integrated remote control in the rear-view mirror: Indicator lamp;=? Transmitter buttonsA Garage door remote controlB Transmitter button on the garage

door remote controlX Keep the transmitter button (;, = or ?)

depressed until the integrated remotecontrol has been set up successfully.

X At the same time, press transmitter buttonB of the garage door remote control fortwo seconds, then release it for twoseconds, then press it again for twoseconds.

X Repeat this sequence on transmitterbutton B of the garage door remotecontrol until the frequency signal has beensaved.

X If the setup procedure is successful,indicator lamp : flashes once slowly andgoes out after a few seconds.

X Continue with the other programmingsteps (see above).

Problems when programming

Integrated remote control in the rear-view mirror: Indicator lamp;=? Transmitter buttonsA Garage door remote controlB Transmitter button on the garage

door remote controlIf you have problems when programming theintegrated remote control, please note thefollowing:RCheck the transmitter frequency of garage

door remote control A (which can usuallybe found on the back of the remotecontrol).The integrated remote control iscompatible with devices that have unitswhich operate in the frequency range of280 to 390 MHz.RReplace the batteries in garage door

remote control A. This increases theprobability of garage door remote controlA sending a strong and more precisesignal to the integrated remote control onthe rear-view mirror.RWhen programming, hold garage door

remote control A at varying distances andangles from the transmitter button whichyou are programming. Try various angles ata distance between 2and 12 inches (5to30 cm) or at the same angle but at varyingdistances.RIf there is another garage door remote

control for the same device, perform theprogramming steps again using that garage

Features 283

Stow

age

and

feat

ures

Z

door opener. Before performing thesesteps, make sure that new batteries havebeen inserted in the garage door remotecontrol.RAlign the antenna cable of the garage door

opener unit. This can improve signalreception/transmission.

Opening/closing the garage door

: Indicator lamp;=? Transmitter buttonsA Garage door remote controlB Transmitter button on the garage

door remote controlOnce programmed, the integrated remotecontrol will assume the function of the garagedoor system's remote control. Please alsoread the operating instructions for the garagedoor system.X Turn the SmartKey to position

2(Y page 139) in the ignition lock.X Press transmitter button ;, = or ? on

the integrated remote control in the rear-view mirror that is programmed to operatethe garage door.Garage door system with fixed code:indicator lamp : lights up continuously.Garage door system with rolling code:indicator lamp : flashes briefly and thenlights up for approximately two seconds.This is repeated for up to 20 seconds.

i The transmitter will transmit a signal foras long as the transmitter button is beingpressed. The transmission will be halted

after a maximum of 20 seconds andindicator lamp : will flash. Press thetransmitter button again, if necessary.

Clearing the remote control memory

: Indicator lamp;=? Transmitter buttonsA Garage door remote controlB Transmitter button on the garage

door remote controlX Turn the SmartKey to position

2(Y page 139) in the ignition lock.X Press and hold transmitter buttons ;

and ? for approximately 20 seconds untilindicator lamp : flashes rapidly.The memory is cleared.

i You should clear the remote controlmemory before selling the vehicle.

Floormat on the driver's side

G WARNINGWhenever you are using a floormat, make surethere is enough clearance and that thefloormat is securely fastened.The floormat should always be securelyfastened using the fastening equipment.Before driving off, check that the floormat issecurely in place and adjust it if necessary. Aloose floormat could slip and hinder properfunctioning of the pedals.Do not place several floormats on top of eachother as this may impair pedal movement.

284 FeaturesSt

owag

e an

d fe

atur

es

X Slide the seat backwards.X To install: place the floormat in the

footwell.X Press studs : onto retainers ;.X To remove: pull the floormat out of

retainers ;.X Remove the floormat.

Features 285

Stow

age

and

feat

ures

Z

286

Useful information ............................ 288Engine compartment ........................ 288Maintenance ...................................... 293Care .................................................... 294

287

Mai

nten

ance

and

car

e

Useful information

i This Operator's Manual describes allmodels and all standard and optionalequipment of your vehicle available at thetime of publication of the Operator'sManual. Country-specific differences arepossible. Please note that your vehicle maynot be equipped with all featuresdescribed. This also applies to safety-related systems and functions.

i Read the information on qualifiedspecialist workshops: (Y page 23).

Engine compartment

Hood

Important safety notes

G WARNINGDo not pull the release lever while the vehicleis in motion. Otherwise, the hood could beforced open by passing air flow.This could cause the hood to come loose andinjure you and/or others.

G WARNINGDo not open the hood when the engine isoverheated. You could be seriously injured.Observe the coolant temperature gauge todetermine whether the engine may beoverheated. If you see flames or smokecoming from the engine compartment, moveaway from the vehicle. Wait until the enginehas cooled. If necessary, call the firedepartment.

G WARNINGYou could be injured when the hood is open –even when the engine is turned off.Parts of the engine can become very hot. Toprevent burns, let the engine cool completelybefore touching any components on thevehicle. Comply with all relevant safetyprecautions.

G WARNINGTo avoid injury, stay clear of moving partswhen the hood is open and the engine isrunning.The radiator fan may continue to run forapproximately 30seconds or may even restartafter the engine has been switched off. Forthis reason, you must not reach into the fanrotation area.

G WARNINGThe engine is equipped with a transistorizedignition system. Because of the high voltage,it is dangerous to touch any components(ignition coils, spark plug sockets, diagnosticsocket) of the ignition system:Rwith the engine runningRwhile starting the engineRwhen the ignition is switched on and the

engine is turned manually

G WARNINGThe windshield wipers and wiper linkagecould be set in motion.When the hood is open, you or others couldbe injured by the wiper linkage.Make sure that the windshield wipers areswitched off and that the SmartKey has beenpulled out of the ignition lock before openingthe hood.

! Make sure that the windshield wipers arenot folded away from the windshield. Youcould otherwise damage the windshieldwipers or the hood.

288 Engine compartmentM

aint

enan

ce a

nd c

are

Opening the hood

The release lever on the hood is in the footwellon the left-hand side of the vehicle whenviewed in the direction of travel.X Make sure that the windshield wipers are

turned off.X Pull release lever : on the hood.

The hood is released.

X Lift the hood slightly.X Push hood catch handle ; in the direction

of the arrow and lift the hood.

Closing the hood

G WARNINGWhen closing the hood, use extreme cautionnot to catch hands or fingers. Be careful thatyou do not close the hood on anyone.Make sure the hood is securely engagedbefore driving off. Do not continue driving ifthe hood can no longer engage after anaccident, for example. The hood could

otherwise come loose while the vehicle is inmotion and injure you and/or others.

X Lower the hood and let it drop shut from aheight of approximately 8 in. (20 cm).

X Check that the hood has engaged properly.If the hood can be raised slightly, it is notproperly engaged. Open it again and closeit with a little more force.

Engine oil

Notes on the oil levelDepending on the driving style, the vehicleconsumes up to 0.9 US qt (0.8 l) of oil over adistance of 600 miles (1000 km). The oilconsumption may be higher than this whenthe vehicle is new or if you frequently drive athigh engine speeds.

Checking the oil level using the oildipstick

Example: oil dipstick

When checking the oil level:Rpark the vehicle on a level surface.Rthe engine should be switched off for

approximately five minutes if the engine isat normal operating temperature.Rthe engine should be switched off for at

least 30 minutes if the engine is not atoperating temperature (i.e. if you only startthe engine briefly).

Engine compartment 289

Mai

nten

ance

and

car

e

Z

X Pull oil dipstick : out of the dipstick guidetube.

X Wipe off oil dipstick :.X Slowly slide oil dipstick : into the guide

tube to the stop, and take it out again.The oil level is correct if the level is betweenMIN mark = and MAX mark ;.

X Add oil if necessary.

Checking the oil level using the on-board computer! Do not add too much oil. adding too much

engine oil can result in damage to theengine or to the catalytic converter. Haveexcess engine oil siphoned off.

G 65 AMG: the oil level can be checked usingthe on-board computer only.On all other models, the oil dipstick must beused to check the engine oil level.When checking the oil level:Rpark the vehicle on a level surface.Rthe engine should be switched off for

approximately five minutes if the engine isat normal operating temperature.

X Make sure that the SmartKey is in position2 in the ignition lock.

X Press the & or * button on thesteering wheel to select the followingmessage:

The measurement takes a few seconds. Youwill see one of the following messages in themultifunction display:REngine Oil Level OKRAdd 1.0 qt (Canada: 1.0 liter) to reach maximum oil level.

RAdd 1.5 qts (Canada: 1.5 liters) to reach maximum oil level.RAdd 2.0 qts. (Canada: 2.0 liters) to reach maximum oil level.

X Add oil if necessary.If the engine is at normal operatingtemperature and the Engine Oil Reduce Oil Level message appears, the engine oillevel is too high.X Have excess oil siphoned off.If the Switch ignition on to check engine oil level message appears:X Turn the SmartKey to position 2 in the

ignition lock (Y page 139).If the Observe Waiting Time messageappears:X If the engine is at normal operating

temperature: repeat the measurementafter about five minutes.

X If the engine is not at normal operating temperature: (e.g. if the engine was onlystarted briefly) repeat the measurementafter about 30 minutes.

If the Engine Oil level Not With Engine On message appears:X Switch off the engine.X If the engine is at normal operating

temperature: wait about five minutesbefore carrying out the measurement.

X If the engine is not at normal operating temperature: e.g. if the engine was onlystarted briefly, wait approximately30 minutes before carrying out themeasurement.

i If you wish to cancel the measurement,press the * or & button on themultifunction steering wheel.

290 Engine compartmentM

aint

enan

ce a

nd c

are

Adding engine oil

H Environmental noteWhen adding oil, take care not to spill any. Ifoil enters the soil or waterways, it is harmfulto the environment.

! Only use engine oils and oil filters thathave been approved for vehicles with aservice system. You can obtain a list of theengine oils and oil filters tested andapproved in accordance with theMercedes-Benz Specifications for ServiceProducts at any Mercedes-Benz Servicecenter.Damage to the engine or exhaust system iscaused by the following:Rusing engine oils and oil filters that have

not been specifically approved for theservice systemRreplacing engine oil and oil filters after

the interval for replacement specified bythe service system has been exceededRusing engine oil additives.

! Do not add too much oil. If the oil level isabove the "max" mark on the dipstick, toomuch oil has been added. This can lead todamage to the engine or the catalyticconverter. Have excess oil siphoned off.

Example: engine oil capX Turn cap : counter-clockwise and remove

it.X Add the amount of oil required.

Observe the specifications in the on-boardcomputer when doing so or fill carefully to themaximum mark on the oil dipstick.Further information on engine oil(Y page 353).i The difference between the minimum

mark and the maximum mark on the oildipstick is approximately 2.1 US qt (2 l).

X Replace cap : on the filler neck andtighten clockwise.Ensure that the cap locks into placesecurely.

Additional service products

Checking the coolant level

G WARNINGIn order to avoid potentially serious burns:Ruse extreme caution when opening the

hood if there are any signs of vapor orcoolant leaking from the cooling system, orif the coolant temperature display indicatesthat the coolant is overheated.Rdo not remove the pressure cap on the

coolant tank if the coolant temperature isabove 158 ‡ (70 †). Allow the engine tocool down before removing the cap. Thecoolant tank contains hot fluid and is underpressure.Rusing a cloth, slowly turn the cap

approximately Ö turn to relieve excesspressure. If you open the cap immediately,pressurized scalding hot fluid and vapor willbe blown out.Rdo not spill antifreeze on hot engine parts.

Antifreeze contains ethylene glycol whichmay burn if it comes into contact with hotengine parts.

Engine compartment 291

Mai

nten

ance

and

car

e

Z

X Park the vehicle on a level surface.Only check the coolant level when thevehicle is on a level surface and the enginehas cooled down.

X Turn the SmartKey to position2 (Y page 139) in the ignition lock.

X Check the coolant temperature display inthe instrument cluster.The coolant temperature must be below158 ‡ (70 †).

X Slowly turn cap : half a turn counter-clockwise to allow excess pressure toescape.

X Turn cap : further counter-clockwise andremove it.If the coolant is at the level of marker bar= in the filler neck when cold, there isenough coolant in coolant expansiontank ;.If the coolant level is approximately 0.6 in(1.5 cm) above marker bar = in the fillerneck when warm, there is enough coolantin coolant expansion tank ;.

X If necessary, add coolant that has beentested and approved by Mercedes-Benz.

X Replace cap : and turn it clockwise as faras it will go.

For further information on coolant, see(Y page 354).

Adding washer fluid to the windshieldwasher system/headlamp cleaningsystem

G WARNINGWasher solvent/antifreeze is highlyflammable. Do not spill washer solvent/antifreeze on hot engine parts, because it mayignite and burn. You could be seriouslyburned.

Example: washer fluid reservoirX To open: pull cap : upwards by the tab.X Add the premixed washer fluid.X To close: press cap : onto the filler neck

until it engages.Further information on windshield washerfluid/antifreeze (Y page 356).

Brake fluid level! If you notice that the brake fluid level in

the brake fluid reservoir has fallen to theMIN mark or less, check the brake systemimmediately for leaks. Also check thethickness of the brake linings. Visit aqualified specialist workshop immediately.Do not add brake fluid. This does notcorrect the error.

292 Engine compartmentM

aint

enan

ce a

nd c

are

Only check the brake fluid level when thevehicle is on a level surface.If the brake fluid level is between MINmark : and MAX mark ; on the brake fluidreservoir, it is correct.

Maintenance

Service interval display

Service messagesInformation on the type of service and serviceintervals (see the separate MaintenanceBooklet).You can obtain further information from anauthorized Mercedes-Benz Center or athttp://www.mbusa.com (USA only).The ASSYST service interval display informsyou of the next service due date.If a service due date has been exceeded, youalso hear a warning tone.The multifunction display shows a servicemessage for several seconds, e.g.:Service A in 99999 MilesService A Due NowService A Exceeded By 99999 Miles

Maintaining the time-dependent serviceschedule:X Before disconnecting the battery, note

down the service due date displayed.or:X After reconnecting the battery, subtract

the battery disconnection periods from theservice date shown on the display.

i The service interval display should not beconfused with the 4 engine oil leveldisplay.

The symbol and the letter indicate which typeof service is due:¯ Minor service A± Major service BThe ASSYST service interval display does nottake into account any periods of time duringwhich the battery is disconnected.

Hiding a service messageX To hide the service message, press the% back button on the multifunctionsteering wheel (Y page 31)(Y page 211).

Displaying service messagesUse the buttons on the multifunction steeringwheel.X Switch on the ignition.X Press V or U to select the standard

display menu on the steering wheel(Y page 212).

X Select & or * to select the serviceinterval display.The ¯ or ± service symbol and theservice due date are displayed.

Points to noteArduous operating conditions or increasedloads on the vehicle will require some servicework to be performed more often than for avehicle in normal use. Such arduousconditions include regular city driving withfrequent intermediate stops and use in

Maintenance 293

Mai

nten

ance

and

car

e

Z

mountainous terrain or on poor roadsurfaces.For example, if the vehicle is used underarduous operating conditions, have air filters,engine oil and oil filters changed frequentlyand check the wheels often. Furtherinformation can be obtained at a qualifiedspecialist workshop, e.g. an authorizedMercedes-Benz Center.

Fuel/water separator

H Environmental noteDispose of service products in anenvironmentally responsible manner.

! If you continue driving without having thefuel/water separator serviced, this couldcause damage to the engine. Any resultingdamage is not covered by the warranty.

If the fuel/water separator needs servicing,the following message appears in themultifunction display:

You will also hear a brief warning tone.X Visit a qualified specialist workshop as

soon as possible.

Care

General notesRegular care of your vehicle is a condition forretaining the quality in the long term.Use care products and cleaning agentsrecommended and approved by Mercedes-Benz.

G WARNINGMany cleaning products can be hazardous.Some are poisonous, others are flammable.Always follow the instructions on theparticular container. Always open yourvehicle's doors or windows when cleaning theinside.Never use fluids or solvents that are notdesigned for cleaning your vehicle.Always lock away cleaning products and keepthem out of reach of children.

! For cleaning your vehicle, do not use anyof the following:Rdry, rough or hard clothsRabrasive cleaning agentsRsolventsRcleaning agents containing solventsDo not scrub.Do not touch the surfaces or protectivefilms with hard objects, e.g. a ring or icescraper. You could otherwise scratch ordamage the surfaces and protective film.

H Environmental noteDispose of empty packaging and cleaningcloths in an environmentally responsiblemanner.

! Do not park the vehicle for an extendedperiod straight after cleaning it, particularlyafter having cleaned the wheels with wheelcleaner. Wheel cleaners could causeincreased corrosion of the brake discs andbrake pads/linings. For this reason, youshould drive for a few minutes aftercleaning. Braking heats the brake discs andthe brake pads/linings, thus drying them.The vehicle can then be parked.

294 CareM

aint

enan

ce a

nd c

are

Exterior care

Automatic car wash

G WARNINGBraking efficiency is reduced after washingthe vehicle. This could cause an accident. Forthis reason, you must drive particularlycarefully after washing the vehicle until thebrakes have dried.

! Never clean your vehicle in a TouchlessAutomatic Car Wash as these use specialcleaning agents. These cleaning agents candamage the paintwork or plastic parts.

! Make sure that the automatic car wash issuitable for the size of the vehicle. Fold inthe exterior mirrors before the vehicle iswashed. The exterior mirrors couldotherwise be damaged.

! Make sure that the automatictransmission is in position N when washingyour vehicle in a tow-through car wash. Thevehicle could be damaged if thetransmission is in another position.

! Make sure that:Rthe side windows and sliding sunroof are

closed completely.Rthe blower for the ventilation/heating is

switched off (airflow control is turned toposition 0/the à and Á buttonsare switched off).Rthe windshield wiper switch is at position

0.The vehicle could otherwise be damaged.

You can wash the vehicle in an automatic carwash from the very start.If the vehicle is very dirty, pre-wash it beforecleaning it in an automatic car wash.After using an automatic car wash, wipe offwax from the windshield and the wiperblades. This will prevent smears and reducewiping noises caused by residue on thewindshield.

Washing by handIn some countries, washing by hand is onlyallowed at specially equipped washing bays.Observe the legal requirements in allcountries concerned.When using the vehicle in winter, remove alltraces of road salt deposits carefully and assoon as possible.When washing the vehicle underbody, alsoclean the inside of the wheels.X Do not use hot water and do not wash the

vehicle in direct sunlight.X Use a soft sponge to clean.X Use a mild cleaning agent, such as a car

shampoo approved by Mercedes-Benz.X Thoroughly hose down the vehicle with a

gentle jet of water.X Do not point the water jet directly towards

the air inlets.X Use plenty of water and rinse out the

sponge frequently.X Rinse the vehicle with clean water and dry

thoroughly with a chamois.X Do not let the cleaning agent dry on the

paintwork.

Power washers

G WARNINGDo not use power washers with circular jetnozzles (concentrated-power jets) to cleanyour vehicle, especially for cleaning tires. Youcould otherwise damage the tires and causean accident.

! Always maintain a distance of at least11.8 in (30 cm) between the vehicle and thepower washer nozzle. Information aboutthe correct distance is available from theequipment manufacturer.Move the power washer nozzle aroundwhen cleaning your vehicle.

Care 295

Mai

nten

ance

and

car

e

Z

Do not aim directly at any of the following:RtiresRdoor gaps, roof gaps, joints, etc.Relectrical componentsRbatteryRconnectorsRlightsRsealsRtrimRventilation slotsDamaged seals or electrical componentscan lead to leaks or failures.

Cleaning the wheels! Do not use acidic wheel cleaning products

to remove brake dust. This could damagewheel bolts and brake components.

! Do not park the vehicle for an extendedperiod straight after cleaning it, particularlyafter having cleaned the wheels with wheelcleaner. Wheel cleaners could causeincreased corrosion of the brake discs andbrake pads/linings. For this reason, youshould drive for a few minutes aftercleaning. Braking heats the brake discs andthe brake pads/linings, thus drying them.The vehicle can then be parked.

Cleaning the paintwork! Do not affix:RstickersRfilmsRmagnetic plates or similar itemsto painted surfaces. You could otherwisedamage the paintwork.

Scratches, corrosive deposits, areas affectedby corrosion and damage caused byinadequate care cannot always be completelyrepaired. In such cases, visit a qualifiedspecialist workshop.

X Remove dirt immediately, where possible,while avoiding rubbing too hard.

X Soak insect remains with insect removerand rinse off the treated areas afterwards.

X Soak bird droppings with water and rinseoff the treated areas afterwards.

X Remove coolant, brake fluid, tree resin,oils, fuels and greases by rubbing gentlywith a cloth soaked in petroleum ether orlighter fluid.

X Use tar remover to remove tar stains.X Use silicone remover to remove wax.If water no longer forms "beads" on the paintsurface, use the paint care productsrecommended and approved by Mercedes-Benz. This is the case approximately everythree to five months, depending on theclimate conditions and the care product used.If dirt has penetrated the paint surface or ifthe paint has become dull, the paint cleanerrecommended and approved by Mercedes-Benz should be used.Do not use these care products in the sun oron the hood while the hood is hot.X Use a suitable touch-up stick, e.g. MB

Touch-Up Stick, to correct smaller areas ofpaint damage quickly and provisionally.

Matte finish care! Never polish the vehicle or the light alloy

wheels. Polishing causes the finish toshine.

! Never use paint cleaner, buffing orpolishing products, or gloss preserver, e.g.wax. These products are only suitable forhigh-gloss surfaces. Their use on vehicleswith matte finish leads to considerablesurface damage (shiny, spotted areas).Always have paintwork repairs carried outat a qualified specialist workshop.

! Do not use wash programs with a hot waxtreatment under any circumstances.

296 CareM

aint

enan

ce a

nd c

are

If your vehicle has a clear matte finish,observe the following instructions in order toavoid damage to the paintwork due toincorrect care.These notes also apply to light alloy wheelswith a clear matte finish.

i The vehicle should preferably be washedby hand using a soft sponge, car shampooand plenty of water.

i Use only insect remover and car shampoofrom the range of recommended andapproved Mercedes-Benz care products.

Cleaning the windows

G WARNINGSwitch off the windshield wipers and removethe SmartKey from the ignition lock beforecleaning the windshield or the wiper blades.The windshield wipers could otherwise moveand injure you.

! Do not use dry cloths, abrasive products,solvents or cleaning agents containingsolvents to clean the inside of the windows.Do not touch the insides of the windowswith hard objects, e.g. an ice scraper orring. There is otherwise a risk of damagingthe windows.

! Clean the water drainage channels of thewindshield and the rear window at regularintervals. Deposits such as leaves, petalsand pollen may under certaincircumstances prevent water from drainingaway. This can lead to corrosion damageand damage to electronic components.

X Clean the inside and outside of thewindows with a damp cloth and a cleaningagent that is recommended and approvedby Mercedes-Benz.

Cleaning the wiper blades

G WARNINGSwitch off the windshield wipers and removethe SmartKey from the ignition lock beforecleaning the windshield or the wiper blades.The windshield wipers could otherwise moveand injure you.

! Do not pull the wiper blade. Otherwise,the wiper blade could be damaged.

! Do not clean wiper blades too often anddo not rub them too hard. Otherwise, thegraphite coating could be damaged. Thiscould cause wiper noise.

! Hold the wiper arm securely when foldingback. The windshield could be damaged ifthe wiper arm smacks against it suddenly.

X Fold the windshield wiper arms away fromthe windshield.

X Carefully clean the wiper blades with adamp cloth.

X Fold the windshield wiper arms back againbefore switching on the ignition.

Cleaning the headlamps! Only use cleaning agents or cleaning

cloths which are suitable for plasticheadlamp lenses. Unsuitable cleaningagents or cleaning cloths could scratch ordamage the plastic headlamp lenses.

X Clean the headlamp lenses with a dampsponge and a mild cleaning agent, e.g.Mercedes-Benz car shampoo or cleaningcloths.

Cleaning the sensors! If you clean the sensors with a power

washer, make sure that you keep adistance of at least 11.8 in (30 cm) betweenthe vehicle and the power washer nozzle.Information about the correct distance isavailable from the equipmentmanufacturer.

Care 297

Mai

nten

ance

and

car

e

Z

X Clean sensors : of the driving systemswith water, car shampoo and a soft cloth.

Cleaning the rear view camera! Do not clean the camera lens and the area

around the rear view camera with a powerwasher.

X Use clear water and a soft cloth to cleancamera lens :.

Cleaning chrome parts! Do not clean the exhaust pipe with acid-

based cleaning agents such as sanitarycleansers or wheel cleaners.

Impurities combined with the effects of roadgrit and corrosive environmental factors maycause flash rust to form on the surface. Youcan restore the original shine of the chromeparts by cleaning them regularly, especially inwinter and after washing.X Clean the chrome parts with a chrome care

product tested and approved by Mercedes-Benz.

Interior care

Cleaning the display! For cleaning, do not use any of the

following:Ralcohol-based thinner or gasolineRabrasive cleaning agentsRcommercially-available household

cleaning agentsThese may damage the display surface. Donot put pressure on the display surfacewhen cleaning. This could lead toirreparable damage to the display.

X Before cleaning the display, make sure thatit is switched off and has cooled down.

X Clean the display surface using acommercially available microfiber clothand TFT/LCD display cleaner.

X Dry the display surface using a drymicrofiber cloth.

Cleaning the plastic trim

G WARNINGWhen cleaning the steering wheel boss anddashboard, do not use cockpit sprays orcleaning agents containing solvents. Cleaningagents containing solvents cause the surfaceto become porous, and as a result, plastic

298 CareM

aint

enan

ce a

nd c

are

parts may break away and be thrown aroundthe interior when an air bag is deployed, whichmay result in severe injuries.

! Do not affix the following to plasticsurfaces:RstickersRfilmsRscented oil bottles or similar itemsYou can otherwise damage the plastic.

! Do not allow cosmetics, insect repellentor sunscreen to come into contact with theplastic trim. This maintains the high-qualitylook of the surfaces.

X Wipe the plastic trim with a damp, lint-freecloth, e.g. a microfiber cloth.

X Heavy soiling: use car care and cleaningproducts recommended and approved byMercedes-Benz.The surface may change color temporarily.Wait until the surface is dry again.

Cleaning the steering wheel and gear orselector leverX Thoroughly wipe with a damp cloth or use

leather care agents that have beenrecommended and approved by Mercedes-Benz.

Cleaning wooden trim and trim strips! Do not use solvent-based cleaning agents

such as tar remover, wheel cleaners,polishes or waxes. There is otherwise a riskof damaging the surface.

! Do not use chrome polish for trim strips.The trim strips have a chrome look but aremostly made of anodized aluminum andcan lose their shine if chrome polish isused. Use a damp, lint-free cloth insteadwhen cleaning the trim strips.If the chrome-plated trim strips are verydirty, you can use a chrome polish. If youare unsure as to whether the trim strips are

chrome-plated or not, consult anauthorized Mercedes-Benz Center.

X Wipe the wooden trim and trim strips witha damp, lint-free cloth, e.g. a microfibercloth.

X Heavy soiling: use car care and cleaningproducts recommended and approved byMercedes-Benz.

Cleaning the seat covers! Do not use microfiber cloths to clean

genuine leather or artificial leather covers,as these are too aggressive and, if usedoften, may damage the cover.

! Observe the following when cleaning:Rclean genuine leather covers carefully

with a damp cloth and then wipe thecovers down with a dry cloth. Make surethat the leather does not becomesoaked. It may otherwise become roughand cracked. Only use leather careagents that have been tested andapproved by Mercedes-Benz. You canobtain these from a qualified specialistworkshop.Rclean artificial leather covers with a cloth

moistened with a solution containing 1%detergent (e.g. dishwashing liquid).Rclean cloth covers with a microfiber cloth

moistened with a solution containing 1%detergent (e.g. dishwashing liquid). Rubcarefully and always wipe entire seatsections to avoid leaving visible lines.Leave the seat to dry afterwards.Cleaning results depend on the type ofdirt and how long it has been there.

i Note that regular care is essential toensure that the appearance and comfort ofthe covers is retained over time.

Care 299

Mai

nten

ance

and

car

e

Z

Cleaning the seat belts

G WARNINGDo not bleach or dye seat belts as this mayseverely weaken them. In a crash, they maynot be able to provide adequate protection.

! Do not clean the seat belts using chemicalcleaning agents. Do not dry the seat beltsby heating at temperatures above 176 ‡(80 †) or in direct sunlight.

X Use clean, lukewarm water and soapsolution.

Cleaning the headliner and carpetsX Headliner: if it is very dirty, use a soft brush

or dry shampoo.X Carpets: use the carpet and textile

cleaning agents recommended andapproved by Mercedes-Benz.

300 CareM

aint

enan

ce a

nd c

are

Useful information ............................ 302Where will I find...? ........................... 302Flat tire .............................................. 304Battery (vehicle) ................................ 305Jump-starting .................................... 308Towing and tow-starting .................. 310Fuses .................................................. 313

301

Brea

kdow

n as

sist

ance

Useful information

i This Operator's Manual describes allmodels and all standard and optionalequipment of your vehicle available at thetime of publication of the Operator'sManual. Country-specific differences arepossible. Please note that your vehicle maynot be equipped with all featuresdescribed. This also applies to safety-related systems and functions.

i Read the information on qualifiedspecialist workshops: (Y page 23).

Where will I find...?

Warning triangle

Setting up the warning triangle

: Press-stud; Reflectors= FeetX Fold feet = down and out to the side.X Pull side reflectors ; up to form a triangle

and lock them at the top using press-stud :.

First-aid kit

First-aid kit : is located in the stowagecompartment in the right-hand door.

i Check the expiration date on the first-aidkit at least once a year. Replace thecontents if necessary, and replace missingitems.

Vehicle tool kit

General notesi When they leave the factory, vehicles are

not equipped with the tools needed tochange a wheel, such as a jack or lugwrench. Some tools for changing a wheelare specific to the vehicle. To obtain toolsapproved for your vehicle, contact aqualified specialist workshop.

The vehicle tool kit contains:RVehicle tool kit bag with:

- a fuse extractor- an Allen key, e.g. to operate the sliding

roof manually in an emergency- a pump lever for the vehicle jack- a screwdriver- a lug wrenchRJack

302 Where will I find...?Br

eakd

own

assi

stan

ce

Vehicle tool kit

The vehicle tool kit is under the cover in thefootwell in front of the rear bench seat.X Fold cover : to the side.X Pull vehicle tool kit ; out by the tab.

Jack! Make sure that, while installing the

vehicle jack, there are no cables on theholder, in order to avoid them becomingtrapped.

The jack is located under the rear bench seaton the right-hand side when viewed in thedirection of travel.X Fold rear bench seat (Y page 266)

forwards.X Open cover :.X Pull bar = upwards and detach from

tab ?.X Remove jack ;.

Exterior spare wheel bracket

General notes

G WARNINGIf the spare tire is more than 6 years old or isnot the same model as the regular tires, havethe spare tire replaced with a new tire at thenearest Mercedes-Benz Center.Never operate the vehicle with more than onespare wheel mounted.

G WARNINGThe wheel or tire size as well as the tire typeof the spare wheel or emergency spare wheeland the wheel to be replaced may differ.Mounting an emergency spare wheel mayseverely impair the driving characteristics.There is a risk of an accident.To avoid hazardous situations:Radapt your driving style accordingly and

drive carefully.Rnever install more than one spare wheel or

emergency spare wheel that differs in size.Ronly use a spare wheel or emergency spare

wheel of a different size briefly.Rdo not switch ESP® off.Rhave a spare wheel or emergency spare

wheel of a different size replaced at thenearest qualified specialist workshop.Observe that the wheel and tire dimensionsas well as the tire type must be correct.

You must not exceed the maximum speed of50 mph (80 km/h) when using spare wheelsof differing sizes.

i When changing a wheel, you should alsoobserve the safety notes in the "Flat tire"section (Y page 340).

The spare wheel is on the outer side of therear door.

Where will I find...? 303

Brea

kdow

n as

sist

ance

Z

Stainless-steel spare hub cap

X Take the screwdriver out of the vehicle toolkit (Y page 302).

X Open the lock on cover ring : withscrewdriver = or a similar tool.

X Fold tab ; down.

X Pull cover ring : apart and remove it.X Pull off cover panel ?.

i When refitting cover panel ?, make surethat retainer A engages in recess B.

Removing the spare wheelThe spare wheel is heavy. Take particular noteof this when removing the spare wheel.

X Remove wheel nuts :.X Remove the spare wheel.

Mounting the wheelAfter changing a wheel:X Repair or replace the damaged wheel as

soon as possible and secure the sparewheel in place again.

X Secure the damaged wheel on the sparewheel bracket with wheel nuts :. Whendoing so, make sure that the wheel cannotcome loose.

X When refitting cover panel ?, make surethat retainer B engages in recessA(Y page 304).

X Make sure that tab ; is below whenrefitting cover ring :(Y page 304).

X For safety reasons, regularly check toensure that the wheel is securely fastened.

Flat tire

Preparing the vehicleX Stop the vehicle on solid, non-slippery and

level ground, as far away as possible fromtraffic.

X Switch on the hazard warning lamps(Y page 104).

304 Flat tireBr

eakd

own

assi

stan

ce

X Apply the parking brake.X Bring the front wheels into the straight-

ahead position.X Move the selector lever to position P.X Switch off the engine.X Remove the SmartKey from the ignition

lock.The steering wheel lock stays active for aslong as the SmartKey is removed.

X All occupants must get out of the vehicle.Make sure that they are not endangered asthey do so.

X Make sure that no one is near the dangerarea while a wheel is being changed.Anyone who is not directly assisting in thewheel change should, for example, standbehind the barrier.

X Get out of the vehicle. Pay attention totraffic conditions when doing so.

X Close the driver's door.

Battery (vehicle)

Important safety notesSpecial tools and expert knowledge arerequired when working on the battery, e.g.removal and installing. You should thereforehave all work involving the battery carried outat a qualified specialist workshop.

G WARNINGWork carried out incorrectly on the batterycan, for example, lead to a short circuit anddamage your vehicle's electronic system. Thiscan disrupt driving safety systems such asABS (anti-lock braking system) or ESP®

(Electronic Stability Program).RIf ABS malfunctions, the wheels can lock

during braking. This limits the steerabilityof the vehicle when braking and the braking

distance may increase. There is a risk ofaccident.RIf ESP® malfunctions, the vehicle will not be

stabilised if it starts to skid or a wheel startsto spin. There is a risk of accident.

You should therefore have all work involvingthe battery carried out at a qualified specialistworkshop.

G WARNINGDuring the charging process, a batteryproduces hydrogen gas. If a short circuitoccurs or sparks are created, the hydrogengas can ignite. There is a risk of an explosion.RMake sure that the positive terminal of a

connected battery does not come intocontact with vehicle parts.RNever place metal objects or tools on a

battery.RIt is important that you observe the

described order of the battery terminalswhen connecting and disconnecting abattery.RWhen jump-starting, make sure that the

battery poles with identical polarity areconnected.RIt is particularly important to observe the

described order when connecting anddisconnecting the jumper cables.RNever connect or disconnect the battery

terminals while the engine is running.

G WARNINGElectrostatic build-up can lead to the creationof sparks, which could ignite the highlyexplosive gases of a battery. There is a risk ofan explosion.Before handling the battery, touch the vehiclebody to remove any existing electrostaticbuild-up.

G WARNINGBattery acid is caustic. There is a risk of injury.Avoid contact with the skin, eyes or clothing.Do not inhale any battery gases. Do not lean

Battery (vehicle) 305

Brea

kdow

n as

sist

ance

Z

over the battery. Keep children away frombatteries. Wash battery acid immediately withwater and seek medical attention.

! Have the battery checked regularly at aqualified specialist workshop.Observe the service intervals in theMaintenance Booklet or contact a qualifiedspecialist workshop for more information.

! You should have all work involving thebattery carried out at a qualified specialistworkshop. In the exceptional case that it isnecessary for you to disconnect the batteryyourself, make sure that:Ryou switch off the engine and remove the

SmartKey. Check that all the indicatorlamps in the instrument cluster are off.Otherwise, electronic components, suchas the alternator, may be damaged.Ryou first remove the negative terminal

clamp and then the positive terminalclamp. Never swap the terminal clamps.Otherwise, the vehicle's electronicsystem may be damaged.Ron vehicles with automatic transmission,

the transmission is locked in position Pafter disconnecting the battery. Thevehicle is secured against rolling away.You can then no longer move the vehicle.

The battery and the cover of the positiveterminal clamp must be installed securelyduring operation.

H Environmental noteBatteries contain dangeroussubstances. It is against thelaw to dispose of them withthe household rubbish. Theymust be collected separatelyand recycled to protect theenvironment.Dispose of batteries in anenvironmentally friendlymanner. Take dischargedbatteries to a qualifiedspecialist workshop or a

special collection point forused batteries.

In order for the battery to achieve themaximum possible service life, it must alwaysbe sufficiently charged.Comply with safety precautions and takeprotective measures when handlingbatteries.

WARNINGAvoid the creation of sparks andheat.Avoid fire, naked flames andsmoking. Creation of sparks.

Battery acid is caustic.Avoid contact with the skin, eyesor clothing.Wear eye protection.

Keep children away.

Observe this Operator's Manual.

The vehicle battery, like other batteries, candischarge over time if you do not use thevehicle. In this case, have the batterydisconnected at a qualified specialistworkshop. You can also charge the batterywith a charger recommended by Mercedes-Benz. Contact a qualified specialist workshopfor further information.Explosive gases are created during chargingand jump-starting.For safety reasons, Mercedes-Benzrecommends that you only use batterieswhich have been tested and approved foryour vehicle by Mercedes-Benz. Thesebatteries provide increased impactprotection to prevent vehicle occupants from

306 Battery (vehicle)Br

eakd

own

assi

stan

ce

suffering acid burns should the battery bedamaged in the event of an accident.Have the battery charge level checked morefrequently if you use the vehicle mainly forshort trips or if you leave it standing idle fora lengthy period. Consult a qualified specialistworkshop if you wish to leave your vehicleparked up for a long period of time.

i Remove the SmartKey if you park thevehicle and do not require any electricalconsumers. The vehicle will then use verylittle energy, thus conserving batterypower.

i If the power supply has been interrupted,e.g. due to a discharged battery, you willhave to:Rset the clock. Information on setting the

clock can be found in the separateoperating instructions.On vehicles with COMAND and anavigation system, the clock is setautomatically.Rreset the head restraints on the front

seats (Y page 87).Rreset the function for folding the exterior

mirrors in/out automatically, by foldingthe mirrors out once (Y page 93).

Charging the battery

G WARNINGDuring charging and jump-starting, explosivegases can escape from the battery. There is arisk of an explosion.Particularly avoid fire, naked flames, creatingsparks and smoking. Ensure there is sufficientventilation while charging and jump-starting.Do not lean over a battery.

G WARNINGBattery acid is caustic. There is a risk of injury.Avoid contact with the skin, eyes or clothing.Do not inhale any battery gases. Do not leanover the battery. Keep children away from

batteries. Wash battery acid immediately withwater and seek medical attention.

G WARNINGA discharged battery can freeze attemperatures below freezing point. Whenjump-starting the vehicle or charging thebattery, gases can escape from the battery.There is a risk of an explosion.Allow the frozen battery to thaw out beforecharging it or jump-starting.

! Only use battery chargers with amaximum charging voltage of 14.8 V.

! Only charge the battery using the jump-starting connection point.

Never charge a battery still installed in thevehicle unless a battery charger unitapproved by Mercedes-Benz is being used.A battery charger unit specially adapted forMercedes-Benz vehicles and tested andapproved by Mercedes-Benz is available as anaccessory. It permits the charging of thebattery in its installed position. Contact anauthorized Mercedes-Benz Center forinformation and availability. Charge thebattery in accordance with the separateinstructions for the battery charger.The jump-starting connection point is in theengine compartment (Y page 308).Read the battery charger's operatinginstructions before charging the battery.X Open the hood (Y page 289).X Connect the battery charger to the positive

terminal and ground point in the sameorder as when connecting the donorbattery in the jump-starting procedure(Y page 308).

Battery (vehicle) 307

Brea

kdow

n as

sist

ance

Z

Jump-starting

G WARNINGBattery acid is caustic. There is a risk of injury.Avoid contact with the skin, eyes or clothing. Do not inhale any battery gases. Do not lean overthe battery. Keep children away from batteries. Wash battery acid immediately with water andseek medical attention.

G WARNINGDuring charging and jump-starting, explosive gases can escape from the battery. There is a riskof an explosion.Particularly avoid fire, naked flames, creating sparks and smoking. Ensure there is sufficientventilation while charging and jump-starting. Do not lean over a battery.

G WARNINGDuring the charging process, a battery produces hydrogen gas. If a short circuit occurs or sparksare created, the hydrogen gas can ignite. There is a risk of an explosion.RMake sure that the positive terminal of a connected battery does not come into contact with

vehicle parts.RNever place metal objects or tools on a battery.RIt is important that you observe the described order of the battery terminals when connecting

and disconnecting a battery.RWhen jump-starting, make sure that the battery poles with identical polarity are connected.RIt is particularly important to observe the described order when connecting and disconnecting

the jumper cables.RNever connect or disconnect the battery terminals while the engine is running.

G WARNINGA discharged battery can freeze at temperatures below freezing point. When jump-starting thevehicle or charging the battery, gases can escape from the battery. There is a risk of an explosion.Allow the frozen battery to thaw out before charging it or jump-starting.

G WARNINGNon-combusted fuel can collect in the exhaust system and ignite. There is a risk of fire. Avoidrepeated and lengthy starting attempts.

! Avoid repeated and lengthy starting attempts. Otherwise, non-combusted fuel maydamage the catalytic converter and create a risk of fire.Do not use a rapid charging device to start the vehicle.Make sure the jumper cables are not damaged.Make sure the jumper cables are not touching any other metal objects when they areconnected to the battery.

308 Jump-startingBr

eakd

own

assi

stan

ce

If the indicator/warning lamps do not light up at temperatures around or below freezing point,the discharged battery is likely to be frozen (a commonplace scenario). In this case, do notjump-start the vehicle or recharge the battery.Once the battery has thawed out, its service life may be dramatically reduced.The starting characteristics can be impaired, particularly at low temperatures.It is recommended that you have the thawed out battery checked at a qualified specialistworkshop.Do not start the vehicle using a rapid charging device. If your vehicle's battery is discharged,the engine can be jump-started from another vehicle or from a second battery using jumpercables. Observe the following points:RThe battery is not accessible in all vehicles. If the other vehicle's battery is not accessible,

jump-start the vehicle using a second battery or a jump-starting device.RVehicles with a gasoline engine: only jump-start the vehicle when the engine and exhaust

system are cold.RDo not start the engine if the battery is frozen. Let the battery thaw first.RJump-starting may only be performed from batteries with a nominal voltage of 12 V.ROnly use jumper cables which have a sufficient cross-section and insulated terminal clamps.RIf the battery is fully discharged, leave the battery that is being used to jump-start connected

for a few minutes before attempting to start. This charges the empty battery a little.RMake sure that the two vehicles do not touch.Make sure that:Rthe jumper leads are not damaged.Rwhen the jumper cables are connected to the battery, uninsulated sections of the terminal

clamp do not come into contact with other metal sections.RThe jumper cables cannot come into contact with parts such as the pulley or the fan. These

parts move when the engine is started and while it is running.X Apply the parking brake.X Move the selector lever to position P.X Switch off all electrical consumers (e.g. radio, blower, etc.).X Open the hood (Y page 289).

Jump-starting 309

Brea

kdow

n as

sist

ance

Z

Position number B identifies the charged battery of the other vehicle or an equivalent jump-starting device.The jump-start terminal point consists of terminals ; and ?.X Lift up cover : of positive terminal ; in the direction of the arrow.X Connect positive terminal ; on your vehicle to positive terminal ? of donor battery B

using the jumper cable. beginning with your own battery.X Start the engine of the donor vehicle and run it at idling speed.X Connect negative terminal A of donor battery B to ground point = of your vehicle using

the jumper cable, connecting the jumper cable to donor battery B first.X Start the engine.X First, remove the jumper cable from ground point = and negative terminal A, then from

positive terminal ; and positive terminal ?, each time disconnecting from the battery onyour own vehicle first.

X Have the battery checked at a qualified specialist workshop.

i Jump-starting is not considered to be a normal operating condition.

i Jumper cables and further information regarding jump starting can be obtained at anyqualified specialist workshop.

Towing and tow-starting

Important safety notes

G WARNINGThe vehicle is braked when the HOLD functionor DISTRONIC PLUS is activated. Therefore,

deactivate HOLD and DISTRONIC PLUS if thevehicle is to be towed.

! The vehicle can be towed a maximum of30 miles (50km). The towing speed of30 mph (50 km/h) must not be exceeded.

310 Towing and tow-startingBr

eakd

own

assi

stan

ce

If the vehicle has to be towed more than30 miles (50km), the entire vehicle must beraised and transported.

! Only secure the tow cable or tow bar tothe towing eyes. You could otherwisedamage the vehicle.

! Do not tow with sling-type equipment.This could damage the vehicle.

! Do not use the towing eyes for recoverypurposes as this could damage the vehicle.If in doubt, recover the vehicle with a crane.

! When towing, pull away slowly andsmoothly. If the tractive power is too high,the vehicles could be damaged.

! Your vehicles is equipped with anautomatic transmission. Therefore, youmust not have the vehicle tow-started. Thetransmission may otherwise be damaged.

G WARNINGIf the weight of the vehicle to be towed or tow-started is greater than the permissible grossweight of your vehicle:Rthe towing eye could detach itselfRthe vehicle/trailer combination could

rollover.There is a risk of an accident.When towing or tow-starting another vehicle,its weight should not be greater than thepermissible gross weight of your vehicle.

Information on your vehicle's gross vehicleweight rating can be found on the vehicleidentification plate (Y page 349).It is better to have the vehicle transportedthan to have it towed.If the transfer case can be shifted into neutralN, you can tow the vehicle.

If the transfer case cannot be shifted intoneutral N, you can tow the vehicle with oneaxle raised. Please bear the following in mind:Rremove the propeller shaft between the

transfer case and the rolling axle.Rturn the SmartKey to position 1 in the

ignition lock (Y page 139).The battery must be connected and charged.Otherwise, you:Rcannot turn the SmartKey in the ignition

lock to position 2(Y page 139)Rcannot shift the automatic transmission to

position Ni Deactivate the automatic locking feature

(Y page 75). You could otherwise be lockedout when pushing or towing the vehicle.

Towing eyes

Towing eyes, front

: Towing eyes, front

Towing eye, rear

Towing and tow-starting 311

Brea

kdow

n as

sist

ance

Z

Rear towing eye : is located under thebumper, on the left-hand side when viewed inthe direction of travel.

Towing a vehicle with both axles onthe ground

It is important that you observe the safetyinstructions when towing away your vehicle(Y page 310).X Switch on the hazard warning lamps

(Y page 104).i In order to signal a change of direction

when towing the vehicle with the hazardwarning lamps switched on, use thecombination switch as usual. In this case,only the turn signals for the desireddirection flash. When you reset thecombination switch, the hazard warninglamps start flashing again.

X Turn the SmartKey to position 2 in theignition lock (Y page 139).

X When the vehicle is stationary, depress thebrake pedal and keep it depressed.

X Shift the transfer case toneutral(Y page 200).

X Shift the automatic transmission toposition N.

X Release the brake pedal.X Release the parking brake (Y page 157).

i The transmission can only change gear ifthe battery has sufficient charge.If you cannot move the selector lever to N,the propeller shafts to the driven axlesmust be removed.

Transporting the vehicle! Only lash the vehicle down by the wheels

or wheel rims, not by parts of the vehiclesuch as axle or steering components.Otherwise, the vehicle could be damaged.

Use the towing eyes to pull the vehicle if itneeds to be transported on a trailer ortransporter (Y page 311).X Apply the parking brake.X Turn the SmartKey to position 2 in the

ignition lock (Y page 139).X Move the selector lever to N.X Shift the transfer case to

neutral(Y page 200).X Secure the towing cable to the towing eyes

(Y page 311).X Make sure that the vehicle cannot roll

away.X Release the parking brake.X Load the vehicle onto the transporter.

As soon as the vehicle is loaded:X Apply the parking brake.X Shift the automatic transmission to

position P.X Turn the SmartKey to position 0 in the

ignition lock (Y page 139) and remove it.X Secure the vehicle.

Recovering a vehicle that has becomestuck

! Pull away smoothly, slowly, and in astraight line when pulling out a vehicle thathas become stuck. Excessive tractivepower could damage the vehicles.

If the drive wheels get trapped on loose ormuddy ground, recover the vehicle with theutmost care, especially so if the vehicle isladen.Never attempt to recover a vehicle with atrailer attached.Pull out the vehicle backwards, if possible,using the tracks it made when it becamestuck.

312 Towing and tow-startingBr

eakd

own

assi

stan

ce

Towing in the event of malfunctions

General notes! If you are removing the propeller shaft,

use M10 nuts as spacers on the M8 boltsand secure them with M8 nuts.New self-locking nuts must be used whenthe propeller shafts are refitted.

X Observe the safety notes as you do so(Y page 310).

i Consult an authorized Mercedes-BenzCenter.

Engine damage, gear damage orelectrical malfunctionsX Move the selector lever to

position N(Y page 145).X Shift the transfer case to

neutral(Y page 200).

In the event of damage to the transfercaseHave the propeller shafts between the axlesand the transfer case removed.

In the event of damage to the front axleHave the propeller shaft between the rearaxle and the transfer case removed.Have the vehicle towed with the front axleraised.

In the event of damage to the rear axleHave the propeller shaft between the frontaxle and the transfer case removed.Have the vehicle towed with the rear axleraised and with wheel rollers under the frontaxle.

Fuses

Important safety notes

G WARNINGOnly use fuses that have been approved forMercedes-Benz vehicles and that have thecorrect fuse rating for the systemsconcerned. Do not attempt to repair or bridgefaulty fuses. Using fuses that have not beenapproved or attempting to repair or bridgefaulty fuses could cause the fuse to beoverloaded and result in a fire. Have the causetraced and rectified at a qualified specialistworkshop.

! Only use fuses that have been approvedfor Mercedes-Benz vehicles and whichhave the correct fuse rating for the systemconcerned. Otherwise, components orsystems could be damaged.

The fuses in your vehicle serve to close downfaulty circuits. If a fuse blows, all thecomponents on the circuit and their functionsstop operating.Blown fuses must be replaced with fuses ofthe same rating, which you can recognize bythe color and value. The fuse ratings are listedin the fuse allocation chart.

i If a fuse has blown, contact a breakdownservice or an authorized Mercedes-BenzCenter.

If a newly inserted fuse also blows, have thecause traced and rectified at a qualifiedspecialist workshop, e.g. an authorizedMercedes-Benz Center.

Before changing a fuseX Park the vehicle and apply the parking

brake.X Switch off all electrical consumers.X Remove the SmartKey from the ignition

lock.All indicator lamps in the instrument clustermust be off.

Fuses 313

Brea

kdow

n as

sist

ance

Z

The fuses are located in various fuse boxes:RMain fuse box on the driver's side of the

dashboardRFuse box in the front-passenger footwellRFuse box in the transmission tunnelRFuse box in the battery caseThe fuse allocation chart and the spare fusesare in the main fuse box on the dashboard(Y page 314).You will find the fuse removal device in thevehicle tool kit (Y page 302).

Dashboard fuse box! Do not use a pointed object such as a

screwdriver to open the cover in thedashboard. You could damage thedashboard or the cover.

! Make sure that no moisture can enter thefuse box when the cover is open.

! When closing the cover, make sure that itis lying correctly on the fuse box. Moistureseeping in or dirt could otherwise impairthe operation of the fuses.

X Open the driver's door.X To open: pull cover : outwards in the

direction of the arrow and remove it.X To close: clip in cover : on the front of

the dashboard.X Fold cover : inwards until it engages.

Fuse box in the front-passengerfootwell

! Make sure that no moisture can enter thefuse box when the cover is open.

! When closing the cover, make sure that itis lying correctly on the fuse box. Moistureseeping in or dirt could otherwise impairthe operation of the fuses.

X Unscrew screws :.X Lift up cover ; in the direction of the

arrow.

= Fuse box

Fuse box in the transmission tunnel! Make sure that no moisture can enter the

fuse box when the cover is open.

! When closing the cover, make sure that itis lying correctly on the fuse box. Moistureseeping in or dirt could otherwise impairthe operation of the fuses.

314 FusesBr

eakd

own

assi

stan

ce

X Fold down the cup holder on the centerconsole (Y page 268).

X Adjust the front-passenger seat to itsforemost position (Y page 86).

X To open: remove screws :.X Remove cover ; in the direction of the

arrow.X To close: clip in cover ;.X Install cover ; with screws :.

Fuse box in the battery caseThe fuses in the battery case do not usuallyneed to be replaced. If a fuse change isnecessary, consult a qualified specialistworkshop.

Fuses 315

Brea

kdow

n as

sist

ance

Z

316

Useful information ............................ 318Important safety notes .................... 318Operation ........................................... 319Winter operation ............................... 320Tire pressure ..................................... 322Loading the vehicle .......................... 328Uniform Tire Quality GradingStandards .......................................... 332Tire labeling ....................................... 334Changing a wheel ............................. 340Wheel and tire combinations ........... 344

317

Whe

els

and

tires

Useful information

i This Operator's Manual describes allmodels and all standard and optionalequipment of your vehicle available at thetime of publication of the Operator'sManual. Country-specific differences arepossible. Please note that your vehicle maynot be equipped with all featuresdescribed. This also applies to safety-related systems and functions.

i Read the information on qualifiedspecialist workshops: (Y page 23).

Important safety notes

G WARNINGReplace rims or tires with the samedesignation, manufacturer and type as shownon the original part. For further informationcontact an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center.If incorrectly sized rims and tires aremounted, the wheel brakes or suspensioncomponents can be damaged. Also, theoperating clearance of the wheels and thetires may no longer be correct.

G WARNINGWorn, old tires can cause accidents. If the tiretread is worn to minimum tread depth, or ifthe tires have sustained damage, replacethem.When replacing rims, only use genuineMercedes-Benz wheel bolts specified for theparticular rim type. Failure to do so can resultin the bolts loosening and possibly anaccident.Retreaded tires are not tested orrecommended by Mercedes-Benz, sinceprevious damage cannot always berecognized on retreads. The operating safetyof the vehicle cannot be assured when suchtires are used.

G WARNINGIf you notice sudden significant vibrations orunusual handling performance or if yoususpect that damage has occurred to thevehicle, you should activate the hazardwarning lamps, gently reduce speed andcarefully head for an area that is located at asafe distance from the road.Check the tires and the underside of thevehicle for damage. If the vehicle seemsunsafe, have the vehicle towed away to thenearest Mercedes-Benz Center or tire dealerto be repaired.

G WARNINGDo not drive with a flat tire. A flat tire affectsthe ability to steer or brake the vehicle. Youmight lose control of the vehicle. Continueddriving with a flat tire or driving at high speedwith a flat tire will cause excessive heat build-up and possibly a fire.

G WarningA flat tire severely impairs the driving,steering and braking characteristics of thevehicle. There is a risk of an accident.do not drive with a flat tire. Immediatelyreplace the flat tire with your spare wheel, orconsult a qualified specialist workshop.

Consult an authorized Mercedes-Benz Centerif you require information on approved andrecommended tires and wheels for summerand winter operation. Advice on purchasingand caring for tires is also available there.Accessories that are not approved for yourvehicle by Mercedes-Benz or are not beingused correctly can impair the operatingsafety.Before purchasing and using non-approvedaccessories, visit a qualified specialistworkshop and ask about:RsuitabilityRlegal stipulationsRfactory recommendations

318 Important safety notesW

heel

s an

d tir

es

Information on the dimensions and types ofwheels and tires for your vehicle can be foundin the "Wheel/tire combinations" section(Y page 344).Information on air pressure for the tires onyour vehicle can be found:Ron the tire pressure label on the fuel filler

flapRin the "Tire pressure" section

i Further information on wheels and tirescan be obtained at any qualified specialistworkshop.

Operation

Notes on drivingIf the vehicle is heavily loaded, check the tirepressures and correct them if necessary.When parking your vehicle, make sure thatthe tires do not get deformed by the curb orother obstacles. If it is necessary to drive overcurbs, speed humps or similar elevations, tryto do so slowly and at an obtuse angle.Otherwise, the tires, particularly thesidewalls, may be damaged.

Regular checking of wheels and tires

G WARNINGRegularly check the tires for damage.Damaged tires can cause tire inflationpressure loss. As a result, you could losecontrol of your vehicle.Worn, old tires can cause accidents. If the tiretread is worn to minimum tread depth, or ifthe tires have sustained damage, replacethem.

RRegularly check the wheels and tires ofyour vehicle for damage at least once amonth, as well as after driving off-road oron rough roads. Damage includes bulgesand deformation on tires, cuts, punctures,cracks or severe corrosion on wheels, for

example. Damaged wheels can cause aloss of tire pressure.RRegularly check the tire tread depth and

the condition of the tread across the wholewidth of the tire (Y page 319). In order toinspect the inner side of the tire surface,turn the steering wheel to full lock.RAll wheels must have a valve cap to protect

the valve against dirt and moisture. Do notinstall anything onto the valve other thanthe standard valve cap or a valve capapproved by Mercedes-Benz for yourvehicle.Do not install anything onto the valve, suchas tire pressure monitoring systems.RYou should regularly check the pressure of

all your tires including the spare wheel,particularly prior to long trips. Adjust thetire pressure as necessary (Y page 327).

The service life of tires depends, among otherthings, on the following factors:RDriving styleRTire pressureRDistance covered

Tire tread

G WARNINGAlthough the applicable federal motor vehiclesafety laws consider a tire to be worn whenthe treadwear indicators (TWI) become visibleat approximately á inches (1.6 mm), werecommend that you do not allow your tiresto wear down to that level. As tread depthapproaches â inches (3 mm) the adhesionproperties on a wet road are sharply reduced.Depending upon the weather and/or roadsurface (conditions), the tire traction varieswidely.

Operation 319

Whe

els

and

tires

Z

Mark : is a visual warning on the tread wearindicators (TWI). The arrow indicates theplacement of the tire tread.Do not drive with tires which have too littletread depth. tire traction on wet road surfacesdecreases significantly when the tread depthis less than 1/8 in (3 mm).Tread wear indicators (TWI) are required bylaw. Six indicators are positioned over the tiretread. They are visible once the tread depthis approximately 1/16 in (1.6 mm). If this is thecase, the tire is so worn that it must bereplaced.The recommended tread depth for summertires is at least 1/8 in (3 mm). Therecommended tread depth for winter tires isat least 1/6 in (4 mm).

Selecting, mounting and replacingtiresROnly mount tires and wheels of the same

type and make.ROnly mount approved tires of the correct

size onto the wheels.RTires are supplied with a protective layer

from the factory. Break in new tires atmoderate speeds for the first 60 miles(100 km). They only reach their fullperformance after this distance.

RDo not drive with tires which have too littletread depth. as this significantly reducesthe traction on wet roads (hydroplaning).RReplace the tires after six years at the

latest, regardless of wear. This also appliesto the spare wheel.

Winter operation

General notesHave your vehicle winterproofed at a qualifiedspecialist workshop at the onset of winter.Observe the notes in the "Changing a wheel"section (Y page 340).

Driving with summer tiresAt temperatures below 45 ‡ (+7 †), summertires lose elasticity significantly, andtherefore traction and braking power as well.Change the tires on your vehicle toM+S tires. Using summer tires at very coldtemperatures could cause cracks to form,thereby damaging the tires permanently.Mercedes-Benz cannot accept responsibilityfor this type of damage.

M+S tires

G WARNINGM+S tires with a tire tread depth of less thanã in (4 mm) are not suitable for use in winterand do not provide sufficient traction. Thereis a risk of an accident.M+S tires with a tread depth of less than ãin (4 mm) must be replaced immediately.

G WARNINGThe spare wheel and M+S tires have differenttire characteristics. Driving characteristicscan be severely impaired when you mount thespare wheel. There is a risk of an accident.You should therefore adapt your driving styleand drive carefully. Have the spare wheel

320 Winter operationW

heel

s an

d tir

es

replaced with a new wheel with an M+S tireat the nearest qualified specialist workshop.

At temperatures below 45 ‡(+7 †), use all-season tires or winter tires. Both types of tireare identified by the M+S marking.Not all tires with the M+S marking provide thedriving characteristics of winter tires. Inaddition to the M+S marking, winter tires alsohave the i snowflake symbol on the tirewall. Tires with this marking fulfill therequirements of the Rubber ManufacturersAssociation (RMA) and the RubberAssociation of Canada (RAC) regarding snowtraction, and were specially developed fordriving on snow. Only these tires will allowdriving safety systems such as ABS andESP® to function optimally in winter, sincethese tires have been designed specificallyfor driving on snow.Use M+S tires of the same make and tread onall wheels to maintain safe handlingcharacteristics.Always observe the maximum permissiblespeed specified for the M+S tires you havemounted.When you have installed the M+S tires:X Check the tire pressures (Y page 325).X Restart the tire pressure monitor

(Y page 327).

i You can obtain information about wintertires that have been approved byMercedes-Benz especially for your vehicleat any Mercedes-Benz Service center.

i For further information about tires, see(Y page 346).

Snow chains! Information about the use of snow chain

compatible AMG winter tires is applicablefor AMG tires. Use of snow chains is onlypermissible with these tires.

! On some tire sizes there is not enoughspace for snow chains. To avoid damage tothe vehicle or tires, observe the "Wheel andtire combinations" section under "Tires andwheels".

! If snow chains are mounted on the frontwheels, the snow chains could grindagainst the bodywork or components of thechassis. This could result in damage to thevehicle or the tires.

For safety reasons, Mercedes-Benzrecommends that you only use snow chainsthat have been specially approved for yourvehicle by Mercedes-Benz, or are of acorresponding standard of quality.ROnly use snow chains when driving on

roads completely covered by snow.Remove the snow chains as soon aspossible when you are no longer driving onsnow-covered roads.RLocal regulations may restrict the use of

snow chains. Observe the relevantregulations when mounting snow chains.RDo not exceed the maximum permissible

speed of 30 mph (50 km/h).If you intend to mount snow chains, pleasebear the following points in mind:RSnow chains cannot be mounted on all

wheel/tire combinations (Y page 62).RMount snow chains only in pairs and only

on the rear wheels. Observe themanufacturer's mounting instructions.

i You may wish to deactivateESP®(Y page 62) when pulling away withsnow chains installed. This way you canallow the wheels to spin in a controlledmanner, achieving an increased drivingforce (cutting action).

Winter operation 321

Whe

els

and

tires

Z

Tire pressure

Tire pressure specifications

Important safety notes

G WARNINGUnderinflated or overinflated tires pose thefollowing risks:Rthe tires may burst, especially as the load

and vehicle speed increase.Rthe tires may wear excessively and/or

unevenly, which may greatly impair tiretraction.Rthe driving characteristics, as well as

steering and braking, may be greatlyimpaired.

There is a risk of an accident.Follow recommended tire inflation pressuresand check the pressure of all the tiresincluding the spare wheel:Rmonthly, at leastRif the load changesRbefore beginning a long journeyRunder different operating conditions, e.g.

off-road drivingIf necessary, correct the tire pressure.

i The specifications on the sample Tire andLoading Information placard and tirepressure tables are examples. Tirepressure specifications are vehicle-specificand may deviate from the data shown here.The tire pressure specifications that arevalid for your vehicle can be found on theTire and Loading Information placard andtire pressure table on the vehicle.

General notesThe recommended tire pressures for the tiresmounted at the factory can be found on thelabels described here.Operation with a trailer: the applicablevalue for the rear tires is the maximum tirepressure value stated in the table inside thefuel filler flap.

Further information on tire pressures can beobtained at a qualified specialist workshop.

Tire and Loading Information placard

: Recommended tire pressures

The Tire and Loading Information placard ison the B-pillar on the driver's side(Y page 328).The Tire and Loading Information placardcontains the recommended tire pressures forcold tires. The recommended tire pressuresare valid for the maximum permissible loadand up to the maximum permissible vehiclespeed.

Tire pressure table

Example: tire pressure table for all tires permittedfor this vehicle by the factory

The tire pressure table is on the inside of thefuel filler flap.The tire pressure table contains therecommended pressures for cold tires forvarious operating conditions, i.e. differingload and speed conditions.

322 Tire pressureW

heel

s an

d tir

es

Example: tire pressure table with tire dimensions

If a tire size precedes a tire pressure, the tirepressure information following is only validfor that tire size. The load conditions "partiallyladen" and "fully laden" are defined in thetable for different numbers of occupants andamounts of luggage. The actual number ofseats may differ.

Some tire pressure tables only show the rimdiameter instead of the complete tire size,e.g. R16. The rim diameter is part of the tiresize and can be found on the tire sidewall(Y page 334).If the tire pressures have been set to thelower values for lighter loads and/or lowerroad speeds, the pressures should be resetto the higher values:Rif you want to drive with an increased load

and/orRif you want to drive at higher road speeds.

i The tire pressures for increased loadsand/or higher road speeds, shown in thetire pressure table, may have a negativeeffect on driving comfort.

If the tire pressure is not set correctly, thiscan lead to an excessive build up of heat anda sudden loss of pressure.For more information, contact a qualifiedspecialist workshop.

Important notes on tire pressure

G WARNINGIf the tire pressure drops repeatedly, thewheel, valve or tire may be damaged. Tirepressure that is too low may result in a tireblow-out. There is a risk of an accident.RCheck the tire for foreign objects.RCheck whether the wheel is losing air or the

valve is leaking.If you are unable to rectify the damage,contact a qualified specialist workshop.

G WARNINGIf you fit unsuitable accessories onto tirevalves, the tire valves may be overloaded andmalfunction, which can cause tire pressureloss. Due to their design, retrofitted tirepressure monitors keep the tire valve open.This can also result in tire pressure loss. Thereis a risk of an accident.Only screw the standard valve cap or othervalve caps approved by Mercedes-Benz foryour vehicle onto the tire valve.

Use a suitable pressure gauge to check thetire pressure. The outer appearance of a tiredoes not permit any reliable conclusion aboutthe tire pressure. On vehicles equipped withthe electronic tire pressure monitoringsystem, the tire pressure can be checkedusing the on-board computer.The tire temperature and pressure increasewhen the vehicle is in motion. This isdependent on the driving speed and the load.Therefore, you should only correct tirepressures when the tires are cold.

Tire pressure 323

Whe

els

and

tires

Z

The tires are cold:Rif the vehicle has been parked without

direct sunlight on the tires for at least threehours andRif the vehicle has been driven for less than

1 mile (1.6 km).The tire temperature changes depending onthe outside temperature, the vehicle speedand the tire load. If the tire temperaturechanges by 18 ‡ (10 †), the tire pressurechanges by approximately 10 kPa (0.1 bar/1.5 psi). Take this into account whenchecking the pressure of warm tires. Onlycorrect the tire pressure if it is too low for thecurrent operating conditions. If you check thetire pressure when the tires are warm, theresulting value will be higher than if the tireswere cold. This is normal. Do not reduce thetire pressure to the value specified for coldtires. The tire pressure would otherwise betoo low.Observe the recommended tire pressures forcold tires:Ron the Tire and Loading Information placard

on the B-pillar on the driver's sideRin the tire pressure table on the inside of

the fuel filler flapObserve the following for the tire pressure onthe spare wheel:Rthe tire and loading information table on

the B-pillar on the driver's side.Rthe tire pressure sticker on the inside of the

fuel filler flap.

Underinflated or overinflated tires

Underinflation

G WARNINGTires with pressure that is too low canoverheat and burst as a consequence. Inaddition, they also suffer from excessive and/or irregular wear, which can severely impairthe braking properties and the drivingcharacteristics. There is a risk of an accident.

Avoid tire pressures that are too low in all thetires, including the spare wheel.

Underinflated tires may:Roverheat, leading to tire defectsRhave an adverse effect on handling

characteristicsRwear quickly and unevenlyRhave an adverse effect on fuel consumption

Overinflation

G WARNINGTires with excessively high pressure can burstbecause they are damaged more easily byroad debris, potholes etc. In addition, theyalso suffer from irregular wear, which canseverely impair the braking properties and thedriving characteristics. There is a risk of anaccident.Avoid tire pressures that are too high in all thetires, including the spare wheel.

Overinflated tires may:Rincrease the braking distanceRhave an adverse effect on handling

characteristicsRwear quickly and unevenlyRhave an adverse effect on ride comfortRbe more susceptible to damage

Maximum tire pressures

: Example: maximum permissible tirepressure

324 Tire pressureW

heel

s an

d tir

es

Never exceed the maximum permissible tireinflation pressure. Always observe therecommended tire pressure for your vehiclewhen adjusting the tire pressure(Y page 338).

i The actual values for tires are vehicle-specific and may deviate from the values inthe illustration.

Checking the tire pressures

Important safety notesObserve the notes on tire pressure(Y page 322).Information on air pressure for the tires onyour vehicle can be found:Ron the vehicle's Tire and Loading

Information placard on the B-pillar(Y page 322)Ron the tire pressure label on the fuel filler

flap (Y page 322)Rin the "Tire pressure information" sectionRin the "Tire pressure information" section

(Y page 322)

Checking tire pressures manuallyTo determine and set the correct tirepressure, proceed as follows:X Remove the valve cap of the tire that is to

be checked.X Press the tire pressure gauge securely onto

the valve.X Read the tire pressure and compare it with

the recommended value on the Tire andLoading Information placard on the B-pillaron the driver's side of your vehicle(Y page 322).

X The tire pressure is too low: increase thetire pressure to the recommended value.

X The tire pressure is too high: press downthe metal pin in the valve using the tip of apen, for example.Air is released from the tire.

X Check the tire pressure again with the tirepressure gauge.

X Screw the valve cap onto the valve.X Repeat these steps for the other tires.

Tire pressure monitor

Important safety notes

G WARNINGEach tire, including the spare (if provided),should be checked at least once a monthwhen cold and inflated to the pressurerecommended by the vehicle manufactureron the Tire and Loading Information placardon the driver's door B-pillar or the tirepressure label on the inside of the fuel fillerflap. If your vehicle has tires of a different sizethan the size indicated on the Tire and LoadingInformation placard or the tire pressure label,you should determine the proper tire pressurefor those tires.As an added safety feature, your vehicle hasbeen equipped with a tire pressure monitoringsystem (TPMS) that illuminates a low tirepressure telltale when one or more of yourtires are significantly underinflated.Accordingly, when the low tire pressuretelltale illuminates, you should stop and checkyour tires as soon as possible, and inflatethem to the proper pressure. Driving on asignificantly underinflated tire causes the tireto overheat and can lead to tire failure.Underinflation also reduces fuel efficiencyand tire tread life, and may affect the vehicle'shandling and stopping ability.Please note that the TPMS is not a substitutefor proper tire maintenance, and it is thedriver's responsibility to maintain correct tirepressure, even if underinflation has notreached the level to trigger illumination of theTPMS low tire pressure telltale.USA only:Your vehicle has also been equipped with aTPMS malfunction indicator to indicate if thesystem is not operating properly. The TPMS

Tire pressure 325

Whe

els

and

tires

Z

malfunction indicator is combined with thelow tire pressure telltale. When the systemdetects a malfunction, the warning lamp willflash for approximately a minute and thenremain continuously illuminated. Thissequence will be repeated every time thevehicle is started as long as the malfunctionexists.When the malfunction indicator is illuminated,the system may not be able to detect or signallow tire pressure as intended. TPMSmalfunctions may occur for a variety ofreasons, including the installation ofincompatible replacement or alternate tiresor wheels on the vehicle that prevent theTPMS from functioning properly. Alwayscheck the TPMS malfunction telltale afterreplacing one or more tires or wheels on yourvehicle to ensure that the replacement oralternate tires and wheels allow the TPMS tocontinue to function properly.

It is the driver's responsibility to set the tirepressure to the recommended cold tirepressure suitable for the operating situation(Y page 322). Note that the correct tirepressure for the current operating situationmust first be taught-in to the tire pressuremonitor. If there is a substantial loss ofpressure, the warning threshold for thewarning message is aligned to the referencevalues taught-in. Restart the tire pressuremonitor after adjusting to the cold tirepressure (Y page 327). The currentpressures are saved as new reference values.As a result, a warning message will appear ifthe tire pressure drops significantly.The tire pressure monitor does not warn youof an incorrectly set tire pressure. Observethe notes on the recommended tire pressure(Y page 322).The tire pressure monitor is not able to warnyou of a sudden loss of pressure, e.g. if thetire is penetrated by a foreign object. In theevent of a sudden loss of pressure, bring thevehicle to a halt by braking carefully. Avoidabrupt steering maneuvers.

If a tire pressure monitor system is installed,the vehicle's wheels have sensors installedthat monitor the tire pressures in all four tires.The tire pressure monitor warns you if thepressure drops in one or more of the tires. Thetire pressure monitor only functions if thecorrect wheel electronics units are installedon each wheel.The tire pressure monitor has a yellowwarning lamp in the instrument cluster forindicating pressure loss/malfunctions (USA)or pressure loss (Canada). Whether thewarning lamp flashes or lights up indicateswhether a tire pressure is too low or the tirepressure monitor is malfunctioning:Rif the warning lamp is lit continuously, the

tire pressure on one or more tires issignificantly too low. The tire pressuremonitor is not malfunctioning.RUSA only: if the warning lamp flashes for

around a minute and then remains litconstantly, the tire pressure monitor ismalfunctioning.

Information on tire pressures is displayed inthe multifunction display. After a few minutesof driving, the current tire pressure of eachtire is shown in the multifunction display.USA only: if there is a malfunction with thetire pressure monitor it can take more thanten minutes until the malfunction is shown bythe tire pressure warning lamp flashing forapproximately one minute and then lightingup continuously. When the malfunction hasbeen rectified, the tire pressure warning lampgoes out after a few minutes of driving.The tire pressure values indicated by the on-board computer may differ from thosemeasured at a gas station with a pressuregauge. The tire pressures shown by the on-board computer refer to those measured atsea level. At high altitudes, the tire pressurevalues indicated by a pressure gauge arehigher than those shown by the on-boardcomputer. In this case, do not reduce the tirepressures.

326 Tire pressureW

heel

s an

d tir

es

The operation of the tire pressure monitor canbe affected by interference from radiotransmitting equipment (e.g. radioheadphones, two-way radios) that may bebeing operated in or near the vehicle.

i USA only:This device complies with part 15 of theFCC Rules. Operation is subject to thefollowing two conditions:1. This device may not cause interference,and2. this device must accept any interferencereceived, including interference that maycause undesired operation of the device.Any unauthorized modification to thisdevice could void the user's authority tooperate the equipment.

i Canada only:This device complies with RSS-210 ofIndustry Canada. Operation is subject tothe following two conditions:1. This device may not cause interference,and2. this device must accept any interferencereceived, including interference that maycause undesired operation.Any unauthorized modification to thisdevice could void the user's authority tooperate the equipment.

Checking tire pressure electronicallyX Make sure that the SmartKey is in

position 2 (Y page 139) in the ignition lock.X Press the = or ; button on the

steering wheel to select the Serv. menu.X Press the 9 or : button to selectTire Pressure.

X Press button a.The current tire pressure for each wheel willbe displayed in the multifunction display.

If the vehicle has been parked for over20 minutes, the message Tire pressure

will be displayed after driving a few minutes appears.After a teach-in period, the tire pressuremonitor automatically recognizes new wheelsor new sensors. As long as a clear allocationof the tire pressure values to the individualwheels is not possible, the Tire Pressure Monitor Active display message is showninstead of the tire pressure display. The tirepressures are already being monitored.

i If a spare wheel is mounted, the systemmay continue to show the tire pressure ofthe wheel that has been removed for a fewminutes. If this occurs, note that the valuedisplayed for the position where the sparewheel is mounted is not the same as thespare wheel's current tire pressure.

Tire pressure monitor warningmessagesIf the tire pressure monitor detects asignificant pressure loss on one or more tires,a warning message is shown in themultifunction display. A warning tone alsosounds and the tire pressure warning lamplights up in the instrument cluster.Each tire that is affected by a significant lossof pressure is highlighted in the pressuredisplay.X If the Correct Tire PressureCorrect Tire Pressure message appears in themultifunction display, check the tirepressure on all four wheels and correct it ifnecessary.

i If the wheel positions on the vehicle areinterchanged, the tire pressures may bedisplayed for the wrong positions for ashort time. This is rectified after a fewminutes of driving, and the tire pressuresare displayed for the correct positions.

Restarting the tire pressure monitorWhen you restart the tire pressure monitor,all existing warning messages are deleted andthe warning lamps go out. The monitor uses

Tire pressure 327

Whe

els

and

tires

Z

the currently set tire pressures as thereference values for monitoring. In mostcases, the tire pressure monitor willautomatically detect the new referencevalues after you have changed the tirepressure. However, you can also definereference values manually as described here.X Set the tire pressure to the value

recommended for the correspondingdriving situation on the Tire and LoadingInformation placard on the driver's sideB-pillar (Y page 322).Additional tire pressure values for differentloads can also be found on the tire pressuretable on the inside of the fuel filler flap(Y page 322).

X Make sure that the tire pressure is correcton all four wheels.

X Make sure that the SmartKey is inposition 2 (Y page 139) in the ignition lock.

X Press the = or ; button on thesteering wheel to select the Serv. menu.

X Press the 9 or : button to selectTire Pressure.

X Press the a button.The multifunction display shows thecurrent tire pressure for the individual tiresor the Tire pressure will be displayed after driving a few minutes message.

X Press the : button.The Use Current Pressures as New Reference Values message appears inthe multifunction display.

If you wish to confirm the restart:X Press the a button.

The Tire Press. Monitor Restartedmessage appears in the multifunctiondisplay.After driving for a few minutes, the systemchecks whether the current tire pressuresare within the specified range. The new tirepressures are then accepted as referencevalues and monitored.

If you wish to cancel the restart:X Press the % button.

The tire pressure values stored at the lastrestart will continue to be monitored.

Loading the vehicle

Instruction labels for tires and loads

G WARNINGOverloaded tires can overheat, causing ablowout. Overloaded tires can also impair thesteering and driving characteristics and leadto brake failure. There is a risk of accident.Observe the load rating of the tires. The loadrating must be at least half of the GAWR ofyour vehicle. Never overload the tires byexceeding the maximum load.

: B-pillar, driver's side

Two instruction labels on your vehicle showthe maximum possible load.(1) The Tire and Loading Information placard

is on the B-pillar on the driver's side. TheTire and Loading Information placardshows the maximum permissible numberof occupants and the maximumpermissible vehicle load. It also containsdetails of the tire sizes andcorresponding pressures for tiresmounted at the factory.

(2) The vehicle identification plate is on theB-pillar on the driver's side. The vehicleidentification plate informs you of thegross vehicle weight rating. It is made up

328 Loading the vehicleW

heel

s an

d tir

es

of the vehicle weight, all vehicleoccupants, the fuel and the cargo. Youcan also find information about themaximum gross axle weight rating on thefront and rear axle.The maximum gross axle weight rating isthe maximum weight that can be carriedby one axle (front or rear axle). Neverexceed the maximum load or themaximum gross axle weight rating for thefront or rear axle.

Maximum permissible gross vehicleweight rating

X Specification for maximum gross vehicleweight : is listed in the Tire and LoadingInformation placard: "The combined weightof occupants and cargo should neverexceed XXX kilograms or XXX lbs."

The gross weight of all vehicle occupants,cargo, luggage and trailer load/noseweight (ifapplicable) must not exceed the specifiedvalue.

i The specifications shown on the Tire andLoading Information placard in theillustration are examples. The maximumpermissible gross vehicle weight rating isvehicle-specific and may differ from that inthe illustration. You can find the validmaximum permissible gross vehicle weightrating for your vehicle on the Tire andLoading Information placard.

Number of seats

Maximum number of seats : indicates themaximum number of occupants allowed totravel in the vehicle. This information can befound on the Tire and Loading Informationplacard.

i The specifications shown on the Tire andLoading Information placard in theillustration are examples. The number ofseats is vehicle-specific and can differ fromthe details shown. The number of seats inyour vehicle can be found on the Tire andLoading Information placard.

Determining the correct load limit

Step-by-step instructionsThe following steps have been developed asrequired of all manufacturers under Title 49,Code of U.S. Federal Regulations, Part 575pursuant to the "National Traffic and MotorVehicle Safety Act of 1966".X Step 1: Locate the statement "The

combined weight of occupants and cargoshould never exceed XXX kg or XXX lbs." onyour vehicle’s Tire and Loading Informationplacard.

X Step 2: Determine the combined weight ofthe driver and passengers that will be ridingin your vehicle.

X Step 3: Subtract the combined weight ofthe driver and passengers from XXXkilograms or XXX lbs.

Loading the vehicle 329

Whe

els

and

tires

Z

X Step 4: The resulting figure equals theavailable amount of cargo and luggage loadcapacity. For example, if the "XXX" amountequals 1400 lbs and there will be five 150-pound passengers in your vehicle, theamount of available cargo and luggage loadcapacity is 650 lbs (1400 – 750 (5 x 150)= 650 lbs).

X Step 5: Determine the combined weight ofluggage and cargo being loaded on thevehicle. That weight may not safely exceedthe available cargo and luggage loadcapacity calculated in step 4.

X Step 6 (if applicable): If your vehicle willbe towing a trailer, load from your trailerwill be transferred to your vehicle. Thisreduces the available cargo and luggageload capacity of your vehicle(Y page 358).

330 Loading the vehicleW

heel

s an

d tir

es

Example: steps 1 to 3The following table shows examples on how to calculate total and cargo load capacities withvarying seating configurations and number and size of occupants. The following examples usea maximum load of 1500 lbs (680 kg). This is for illustration purposes only. Make sure youare using the actual load limit for your vehicle stated on your vehicle's Tire and LoadingInformation placard (Y page 328).The higher the weight of all the occupants, the smaller the maximum load for luggage.Additional information when towing a trailer (Y page 358).Step 1

Example 1 Example 2 Example 3

Combined maximum weight of occupants and cargo (data from the Tire and Loading Information placard)

1500 lbs (680 kg) 1500 lbs (680 kg) 1500 lbs (680 kg)

Step 2

Example 1 Example 2 Example 3

Number of people in the vehicle (driver and occupants)

5 3 1

Distribution of the occupants

Front: 2Rear: 3

Front: 1Rear: 2

Front: 1

Weight of the occupants

Occupant 1: 150 lbs(68 kg)Occupant 2: 180 lbs(82 kg)Occupant 3: 160 lbs(73 kg)Occupant 4: 140 lbs(63 kg)Occupant 5: 120 lbs(54 kg)

Occupant 1: 200 lbs(91 kg)Occupant 2: 190 lbs(86 kg)Occupant 3: 150 lbs(68 kg)

Occupant 1:150 lbs (68 kg)

Gross weight of all occupants

750 lbs (340 kg) 540 lbs (245 kg) 150 lbs (68 kg)

Loading the vehicle 331

Whe

els

and

tires

Z

Step 3

Example 1 Example 2 Example 3

Permissible load (maximum gross vehicle weight rating from the Tire and Loading Information placard minus the gross weight of all occupants)

1500 lbs (680 kg)Ò750 lbs (340 kg) =750 lbs (340 kg)

1500 lbs (680 kg)Ò540 lbs (245 kg) =960 lbs (435 kg)

1500 lbs (680 kg)Ò150 lbs (68 kg) =1350 lbs (612 kg)

Vehicle identification plateEven if you have calculated the total loadcarefully, you should still make sure that thegross vehicle weight rating and the gross axleweight rating are not exceeded. Details canbe found on the vehicle identification plate onthe B-pillar on the driver's side of the vehicle(Y page 328).Permissible gross vehicle weight: thegross weight of the vehicle, all passengers,load and trailer load/noseweight (ifapplicable) must not exceed the permissiblegross vehicle weight.Gross axle weight rating: the maximumpermissible weight that can be carried by oneaxle (front or rear axle).To ensure that your vehicle does not exceedthe maximum permissible values (grossvehicle weight and maximum gross axleweight rating), have your loaded vehicle(including driver, occupants, cargo, and fulltrailer load if applicable) weighed on asuitable vehicle weighbridge.

Trailer load/noseweightThe trailer load/noseweight affects the grossweight of the vehicle. If a trailer is attached,the trailer load/noseweight is included in theload along with occupants and luggage. Thetrailer load/noseweight is usually

approximately 10% of the gross weight of thetrailer and its load.Only use a trailer tow hitch that has beenapproved for your vehicle by Mercedes-Benz.Comply with the manufacturer's operatinginstructions for operation, care andmaintenance.

Uniform Tire Quality GradingStandards

Overview of Tire Quality GradingStandards

Uniform Tire Quality Grading Standards areU.S. government specifications. Theirpurpose is to provide drivers with uniformreliable information on tire performance data.Tire manufacturers have to grade tires usingthree performance factors: : tread weargrade, ; traction grade and = temperaturegrade. These regulations do not apply to

332 Uniform Tire Quality Grading StandardsW

heel

s an

d tir

es

Canada. Nevertheless, all tires sold in NorthAmerica are provided with the correspondingquality grading markings on the sidewall ofthe tire.Where applicable, the tire gradinginformation can be found on the tire sidewallbetween the tread shoulder and maximumtire width.Example:RTreadwear grade: 200RTraction grade: AARTemperature grade: AAll passenger car tires must conform to thestatutory safety requirements in addition tothese grades.

i The actual values for tires are vehicle-specific and may deviate from the values inthe illustration.

TreadwearThe treadwear grade is a comparative ratingbased on the wear rate of the tire when testedunder controlled conditions on a specifiedU.S. government course. For example, a tiregraded 150 would wear one and one-halftimes as well on the government test track asa tire graded 100.The relative performance of tires dependsupon the actual conditions of their use,however, and may depart significantly fromthe norm, due to variations in driving habits,service practices and differences in roadcharacteristics and climate conditions.

Traction

G WARNINGThe traction grade assigned to this tire isbased on straight-ahead braking tractiontests, and does not include acceleration,cornering, hydroplaning, or peak tractioncharacteristics.

! Avoid wheelspin. This can lead to damageto the drive train.

The traction grades, from highest to lowest,are AA, A, B, and C. Those grades representthe tire's ability to stop on a wet surface asmeasured under controlled conditions onspecified government test surfaces of asphaltand concrete. A tire marked C may have poortraction performance.The safe speed on a wet, snow covered or icyroad is always lower than on dry roadsurfaces.You should pay special attention to roadconditions when temperatures are aroundfreezing point.Mercedes-Benz recommends a minimumtread depth of ã in (4 mm) on all four wintertires. Observe the legally required minimumtire tread depth (Y page 319). Winter tires canreduce the braking distance on snow-coveredsurfaces in comparison with summer tires.The braking distance is still much further thanon surfaces that are not icy or covered withsnow. Take appropriate care when driving.Further information on winter tires (M+Stires) (Y page 320).

Temperature

G WARNINGThe temperature grade for this tire isestablished for a tire that is properly inflatedand not overloaded. Excessive speed,underinflation, or excessive loading, eitherseparately or in combination, can causeexcessive heat build-up and possible tirefailure.

The temperature grades are A (the highest),B, and C. These represent the tire'sresistance to the generation of heat and itsability to dissipate heat when tested undercontrolled conditions on a specified indoorlaboratory test wheel. Sustained hightemperature can cause the material of the tireto degenerate and reduce tire life, and

Uniform Tire Quality Grading Standards 333

Whe

els

and

tires

Z

excessive temperature can lead to suddentire failure. The grade C corresponds to a levelof performance which all passenger car tiresmust meet under the Federal Motor VehicleSafety Standard No. 109. Grades B and Arepresent higher levels of performance on thelaboratory test wheel than the minimumrequired by law.

Tire labeling

Tire labeling overview

: Uniform tire Quality Grading Standard(Y page 338)

; DOT tire Identification Number(Y page 337)

= Maximum tire load (Y page 337)? Maximum tire pressures (Y page 324)A ManufacturerB Tire material (Y page 337)C Tire size designation, load-bearing

capacity and speed rating (Y page 334)D Load identification (Y page 336)E Tire name

The markings described above are on the tirein addition to the tire name (salesdesignation) and the manufacturer's name.

i Tire data is vehicle-specific and maydeviate from the data in the example.

Tire size designation, load-bearingcapacity and speed rating

G WARNINGExceeding the stated tire load-bearingcapacity and the approved maximum speedcould lead to tire damage or the tire bursting.There is a risk of accident.Therefore, only use tire types and sizesapproved for your vehicle model. Observe thetire load rating and speed rating required foryour vehicle.

: Tire width; Height-width ratio in percentage= Tire code? Rim diameterA Load bearing indexB Speed rating

General: depending on the manufacturer'sstandards, a letter is imprinted into the tirewall before the size description.If there is no letter preceding the sizedescription (as shown above): these arepassenger vehicle tires according toEuropean manufacturing standards.If "P" precedes the size description:passenger vehicle tires according to U.S.manufacturing standards.

334 Tire labelingW

heel

s an

d tir

es

If "P" precedes the size description: lighttruck tires according to U.S. manufacturingstandards.If "T" precedes the size description: these arecompact emergency spare wheels at high tirepressure, to be used only temporarily in anemergency.Tire width: tire width : shows the nominaltire width in millimeters.Height-width ratio: height-width ratio ; isthe ratio between tire height and tire width.The aspect ratio is calculated by dividing thetire width by the tire height. The resultingquotient is given as a percentage.Tire code: tire code = shows the tire type."R" represents radial tires; "D" representsdiagonal tires; "B" represents diagonal radialtires.Optionally, tires with a maximum speed ofover 149 mph (240 km/h) may have "ZR" inthe size description, depending on themanufacturer (e.g. 245/40 ZR 18).Rim diameter: rim diameter ? is thediameter of the bead seat, not the diameterof the rim flange. The rim diameter isspecified in inches (in).Load bearing index: B load bearing indexA (also load index) is a numerical code thatspecifies the maximum load-bearing capacityof a tire.Do not overload the tires by exceeding thespecified load limit. The maximumpermissible load can be found on thevehicle's Tire and Loading Informationplacard on the B-pillar on the driver's side(Y page 328).Example:Load-bearing index 91 indicates a maximumload of 1356 lbs (615 kg) that the tires canbear. For further information on the maximumtire load in kilograms and pounds, see(Y page 337).For further information on the load bearingindex, see "Load index" (Y page 336).

Speed rating: speed rating B specifies theapproved maximum speed of the tire.

i Tire data is vehicle-specific and maydeviate from the data in the example.

Regardless of the speed rating, alwaysobserve the speed limits. Drive carefully andadapt your driving style to the trafficconditions.

i Since 2009, tires in Europe whichcorrespond to the noise limitations ofDirective ECE-R 117 show an >>S<<(Sound) mark. This identification followsthe type approval number and has noconnection with the speed rating.

Summer tires

Index Speed rating

Q up to 100 mph (160 km/h)

R up to 106 mph (170 km/h)

S up to 112 mph (180 km/h)

T up to 118 mph (190 km/h)

H up to 130 mph (210 km/h)

V up to 149 mph (240 km/h)

W up to 168 mph (270 km/h)

Y up to 186 mph (300 km/h)

ZR...Y up to 186 mph (300 km/h)

ZR...(..Y) over 186 mph (300 km/h)

ZR over 149 mph (240 km/h)

ROptionally, tires with a maximum speed ofover 149 mph (240 km/h) may have "ZR"in the size description, depending on themanufacturer (e.g. 245/40 ZR18).The service specification is made up ofload-bearing index A and speed ratingB.RIf the size description of your tire includes

"ZR" and there are no service

Tire labeling 335

Whe

els

and

tires

Z

specifications, ask the tire manufacturer inorder to find out the maximum speed.If a service specification is available, themaximum speed is limited according to thespeed rating in the service specification.Example: 245/40 ZR 18 97 Y. In thisexample, "97 Y" is the service specification.The letter "Y" represents the speed ratingand the maximum speed of the tire islimited to 186 mph(300 km/h).RThe size description for all tires with

maximum speeds of over 186 mph(300 km/h) must include "ZR" and theservice specification must be given inparentheses. Example:275/40 ZR 18 (99 Y). The speed rating "(Y)"indicates that the maximum speed of thetire is over 186 mph (300 km/h). Ask thetire manufacturer about the maximumspeed.

All-weather tires and winter tires

Index Speed rating

Q M+S4 up to 100 mph (160 km/h)

T M+S4 up to 118 mph (190 km/h)

H M+S4 up to 130 mph (210 km/h)

V M+S4 up to 149 mph (240 km/h)

i Not all tires with the M+S marking providethe driving characteristics of winter tires.In addition to the M+S marking, winter tiresalso have the i snowflake symbol onthe tire wall. Tires with this marking fulfillthe requirements of the RubberManufacturers Association (RMA) and theRubber Association of Canada (RAC).These tires have been developedspecifically for driving on snow.

When the electronic speed limiter is set, yourvehicle is prevented from exceeding 130 mph(210 km/h).

The speed rating of tires mounted at thefactory may be higher than the maximumspeed that the electronic speed limiterpermits.Make sure that your tires have the requiredspeed rating, e.g. when buying new tires. Therequired speed rating for your vehicle can befound in the "Tires" section (Y page 346).Further information about reading tire datacan be obtained from any qualified specialistworkshop.

Load index

In addition to the load bearing index, loadrating : may be imprinted after the lettersthat identify speed rating B on the sidewallof the tire (Y page 334).RIf no specification is given: no text (as in the

example above), represents a standardload (SL) tireRXL or Extra Load: represents a reinforced

tireRLight Load: represents a light load tireRC, D, E: represents a load range that

depends on the maximum load that the tirecan carry at a certain pressure

i Tire data is vehicle-specific and maydeviate from the data in the example.

4 Or M+Si for winter tires.

336 Tire labelingW

heel

s an

d tir

es

Maximum load rating

Maximum tire load : is the maximumpermissible weight for which the tire isapproved.Do not overload the tires by exceeding thespecified load limit. The maximumpermissible load can be found on thevehicle's Tire and Loading Informationplacard on the B-pillar on the driver's side(Y page 328).

i The actual values for tires are vehicle-specific and may deviate from the values inthe illustration.

DOT, Tire Identification Number (TIN)U.S. tire regulations prescribe that everymanufacturer of new tires or retreader has toimprint a TIN in or on the sidewall of each tireproduced.

The TIN is a unique identification number. TheTIN enables tire manufacturers to informpurchasers of recalls and other safety-

relevant matters. It makes it possible for thepurchaser to easily identify the affected tires.The TIN is made up of manufactureridentification code ;, tire size =, tire typecode ? and manufacturing date A.DOT (Department of Transportation): tiresymbol : indicates that the tire complieswith the requirements of the U.S. Departmentof Transportation.Manufacturer identification code: manufacturer identification code ; providesdetails on the tire manufacturer. New tireshave a code with two symbols. Retreadedtires have a code with four symbols.For further information about retreaded tires,see (Y page 318).Tire size: identifier = describes the tire size.Tire type code: tire type code ? can beused by the manufacturer as a code todescribe specific characteristics of the tire.Date of manufacture: date of manufactureA provides information about the age of atire. The first and second positions representthe week of manufacture, starting with "01"for the first calendar week. Positions threeand four represent the year of manufacture.For example, a tire that is marked with"3208", was manufactured in week 32 in2008.

i Tire data is vehicle-specific and maydeviate from the data in the example.

Tire characteristics

Tire labeling 337

Whe

els

and

tires

Z

This information describes the type of tirecord and the number of layers insidewall : and under tire tread ;.

i Tire data is vehicle-specific and maydeviate from the data in the example.

Definition of terms for tires andloading

Tire ply composition and material usedDescribes the number of layers or the numberof rubber-coated belts in the tread and thesidewall of the tire. These are made of steel,nylon, polyester and other materials.

BarMetric unit for tire pressure.14.5038 pounds per square inch (psi) and100 kilopascals (kPa) are the equivalent of1 bar.

DOT (Department of Transportation)DOT marked tires fulfill the requirements ofthe United States Department ofTransportation.

Normal occupant weightThe number of occupants for which thevehicle is designed multiplied by68 kilograms (150 lbs).

Uniform Tire Quality Grading StandardsA uniform standard to grade the quality oftires with regards to tread quality, tire tractionand temperature characteristics. Ratings aredetermined by tire manufacturers using U.S.government testing procedures. The ratingsare molded into the sidewall of the tire.

Recommended tire pressureThe recommended tire pressure applies tothe tires mounted at the factory.

The Tire and Loading Information placardcontains the recommended tire pressures forcold tires on a fully loaded vehicle and for themaximum permissible vehicle speed.The tire pressure table contains therecommended pressures for cold tires forvarious operating conditions, i.e. differingload and speed conditions.

Increased vehicle weight due tooptional equipmentThis is the combined weight of all standardand optional equipment available for thevehicle, regardless of whether it is actuallyinstalled on the vehicle or not.

RimThis is the part of the wheel on which the tireis mounted.

GAWR (Gross Axle Weight Rating)The GAWR is the maximum gross axle weightrating. The actual load on an axle must neverexceed the gross axle weight rating. Thegross axle weight rating can be found on thevehicle identification plate on the B-pillar onthe driver's side.

Speed ratingThe speed rating is part of the tireidentification. It specifies the speed range forwhich the tire is approved.

GTW (Gross Trailer Weight)The GTW is the weight of a trailer includingthe weight of the load, luggage, accessoriesetc. on the trailer.

GVW (Gross Vehicle Weight)The gross vehicle weight includes the weightof the vehicle including fuel, tools, the sparewheel, accessories installed, occupants,luggage and the drawbar noseweight, ifapplicable. The gross vehicle weight must not

338 Tire labelingW

heel

s an

d tir

es

exceed the gross vehicle weight rating GVWRas specified on the vehicle identification plateon the B-pillar on the driver's side.

GVWR (Gross Vehicle Weight Rating)The GVWR is the maximum permissible grossweight of a fully loaded vehicle (the weight ofthe vehicle including all accessories,occupants, fuel, luggage and the drawbarnoseweight, if applicable). The gross vehicleweight rating is specified on the vehicleidentification plate on the B-pillar on thedriver's side.

Maximum loaded vehicle weightThe maximum weight is the sum of:Rthe curb weight of the vehicleRthe weight of the accessoriesRthe load limitRthe weight of the factory installed optional

equipment

Kilopascal (kPa)Metric unit for tire pressure. 6.9 kPacorresponds to 1 psi. Another unit for tirepressure is bar. 100 kilopascals (kPa) are theequivalent of 1 bar.

Load indexIn addition to the load-bearing index, the loadindex may also be imprinted on the sidewallof the tire. This specifies the load-bearingcapacity more precisely.

Curb weightThe weight of a vehicle with standardequipment including the maximum capacityof fuel, oil and coolant. It also includes the air-conditioning system and optional equipmentif these are installed in the vehicle, but doesnot include passengers or luggage.

Maximum load ratingThe maximum tire load is the maximumpermissible weight in kilograms or lbs forwhich a tire is approved.

Maximum permissible tire pressureMaximum permissible tire pressure for onetire.

Maximum load on one tireMaximum load on one tire. This is calculatedby dividing the maximum axle load of one axleby two.

PSI (pounds per square inch)A standard unit of measure for tire pressure.

Aspect ratioRelationship between tire height and tirewidth in percent.

Tire pressureThis is pressure inside the tire applying anoutward force to each square inch of the tire'ssurface. The tire pressure is specified inpounds per square inch (psi), in kilopascal(kPa) or in bar. The tire pressure should onlybe corrected when the tires are cold.

Cold tire pressureThe tires are cold:Rif the vehicle has been parked without

direct sunlight on the tires for at least threehours andRif the vehicle has not been driven further

than 1 mile (1.6 km)

TreadThe part of the tire that comes into contactwith the road.

Tire labeling 339

Whe

els

and

tires

Z

BeadThe tire bead ensures that the tire sitssecurely on the wheel. There are several steelwires in the bead to prevent the tire fromcoming loose from the wheel rim.

SidewallThe part of the tire between the tread and thebead.

Weight of optional extrasThe combined weight of those optional extrasthat weigh more than the replaced standardparts and more than 2.3 kg (5 lbs). Theseoptional extras, such as high-performancebrakes, level control, a roof rack or a high-performance battery, are not included in thecurb weight and the weight of theaccessories.

TIN (Tire Identification Number)This is a unique identifier which can be usedby a tire manufacturer to identify tires, forexample for a product recall, and thus identifythe purchasers. The TIN is made up of themanufacturer's identity code, tire size, tiretype code and the manufacturing date.

Load bearing indexThe load bearing index (also load index) is acode that contains the maximum load bearingcapacity of a tire.

TractionTraction is the result of friction between thetires and the road surface.

TWR (Tongue Weight Rating)The TWR specifies the maximum permissibleweight that the ball coupling of the trailer towhitch can support.

Treadwear indicatorsNarrow bars (tread wear bars) that aredistributed over the tire tread. If the tire treadis level with the bars, the wear limit of á in(1.6 mm) has been reached.

Occupant distributionThe distribution of occupants in a vehicle attheir designated seating positions.

Total load limitNominal load and luggage load plus 150 lbs(68 kg) multiplied by the number of seats inthe vehicle.

Changing a wheel

Flat tireThe "Breakdown assistance" section(Y page 304) contains information and noteson how to deal with a flat tire.

Interchanging the wheels

G WARNINGRotate front and rear wheels only if the tiresare of the same dimension.If your vehicle is equipped with mixed-sizetires (different tire dimensions front vs. rear),tire rotation is not possible.

G WARNINGHave the tightening torque checked afterchanging a wheel. The wheels could comeloose if they are not tightened to a torque of96 lb-ft (130 Nm).Only use genuine Mercedes-Benz wheel boltsspecified for your vehicle's rims.

! On vehicles equipped with a tire pressuremonitor, electronic components arelocated in the wheel.

340 Changing a wheelW

heel

s an

d tir

es

Tire-mounting tools should not be usednear the valve. This could damage theelectronic components.Only have tires changed at a qualifiedspecialist workshop.

Interchanging the front and rear wheels ofdiffering dimensions can render the generaloperating permit invalid.Always pay attention to the instructions andsafety notices in the section on "Changing awheel and mounting a spare wheel"(Y page 341).The wear patterns on the front and rear tiresdiffer, depending on the operating conditions.Rotate the wheels before a clear wear patternhas formed on the tires. Front tires typicallywear more on the shoulders and the rear tiresin the center.If your vehicle's tire configuration allows, youcan rotate the wheels according to theintervals in the tire manufacturer's warrantybook in your vehicle documents. If nowarranty book is available, the tires should bereplaced every 3000 to6000 miles(5000 to 10,000 km), or earlier iftire wear necessitates it. Do not change thedirection of wheel rotation.Clean the contact surfaces of the wheel andthe brake disc thoroughly every time a wheelis interchanged. Check the tire pressure andreactivate the tire pressure monitor(Y page 325) if necessary.

Direction of rotationTires with a specified direction of rotationhave additional benefits, e.g. if there is a riskof hydroplaning. You will only gain thesebenefits if the correct direction of rotation isobserved.An arrow on the sidewall of the tire indicatesits correct direction of rotation.You may mount the spare wheel against thedirection of rotation. Adhere to the timerestriction on use as well as the speedlimitation specified on the spare wheel.

Storing wheelsStore tires that are not being used in a cool,dry and preferably dark place. Protect thetires from oil, grease, gasoline and diesel.

Cleaning the wheels

G WARNINGDo not use power washers with circular-jetnozzles (dirt grinders) to clean your vehicle, inparticular the tires. You could otherwisedamage the tires and cause an accident.

Mounting a wheel

Preparing the vehicle

G WARNINGYou must remove the spare wheel from thespare wheel carrier before lifting the vehicle.Otherwise the vehicle could fall off the jackand injure you or others.

X Prepare the vehicle as described(Y page 304).

X Remove the vehicle tool kit and the jack(Y page 302).

X Secure the vehicle to prevent it from rollingaway.

X Remove the spare wheel from the sparewheel bracket (Y page 303).

i Vehicles without a spare wheel oremergency spare wheel are not equippedwith a tire-change tool kit at the factory. Formore information on which tools arerequired to perform a wheel change on yourvehicle e.g. lug wrench or jack, consult anauthorized Mercedes-Benz Center.

Securing the vehicle to prevent it fromrolling awayX On level ground: place chocks or other

suitable items under the front and rear of

Changing a wheel 341

Whe

els

and

tires

Z

the wheel that is diagonally opposite thewheel you wish to change.

X On downhill gradients: place chocks orother suitable items in front of the wheelsof the front and rear axle.

Raising the vehicle

G WARNINGIf you do not position the jack correctly at theappropriate jacking point of the vehicle, thejack could tip over with the vehicle raised.There is a risk of injury.Only position the jack at the appropriatejacking point of the vehicle. The base of thejack must be positioned vertically, directlyunder the jacking point of the vehicle.

! The jack is designed exclusively forjacking up the vehicle at the jacking points.Otherwise, your vehicle could be damaged.

The following must be observed when raisingthe vehicle:Rto raise the vehicle, only use the vehicle-

specific jack that has been tested andapproved by Mercedes-Benz. If usedincorrectly, the jack could tip over with thevehicle raised.Rthe jack is designed only to raise and hold

the vehicle for a short time while a wheelis being changed. It is not suited forperforming maintenance work under thevehicle.Ravoid changing the wheel on uphill and

downhill slopes.Rbefore raising the vehicle, secure it from

rolling away by applying the parking brakeand inserting wheel chocks. Neverdisengage the parking brake while thevehicle is raised.Rthe jack must be placed on a firm, flat and

non-slip surface. On a loose surface, alarge, load-bearing underlay must be used.On a slippery surface, a non-slip underlaymust be used, e.g. rubber mats.

Rdo not use wooden blocks or similarobjects as a jack underlay. Otherwise, thejack will not be able to achieve its load-bearing capacity due to the restrictedheight.Rmake sure that the distance between the

underside of the tires and the ground doesnot exceed 1.2 inches (3 cm).Rnever place your hands and feet under the

raised vehicle.Rnever lie under the raised vehicle.Rnever start the engine when the vehicle is

raised.Rnever open or close a door or the tailgate

when the vehicle is raised.Rmake sure that no persons are present in

the vehicle when the vehicle is raised.

X Using lug wrench :, loosen the bolts onthe wheel you wish to change by about onefull turn. Do not unscrew the wheel boltscompletely.

Pump lever; Notch on pump lever

342 Changing a wheelW

heel

s an

d tir

es

X Assemble the pump lever for the jack. It canbe found with the vehicle tool kit(Y page 302).

X Turn pressure release screw = clockwiseas far as it will go using notch ; on thepump lever.Pressure release screw = is closed.

i Do not turn pressure release screw = bymore than one to two revolutions.Otherwise, hydraulic fluid could escape.

X Set jack : on solid ground.X Position jack : on the axle carrier

tube ; of the front or rear axle. Jack :must always stand vertically, even onslopes.Make sure that jack : is correctlypositioned under axle carrier tube ;. Thefront or rear axle must sit securely in therecess of jack :.

X Raise the vehicle by pumping in thedirection of the arrow, until the tire is amaximum of 1.2 in (3 cm) off the ground.

Removing a wheel! Do not place wheel bolts in sand or on a

dirty surface. The bolt and wheel hubthreads could otherwise be damaged whenyou screw them in.

X Unscrew the wheel bolts.X Remove the wheel.

Mounting a new wheel

G WARNINGAlways replace wheel bolts that are damagedor rusted.Never oil or grease wheel bolts. This couldcause the bolts to loosen in the wheel hub.

G WARNINGAlways replace wheel bolts that are damagedor rusted.Never apply oil or grease to wheel bolts.Damaged wheel hub threads should berepaired immediately. Do not continue todrive under these circumstances! Contact anauthorized Mercedes-Benz Center or callRoadside Assistance.Incorrect wheel bolts or improperly tightenedwheel bolts can cause the wheel to come off.This could cause an accident. Make sure touse the correct wheel bolts.

G WARNINGOnly use genuine Mercedes-Benz wheel bolts.Other wheel bolts may come loose.Do not tighten the wheel bolts when thevehicle is raised. Otherwise, the vehicle couldfall off the jack.

! To prevent damage to the paintwork, holdthe wheel securely against the wheel hubwhile screwing in the first wheel bolt.

Always pay attention to the instructions andsafety notes in the "Changing a wheel"section (Y page 340).

Changing a wheel 343

Whe

els

and

tires

Z

X Clean the wheel and wheel hub contactsurfaces.

X Place the new wheel on the wheel hub andpush it on.

X Tighten the wheel bolts until they arefinger-tight.

Lowering the vehicle

G WARNINGThe wheels could work loose if the wheel nutsand bolts are not tightened to the specifiedtightening torque. There is a risk of accident.Have the tightening torque immediatelychecked at a qualified specialist workshopafter a wheel is changed.

X Open the pressure release screw on thejack using the pump lever (Y page 342) byapproximately one turn.

X Lower the vehicle until it is once againstanding firmly on the ground.

X Place the jack to one side.X Tighten the wheel bolts evenly in a

crosswise pattern in the sequenceindicated (: to A). The specifiedtightening torque is 96 lb-ft (130 Nm).

X Disassemble the pump lever.X Push the jack piston back in and close the

drain plug.X Use the bolts to secure the faulty wheel to

the spare wheel bracket (Y page 303).

X Stow the jack and the vehicle tools in thevehicle again.

X Check the tire pressure of the newlyinstalled wheel and adjust it if necessary.A table with the tire pressures for yourvehicle can be found on the B-pillar on thedriver's side.

Wheel and tire combinations

General notes

G WARNINGReplace rims or tires with the samedesignation, manufacturer and type as shownon the original part. For further informationcontact an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center.If incorrectly sized rims and tires aremounted, the wheel brakes or suspensioncomponents can be damaged. Also, theoperating clearance of the wheels and thetires may no longer be correct.

G WARNINGReplace rims or tires with the samedesignation, manufacturer and type as shownon the original part. For further informationcontact an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center.If incorrectly sized rims and tires aremounted, the wheel brakes or suspensioncomponents can be damaged. Also, theoperating clearance of the wheels and thetires may no longer be correct.

G WARNINGIf you notice sudden significant vibrations orunusual handling performance or if yoususpect that damage has occurred to thevehicle, you should activate the hazardwarning lamps, gently reduce speed andcarefully head for an area that is located at asafe distance from the road.Check the tires and the underside of thevehicle for damage. If the vehicle seemsunsafe, have the vehicle towed away to the

344 Wheel and tire combinationsW

heel

s an

d tir

es

nearest Mercedes-Benz Center or tire dealerto be repaired.

G WARNINGDo not drive with a flat tire. A flat tire affectsthe ability to steer or brake the vehicle. Youmight lose control of the vehicle. Continueddriving with a flat tire or driving at high speedwith a flat tire will cause excessive heat build-up and possibly a fire.

! For safety reasons, Mercedes-Benzrecommends that you only use tires,wheels and accessories which have beenapproved by Mercedes-Benz specificallyfor your vehicle. These tires have beenspecially adapted for use with the drivingsafety systems, such as ABS or ESP®.Only use tires, wheels or accessoriestested and approved by Mercedes-Benz.Certain characteristics, e.g. handling,vehicle noise emissions or fuelconsumption, may otherwise be adverselyaffected. In addition, when driving with aload, tire dimension variations could causethe tires to come into contact with thebodywork and axle components. This couldresult in damage to the tires or the vehicle.Mercedes-Benz accepts no liability fordamage resulting from the use of tires,wheels or accessories other than thosetested and approved.Further information about wheels, tires andapproved combinations can be obtainedfrom any authorized Mercedes-BenzCenter.

i The Tire and Loading Information placardwith the recommended tire pressures isattached to the B-pillar on the driver's side.Further information about driving at highspeeds or driving with vehicle loads that arelighter than the maximum vehicle load canbe found in the tire pressure table on theinside of the fuel filler flap. Check tirepressures regularly, and only when the tiresare cold. Comply with the maintenance

recommendations of the tire manufacturerin the vehicle document wallet.

Further information on recommended tirepressures as well as tire pressures forspecific driving situations, see (Y page 338).

i Notes on the vehicle equipment – alwaysequip the vehicle with:Rtires of the same size on a given axle

(left/right)Rtires of the same type on your vehicle at

a given time (summer tires, winter tires,all-weather tires, all-terrain tires)

i The following pages contain informationon approved wheels and tire sizes forequipping your vehicle with winter tires.Winter tires are not available at the factoryas standard equipment or optional extras.If you wish to mount approved winter tireson your vehicle, wheels of appropriate sizemay also be required as the sizes of theapproved winter tires may differ from thoseof the original tires. This is dependent onthe model and the equipment installed atthe factory.The wheels and tires as well as furtherinformation can be obtained at a qualifiedspecialist workshop.

The tire and wheel combinations listed in thetables below apply to the following models:

V1 G 550

V2 G 63 AMG

i Not all wheel and tire combinations areavailable at the factory for all countries.

Wheel and tire combinations 345

Whe

els

and

tires

Z

Tires

G 550

All-weather tires

Tires (radial tires) Alloy wheels

265/60 R18 110VM+S

7.5 J x 18 H2Wheel offset:1.69 in(43 mm)

i You can obtain information about tiresand tire dimensions that are not listed hereat any authorized Mercedes-Benz Center.

Spare wheelAll-weather tires

tires (radial tires) Alloy wheels

265/60 R18 110VM+S

7.5 J x 18 H2Wheel offset:1.69 in (43 mm)

i You can obtain information about tiresand tire dimensions that are not listed hereat any authorized Mercedes-Benz Center.

G 63 AMG

Summer tires

Tires Alloy wheels

275/50 R20 113W XLUse of snow chainsnot permitted.Tire manufacturerrecommended byMercedes-Benz:Yokohama.

9.5J x 20 H2 ET 50

i You can obtain information about tiresand tire dimensions that are not listed hereat any authorized Mercedes-Benz Center.

Winter tires

Tires Alloy wheels

265/55 R19 109HM+STire manufacturerrecommended byMercedes-Benz:Dunlop.

9.5J x 19 H2 ET 50

i You can obtain information about tiresand tire dimensions that are not listed hereat any authorized Mercedes-Benz Center.

Spare wheel! The spare wheel must be inflated to the

maximum tire pressure given in the tableon the inside of the fuel filler flap.

Tires Alloy wheels

265/55 R19 109HM+STire manufacturerrecommended byMercedes-Benz:Dunlop.

9.5J x 19 H2 ET 50

i You can obtain information about tiresand tire dimensions that are not listed hereat any authorized Mercedes-Benz Center.

346 Wheel and tire combinationsW

heel

s an

d tir

es

Useful information ............................ 348Genuine Mercedes-Benz parts ......... 348Warranty ............................................ 348Identification plates ......................... 349Service products and filling capaci-ties ..................................................... 350Vehicle data ...................................... 357Trailer tow hitch ................................ 358

347

Tech

nica

l dat

a

Useful information

i This Operator's Manual describes allmodels and all standard and optionalequipment of your vehicle available at thetime of publication of the Operator'sManual. Country-specific differences arepossible. Please note that your vehicle maynot be equipped with all featuresdescribed. This also applies to safety-related systems and functions.

i Read the information on qualifiedspecialist workshops: (Y page 23).

Genuine Mercedes-Benz parts

G WARNINGDriving safety may be impaired if non-approved parts, tires and wheels or safety-relevant accessories are used.This could lead to malfunctions in safety-relevant systems, e.g. the brake system. Thiscould cause you to lose control of your vehicleand cause an accident.For this reason, Mercedes-Benz recommendsthat you use genuine Mercedes-Benz parts orparts of equal quality. Only use tires, wheelsand accessories that have been specificallyapproved for your vehicle.

H Environmental noteDaimler AG also supplies reconditioned majorassemblies and parts which are of the samequality as new parts. They are covered by thesame Limited Warranty entitlements as newparts.

! The use of non-approved parts couldimpair the vehicle's safety. For this reason,Mercedes-Benz recommends genuineMercedes-Benz parts and approvedconversion parts and accessories for yourvehicle model.

! Air bags and Emergency TensioningDevices, as well as control units andsensors for these restraint systems, may beinstalled in the following areas of yourvehicle:RdoorsRdoor pillarsRdoor sillsRseatsRcockpitRinstrument clusterRcenter consoleDo not install accessories such as audiosystems in these areas. Do not carry outrepairs or welding. You could impair theoperating efficiency of the restraintsystems.Have aftermarket accessories installed ata qualified specialist workshop.

Genuine Mercedes-Benz parts are subject tostrict quality control. Each part has beenspecially developed, manufactured orselected for Mercedes-Benz vehicles andfine-tuned for them. Only genuine Mercedes-Benz parts should therefore be used.More than 300,000 different genuine partsare available for Mercedes-Benz models.All Mercedes-Benz Centers maintain a supplyof genuine Mercedes-Benz parts fornecessary service and repair work. Inaddition, strategically located parts deliverycenters provide quick and reliable partsservice.Always specify the vehicle identificationnumber (VIN) (Y page 349) and the enginenumber (Y page 350) when ordering genuineMercedes-Benz parts.

Warranty

Your vehicle is covered under the terms of thewarranties printed in the Service andWarranty Information booklet.

348 WarrantyTe

chni

cal d

ata

Your authorized Mercedes-Benz Center willreplace and repair all factory-installed partsin accordance with the following warrantyterms and conditions:RNew Vehicle Limited WarrantyREmission Systems WarrantyREmission Performance WarrantyRCalifornia, Connecticut, Maine,

Massachusetts, New York, Pennsylvania,Rhode Island and Vermont EmissionControl System WarrantyRState warranty enforcement laws (Lemon

Laws)Replacement parts and accessories arecovered by the Mercedes-Benz Parts andAccessories warranties. These are availableat any authorized Mercedes-Benz Center.

i If you lose the Service and WarrantyInformation booklet, contact an authorizedMercedes-Benz Center to arrange areplacement. It will be mailed to you.

Identification plates

Vehicle identification plate withvehicle identification number (VIN)and paint code number

X Open the driver's door.You will see vehicle identification plate :.

Example: vehicle identification plate (USA only); VIN= Paint code

Example: vehicle identification plate (Canada only); VIN= Paint code

i The data shown on the vehicleidentification plate is used only as anexample. This data is different for everyvehicle and can deviate from the datashown here. The correct data for yourvehicle can be found on the vehicleidentification plate that is mounted on yourvehicle.

Identification plates 349

Tech

nica

l dat

a

Z

Vehicle identification number (VIN)

: VIN (stamped into the chassis on theright-hand side, when viewed in thedirection of travel)

: VIN (on the lower edge of the windshield)

The VIN can be found in the followinglocations:Ron the vehicle identification plate

(Y page 349)Rstamped into the chassis on the right-hand

side (when viewed in the direction of travel)Ron the lower edge of the windshield

Engine number

Example: G 550: Plate with information on emissions

testing, including the confirmation of theemission standards at U.S. federal levelas well as for California

; Engine number (stamped into thecrankcase)

Service products and fillingcapacities

Important safety notes

G WARNINGComply with all valid regulations with respectto handling, storing and disposing of servicefluids. Otherwise, you could endangerpersons or the environment.Keep service fluids out of the reach ofchildren.For health reasons, you should preventservice fluids from coming into direct contactwith your skin or clothing.If a service fluid is swallowed, contact aphysician immediately.

H Environmental noteDispose of service products in anenvironmentally responsible manner.

Service products include the following:RFuelsRLubricants (e.g. engine oil, transmission oil)

350 Service products and filling capacitiesTe

chni

cal d

ata

RCoolantRBrake fluidRWindshield washer fluidRClimate control system refrigerantComponents and service products must bematched. You should therefore only useproducts that have been tested and approvedby Mercedes-Benz.Information on tested and approved productscan be obtained at an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center or on the Internet at http://bevo.mercedes-benz.com.You can recognize service products approvedby Mercedes-Benz by the followinginscription on the containers:RMB-Freigabe (e.g. MB-Freigabe 229.51)RMB Approval (e.g. MB Approval 229.51)Other designations or recommendationsindicate a level of quality or a specification inaccordance with an MB Sheet number (e.g.MB 229.5). They have not necessarily beenapproved by Mercedes-Benz.

Fuel

Important safety notes

G WARNINGFuel is highly flammable. If you handle fuelincorrectly, there is a risk of fire andexplosion.You must avoid fire, naked flames, creatingsparks and smoking. Switch off the engineand, if applicable, the auxiliary heating beforerefueling.

G WARNINGFuel is poisonous and hazardous to health.There is a risk of injury.You must make sure that fuel does not comeinto contact with your skin, eyes or clothingand that it is not swallowed. Do not inhale fuelvapors. Keep fuel away from children.

If you or others come into contact with fuel,observe the following:RWash away fuel from skin immediately

using soap and water.RIf fuel comes into contact with your eyes,

immediately rinse them thoroughly withclean water. Seek medical assistancewithout delay.RIf fuel is swallowed, seek medical

assistance without delay. Do not inducevomiting.RImmediately change out of clothing which

has come into contact with fuel.

Tank capacity

Total capacity

All models 25.4 US gal(96.0 l)

Of which reserve

All models Approximately 3.7 US gal

(14.0 l)

Gasoline (EN 228)

Fuel grade! Do not use diesel to refuel vehicles with a

gasoline engine. Even small amounts of thewrong fuel result in damage to the fuelsystem and engine.

! You should only refuel with unleadedpremium-grade gasoline as this avoidsdamaging the catalytic converter.If engine running problems are apparent,have the cause checked immediately andrepaired. Excess unburned fuel canotherwise enter the catalytic converter,leading to overheating and possiblycausing a fire.

Service products and filling capacities 351

Tech

nica

l dat

a

Z

! To ensure the longevity and fullperformance of the engine, only premium-grade unleaded gasoline may be used.If there is no premium-grade unleadedgasoline available and regular unleadedgasoline must be used, please observe thefollowing precautions:Ronly fill the fuel tank to half full with

regular unleaded gasoline and fill the restwith premium-grade unleaded gasolineas soon as possible.Rdo not drive at the maximum speed.Ravoid sudden acceleration.Rif the vehicle is carrying a light load, e.g.

two passengers without luggage, do notallow the engine to rev above 3000 rpm.Rif the vehicle is fully loaded or is being

operated in mountainous terrain, do notdepress the accelerator pedal furtherthan Ô of the pedal travel.

! Use a filter when refueling from a fuel can.Otherwise, the fuel lines and/or injectionsystem could be blocked by particles fromthe fuel can.

Only refuel using premium-grade unleadedgasoline with a minimum octane rating of 91.Reformulated Gasoline (RFG) and/orunleaded gasoline with additives can be used.The concentration of additives in the fuel,however, must not exceed 10%, e.g.:REthanolRTAMERETBERIPARTBAFor MTBE, the concentration should notexceed 15%.The concentration of methanol in gasoline,including other additives, must not exceed3%.Using mixtures of methanol and ethanol is notpermitted. Gasohol, a mixture of 10% ethanoland 90% unleaded gasoline, may be used.

All of these mix fuels must fulfill the fuelrequirements, e.g.:Rknock resistanceRboiling pointRvapor pressureYou will usually find information about the fuelgrade on the pump. If you cannot find thelabel on the pump, ask the staff forassistance.

i For further information, consult anauthorized Mercedes-Benz Center or onthe Internet at http://www.mbusa.com(USA only).

Information on refueling (Y page 153).

AMG vehicles! Only refuel using super-grade unleaded

gasoline with at least 98 RON/88 MONthat conforms to European standardEN 228 or an equivalent specification.You could otherwise impair engine outputor damage the engine.

! Premium-grade unleaded gasoline withan octane rating of 95 RON/85 MON maybe used as a temporary measure if therecommended fuel is not available. Thismay reduce engine performance andincrease fuel consumption. Do not drive atfull throttle.

! Regular unleaded gasoline with an octanerating of 91 RON/82.5 MON may also beused as an emergency measure if therecommended fuel is not available.Doing so results in noticeably higher fuelconsumption, and the engine power outputis noticeably reduced. Avoid driving at fullthrottle.If only regular unleaded gasoline with anoctane rating of 91 RON/82.5 MON orlower is available, you must have thevehicle adapted to this fuel at a qualifiedspecialist workshop.

352 Service products and filling capacitiesTe

chni

cal d

ata

Additives! Do not refuel with low-grade fuel and do

not use fuel additives that are not testedand approved for Mercedes-Benz vehicles.Damage to or malfunctions of the fuelsystem may otherwise occur.

One of the main problems of poor fuel qualityis the forming of deposits that are createdduring the gasoline combustion process.Mercedes-Benz recommends that you usebranded fuels that have additives.If you use fuels without these additives overa longer period of time, carbon deposits maybuild up. These deposits form at the inletvalves and in the combustion chamber inparticular.This could lead to engine problems, e.g.:Rlonger engine warm-up phaseRuneven idleRengine noiseRmisfiringRloss of powerCarbon deposits may form if the availabilityof gasoline with relevant additives isinsufficient (in certain regions). In this case,Mercedes-Benz recommends additivesapproved for use in Mercedes-Benz vehicles;see http://bevo.mercedes-benz.com.For a list of approved products, consult anauthorized Mercedes-Benz Center. Complywith the instructions for use on the productlabel.Do not mix other fuel additives with fuel. Thiscauses unnecessary costs and could damagethe engine.

Engine oil

General notes! Never use engine oil or an oil filter of a

specification other than is necessary tofulfill the prescribed service intervals. Donot change the engine oil or oil filter inorder to achieve longer replacement

intervals than those prescribed. You couldotherwise cause engine damage or damageto the exhaust gas aftertreatment.Follow the instructions in the serviceinterval display regarding the oil change.Otherwise, you may damage the engine andthe exhaust gas aftertreatment.

The engine oils are matched to theperformance of Mercedes-Benz engines andservice intervals. For this reason, only useengine oils and oil filters that are approved forvehicles with a service system.For a list of approved engine oils and oil filters,consult an authorized Mercedes-Benz Centeror go to the Internet sitehttp://bevo.mercedes-benz.com (USAonly).The table shows which engine oils have beenapproved for your vehicle.

Model Enginemodel

MBApproval

G 550 273 229.5

G 63 AMG 157 229.5

i Restriction for AMG vehicles: onlyengine oils SAE 0W-40 or SAE 5W-40 maybe used.

i MB approval is indicated on the oilcontainers.

Filling capacitiesThe following values refer to an oil changeincluding the oil filter.The missing values for the following modelwere not available at the time of going toprint:RG 63 AMG

Vehicle model Capacity includingoil filter

G 550 2.4 US gal (9.0 l)

G 63 AMG

Service products and filling capacities 353

Tech

nica

l dat

a

Z

Additives! Do not use any additives in the engine oil.

This could damage the engine.

Engine oil viscosity

Viscosity describes the flow characteristicsof a fluid. If an engine oil has a high viscosity,this means that it is thick; a low viscositymeans that it is thin.Select an engine oil with an SAE (viscosity)classification suitable for the prevailingoutside temperatures. The table shows youwhich SAE classifications are to be used. Thelow-temperature characteristics of engineoils can deteriorate significantly, e.g. as aresult of aging, soot and fuel deposits. It istherefore strongly recommended that youcarry out regular oil changes using anapproved engine oil with the appropriate SAEclassification.

Refrigerant of the air-conditioningsystem

! Never use refrigerant R 12 (CFC) ormineral lubricants. Otherwise, you coulddamage the air-conditioning system.

The air-conditioning system is filled withR134a (HFC) refrigerant and a special PAGlubricant.

Brake fluid

G WARNINGOver a period of time, the brake fluid absorbsmoisture from the air; this lowers its boilingpoint.If the boiling point of the brake fluid is too low,vapor pockets may form in the brake systemwhen the brakes are applied hard (e.g. whendriving downhill). This would impair brakingefficiency.You should have the brake fluid renewed atregular intervals. The brake fluid changeintervals can be found in the MaintenanceBooklet.

Only use brake fluid approved by Mercedes-Benz according to MB Approval 331.0.Information about approved brake fluid canbe obtained at any qualified specialistworkshop or on the Internet athttp://bevo.mercedes-benz.com.

i Have the brake fluid renewed regularly ata qualified specialist workshop.

Coolant

Important safety notes

G WARNINGAntifreeze is highly flammable. Fire, openflames and smoking are prohibited whenhandling antifreeze.If antifreeze comes into contact with hotengine parts, it may ignite and you could burnyourself. Do not spill any antifreeze on hotengine parts.

! Only add coolant that has been premixedwith the desired antifreeze protection. Youcould otherwise damage the engine.Further information on coolants can befound in the Mercedes-Benz Specificationsfor Service Products, MB Specifications forService Products 310.1, e.g. on theInternet at

354 Service products and filling capacitiesTe

chni

cal d

ata

http://bevo.mercedes-benz.com. Orcontact a qualified specialist workshop.

! Always use a suitable coolant mixture,even in countries where high temperaturesprevail.Otherwise, the engine cooling system is notsufficiently protected from corrosion andoverheating.

The coolant is a mixture of water andantifreeze/corrosion inhibitor. It performsthe following tasks:Rcorrosion protectionRantifreeze protectionRraising the boiling pointIf the coolant has antifreeze protection downto -35 ‡ (-37 †), the boiling point of thecoolant in the pressure system isapproximately 266 ‡ (130 †).The antifreeze/corrosion inhibitorconcentration in the engine cooling systemshould:Rbe at least 50%. This will protect the engine

cooling system against freezing down toapproximately -35 ‡ (-37 †).Rnot exceed 55% (antifreeze protection

down to -49 ‡ [-45 †]). Otherwise, heatwill not be dissipated as effectively.

If the vehicle has lost coolant, add equalamounts of water and antifreeze/corrosioninhibitor. Mercedes-Benz recommends anantifreeze/corrosion inhibitor in accordancewith MB Specifications for Service Products310.1.The coolant is checked with everymaintenance interval at a qualified specialistworkshop.

i When the vehicle is first delivered, it isfilled with a coolant mixture that ensuresadequate antifreeze and corrosionprotection.

The engine cooling system is filled withcoolant at the factory; this coolant containsantifreeze/corrosion inhibitor that ensures

protection down to approximately -35 ‡(-37 †).Your vehicle has a range of aluminumcomponents. Aluminum components in theengine make it necessary to use antifreeze/corrosion inhibitor that has been specificallyformulated to protect the aluminum parts.Using other antifreeze/corrosion inhibitorswithout these characteristics affects theservice life.The coolant must be used throughout the yearin order to maintain the necessary corrosionprotection and to provide protection fromoverheating. In the Maintenance Booklet, youcan find information on the intervals forrenewal.The renewal interval is determined by thecoolant type and the engine cooling systemdesign. The renewal interval in theMaintenance Booklet is only valid if thecoolant is renewed or added to withMercedes-Benz approved products.Therefore, only use MB 326.0 antifreeze/corrosion inhibitor or another Mercedes-Benzapproved product of the same specification.Information on other products with the samespecifications that are approved byMercedes-Benz can be obtained at anauthorized Mercedes-Benz Center or on theInternet athttp://bevo.mercedes-benz.com.If the coolant level is too low, MB 325.0antifreeze/corrosion inhibitor should beadded. Have the engine cooling systemchecked for possible leaks.

Service products and filling capacities 355

Tech

nica

l dat

a

Z

Capacity

Model Capacity

G 550 Approximately11.1 US qt (10.5 l)

G 63 AMG Approximately14.6 US qt (13.8 l)Low-temperaturecircuit:approximately3.1 US qt (2.9 l)

i Use MB 325.0 or MB 326.0 corrosioninhibitor/antifreeze.

Washer fluid

Important safety notes

G WARNINGWindshield washer concentrate is highlyflammable. If it comes into contact with hotengine components or the exhaust system itcould ignite. There is a risk of fire and injury.Make sure that no windshield washerconcentrate is spilled next to the filler neck.

! Only use washer fluid that is suitable forplastic lamp lenses, e.g. MB SummerFit orMB WinterFit. Unsuitable washer fluidcould damage the plastic lenses of theheadlamps.

! Do not add distilled or de-ionized water tothe washer fluid container. Otherwise, thelevel sensor may be damaged.

! Only MB SummerFit and MB WinterFitwasher fluid should be mixed together. Thespray nozzles may otherwise becomeblocked.

At temperatures above freezing:X Fill the washer fluid reservoir with a mixture

of water and windshield washer fluid, e.g.MB SummerFit.

X Add 1 part MB SummerFit to 100 partswater.

At temperatures below freezing:X Fill the washer fluid reservoir with a mixture

of water and washer fluid, e.g. MBWinterFit.

Adapt the mixing ratio to the outsidetemperature.X Down to 14 ‡ (Ò10 †): mix 1 part MB

WinterFit to 2 parts water.X Down to Ò4 ‡ (Ò20 †): mix 1 part MB

WinterFit to 1 part water.X Down to Ò20.2 ‡ (Ò29 †): mix 2 parts MB

WinterFit to 1 part water.

i Add washer fluid concentrate, e.g. MBSummerFit or MB WinterFit, to the washerfluid all year round.

Filling capacities

Model Capacity

All models (except AMG vehicles)

7.4 US qt (7.0 l)

AMG vehicles 3.6 US qt (3.4 l)

356 Service products and filling capacitiesTe

chni

cal d

ata

Vehicle data

General notesPlease note that for the specified vehicledata:Rthe heights specified may vary as a result

of:- Tires- Load- Condition of the suspension- Optional equipmentRthe vehicle length specified includes the

front license plate adapter.

Dimensions and weights

The missing values for the following modelswere not available at time of going to print:RG 63 AMG

G 550 G 63 AMG

:Upper-edge clearance

75 in -78.9 in

(1905 mm -2005 mm)

;Lower-edge clearance

26.8 in -30.7 in

(680 mm -780 mm)

=Range of movement

36.7 in(931 mm)

The missing values for the following modelwere not available at the time of going toprint:RG 63 AMG

G 550

Vehicle length 183.5 in(4662 mm)

Vehicle width including exterior mirrors

80.9 in(2055 mm)

Maximum vehicle height 76.8 in(1951 mm)

Wheelbase 112.2 in(2850 mm)

Minimum ground clearance

8.1 in(205 mm)

Turning radius 44.6 ft(13.60 m)

Gross vehicle weight rating (GVWR)

7054.8 lb(3200 kg)

Gross axle weight rating (GAWR), front

3196.7 lb(1450 kg)

Gross axle weight rating (GAWR), rear

4188.8 lb(1900 kg)

i The GVWR is the maximum permissiblegross vehicle weight. Gross Vehicle Weight(GVW) is the vehicle weight including fuel,service products, spare wheel, accessoriesinstalled, load and, if applicable, trailerdrawbar load. The GVW must never exceedthe GVWR.

i The GAWR is the maximum gross axleweight rating.

Vehicle data 357

Tech

nica

l dat

a

Z

Trailer tow hitch

Mounting dimensions

G WARNINGOnly have a trailer tow hitch retrofitted at aqualified specialist workshop.

! If you have a trailer tow hitch retrofitted,changes to the engine cooling system maybe necessary, depending on the vehicletype.If you have a trailer tow hitch retrofitted,observe the anchorage points on thechassis frame.

Anchorage points for the trailer tow hitch: Anchorage points; Overhang dimension

For trailer tow hitches installed at the factory,the overhang dimension including protectivecovering is 35.2 in (895 mm).

Trailer loads

G 550G 63 AMG

Permissible trailer load, unbraked

1653 lbs(750 kg)

Permissible trailer load, braked (at a minimum gradient-climbing capability of 12% from a standstill)

7000 lbs(3175 kg)

Permissible rear axle load when towing a trailer (the drawbar noseweight is not included in the towing weight)

4188 lbs(1900 kg)

Trailer drawbar noseweight

Numberofpassengers eachweighing150 lbs(68 kg)

Seatoccupancy

Trunkload

Maximumdrawbarnoseweight

2 Frontseats

220 lbs(100 kg)

562 lbs(255 kg)

3 2 frontseats1 rearseat

176 lbs(80 kg)

562 lbs(255 kg)

4 2 frontseats2 rearseats

132 lbs(60 kg)

456 lbs(207 kg)

5 2 frontseats3 rearseats

0 lbs(0 kg)

423 lbs(192 kg)

358 Trailer tow hitchTe

chni

cal d

ata

Ball position

Ball position of the ball coupling

When choosing a ball coupling, thedimensions stated in the illustration must notbe exceeded.

Trailer tow hitch 359

Tech

nica

l dat

a

Z

360

InternetFurther information about Mercedes-Benzvehicles and about Daimler AG can be foundon the following websites:http://www.mbusa.com (USA only)http://www.mercedes-benz.ca (Canadaonly)

Editorial office

Not to be reprinted, translated or otherwisereproduced, in whole or in part, without thewritten permission of Daimler AG.

As at 06.12.2011

Order no. XXXX XXXX 13 Part no. XXX X Edition A 2013

ÉXXXXNËÍXXXX